34 60 04rev3

UNS-1B
Flight Management System

Technical Manual
The information contained herein is subject to Export administration regulations (“EAR”),

15 C.F.R. Parts 730-774. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited
This publication is available on the UniNet page of our Web site at www.uasc.com
©1995, 2009 UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
3260 East Universal Way

Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
(520) 295-2300 • (800) 321-5253 34-60-04 12 August 2009
UNS-1B Flight Management System Technical Manual
Record of Revisions
Rev No. Issue Date Insertion Date Initials
1 March 20, 1995 March 20, 1995 UASC
2 January 15, 1996 January 15, 1996 UASC
3 August 12, 2009 August 12, 2009 UASC
Retain this record in front of the manual. Upon receipt of revisions, insert and remove pages
according to the List of Effective Pages. Then enter, on this page, the revision number, issue date,
insertion date, and your initials.
34-60-04 12 AugustPage
2009
1
Record of Temporary Changes

Change No. Issue Date Insertion Date & Initials Removal Date & Initials
Retain this record in front of the manual. Upon receipt of a Temporary Change, insert pages into
manual and enter the Temporary Change number, issue date, insertion date, and your initials. Also,
record the removal of each temporary change
Page 1
12 August 2009
Record of Temporary Changes

Change No. Issue Date Insertion Date & Initials Removal Date & Initials
Retain this record in front of the manual. Upon receipt of a Temporary Change, insert pages into
manual and enter the Temporary Change number, issue date, insertion date, and your initials. Also,
record the removal of each temporary change
Page 2
12 August 2009
List of Effective Pages

Subject Page Date Subject Page Date
5 12 Aug 09
Title Page 12 Aug 09 6 12 Aug 09
7 12 Aug 09
Record of Revisions 1 12 Aug 09 8 12 Aug 09
9 12 Aug 09
Record of 1 12 Aug 09 10 12 Aug 09
Temporary Changes 2 12 Aug 09 11 12 Aug 09
12 12 Aug 09
List of Effective 13 12 Aug 09
1 12 Aug 09 14 12 Aug 09
Pages
2 12 Aug 09 15 12 Aug 09
3 12 Aug 09 16 12 Aug 09
4 12 Aug 09 17 12 Aug 09
5 12 Aug 09 18 12 Aug 09
6 12 Aug 09 19 12 Aug 09
7 12 Aug 09 20 12 Aug 09
8 12 Aug 09 21 12 Aug 09
Table of Contents 1 12 Aug 09 22 12 Aug 09
2 12 Aug 09 23 12 Aug 09
3 12 Aug 09 FAA Approval 101 12 Aug 09
4 12 Aug 09 102 12 Aug 09
5 12 Aug 09 103 12 Aug 09
6 12 Aug 09 104 12 Aug 09
7 12 Aug 09 105 12 Aug 09
8 12 Aug 09 106 12 Aug 09
9 12 Aug 09 107 12 Aug 09
10 12 Aug 09 108 12 Aug 09
11 12 Aug 09 109 12 Aug 09
12 12 Aug 09 110 12 Aug 09
13 12 Aug 09 111 12 Aug 09
14 12 Aug 09 112 12 Aug 09
15 12 Aug 09 113 12 Aug 09
16 12 Aug 09 114 12 Aug 09
17 12 Aug 09 115 12 Aug 09
18 12 Aug 09 116 12 Aug 09
19 12 Aug 09 117 12 Aug 09
20 12 Aug 09 Equipment 201 12 Aug 09
21 12 Aug 09 Specifications 202 12 Aug 09
22 12 Aug 09 203 12 Aug 09
23 12 Aug 09 204 12 Aug 09
Introduction 1 12 Aug 09 205 12 Aug 09
2 12 Aug 09 206 12 Aug 09
3 12 Aug 09 207 12 Aug 09
4 12 Aug 09 208 12 Aug 09
Description and 1 12 Aug 09 209 12 Aug 09
Operation 2 12 Aug 09 210 12 Aug 09
3 12 Aug 09 211 12 Aug 09
4 12 Aug 09 212 12 Aug 09
Page 1
12 August 2009

213 12 Aug 09 265 12 Aug 09
214 12 Aug 09 266 12 Aug 09
215 12 Aug 09 267 12 Aug 09
216 12 Aug 09 268 12 Aug 09
217 12 Aug 09 269 12 Aug 09
218 12 Aug 09 270 12 Aug 09
219 12 Aug 09 271 12 Aug 09
220 12 Aug 09 272 12 Aug 09
221 12 Aug 09 273 12 Aug 09
222 12 Aug 09 274 12 Aug 09
223 12 Aug 09 275 12 Aug 09
224 12 Aug 09 276 12 Aug 09
225 12 Aug 09 277 12 Aug 09
226 12 Aug 09 278 12 Aug 09
227 12 Aug 09 279 12 Aug 09
228 12 Aug 09 280 12 Aug 09
229 12 Aug 09 281 12 Aug 09
230 12 Aug 09 282 12 Aug 09
231 12 Aug 09 283 12 Aug 09
232 12 Aug 09 284 12 Aug 09
233 12 Aug 09 285 12 Aug 09
234 12 Aug 09 286 12 Aug 09
235 12 Aug 09 287 12 Aug 09
236 12 Aug 09 288 12 Aug 09
237 12 Aug 09 289 12 Aug 09
238 12 Aug 09 290 12 Aug 09
239 12 Aug 09 291 12 Aug 09
240 12 Aug 09 292 12 Aug 09
241 12 Aug 09 293 12 Aug 09
242 12 Aug 09 294 12 Aug 09
243 12 Aug 09 295 12 Aug 09
244 12 Aug 09 296 12 Aug 09
245 12 Aug 09 297 12 Aug 09
246 12 Aug 09 298 12 Aug 09
247 12 Aug 09 298.1 12 Aug 09
248 12 Aug 09 298.2 12 Aug 09
249 12 Aug 09 298.3 12 Aug 09
250 12 Aug 09 298.4 12 Aug 09
251 12 Aug 09 298.5 12 Aug 09
252 12 Aug 09 298.6 12 Aug 09
253 12 Aug 09 298.7 12 Aug 09
254 12 Aug 09 298.8 12 Aug 09
255 12 Aug 09 298.9 12 Aug 09
256 12 Aug 09 298.10 12 Aug 09
257 12 Aug 09 298.11 12 Aug 09
258 12 Aug 09 298.12 12 Aug 09
259 12 Aug 09 298.13 12 Aug 09
260 12 Aug 09 298.14 12 Aug 09
261 12 Aug 09 298.15 12 Aug 09
262 12 Aug 09 298.16 12 Aug 09
263 12 Aug 09 298.17 12 Aug 09
264 12 Aug 09 298.18 12 Aug 09
Page 2
12 August 2009

298.19 12 Aug 09 350 12 Aug 09
298.20 12 Aug 09 351 12 Aug 09
298.21 12 Aug 09 352 12 Aug 09
Installation and 301 12 Aug 09 353 12 Aug 09
Wiring 302 12 Aug 09 354 12 Aug 09
303 12 Aug 09 355 12 Aug 09
304 12 Aug 09 356 12 Aug 09
305 12 Aug 09 357 12 Aug 09
306 12 Aug 09 358 12 Aug 09
307 12 Aug 09 359 12 Aug 09
308 12 Aug 09 360 12 Aug 09
309 12 Aug 09 361 12 Aug 09
310 12 Aug 09 362 12 Aug 09
311 12 Aug 09 363 12 Aug 09
312 12 Aug 09 364 12 Aug 09
313 12 Aug 09 365 12 Aug 09
314 12 Aug 09 366 12 Aug 09
315 12 Aug 09 367 12 Aug 09
316 12 Aug 09 368 12 Aug 09
317 12 Aug 09 369 12 Aug 09
318 12 Aug 09 370 12 Aug 09
319 12 Aug 09 371 12 Aug 09
320 12 Aug 09 372 12 Aug 09
321 12 Aug 09 373 12 Aug 09
322 12 Aug 09 374 12 Aug 09
323 12 Aug 09 375 12 Aug 09
324 12 Aug 09 376 12 Aug 09
325 12 Aug 09 377 12 Aug 09
326 12 Aug 09 378 12 Aug 09
327 12 Aug 09 379 12 Aug 09
328 12 Aug 09 380 12 Aug 09
329 12 Aug 09 381 12 Aug 09
330 12 Aug 09 382 12 Aug 09
331 12 Aug 09 383 12 Aug 09
332 12 Aug 09 384 12 Aug 09
333 12 Aug 09 385 12 Aug 09
334 12 Aug 09 386 12 Aug 09
335 12 Aug 09 387 12 Aug 09
336 12 Aug 09 388 12 Aug 09
337 12 Aug 09 389 12 Aug 09
338 12 Aug 09 390 12 Aug 09
339 12 Aug 09 391 12 Aug 09
340 12 Aug 09 392 12 Aug 09
341 12 Aug 09 393 12 Aug 09
342 12 Aug 09 394 12 Aug 09
343 12 Aug 09 395 12 Aug 09
344 12 Aug 09 396 12 Aug 09
345 12 Aug 09 397 12 Aug 09
346 12 Aug 09 398 12 Aug 09
347 12 Aug 09 398.1 12 Aug 09
348 12 Aug 09 398.2 12 Aug 09
379 12 Aug 09 398.3 12 Aug 09
Page 3
12 August 2009

398.4 12 Aug 09 398.56 12 Aug 09
398.5 12 Aug 09 398.57 12 Aug 09
398.6 12 Aug 09 398.58 12 Aug 09
398.7 12 Aug 09 398.59 12 Aug 09
398.8 12 Aug 09 System Data
398.9 12 Aug 09 Installation 401 12 Aug 09
398.10 12 Aug 09 402 12 Aug 09
398.11 12 Aug 09 403 12 Aug 09
398.12 12 Aug 09 404 12 Aug 09
398.13 12 Aug 09 405 12 Aug 09
398.14 12 Aug 09 406 12 Aug 09
398.15 12 Aug 09 407 12 Aug 09
398.16 12 Aug 09 408 12 Aug 09
398.17 12 Aug 09 409 12 Aug 09
398.18 12 Aug 09 410 12 Aug 09
398.19 12 Aug 09 411 12 Aug 09
398.20 12 Aug 09 412 12 Aug 09
398.21 12 Aug 09 413 12 Aug 09
398.22 12 Aug 09 414 12 Aug 09
398.23 12 Aug 09 415 12 Aug 09
398.24 12 Aug 09 416 12 Aug 09
398.25 12 Aug 09 417 12 Aug 09
398.26 12 Aug 09 418 12 Aug 09
398.27 12 Aug 09 419 12 Aug 09
398.28 12 Aug 09 420 12 Aug 09
398.29 12 Aug 09 421 12 Aug 09
398.30 12 Aug 09 422 12 Aug 09
398.31 12 Aug 09 423 12 Aug 09
398.32 12 Aug 09 424 12 Aug 09
398.33 12 Aug 09 425 12 Aug 09
398.34 12 Aug 09 426 12 Aug 09
398.35 12 Aug 09 427 12 Aug 09
398.36 12 Aug 09 428 12 Aug 09
398.37 12 Aug 09 429 12 Aug 09
398.38 12 Aug 09 430 12 Aug 09
398.39 12 Aug 09 431 12 Aug 09
398.40 12 Aug 09 432 12 Aug 09
398.41 12 Aug 09 433 12 Aug 09
398.42 12 Aug 09 434 12 Aug 09
398.43 12 Aug 09 435 12 Aug 09
398.44 12 Aug 09 436 12 Aug 09
398.45 12 Aug 09 437 12 Aug 09
398.46 12 Aug 09 438 12 Aug 09
398.47 12 Aug 09 439 12 Aug 09
398.48 12 Aug 09 440 12 Aug 09
398.49 12 Aug 09 441 12 Aug 09
398.50 12 Aug 09 442 12 Aug 09
398.51 12 Aug 09 443 12 Aug 09
398.52 12 Aug 09 444 12 Aug 09
398.53 12 Aug 09 445 12 Aug 09
398.54 12 Aug 09 446 12 Aug 09
398.55 12 Aug 09 447 12 Aug 09
Page 4
12 August 2009

448 12 Aug 09 498.2 12 Aug 09
449 12 Aug 09 498.3 12 Aug 09
450 12 Aug 09 498.4 12 Aug 09
451 12 Aug 09 498.5 12 Aug 09
452 12 Aug 09 498.6 12 Aug 09
453 12 Aug 09 498.7 12 Aug 09
454 12 Aug 09 498.8 12 Aug 09
455 12 Aug 09 498.9 12 Aug 09
456 12 Aug 09 498.10 12 Aug 09
457 12 Aug 09 498.11 12 Aug 09
458 12 Aug 09 498.12 12 Aug 09
459 12 Aug 09 498.13 12 Aug 09
460 12 Aug 09 498.14 12 Aug 09
461 12 Aug 09 498.15 12 Aug 09
462 12 Aug 09 498.16 12 Aug 09
463 12 Aug 09 498.17 12 Aug 09
464 12 Aug 09 498.18 12 Aug 09
465 12 Aug 09 498.19 12 Aug 09
466 12 Aug 09 498.20 12 Aug 09
467 12 Aug 09 498.21 12 Aug 09
468 12 Aug 09 498.22 12 Aug 09
469 12 Aug 09 498.23 12 Aug 09
470 12 Aug 09 498.24 12 Aug 09
471 12 Aug 09 498.25 12 Aug 09
472 12 Aug 09 498.26 12 Aug 09
473 12 Aug 09 498.27 12 Aug 09
474 12 Aug 09 498.28 12 Aug 09
475 12 Aug 09 498.29 12 Aug 09
476 12 Aug 09 498.30 12 Aug 09
477 12 Aug 09 498.31 12 Aug 09
478 12 Aug 09 498.32 12 Aug 09
479 12 Aug 09 498.33 12 Aug 09
480 12 Aug 09 498.34 12 Aug 09
481 12 Aug 09 498.35 12 Aug 09
482 12 Aug 09 498.36 12 Aug 09
483 12 Aug 09 498.37 12 Aug 09
484 12 Aug 09 498.38 12 Aug 09
485 12 Aug 09 498.39 12 Aug 09
486 12 Aug 09 498.40 12 Aug 09
487 12 Aug 09 498.41 12 Aug 09
488 12 Aug 09 498.42 12 Aug 09
489 12 Aug 09 498.43 12 Aug 09
490 12 Aug 09 498.44 12 Aug 09
491 12 Aug 09 498.45 12 Aug 09
492 12 Aug 09 498.46 12 Aug 09
493 12 Aug 09 498.47 12 Aug 09
494 12 Aug 09 498.48 12 Aug 09
495 12 Aug 09 498.49 12 Aug 09
496 12 Aug 09 498.50 12 Aug 09
497 12 Aug 09 498.51 12 Aug 09
498 12 Aug 09 498.52 12 Aug 09
498.1 12 Aug 09 498.53 12 Aug 09
Page 5
12 August 2009

498.54 12 Aug 09 498.106 12 Aug 09
498.55 12 Aug 09 498.107 12 Aug 09
498.56 12 Aug 09 498.108 12 Aug 09
498.57 12 Aug 09 498.109 12 Aug 09
498.58 12 Aug 09 498.110 12 Aug 09
498.59 12 Aug 09 498.111 12 Aug 09
498.60 12 Aug 09 498.112 12 Aug 09
498.61 12 Aug 09 498.113 12 Aug 09
498.62 12 Aug 09 498.114 12 Aug 09
498.63 12 Aug 09 498.115 12 Aug 09
498.64 12 Aug 09 498.116 12 Aug 09
498.65 12 Aug 09 498.117 12 Aug 09
498.66 12 Aug 09 498.118 12 Aug 09
498.67 12 Aug 09 498.119 12 Aug 09
498.68 12 Aug 09 498.120 12 Aug 09
498.69 12 Aug 09 498.121 12 Aug 09
498.70 12 Aug 09 498.122 12 Aug 09
498.71 12 Aug 09 498.123 12 Aug 09
498.72 12 Aug 09 498.124 12 Aug 09
498.73 12 Aug 09 498.125 12 Aug 09
498.74 12 Aug 09 498.126 12 Aug 09
498.75 12 Aug 09 498.127 12 Aug 09
498.76 12 Aug 09 498.128 12 Aug 09
498.77 12 Aug 09 498.129 12 Aug 09
498.78 12 Aug 09 498.130 12 Aug 09
498.79 12 Aug 09 498.131 12 Aug 09
498.80 12 Aug 09 498.132 12 Aug 09
498.81 12 Aug 09 498.133 12 Aug 09
498.82 12 Aug 09 498.134 12 Aug 09
498.83 12 Aug 09 498.135 12 Aug 09
498.84 12 Aug 09 498.136 12 Aug 09
498.85 12 Aug 09 498.137 12 Aug 09
498.86 12 Aug 09 498.138 12 Aug 09
498.87 12 Aug 09 498.139 12 Aug 09
498.88 12 Aug 09 498.140 12 Aug 09
498.89 12 Aug 09 498.141 12 Aug 09
498.90 12 Aug 09 498.142 12 Aug 09
498.91 12 Aug 09 498.143 12 Aug 09
498.92 12 Aug 09 498.144 12 Aug 09
498.93 12 Aug 09 498.145 12 Aug 09
498.94 12 Aug 09 498.146 12 Aug 09
498.95 12 Aug 09 498.147 12 Aug 09
498.96 12 Aug 09 498.148 12 Aug 09
498.97 12 Aug 09 498.149 12 Aug 09
498.98 12 Aug 09 498.150 12 Aug 09
498.99 12 Aug 09 498.151 12 Aug 09
498.100 12 Aug 09 498.152 12 Aug 09
498.101 12 Aug 09 498.153 12 Aug 09
498.102 12 Aug 09 498.154 12 Aug 09
498.103 12 Aug 09 498.155 12 Aug 09
498.104 12 Aug 09 498.156 12 Aug 09
498.105 12 Aug 09 498.157 12 Aug 09
Page 6
12 August 2009

498.158 12 Aug 09 498.210 12 Aug 09
498.159 12 Aug 09 498.211 12 Aug 09
498.160 12 Aug 09 498.212 12 Aug 09
498.161 12 Aug 09 498.213 12 Aug 09
498.162 12 Aug 09 498.214 12 Aug 09
498.163 12 Aug 09 498.215 12 Aug 09
498.134 12 Aug 09 498.216 12 Aug 09
498.165 12 Aug 09 498.217 12 Aug 09
498.166 12 Aug 09 498.218 12 Aug 09
498.167 12 Aug 09 498.219 12 Aug 09
498.168 12 Aug 09 498.220 12 Aug 09
498.169 12 Aug 09 498.221 12 Aug 09
498.170 12 Aug 09 498.222 12 Aug 09
498.171 12 Aug 09 498.223 12 Aug 09
498.172 12 Aug 09 498.224 12 Aug 09
498.173 12 Aug 09 498.225 12 Aug 09
498.174 12 Aug 09 498.226 12 Aug 09
498.175 12 Aug 09 498.227 12 Aug 09
498.176 12 Aug 09 498.228 12 Aug 09
498.177 12 Aug 09 498.229 12 Aug 09
498.178 12 Aug 09 498.230 12 Aug 09
498.179 12 Aug 09 498.231 12 Aug 09
498.180 12 Aug 09 498.232 12 Aug 09
498.181 12 Aug 09 498.233 12 Aug 09
498.182 12 Aug 09 498.234 12 Aug 09
498.183 12 Aug 09 498.235 12 Aug 09
498.184 12 Aug 09 498.236 12 Aug 09
498.185 12 Aug 09 Maintenance
498.186 12 Aug 09 Checkout and
498.187 12 Aug 09 Troubleshooting 501 12 Aug 09
498.188 12 Aug 09 502 12 Aug 09
498.189 12 Aug 09 503 12 Aug 09
498.190 12 Aug 09 504 12 Aug 09
498.191 12 Aug 09 505 12 Aug 09
498.192 12 Aug 09 506 12 Aug 09
498.193 12 Aug 09 507 12 Aug 09
498.194 12 Aug 09 508 12 Aug 09
498.195 12 Aug 09 509 12 Aug 09
498.196 12 Aug 09 510 12 Aug 09
498.197 12 Aug 09 511 12 Aug 09
498.198 12 Aug 09 512 12 Aug 09
498.199 12 Aug 09 513 12 Aug 09
498.200 12 Aug 09 514 12 Aug 09
498.201 12 Aug 09 515 12 Aug 09
498.202 12 Aug 09 516 12 Aug 09
498.203 12 Aug 09 517 12 Aug 09
498.204 12 Aug 09 518 12 Aug 09
498.205 12 Aug 09 519 12 Aug 09
498.206 12 Aug 09 520 12 Aug 09
498.207 12 Aug 09 521 12 Aug 09
498.208 12 Aug 09 522 12 Aug 09
498.209 12 Aug 09 523 12 Aug 09
Page 7
12 August 2009

524 12 Aug 09 567 12 Aug 09
525 12 Aug 09 568 12 Aug 09
526 12 Aug 09 569 12 Aug 09
527 12 Aug 09 570 12 Aug 09
528 12 Aug 09 571 12 Aug 09
529 12 Aug 09 572 12 Aug 09
530 12 Aug 09 573 12 Aug 09
531 12 Aug 09 574 12 Aug 09
532 12 Aug 09 575 12 Aug 09
533 12 Aug 09 576 12 Aug 09
534 12 Aug 09 577 12 Aug 09
535 12 Aug 09 578 12 Aug 09
536 12 Aug 09 579 12 Aug 09
537 12 Aug 09 580 12 Aug 09
538 12 Aug 09 581 12 Aug 09
539 12 Aug 09 582 12 Aug 09
540 12 Aug 09 583 12 Aug 09
541 12 Aug 09 584 12 Aug 09
542 12 Aug 09 585 12 Aug 09
543 12 Aug 09 586 12 Aug 09
544 12 Aug 09 587 12 Aug 09
545 12 Aug 09 588 12 Aug 09
546 12 Aug 09 589 12 Aug 09
547 12 Aug 09 590 12 Aug 09
548 12 Aug 09 591 12 Aug 09
549 12 Aug 09 592 12 Aug 09
550 12 Aug 09 593 12 Aug 09
551 12 Aug 09 594 12 Aug 09
552 12 Aug 09 595 12 Aug 09
553 12 Aug 09 596 12 Aug 09
554 12 Aug 09 597 12 Aug 09
555 12 Aug 09 598 12 Aug 09
556 12 Aug 09 599 12 Aug 09
557 12 Aug 09 Navigation Systems 601 12 Aug 09
558 12 Aug 09 Fuel Flow Inputs 701 12 Aug 09
559 12 Aug 09 702 12 Aug 09
560 12 Aug 09 703 12 Aug 09
561 12 Aug 09 704 12 Aug 09
562 12 Aug 09 705 12 Aug 09
563 12 Aug 09 706 12 Aug 09
564 12 Aug 09 707 12 Aug 09
565 12 Aug 09 708 12 Aug 09
566 12 Aug 09 709 12 Aug 09
Page 8
12 August 2009
UNS–1B FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM TECHNICAL MANUAL
Table of Contents
Introduction........................................................................................... 1
1. Makeup and Use of This Manual ....................................................................1
A. Application ................................................................................................................. 1
B. Organization ............................................................................................................... 3
2. Abbreviations and Terminology .....................................................................3
3. History ..............................................................................................................4
Description and Operation................................................................... 1

1. Description.......................................................................................................1
A. General ....................................................................................................................... 1
B. Single NCU Installation Description.......................................................................... 4
C. Dual NCU Installation Description ............................................................................ 5
D. System Components................................................................................................... 6
(1) Control Display Unit ............................................................................................. 6
(2) Navigation Computer Unit (NCU), P/N 1190-XX-XXXX................................... 6
(3) Configuration Module, P/N 11901........................................................................ 7
(4) Data Transfer Unit (DTU), P/N 1403-( ), 1404-( ), 1405-( ) ................................ 7
(5) EFIS Radar Panel, P/N 1015-1-XX ...................................................................... 8
E. System Data ................................................................................................................ 8
(1) Inputs..................................................................................................................... 8
(2) Outputs .................................................................................................................. 9
(3) Internal Data Base ................................................................................................. 10
2. Operation..........................................................................................................11
A. General ....................................................................................................................... 11
B. Control Display Unit P/N 1016-X-( ) and 1018-X-( )................................................ 11
(1) Cursor.................................................................................................................... 13
(2) Item Selection........................................................................................................ 13
(3) Information Display .............................................................................................. 14
(4) Display Control (400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X, and 60X.X)......... 14
(5) Display Control (600.X)........................................................................................ 16
C. Navigation Computer Unit, P/N 1190-XX-XXXX .................................................... 18
D. Configuration Module, P/N 11901............................................................................. 18
E. Data Transfer Unit, P/N 1403-( ), 1404-( ), 1405-( ).................................................. 18
(1) Power..................................................................................................................... 18
Page 1
CONTENTS 12 August, 2009
(2) Carrying Case (Model 1404)................................................................................. 18
(3) Disk Insertion and Removal.................................................................................. 18
F. Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU).................................................................... 19
(1) Power..................................................................................................................... 19
(2) Flash Memory ....................................................................................................... 20
(3) USB Memory Insertion ......................................................................................... 21
G. EFIS Radar Panel (ERP), P/N 1015-1-XX................................................................. 22
(1) ERP (EFIS Radar Panel) Radar Controls.............................................................. 22
(2) ERP/MFD Keys and Switches .............................................................................. 23
FAA Approval ........................................................................................ 101

1. General ............................................................................................................. 101
A. Applicable TSOs ........................................................................................................ 101
B. Applicable Advisory Circulars ................................................................................... 101
C. Applicable Documents ............................................................................................... 102
2. Continuous Airworthiness, FAR 23.1529, 25.1529, 27.1529, and 29.1529 .. 102

A. General Information ................................................................................................... 102
B. Airworthiness Limitations .......................................................................................... 103
3. Environmental Qualification Forms............................................................... 104
Equipment Specifications .................................................................... 201

1. Equipment Identification................................................................................. 201
A. UNS-1B FMS Equipment .......................................................................................... 201
B. Compatible Peripheral Equipment ............................................................................. 202
C. Technical Manuals...................................................................................................... 203
D. Super Control Display Unit (SCDU) ......................................................................... 204
E. Flat Panel Control Display Unit (FPCDU)................................................................. 205
F. UNS-1B Navigation Computer Unit........................................................................... 206
G. Configuration Module ................................................................................................ 210
H. Data Transfer Unit...................................................................................................... 210
I. DTU-100 (Iomega ZIP Drive) ..................................................................................... 211
J. Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU) .................................................................... 211
K. EFIS Radar Panel ....................................................................................................... 212
2. Circuit Board Location And Function............................................................ 213

A. Super Control Display Unit (P/N 1016-X-( ))............................................................ 213
(1) SCDU Board Part Numbers .................................................................................. 213
(2) Power Supply Board ............................................................................................. 213
Page 2
(3) Deflection Board ................................................................................................... 214
(4) Video Board .......................................................................................................... 214
(5) Graphics Board...................................................................................................... 214
(6) CPU Board ............................................................................................................ 214
(7) Liquid Crystal Shutter ........................................................................................... 214
B. Flat Panel control Display Unit (P/N 1018-X-( )) ...................................................... 215
C. UNS-1B Navigation Computer Unit (P/N 1190-XX-XXXX) ................................... 216
(1) NCU Board Part Numbers (400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X) ........... 216
(2) NCU Board Part Numbers (600.X)....................................................................... 216
(3) CPU Board Functions ........................................................................................... 218
(4) Auxiliary Board Functions.................................................................................... 218
(5) Double Density ARINC Board Functions............................................................. 219
(6) Analog Board Functions ....................................................................................... 219
(7) ASCB Board.......................................................................................................... 220
(8) Power Supply ........................................................................................................ 220
D. Data Transfer Unit (P/N 1403-01-11 or 1405-01-X) ................................................. 220
E. EFIS Radar Panel........................................................................................................ 220
3. Power Specifications.......................................................................................221
4. Equipment Specification Tables ....................................................................223

A. Control Display Unit .................................................................................................. 223
(1) Super CDU ............................................................................................................ 223
(2) 5-inch FPCDU....................................................................................................... 223
(3) 4-inch FPCDU (Optional on UNS-1B) ................................................................. 223
B. UNS-1B Navigation Computer Unit .......................................................................... 224
C. Data Transfer Unit...................................................................................................... 225
D. DTU-100 (SCN 603/703 and later option)................................................................. 225
E. Solid State DTU (P/N 1408-00-X) ............................................................................. 226
F. Portable Solid State DTU (P/N 1409-00-2) ................................................................ 226
G. EFIS Radar Panel ....................................................................................................... 227
5. Installation Kits................................................................................................228
A. Control Display Unit .................................................................................................. 228
(1) SCDU .................................................................................................................... 228
(2) FPCDU.................................................................................................................. 228
B. UNS-1B Navigation Computer Unit .......................................................................... 228
C. Data Transfer Unit...................................................................................................... 229
(1) Dzus Mount DTU (P/N 1405-01-11) and DTU-100 (P/N 1406-01-X) ................ 229
(2) Portable DTU (P/N 1404-01-1X) and Portable DTU-100 (P/N 1407-01-X)........ 229
D. Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU) ................................................................... 229
Page 3
(1) Dzus mount SSDTU Installation Kit (P/N K1079-1) ........................................... 229
(2) Portable SSDTU Installation Kit (P/N K12079-1)................................................ 229
E. EFIS Radar Unit ......................................................................................................... 230
6. Wiring Specifications ...................................................................................... 231

A. CDU Input and Output Wiring Specifications ........................................................... 231
(1) SCDU .................................................................................................................... 231
(2) FPCDU.................................................................................................................. 231
(3) 4” FPCDU ............................................................................................................. 231
B. UNS-1B NCU Input and Output Wiring Specifications ............................................ 233
(1) NCU Analog Inputs............................................................................................... 233
(2) NCU Digital Inputs: ARINC Data ........................................................................ 238
(3) NCU Digital Inputs: Commercial Standard Digital Bus (CSDB)......................... 239
(4) NCU Digital Inputs: ASCB Discrete Inputs ......................................................... 240
(5) NCU Analog Outputs............................................................................................ 242
(6) NCU Digital Outputs: ARINC Data ..................................................................... 254
(7) NCU Digital Outputs: ARINC 2 Wire .................................................................. 255
(8) NCU Digital Outputs: ARINC 561 ....................................................................... 256
(9) NCU Digital Outputs: Commercial Standard Digital Bus (CSDB) ...................... 257
(10) NCU Digital Outputs: RS-232 ............................................................................ 257
(11) NCU Digital Outputs: ASCB Version A ............................................................ 258
7. ARINC Data Bus Inputs................................................................................... 259

A. ARINC 429 AHRS Input (Lo-Speed) ........................................................................ 259
B. ARINC 429 DADC Input (Lo-Speed)........................................................................ 259
C. ARINC 575 DADC Input........................................................................................... 259
D. ARINC 429/582 Doppler Input (Lo-Speed)............................................................... 260
E. ARINC 429 Doppler Input (Lo-Speed) ...................................................................... 260
F. ARINC 429 LCS Input (Lo-Speed) ............................................................................ 261
G. ARINC 429 IRS Input (Hi and Lo-Speed)................................................................. 261
H. ARINC 571 IRS Input................................................................................................ 262
I. ARINC 571 KFC FGS Input (Lo-Speed) .................................................................... 262
J. ARINC 429 Primus IC600 Input (Lo-Speed).............................................................. 263
K. ARINC 429 Radar Input (Lo-Speed) ......................................................................... 264
L. ARINC 429 Radar Type 1500 (RDR 1500) Input (Lo-Speed)................................... 265
M. ARINC 571 Radar Input............................................................................................ 265
N. ARINC 429 TACAN Input (Lo-Speed) ..................................................................... 266
O. ARINC 429 DME Input (Lo-Speed).......................................................................... 266
P. ARINC 429 VOR Input (Lo-Speed) ........................................................................... 266
Q. Commercial Standard Data Bus (CSDB) ................................................................... 266
R. ARINC 429 RRS Input (Lo-Speed) ........................................................................... 267
Page 4
S. ARINC 429 GPS Input (Lo-Speed) (400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X)........................... 267
T. ARINC 429 GPS Input (Hi and Lo-Speed) (404.X, 405.X, 600.X)........................... 268
U. ARINC 429 GPS/IRS input (Hi-Speed) (400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X) ................... 269
V. ARINC 429 GPS/IRS Input (Hi-Speed) (404.X, 405.X, 600.X) ............................... 270
W. ARINC 429 GPIRS Aided Input (Lo-Speed) (404.X, 405.X, 600.X) ...................... 272
X. ARINC 429 AFIS Input (Lo-Speed) .......................................................................... 272
Y. ARINC 429 IOC Pro Line 4 Input Buses (Hi-Speed) (PL4-01 Bus Version) ........... 273
Z. ARINC 429 IOC Pro Line 4 Input Buses (Hi-Speed) (PL4-02 Bus Version)............ 275
AA. ARINC 429 IOC Pro Line 4 Input Buses (Hi-Speed) (PL4-03 and PL4-04 Bus
Version) (600.X) ..................................................................................................... 277
AB. ARINC 429 IOC Pro Line 4 Input Buses (Hi-Speed) (PL4-05 and PL4-06 Bus
Version) (600.X) ..................................................................................................... 279
AC. ASCB Input Data – FGS ......................................................................................... 280
AD. ASCB Input Data – EFIS/MFD............................................................................... 281
8. ARINC Data Bus Outputs ................................................................................282

A. ARINC 429 Outputs Hi and Lo-Speed Buses............................................................ 282
B. ARINC 419 (571) Outputs ......................................................................................... 286
C. ARINC 429 Primus IC 600-01 outputs (Hi-Speed) ................................................... 288
D. ARINC 429 Pro Line 4 Outputs (Hi-Speed) (PL4-02 and PL4-03 Bus Versions) .... 290
E. ARINC 429 Pro Line 4 Map Outputs (Hi-Speed) (P4-01 Map Outputs) ................... 295
F. ARINC 429 Pro Line 4 Map Outputs (Hi-Speed) (P4-02 Map A and P4-02 Map B) 296
G. ASCB Output Data – FMS Basic Data ...................................................................... 297
H. ASCB Output Data – FMS Misc. Data Packet........................................................... 298
I. ASCB Output Data – FMS Background Waypoints ................................................... 298.2
J. ASCB Output Data – FMS Background Navaids ....................................................... 298.4
K. ASCB Output Data – FMS Background Airports...................................................... 298.5
L. ARINC 561 Outputs ................................................................................................... 298.6
M. Output to GPS (RAIM).............................................................................................. 298.6
9. Required Tools ................................................................................................298.7

A. Crimping Tools Required for Souriau Connectors .................................................... 298.7
B. Insert/Extract Tools Required..................................................................................... 298.7
10. Wire and Cable Manufacturers .....................................................................298.9
11. Alternate Vendor Part Numbers ...................................................................298.10
12. Drawings ........................................................................................................298.11

A. Super CDU Outline Drawing (P/N 1016-( )) ............................................................. 298.11
B. 5” Flat Panel CDU (P/N 1018-X-( )) ......................................................................... 298.12
Page 5
C. 4” Flat Panel CDU (P/N 1117-XX)............................................................................ 298.13
D. NCU Outline Drawing (P/N 1190-0X-XXXX) ......................................................... 298.14
E. NCU Rack Drawing (P/N 80009000)......................................................................... 298.15
F. Configuration Module Installation.............................................................................. 298.16
G. DTU Outline Drawing (P/N 1405)............................................................................. 298.18
H. DTU-100 Outline Drawing (P/N 1406-01-X) (SCN 603/703 and subsequent)......... 298.19
I. SSDTU Outline Drawing (P/N 1408-00-X) ................................................................ 298.20
J. ERP Outline Drawing (P/N 1015-1-XX)..................................................................... 298.21
Installation and Wiring ......................................................................... 301

1. General ............................................................................................................. 301
A. Form – Dimensions and Communications ................................................................. 301
B. Sensor / Equipment Compatibility / Selection ........................................................... 301
(1) IRS or IRS/GPS Sensors ........................................................................................ 301
(2) GPS Sensors ........................................................................................................... 301
(3) RRS Sensor ............................................................................................................ 301
(4) RRS/RTU ............................................................................................................... 302
(5) ADVANCED EFIS ................................................................................................ 302
(6) Radar ...................................................................................................................... 302
C. Digital Inputs .............................................................................................................. 303
D. Analog Inputs ............................................................................................................. 306
E. Digital Outputs............................................................................................................ 308
F. Analog Outputs ........................................................................................................... 311
G. NCU Inputs/Outputs................................................................................................... 312
H. Electrical Connectors ................................................................................................. 313
I. Remote Annunciators .................................................................................................. 313
J. General Mounting Considerations............................................................................... 313
2. NCU Interfaces................................................................................................. 314

A. NCU Wiring – General Configuration ....................................................................... 314
(1) NCU (P/N 1190-01-XXXX, 1190-02-XXXX, and 1190-03-XXXX) ARINC Input
Ports...................................................................................................................... 314
(2) NCU (P/N 1190-03-X112) ARINC Input Ports.................................................... 314
(3) ARINC 429/571 Input Port Capabilities ............................................................... 315
B. Valid Configurations .................................................................................................. 318
(1) Sensors .................................................................................................................. 318
(2) ARINC Output Ports ............................................................................................. 321
(3) CSDB Sensors....................................................................................................... 321
(4) CSDB Output Ports ............................................................................................... 322
C. Invalid Configurations................................................................................................ 322
Page 6
3. NCU Wiring P/N 1190 – XX – 1XXX .................................................................323
A. NCU (P/N 1190-01-1110 and 1190-03-1112) Wiring – Collins Pro Line 4 (400.X,
401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X) ......................................................................... 323
B. NCU (P/N 1190-01-1XXX) Wiring (400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X) .. 329
C. NCU (P/N 1190-02-1XXX) Wiring (400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X) .. 337
D. NCU (P/N 1190-03-1XXX) Wiring (400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X).. 345
E. NCU to CDU .............................................................................................................. 354
4. NCU Wiring P/N 1190-XX-2XXX (600.X)..........................................................355
A. NCU (P/N 1190-01-2110 and 1190-03-2112) Wiring – Collins Pro Line 4 (600.X) 355
B. NCU (P/N 1190-01-2XXX) Wiring (600.X).............................................................. 364
C. NCU (P/N 1190-02-2XXX) Wiring (600.X).............................................................. 374
D. NCU (P/N 1190-03-2XXX) Wiring (600.X) ............................................................. 388
E. NCU to CDU (600.X)................................................................................................. 398.1
F. NCU to FPCDU (600.X)............................................................................................. 398.2
5. NCU to External Devices.................................................................................398.4
A. NCU to Skylight CDI-500 (P/N 50-0002-X1 or 50-0002-X2) .................................. 398.4
B. ARINC 419/571 Radar Interface – Bendix/King IU2023B ....................................... 398.5
C. ARINC 571 Radar data Interface ............................................................................... 398.6
D. ARINC 429 Radar Data Interface .............................................................................. 398.7
E. Radio Interface – General........................................................................................... 398.8
(1) NCU to DME – Collins DME – 42 with 2 X 5 Tuning ........................................ 398.8
(2) NCU to DME – Single NCU, Single Collins DME – 42 with CTL Heads .......... 398.9
(3) NCU to DME – Dual NCU, Dual Collins DME – 42 with CTL Heads ............... 398.10
(4) NCU to DME – VOR/DME Data – Sperry Primus II........................................... 598.11
(5) NCU to DME – Collins VIR-32 with 2X5 or CTL Serial Tuning........................ 398.12
(6) NCU to DME – Bendix DM-441( ), ARINC 429 Channeling ............................. 398.13
(7) NCU to DME – Foster DME-670/TX-670, ARINC 429 Channeling .................. 398.14
(8) NCU to DME – Single NCU, Single Collins DME-42 with Dual CTL Heads .... 398.15
(9) NCU to NAV – Bendix VN-411( ), ARINC 429 Channeling .............................. 398.16
(10) NCU to ADC – Sperry AZ-800 .......................................................................... 398.17
(13) NCU to ADC – Sperry AZ-241, B&D TAS Plus ............................................... 398.20
F. Flight Guidance Interface – General........................................................................... 398.21
(1) NCU Outputs/Guidance Systems.......................................................................... 398.21
(2) NCU to FGS – Honeywell SPZ-8000 AFCS, DeHavilland Dash-8 ..................... 398.22
(3) NCU to FGS – Collins APS-65, King Air C-90/B-200 ........................................ 398.23
(4) NCU to HIS or EFIS – Analog VNAV (Non-Sperry) .......................................... 398.24
(5) Forced Capture Logic (Approach Flown Via Roll Command Only).................... 398.25
(6) Forced Capture Logic for Analog Flight Director/Autopilot................................ 398.26
Page 7
6. NCU Pin Identification Charts ........................................................................ 398.27
A. NCU P/N 1190-01-XXXX Pin Identification Chart .................................................. 398.27
(1) Middle Plug – P/N 1190-01-XXXX ..................................................................... 398.27
(2) Bottom Plug – P/N 1190-01-XXXX ..................................................................... 398.33
B. NCU P/N 1190-02-XXXX Pin Identification Chart .................................................. 398.34
(1) Top Plug – P/N 1190-02-XXXX........................................................................... 398.34
C. NCU P/N 1190-03-XXXX Pin Identification Chart .................................................. 398.42
D. 4” FPCDU Pin Identification Chart ........................................................................... 498.50
E. SSDTU Pin Assignment ............................................................................................. 398.51
(1) Connector – J1....................................................................................................... 398.51
(2) Connector – J2....................................................................................................... 398.51
F. FMS Identification Logic............................................................................................ 398.52
7. NCU Wiring Conversion Chart – UNS-1A to UNS-1B ................................... 398.53
System Data Installation ...................................................................... 401

1. Configuration Module Features ..................................................................... 401
2. Configuration Worksheets (400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X) ........ 403
A. Identification Data...................................................................................................... 403
(1) FMS Options ......................................................................................................... 403
(2) Software ................................................................................................................ 403
B. Fuel Options ............................................................................................................... 404
(1) DC Linear Fuel Flow Scaling Data....................................................................... 406
(2) AC Linear Fuel Flow Scaling Data....................................................................... 406
(3) Pulse Frequency Fuel Flow Scaling Data ............................................................. 406
(4) Pulse Width Fuel Flow Scaling Data .................................................................... 406
C. Performance Options .................................................................................................. 407
(1) Advanced Performance Option Information......................................................... 408
D. VNAV Options........................................................................................................... 409
E. Approach Options (SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X)............................................. 409
(1) APPR OPT 1/1 ...................................................................................................... 409
(2) APPROACH TYPES ............................................................................................ 409
F. Approach Options (SCN 404.X)................................................................................. 410
(1) APPR OPT 1/1 ...................................................................................................... 410
(2) APPR TYPES 1/1 ................................................................................................. 410
G. Approach Options (SCN 405.X) ................................................................................ 411
Page 8
(1) APPR OPT 1/1 ...................................................................................................... 411
(2) APPR TYPES 1/1 ................................................................................................. 411
H. EFIS Options (SCN 400.X, 401.X)............................................................................ 412
(1) EFIS OPT 1/1........................................................................................................ 412
(2) PER DISP OPTS ................................................................................................... 412
I. EFIS Options (SCN 402.X, 403.X) ............................................................................. 413
(1) EFIS OPT 1/1........................................................................................................ 413
(2) PL-4 OPT 1/1 ........................................................................................................ 413
(3) PERF DISP OPTS................................................................................................. 413
J. EFIS Options (SCN 404.X, 405.X) ............................................................................. 414
(1) EFIS OPT 1/1........................................................................................................ 414
(2) PL-4 OPT 1/1 ........................................................................................................ 414
(3) PERF DISP OPTS................................................................................................. 415
K. NAV Options.............................................................................................................. 416
L. Tune Options .............................................................................................................. 416
M. Crossfill (XFILL) Options......................................................................................... 416
(1) Data base Editing .................................................................................................. 416
(2) Crossfill Options ................................................................................................... 416
N. Cabin Display Options (SCN 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X) ......................... 417
(1) CABIN DISP 1/1) ................................................................................................. 417
(2) MESSAGE ( ) 1/1 ................................................................................................. 417
O. Strut Switch Options (SCN 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X) ........................................ 417
P. ARINC Options .......................................................................................................... 418
(1) ARINC Receive Port Assignments ....................................................................... 419
(2) ARINC Transmit Port Assignments...................................................................... 421
(3) ARINC 561 Transmit Port Assignments (SCN 404.X, 405.X) ............................ 421
Q. CSDB Options............................................................................................................ 422
R. Analog Options........................................................................................................... 422
S. Air Data Options ......................................................................................................... 423
3. Configuration Module Programming Procedures (400.X, 401.X, 402.X,

403.X, 404.X, 405.X) .........................................................................................424
A. Starting the FMS ........................................................................................................ 424
B. Fuel Options Configuration........................................................................................ 427
C. DC Linear Fuel Flow Scaling Configuration ............................................................. 428
D. AC Linear Fuel Flow Scaling Configuration ............................................................. 428
E. Pulse Frequency Fuel Flow Scaling Configuration .................................................... 429
F. Pulse Width Fuel Flow Scaling Configuration ........................................................... 429
G. Performance Options Configuration (400.X)............................................................. 430
H. Performance Options Configuration (401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X) ............. 431
I. VNAV Options Configuration..................................................................................... 432
Page 9
J. Approach Options Configuration (400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X) ............................... 433
K. Approach Options Configuration (404.X) ................................................................. 435
L. Approach Options Configuration (405.X).................................................................. 437
M. EFIS Options Configuration (400.X, 401.X) ............................................................ 439
(1) EFIS Configuration ............................................................................................... 439
(2) Performance Display Configuration ..................................................................... 440
N. EFIS Options Configuration (402.X, 403.X) ............................................................. 441
O. EFIS Options Configuration (404.X, 405.X) ............................................................. 443
(2) Pro Line 4 Options Configuration......................................................................... 445
P. NAV Options Configuration....................................................................................... 446
Q. Tune Options Configuration....................................................................................... 447
R. Crossfill Configuration (401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X).................................. 448
S. Cabin Display Configuration (401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X) ......................... 449
T. Strut Switch Configuration (402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X)........................................ 450
U. ARINC Options Configuration .................................................................................. 451
(1) ARINC Receive Ports Configuration.................................................................... 452
(2) ARINC Transmit Ports Configuration .................................................................. 453
(3) ARINC 561 Transmit Configuration .................................................................... 453
V. CSDB Options Configuration .................................................................................... 454
W. Analog Options Configuration .................................................................................. 455
X. Air Data Configuration .............................................................................................. 456
Y. Store Final Configuration........................................................................................... 458
4. Configuration Worksheets (SCN 600.X) ........................................................ 459

A. Identification Data...................................................................................................... 459
(1) FMS Options ......................................................................................................... 459
(2) Software ................................................................................................................ 459
B. Fuel Options Data....................................................................................................... 460
(1) DC Linear Fuel Flow Scaling Data....................................................................... 462
(2) AC Linear Fuel Flow Scaling Data....................................................................... 462
(3) Pulse Frequency Fuel Flow Scaling Data ............................................................. 462
(4) Pulse Width Fuel Flow Scaling Data .................................................................... 462
(5) Digital Fuel Flow Scaling Data............................................................................. 462
C. Performance Options .................................................................................................. 463
(1) Advanced Performance Option Information......................................................... 463
D. VNAV Options........................................................................................................... 464
E. Approach Options....................................................................................................... 464
Page 10
(1) APPR OPT 1/1 ...................................................................................................... 464
(2) APPR TYPES 1/2 and APPR TYPES 2/2 ............................................................ 464
F. EFIS Options............................................................................................................... 465
(1) EFIS OPT 1/1........................................................................................................ 465
(2) PL-4 OPT 1/1 ........................................................................................................ 465
(3) Performance Display Options ............................................................................... 466
G. NAV Options.............................................................................................................. 467
H. Tune Options .............................................................................................................. 467
I. Crossfill (XFILL) Options ........................................................................................... 467
J. Cabin Display Options................................................................................................. 468
(1) CABIN DISP 1/1................................................................................................... 468
(2) MESSAGE ( ) 1/1 ................................................................................................. 468
K. Strut Switch Options .................................................................................................. 468
L. Discrete Options ......................................................................................................... 469
(1) Discrete In ............................................................................................................. 469
(2) Discrete Out .......................................................................................................... 471
M. ARINC Options ......................................................................................................... 472
(1) ARINC Receive Port Assignments ....................................................................... 472
(2) ARINC Transmit Port Assignments...................................................................... 475
(3) ARINC 561 Transmit Port Assignments............................................................... 476
N. CSDB Options............................................................................................................ 476
O. Analog Options .......................................................................................................... 477
P. ASCB Options ............................................................................................................ 477
Q. Air Data Options ........................................................................................................ 478
R. Aircraft Identification................................................................................................. 479
5. Configuration Module Programming Procedures (SCN 600.X) ...................480

A. Starting the FMS ........................................................................................................ 480
B. Fuel Options Configuration........................................................................................ 483
C. DC Linear Fuel Flow Scaling Configuration ............................................................. 484
D. AC Linear Fuel Flow Scaling Configuration ............................................................. 484
E. Pulse Frequency Fuel Flow Scaling Configuration .................................................... 485
F. Pulse Width Fuel Flow Scaling Configuration ........................................................... 485
G. Digital Fuel Flow Scaling Configuration ................................................................... 486
H. Performance Options Configuration .......................................................................... 487
I. VNAV Options Configuration..................................................................................... 488
J. Approach Options Configuration ................................................................................ 489
K. EFIS Options Configuration....................................................................................... 492
(2) Pro Line 4 Options Configuration......................................................................... 493
Page 11
L. NAV Options Configuration....................................................................................... 495
M. Tune Options Configuration...................................................................................... 496
N. Crossfill Options Configuration ................................................................................. 497
O. Cabin Display Configuration ..................................................................................... 498
P. Strut Switch Configuration ......................................................................................... 498.1
Q. Discrete Configuration ............................................................................................... 498.2
(1) Discrete Input Configuration................................................................................. 498.3
(2) Discrete Output Configuration.............................................................................. 498.4
R. ARINC Options Configuration................................................................................... 498.5
(1) ARINC Receive Ports Configuration.................................................................... 498.6
(2) ARINC Transmit Ports Configuration .................................................................. 498.7
(3) ARINC 561 Transmit............................................................................................ 498.7
S. CSDB Options Configuration ..................................................................................... 498.8
T. Analog Options Configuration ................................................................................... 498.9
U. ASCB Options Configuration .................................................................................... 498.10
V. Air Data Options Configuration................................................................................. 498.11
W. Store Final Configuration.......................................................................................... 498.12
6. Configuration Worksheets (SCN 601.X) ........................................................ 498.13

A. Identification Data...................................................................................................... 498.13
(1) FMS Options ......................................................................................................... 498.13
(2) Software ................................................................................................................ 498.13
B. Display Configuration – Colors.................................................................................. 498.14
C. Fuel Options Data....................................................................................................... 498.14
(1) DC Linear Fuel Flow Scaling Data....................................................................... 498.17
(2) AC Linear Fuel Flow Scaling Data....................................................................... 498.17
(3) Pulse Frequency Fuel Flow Scaling Data ............................................................. 498.17
(4) Pulse Width Fuel Flow Scaling Data .................................................................... 498.17
(5) Digital Fuel Flow Scaling Data............................................................................. 498.17
D Performance Options................................................................................................... 498.18
(1) Advanced Performance Option Information......................................................... 498.19
E. VNAV Options ........................................................................................................... 498.20
F. Approach Options ....................................................................................................... 498.20
(1) APPR OPT 1/1 ...................................................................................................... 498.20
(2) APPR TYPES 1/2 and APPR TYPES 2/2 ............................................................ 498.20
G. EFIS Options .............................................................................................................. 498.21
H. Pro Line 4 Options ..................................................................................................... 498.21
I. Performance Display Options...................................................................................... 498.21
(1) Function................................................................................................................. 498.21
(2) V1 Display Options............................................................................................... 498.21
(3) VR Display Options .............................................................................................. 498.21
Page 12
(5) VTGT Display Options ......................................................................................... 498.22
(6) VREF Display Options ......................................................................................... 498.22
J. NAV Options............................................................................................................... 498.22
K. Tune Options .............................................................................................................. 498.22
L. Crossfill (XFILL) Options.......................................................................................... 498.23
M. Cabin Display Options............................................................................................... 498.23
N. Pilot Data, Flight Plan and Log, and Strut Switch Options........................................ 498.23
O. Discrete Options......................................................................................................... 498.24
(1) Discrete In ............................................................................................................. 498.24
(2) Discrete Out .......................................................................................................... 498.26
P. ARINC Options .......................................................................................................... 498.27
(1) ARINC Receive Port Assignments ....................................................................... 498.27
(2) ARINC Transmit Port Assignments...................................................................... 498.30
(3) ARINC 561 Transmit Port Assignments............................................................... 498.31
Q. CSDB Options............................................................................................................ 498.31
R. Analog Options........................................................................................................... 498.31
S. Air Data Options ......................................................................................................... 498.32
T. Aircraft Identification ................................................................................................. 498.33
7. Configuration Module Programming Procedures (SCN 601.X) ...................498.34

A. Starting the FMS ........................................................................................................ 498.34
B. Display Configuration ................................................................................................ 498.37
C. Fuel Options Configuration........................................................................................ 498.38
D. DC Linear Fuel Flow Scaling Configuration ............................................................. 498.39
E. AC Linear Fuel Flow Scaling Configuration.............................................................. 498.39
F. Pulse Frequency Fuel Flow Scaling Configuration .................................................... 498.40
G. Pulse Width Fuel Flow Scaling Configuration .......................................................... 498.40
H. Digital Fuel Flow Scaling Configuration ................................................................... 498.41
I. Performance Options Configuration............................................................................ 498.42
J. VNAV Options Configuration..................................................................................... 498.43
K. Approach Options Configuration ............................................................................... 498.44
L. Approach Types Configuration .................................................................................. 498.46
M. EFIS Options Configuration...................................................................................... 498.47
N. Pro Line 4 Options Configuration.............................................................................. 498.48
O. Performance Display Options Configuration............................................................. 498.49
P. NAV Options Configuration....................................................................................... 498.50
Q. Tune Options Configuration....................................................................................... 498.51
R. Crossfill Options Configuration ................................................................................. 498.52
S. Cabin Display Configuration ...................................................................................... 498.53
T. Pilot Data, Flight Plan and Log, and Strut Switch Configuration .............................. 498.54
Page 13
U. Discrete Configuration ............................................................................................... 498.55
V. ARINC Configuration ................................................................................................ 498.58
(1) ARINC Receive Port Configuration ..................................................................... 498.59
(2) ARINC Transmit Port Configuration.................................................................... 498.60
(3) ARINC 561 Transmit ........................................................................................... 498.60
W. CSDB Options Configuration ................................................................................... 498.61
X. Analog Options Configuration ................................................................................... 498.62
Y. Air Data Configuration............................................................................................... 498.63
Z. Store Final Configuration ........................................................................................... 498.64
8. Configuration Worksheets (SCN 602.X) ........................................................ 498.65

C. Fuel Options ............................................................................................................... 498.66
D. Performance Options.................................................................................................. 498.70
(1) Advanced Performance Option Information......................................................... 498.71
E. VNAV Options ........................................................................................................... 498.72
(1) APPR OPT 1/1 ...................................................................................................... 498.72
(2) APPR Types 1/2 and APPR TYPES 2/2............................................................... 498.72
G. EFIS Options .............................................................................................................. 498.73
(1) Function................................................................................................................. 498.74
J. NAV Options............................................................................................................... 498.75
K. Tune Options .............................................................................................................. 498.75
Page 14
(1) Discrete In ............................................................................................................. 498.77
(2) Discrete Out .......................................................................................................... 498.79
P. ARINC Options .......................................................................................................... 498.80
Q. ARINC 561 Transmit Options ................................................................................... 498.84
R. CSDB Options ............................................................................................................ 498.84
S. Analog Options ........................................................................................................... 498.84
T. ASCB Options Data.................................................................................................... 498.84
U. Air Data Options ........................................................................................................ 498.85
V. Aircraft Identification................................................................................................. 498.86
9. Configuration Module Programming Procedures (SCN 602.X) ...................498.87

I. Performance Options Configuration............................................................................ 498.95
J. VNAV Options Configuration..................................................................................... 498.96
K. Approach Options Configuration ............................................................................... 498.97
L. Approach Types Configuration .................................................................................. 498.99
M. EFIS Options Configuration...................................................................................... 498.100
N. Pro Line 4 Options Configuration.............................................................................. 498.101
O. Performance Display Configuration........................................................................... 498.102
P. NAV Options Configuration....................................................................................... 498.103
Q. Tune Options Configuration....................................................................................... 498.104
R. Crossfill Options Configuration ................................................................................. 498.105
S. Cabin Display Configuration ...................................................................................... 498.106
T. Pilot Data, Flight Plan and Log, and Strut Switch Configuration .............................. 498.107
U. Discrete Configuration ............................................................................................... 498.108
V. ARINC Configuration ................................................................................................ 498.111
(1) ARINC Receive Port Configuration ..................................................................... 498.112
(2) ARINC Transmit Port Configuration.................................................................... 498.113
(3) ARINC 561 Transmit............................................................................................ 498.113
Page 15
W. CSDB Options Configuration ................................................................................... 498.114
X. Analog Options Configuration ................................................................................... 498.115
Y. ASCB Option Configuration...................................................................................... 498.116
Z. Air Data Configuration ............................................................................................... 498.117
AA. Store Final Configuration........................................................................................ 498.118
10. Configuration Worksheets (SCN 603.X) ...................................................... 498.119

(1) NCU Hardware...................................................................................................... 498.119
(2) NCU Software....................................................................................................... 498.119
(6) APU Fuel Flow Options........................................................................................ 498.124
(1) Advanced Performance Options Information ....................................................... 498.125
E. VNAV Options ........................................................................................................... 498.126
(1) APPR OPT 1/1 ...................................................................................................... 498.127
G. EFIS Options .............................................................................................................. 498.128
(1) Function................................................................................................................. 498.129
J. NAV Options............................................................................................................... 498.130
K. Tune Options .............................................................................................................. 498.130
(1) Discrete In ............................................................................................................. 498.132
Page 16
(2) Discrete Out .......................................................................................................... 498.134
P. ARINC Options .......................................................................................................... 498.135
R. CSDB Options ............................................................................................................ 498.139
S. Analog Options ........................................................................................................... 498.139
T. ASCB Options Data.................................................................................................... 498.139
11. Configuration Module Programming Procedures (SCN 603.X) .................498.141

I. APU Fuel Flow ............................................................................................................ 498.148
J. Performance Options Configuration............................................................................ 498.149
K. VNAV Options Configuration ................................................................................... 498.150
L. Approach Options Configuration ............................................................................... 498.152
M. Approach Types Configuration ................................................................................. 498.154
N. EFIS Configuration .................................................................................................... 498.155
O. Pro Line 4 Configuration............................................................................................ 498.156
P. Performance Display Configuration ........................................................................... 498.157
Q. NAV Options Configuration ...................................................................................... 498.158
R. Tune Options Configuration....................................................................................... 498.159
S. Crossfill Options Configuration.................................................................................. 498.160
T. Cabin Display Configuration...................................................................................... 498.161
U. Pilot Data, Flight Plan and Log, and Strut Switch Configuration.............................. 498.162
V. Discrete Configuration ............................................................................................... 498.163
W. ARINC Options Configuration ................................................................................. 498.166
(3) ARINC 561 Transmit............................................................................................ 498.168
X. CSDB Configuration .................................................................................................. 498.169
Page 17
Y. Analog Options Configuration ................................................................................... 498.170
Z. ASCB Options Configuration..................................................................................... 498.171
AA. Air Data Configuration............................................................................................ 498.172
AB. Store Final Configuration ........................................................................................ 498.174
12. Configuration Worksheets (SCN 604.X) ...................................................... 498.175

(1) NCU Hardware...................................................................................................... 498.175
(2) NCU Software....................................................................................................... 498.175
B. Display Options – Colors ........................................................................................... 498.176
(6) APU Fuel Flow Options........................................................................................ 498.180
(1) Advanced Performance Options Information ....................................................... 498.182
E. VNAV Options ........................................................................................................... 498.183
(1) APPR OPT 1/1 ...................................................................................................... 498.184
G. EFIS Options .............................................................................................................. 498.184
H. Performance Display Options .................................................................................... 498.185
(1) Function................................................................................................................. 498.185
I. NAV Options ............................................................................................................... 498.186
J. Tune Options ............................................................................................................... 498.186
K. Crossfill (XFILL) Options ......................................................................................... 498.186
L. Cabin Display Options................................................................................................ 498.187
M. TAWS (SCN 604.3 and later).................................................................................... 498.187
(1) Discrete In ............................................................................................................. 498.188
(2) Discrete Out .......................................................................................................... 498.190
P. ARINC Options .......................................................................................................... 498.191
Page 18
R. CSDB Options ............................................................................................................ 498.197
S. Analog Options ........................................................................................................... 498.197
T. ASCB Options ............................................................................................................ 498.197
13. Configuration Module Programming Procedures (SCN 604.X) .................498.199

I. APU Fuel Flow Configuration..................................................................................... 498.206
J. Performance Options Configuration............................................................................ 498.207
K. VNAV Options Configuration ................................................................................... 498.208
L. Approach Options Configuration ............................................................................... 498.210
M. Approach Types Configuration ................................................................................. 498.212
N. EFIS Options Configuration....................................................................................... 498.213
O. Pro Line 4 Configuration............................................................................................ 498.214
P. Performance Display Options Configuration.............................................................. 498.215
Q. NAV Configuration.................................................................................................... 498.217
R. Tune Options Configuration....................................................................................... 498.218
S. Crossfill Configuration ............................................................................................... 498.219
T. TAWS Configuration (SCN 604.3 and later) ............................................................. 498.220
U. Cabin Display Configuration ..................................................................................... 498.221
V. Pilot Data, Flight Plan and Log, and Strut Switch Configuration.............................. 498.222
W. Discrete Configuration .............................................................................................. 498.223
X. ARINC Options Configuration .................................................................................. 498.226
(3) ARINC 561 Transmit............................................................................................ 498.228
Y. CSDB Options Configuration .................................................................................... 498.229
Z. Analog Options Configuration ................................................................................... 498.230
Page 19
AA. ASCB Configuration ............................................................................................... 498.231
AB. Air Data Configuration............................................................................................ 498.232
AC. Store Final Configuration ........................................................................................ 498.234
14. Performance Database Loading................................................................... 498.235
Maintenance, Checkout, and Troubleshooting .................................. 501

1. Maintenance..................................................................................................... 501
A. Control Display Unit (CDU P/N 1016-X-XX and FPCDU P/N 1018-X-XXX) ....... 501
B. Navigation Control Unit (NCU), P/N 1190-0X-XXXX............................................. 501
C. Configuration Module, P/N 11901 ............................................................................. 501
D. Data Transfer Unit (DTU), P/N 1404-XX-XX or 1405-XX-X.................................. 501
E. EFIS Radar Panel (ERP), P/N 1015-1-XX ................................................................. 501
F. Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU), P/N 1408-00-X or 1409-00-2................... 502
2. CDU/NCU Self-Test.......................................................................................... 503

A. Initial CDU/NCU Turn On......................................................................................... 503
B. Annunciators............................................................................................................... 503
C. Keyboard Dimming and Offset .................................................................................. 504
D. Initialization Page....................................................................................................... 507
3. Built-In-test (BIT) ............................................................................................. 508

A. Test Values................................................................................................................. 508
B. ARINC 561 Test Values............................................................................................. 508
C. ARINC 429 Test Values............................................................................................. 510
D. ARINC 571 Test Values ............................................................................................ 512
E. Continuous Tests ........................................................................................................ 514
4. NCU Configuration Verification...................................................................... 515
5. NCU Outputs to Flight Guidance System...................................................... 515

A. NCU Self Test Output Checkout................................................................................ 515
B. Flight Plan Checkout .................................................................................................. 516
C. NCU Output to HSI Checkout.................................................................................... 517
D. ADC Function Checkout – DIST/GS Function Checkout ......................................... 517
E. HSI from Function Check........................................................................................... 518
F. DIST/BRG Check ....................................................................................................... 518
G. Roll Steering Check ................................................................................................... 519
H. Input of a Selected Crosstrack.................................................................................... 519
I. DME Checkout ............................................................................................................ 520
J. Winds Display (EFIS Only) ........................................................................................ 520
Page 20
6. Checkout of Installations Configured For Collins Pro Line 4 ......................521
A. Sensors ....................................................................................................................... 521
B. Diagnostic messages................................................................................................... 524
(1) TCN7628A Label 041 (FIAS) .............................................................................. 528
(2) TCN7628A Label 042 (FIAS) .............................................................................. 529
(3) TPA-81A Label 054 (FIAS).................................................................................. 531
(4) TTR-920 Label 054............................................................................................... 532
(5) AHC-850 Label 060.............................................................................................. 533
(6) GPIRS label 060 (FIAS) ....................................................................................... 534
(7) AHC-850 Label 061.............................................................................................. 535
(8) ADC-850 Label 062.............................................................................................. 536
(9) ADF-462 Label 063 .............................................................................................. 537
(10) ADF-75A Label 063 (FIAS) ............................................................................... 539
(11) TDR-94 Label 064 .............................................................................................. 540
(12) TRA-67A Label 064 (FIAS) ............................................................................... 541
(13) GPIRS Label 065 (FIAS) .................................................................................... 542
(14) ME-422 Label 067 .............................................................................................. 543
(15) FCC-850 Label 071............................................................................................. 545
(16) PFD-871 Label 072 ............................................................................................. 546
(17) MFD-871 Label 073............................................................................................ 547
(18) VHF-422 Label 074 ............................................................................................ 548
(19) VIR-432 Label 075 ............................................................................................. 550
(20) ALA-52A Label 077 (FIAS)............................................................................... 552
(21) RAC-870 Label 077 ............................................................................................ 553
(22) AHRS Label 270 ................................................................................................. 554
(23) GPIRS Label 270 (HS 429)................................................................................. 554
(24) IRS Label 270 (HS 429)...................................................................................... 555
(25) IRS Label 270 (LS429) ....................................................................................... 556
(26) LCS Label 270 .................................................................................................... 557
(27) GPIRS Label 273 ................................................................................................ 558
(28) GPS Label 273 (HS 429)..................................................................................... 559
(29) GPS Label 273 (LS 429) ..................................................................................... 560
(30) GPIRS Label 274 ................................................................................................ 561
(31) GPS Label 277 (GPS-950 and GPS-1000 only; NA GPS-1200)........................ 562
(32) IOC-851 Label 350 ............................................................................................. 563
(33) DAU-650 Label 351............................................................................................ 565
(34) WXT-8XX Label 354 ......................................................................................... 566
(35) SIA-850 Label 355 (FIAS).................................................................................. 567
(36) MLS Label 356 ................................................................................................... 568
(37) BCU-4000 Label 372 (FIAS).............................................................................. 569
Page 21
7. Sensor Checkouts........................................................................................... 570
A. Checkout of Inertial Sensor Status and Heading Displays......................................... 570
B. Checkout of Loran C Sensor ...................................................................................... 571
C. Checkout of Each Sensor’s Position Vs CDU-Calculated Position ........................... 571
D. Strut Switch Position Check....................................................................................... 572
E. NAV Receiver Shut Down ......................................................................................... 573
F. Checkout of UASC Radio Reference Sensor (RRS) .................................................. 573
G. Checkout of GPIRS.................................................................................................... 574
(1) GPIRS Status – Page 1.......................................................................................... 574
(2) GPIRS Comparison Page ...................................................................................... 575
(3) GPIRS Diagnostics Page....................................................................................... 575
(4) GPIRS Diagnostics................................................................................................ 575
H. Checkout of UASC GPS ........................................................................................... 578
(1) Test Preparation .................................................................................................... 578
(2) GPS1 1/3 Status Page............................................................................................ 578
(3) GPS1 2/3 and 3/3 Pages ........................................................................................ 584
(4) GPS1 4/4 Page (405.X) ......................................................................................... 585
8. Ground Checkout of Approach Mode............................................................ 586

A. Test Preparation.......................................................................................................... 586
B. Initialization................................................................................................................ 586
C. Creating the Approach................................................................................................ 587
D. Linking Approach into Flight Plan............................................................................. 589
E. Selecting Approach Mode and Checking Annunciation ............................................ 589
F. Inputting Manual HDG ............................................................................................... 589
G. Analysis of Approach Mode Display, Aircraft Static ................................................ 589
H. Analysis of Approach Mode Display, Aircraft In Flight ........................................... 590
9. Troubleshooting .............................................................................................. 591

A. Self-Test ..................................................................................................................... 591
B. Configuration Verification ......................................................................................... 592
C. NCU Self-Test Output Checkout................................................................................ 593
D. NCU Output to HSI Checkout ................................................................................... 593
E. DIST/GS Check .......................................................................................................... 593
F. HSI FROM Check....................................................................................................... 593
G. DIST/BRG Check ...................................................................................................... 594
H. Roll Steering Check ................................................................................................... 594
I. Input of a Selected Crosstrack Check .......................................................................... 594
J. DME Checkout ............................................................................................................ 595
K. Winds Display Checkout............................................................................................ 595
L. Sensor Checkout ......................................................................................................... 595
Page 22
(1) Checkout of Inertial Status and heading Displays ................................................ 595
(2) Checkout of LORAN C Sensor............................................................................. 596
(3) Checkout of Sensor Lat/Long Coordinates vs. CDU Calculated Position............ 596
(4) Strut Switch Position Check.................................................................................. 596
(5) Equipment Shutdown ............................................................................................ 596
(6) Checkout of UASC Radio Reference System (RRS)............................................ 597
(7) Checkout of GPIRS............................................................................................... 597
(8) Checkout of UASC GPS (GPS-950, GPS-1000, GPS-1200) ............................... 597
M. Ground Checkout of Approach Mode ....................................................................... 597
N. Synchro: Wiring to Receiver...................................................................................... 598
Navigation Systems.............................................................................. 601

1. Scheduled Maintenance Periods of Navigation Sensors .............................601
A. GPS Maintenance Schedules ................................................................................. 601
B. LORAN Maintenance Schedules ........................................................................... 601
Fuel Flow Inputs ................................................................................... 701

1. Fuel Flow Sensors ...........................................................................................701
1. Fuel Flow Wiring – Unit No. 1 or No. 2 ...........................................................702

A. IDC, CMC Eldec, Ragen, X & O Engineering, Gull, Ametek, or Howell ................ 702
B. General Electric AC Voltage Pickoff ......................................................................... 704
C. Learjet/J.E.T. Fuel Management (Pulse).................................................................... 705
D. Learjet DC Fuel Management (0-10 VDC)................................................................ 705
E. Intertechnique Fuel Flow............................................................................................ 706
F. Interconnect to Ragen DC Analog Fuel Flow Signal Conditioner, P/N SCF-1788,
Installed in some HS-125 Aircraft ............................................................................. 707
G. Ametek DC Analog Fuel Flow Indicator, P/N VSDLOC208B, (Cessna
P/N 9914095-3) in Cessna Citation II ........................................................................ 708
H. X & O Engineering DC Analog Fuel Flow Indicator, P/N PC900-1A0800PH-1A1
in Sikorsky S-76 ......................................................................................................... 708
I. Ametek/U.S. Gauge DC Analog Fuel Flow Indicator, P/N VSDL-0C208C/E, (Cessna
P/N 9912147-14/16) in Cessna S/II ........................................................................... 709
Page 23
Introduction
1. Makeup and Use of This Manual
A. Application
This Technical Manual for the UNS–1B System is applicable to the components and
Software Control Number (SCN) noted below. The SCN is stamped on the component Data
Plate.
Control Display Units (CDUs)
Super CDU, P/N 1016–1–XX & 1016–1–XXX – SCN 1.X, 3.X, 5.X.
Super CDU, P/N 1016–2–XX & 1016–2–XXX – SCN 2.X, 4.X, 6.X.
Flat Panel CDU, P/N 1018–X–X00 – SCN 1.X.
NOTE: The Super CDU (SCDU) with SCN 5.X or 6.X and the Flat Panel SCDU
(FPCDU) only can be used with UNS–1B Navigation Computer Units
(NCUs) running SCN 60X.X.
Navigation Computer Units
The following table shows the allowable combinations of UNS–1B NCU part numbers and
SCNs.
NAVIGATION COMPUTER UNITS
UNS–1B NCU SOFTWARE CONTROL NUMBERS
PART NUMBER 400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X 600.X 60X.X
1190–01–1110
All Digital D D D D D D
1190–01–1111
Standard D D D D D D
1190–01–1113
Standard AC Pitch D D D
1190–02–1111
Analog Air Data D D D D D D
1190–02–1113
Analog Air Data & D D D
AC Pitch
1190–03–1112
Dual ARINC D D D D D D
1190–01–2110
All Digital D D
1190–01–2111
Standard D D
34-60-04 12 August,Page 1
2009
1190–01–2113
Standard AC Pitch D D
1190–02–2111
Analog Air Data D D
1190–02–2113
Analog Air Data & D D
AC Pitch
1190–03–2112
Dual ARINC D D
1190–03–2114
ASCB D D
(600.4
& later)
NOTE: SCN 601 was developed from SCN 600 and the specific differences are described
in the Description Section of Service Bulletin Number 1XXX.XX. ( )-34-2529.
SCN 602 was developed from SCN 601 and the specific differences are described
in the Description Section of Service Bulletin Number 1XXX.XX. ( )-34-2566.
With the exception of the configuration worksheets and procedures in the System
Data Installation section of this manual, SCN 601 shares the same applicability as
SCN 600 and SCN 602 shares the same applicability as SCN 601.
¾ UNS–1B Configuration Module, P/N 11901.

¾ Data Transfer Unit, P/N 1403–01–0X, 1404–01–0X, 1405–01–0X – SCN 1.0, 1.1, 1.2.
¾ EFIS Radar Panel, P/N 1015–1–XX – SCN 2.0.
¾ Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU), P/Ns 1408-00-X, 1409-00-2 (for use with SCN
60X/70X and later)
2009
NOTE: Throughout this manual, reference is made to the “DTU” and in some cases
‘disk.” The term “disk” refers to any of the data storage devices (floppy disk,
USB, or SD) and the term “DTU” will bee used to refer to either the DTU or
SSDTU. Procedure in this manual and displayed on the FMS will still use the
term DISK and will remain unchanged regardless of the data storage device being
used.
B. Organization
This Technical Manual provides information about:
¾ Description and operation of the components of the UNS–1B Flight Management
System.
¾ FAA Approval including Environmental Qualification Forms.
¾ Equipment Specifications to support selection of compatible peripherals and planning for
the installation of UNS–1B Components.
¾ Detailed installation and wiring requirements.
¾ Worksheets and procedures for installing system data including configuring the UNS–1B
Configuration Module.
¾ Maintenance, Checkout, and Troubleshooting of the UNS–1B FMS and peripheral
sensors as well as NCU outputs to the Flight Guidance System.
¾ Fuel Flow Inputs to the NCU for various sensors.
2. Abbreviations and Terminology

This manual contains no abbreviations or terms that have varying interpretations throughout
the industry. However, some of the components have multiple names that we use
interchangeably. We use the terms Super CDU, and SCDU to refer to the Control Display
Unit, P/N 1016–X–XX. We use the term FPCDU to refer to the Flat Panel CDU, P/N 1018–
X–X00. We use the term CDU to refer to either the 1016– or 1018–unit where the
information applies to all CDU versions. Part numbers refer to specific configurations of a
component.
We use the symbols 400.X , 401.X , 402.X , 403.X , 404.X , 405.X ,

600.X , and
60X.X
to indicate passages that are applicable to one or more, but not all, NCU SCNs.
The front panel of the CDU contains an array of push buttons or keys that are used by the
pilot to operate the system. Instructions in this manual refer to specific keys by name. We
bracket the legend on the key in the text. Examples: [±], [ENTER], [A].
2009
3. History
The first edition of this technical manual (34–60–04) replaced Universal Avionics Systems
Corporation Report No. 2225, UNS–1B Flight Management System. We updated Change 3 to
Report No. 2225 to include all outstanding Temporary Changes and additional information.
We transformed the resulting version of 2225 to a style consistent with our latest Component
Maintenance Manuals. Our Component Maintenance Manuals are designed to comply with
the requirements of ATA Specification 100.
Revision 2 included new part numbers for the UNS–1B NCU, a new CPU board in the
NCU, and the new Flat Panel CDU as well as the 600.X NCU Software.
Revision 3 incorporates all outstanding temporary changes.
34-60-04 12 August,Page
2009
4
Description and Operation

1. Description
A. General
Universal Avionics Systems Corporation’s Flight Management System, the UNS–1B FMS,
is a fully integrated navigation and flight management system designed to provide the pilot
with centralized control for aircraft navigation sensors, computer–based flight planning, and
fuel management. The basic UNS–1B FMS consists of the following components: a cockpit–
mounted Control Display Unit (CDU), a remotely mounted Navigation Computer Unit
(NCU), a Configuration Module, a Data Transfer Unit (DTU), and an optional cockpit–
mounted EFIS Radar Panel (ERP). Installations may contain either a single NCU or dual
NCUs.
NOTE: The use and interface compatibility of specific systems/equipment depends
upon the NCU Part Number in the UNS–1B FMS, and the specific software
Control Number (SCN) incorporated in the NCU, as described and annotated
throughout this manual.
The UNS–1B accepts position information from up to five long–range navigation sensors as
well as a scanning DME, VOR, or TACAN sensor. The data from these sensors is used to
determine the best computed position. This position is used by the UNS–1B for navigating
the aircraft along the programmed flight plan. Flight plans are created using a Jeppesen
database. The data base locates waypoints along a desired route and then combines these
waypoints to form a flight plan. The fuel management function of the UNS–1B accepts input
from the aircraft’s fuel flow sensors as well as information supplied by the pilot. It uses this
data to continuously update and display fuel management information during flight. It also
assists the pilot in planning fuel requirements while on the ground.
The UNS–1B FMS uses a self–contained Jepessen database stored in non–volatile memory.
It provides the FMS with information on navaids, airports, NDBs, enroute waypoints,
intersections, airways, SIDs, STARs, approaches, and runways. In addition, the database has
the capacity to store up to 200 pilot–defined locations, 200 pilot–defined routes, and 100
(each) pilot–defined alignment points, airports, approaches, and runways. The system will
store 100 average size pilot–entered SIDs and STARs as well. The operator may subscribe to
either worldwide or regional database coverage. The Data Transfer Unit (DTU) is housed
within a protective case that may be panel mounted in the cockpit for convenient access. It is
designed to update the standard and expanded Jepessen databases.
The UNS–1B FMS has the capacity to use up to five long–range navigation sensors plus a
scanning DME, VOR, and TACAN to determine the aircraft’s position. The system can also
accept data from a Radio Reference Sensor (RRS) in lieu of DME/VOR/TACAN receivers
and, with SCN 414.X, MLS and DME/P. Because each type of navigation sensor has unique
capabilities and functions, the type and number of sensors can be tailored to optimize the
user’s specific operational requirements. The user may choose from Loran C (LCS), Global
Positioning System (GPS), Doppler, and laser– or gyro–referenced inertial (IRS) navigation
sensors. The system uses a multi–channel scanning DME. VOR and TACAN receivers are
Page 1
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
optional for either enroute navigation or as an approach reference. In addition to navigational
inputs, the UNS–1B also receives true airspeed and altitude information from an air data
computer. The system supports both digital and analog air data inputs. If analog attitude is
configured, digital altitude information is required because the analog inputs are used for
pitch and roll inputs. The UNS–1B receives fuel flow data from the aircraft fuel flow sensors,
and optionally, heading data from an analog gyro. The best computed position of the UNS–
1B is determined by using position inputs from all available navigation and radio sensors.
The UNS–1B searches the database to determine which DME stations are within range
(approximately 300 NM) and then sequentially tunes each of those stations. By interrogating
multiple DME stations, knowing the geographic coordinates of each station, and correcting
the distance computation for slant range using station elevation and aircraft’s altitude, the
UNS–1B FMS is able to compute the position of the aircraft. The best computed position of
the UNS–1B is a weighted average of various sensor inputs. TAS is derived from the air data
computer. Velocity information is derived from the inertial sensors. Position information is
derived from Loran C, GPS, VOR, TACAN, and inertial sensors. These, along with heading
information, are integrated with DME derived position to arrive at the best computed
position. If the aircraft is out of DME range, the FMS will rely upon the long–range sensors
for position information. After the best computed position is obtained, secondary
navigational functions such as course to waypoint, ETA, distance to waypoint, wind, and
groundspeed are computed for display.
A sensor “watchdog” automatically protects against a large error in a navigation sensor
which could cause the best computed position to slip. This is accomplished continuously by
monitoring the difference between the sensor, or second FMS computed position, and the
UNS–1B’s best computed position. It also monitors the position difference between the FMS
and a second FMS. If any difference exceeds a preset value, the watchdog will activate the
appropriate messages to alert the pilot.
Both the computed and raw sensor data is output for display to the flight crew on the CDU.
Flight Guidance system installations, switching, and pilot annunciations are streamlined as
all output data comes from one source, the UNS–1B NCU, which represents all sensors. The
UNS–1B FMS provides desired track, bearing, crosstrack, lateral deviation, vertical
deviation, and related data to the flight guidance system. This information is used for the HSI
displays and roll steering command for the autopilot/flight director system.
Current capability includes lateral great circle and vertical navigational guidance and display,
from aircraft departure to arrival. This includes enroute as well as terminal and approach
capabilities which are integrated with real time fuel management monitoring data. An
incorporated Radar/Multi–function Display (MFD) interface allows selection and display of
flight plan waypoints on compatible weather radar or MFD displays.
The aircraft fuel flow sensors provide the UNS–1B FMS with the inputs necessary to
integrate real time fuel management information with navigational functions. During the pre–
departure phase, the pilot inputs the fuel onboard the aircraft to initialize the fuel
management functions. During flight, the UNS–1B FMS automatically updates the fuel on-
board gross weight. It also provides continuous estimates of the fuel requirements for the
programmed flight plan based upon fuel flow and groundspeed. Additionally, the FMS
Page 2
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
provides specific range and endurance data to aid the pilot in optimizing fuel consumption to
obtain maximum range or endurance.
The UNS–1B FMS is configured to its specific aircraft installation by the use of a
Configuration Module which is part of each aircraft installed NCU rack. At the time of
installation, the Configuration Module is programmed through CDU inputs to completely
define the sensor input ports, fuel flow type, air data type, EFIS interface, etc.
When the optional Flat Panel CDU (FPCDU) is installed, there is an optional video feature
which can accommodate video sources for display on the FPCDU. This feature allows
interfaces with RGB format video from aircraft interior and exterior cameras as well as a
Cabin Display System (when a NTSC-to-RGB converter is used). The video mode is
accessed from the Display Option page by pushing the VIDEO line select key. Video mode
is exited by pushing any key.
Page 3
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
B. Single NCU Installation Description
The NCU acts as the “master” of the Loran–C sensor, and is used during inertial alignment.
The NCU computes its position, provides selected information to the associated flight
instruments, and provides sensor control to all sensors. The NCU houses its internal data
bases, which include charted data from suppliers such as Jeppesen and pilot input data such
as routes and approaches.
SCDU or FPCDU 2
SREVIN
U
AL
ATA
D VAN VA
NV OTD T
SIL ERP 1 2 3
Video 1
V
DME
EUF
L
PF
L
REP
F
E
NUT UNE
M TXE
N 4 5 6
A B C D E F G 7 8 9
H I J K L M N KCAB 0 GSM
O P Q R S T
FO / NO
F ±
M
D
I
U V W X Y Z ENTE
R
VOR FGS
RRS or
TACAN DTU
DME/P À Air Data
AFIS
UNIVERS
AL
Fuel Flow
UNS-1B FMS
Cabin Display
NCU
IRS or GPS LCS Radar

GPIRS Doppler
1 FPCDU P/N 10182XXX only

2 SCDU with SCN 5.X/6.X and FPCDU require NCU SCN 60X.X
Single system Block Diagram
Page 4
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
C. Dual NCU Installation Description

In a dual NCU installation, each system acts as the “master” of its respective Loran–C
sensor, and either NCU can be used during inertial alignment. Each NCU System computes
its own independent position and provides selected information to the associated flight
instruments, while remaining ready to provide sensor control to all sensors in the event either
system should fail. All fuel flow sensors feed their output data to both NCUs. The air data
computer supplies output data to both NCUs, or dual ADCs may be utilized in some
installations. Each NCU houses its own internal data bases. These include charted data from
suppliers such as Jeppesen and pilot input data such as routes and approaches.
2 2
SCDU or FPCDU SCDU or FPCDU
U
V
NE
IR
S U
V
NE
IR
S
AL AL
DATA NA
V VNAV D
T
O LS
IT PRE
V
1 2 3 DATA NA
V VNAV D
T
O LS
IT PRE
V
1 2 3
1
FUE F
P PER TUNE M
EN
U NEXT 4 5 6 FUE
L
F
P
L
PER
F
TUNE M
EN
U NEXT 4 5 6
L L F
7 8 9 A B C D E F G 7 8 9
Video DME
A B C D E F G
BACK 0 M
SG H I J K L M N BACK 0 M
SG
H I J K L M N
DME
O
FO
/N
± O P Q R S T
O
FO
/N
±
O P Q R S T DIM
F
DIM
F
U V W X Y Z ENTE U V W X Y Z ENTE
R R
VOR
VOR
RRS or FGS or RRS
TACAN
TACAN
DTU
DME/P
DME/P
Air Data
AFIS
UNIVERSAL UNIVERSAL
UNS-1B FMS UNS-1B FMS
Fuel Flow
Cabin Display
NCU NCU
IRS or GPS LCS Radar

GPIRS Doppler
1 FPCDU P/N 10182XXX only

2 SCDU with SCN 5.X/6.X and FPCDU require NCU SCN 60X.X
Dual System Block Diagram
Page 5
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
D. System Components
(1) Control Display Unit
The CDUs used in the UNS–1B FMS consist of the following
The CDU, located in the cockpit, provides the operator with all the controls necessary to
communicate with the navigation computer and all associated navigation sensors. The CDU
allows manual data entry, system mode selection, computed and raw data displays, control
(selection and deselection) of navigation sensors, and system message displays. The CDU
also provides remote control and tuning of the TACAN and aircraft radios with the RTU
installed. Certain annunciations concerning system and sensor faults are also included in the
CDU displays. The Configuration Module is programmed through the CDU at installation
The CDU supports data display on eleven lines with 24 characters each in two different
character sizes. Graphics displays for special photo, search and surveillance flight patterns
are presented, and are available for future graphic growth capabilities. Mode selection and
data organization is in a “chapter and page” format with menu selections being made by the
use of the mode select keys and/or “soft” line select keys. This allows two levels of
selections to exist on the same page (screen). Data is always entered into the system at a
cursor location, determined by the system computer program, with certain operator selected
options.
The CDU receives all required power for operation from the NCU (with the exception of 5 or
28 V keyboard backlighting which is provided from the aircraft dimmer bus).
(2) Navigation Computer Unit (NCU), P/N 1190–XX–XXXX
¾ Super CDU – Color, P/N 1016–1–( ); – Monochrome, P/N 1016–2–( )
The SCDU is an advanced CRT cockpit display unit providing operator friendly
versatility through a complete (63 key) alphanumeric and function keyboard. The
daylight–readable 5 inch diagonal CRT offers color displays, in the spectrum of
red to green, for data differentiation (1016–1–( ) only).
¾ Flat Panel CDU – Color, P/N 1018–X–( )
The FPCDU has an active matrix thin film transistor liquid crystal display. This
device provides full color display and may be equipped to display video from
external sources.
The UNS–1B NCU is an ARINC 600, 2 MCU size, remotely mounted unit which
houses the system’s central processing unit (Master computer), the navigation sensor
interface circuits, the flight guidance system interface, fuel flow interface, and the
Jeppesen database. The NCU can be removed from the aircraft rack without loss of
the database memory.
The NCU P/N 1190–XX–XXXX is available in different sensor compatibility
configurations with four optional fuel flow configurations. These are analog (ac or
dc) and digital (Pulse or Frequency).
The configuration module is a serially connected EEPROM designed to store
configuration data that is specific to the aircraft installation, The EEPROM is
Page 6
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
attached to the NCU mounting rack. The user is able to view and initialize the aircraft
configuration through specially designed menus that can be accessed through the
CDU. Subsequent modifications to the configuration are possible but restricted
through software interlocks. The Configuration Module receives and transmits data to
the NCU via private serial communications busses.
(3) Configuration Module, P/N 11901
The Configuration module is a serially connected EEPROM designed to store
configuration data that is specific to the aircraft installation. The EEPROM is
attached to the NCU mounting rack. The user is able to view and initialize the aircraft
configuration through specially designed menus that can be accessed through the
CDU. Subsequent modifications to the configuration are possible but restricted
through the CDU. Subsequent modifications to the configuration are possible but
restricted through software interlocks. The Configuration Module receives and
transmits data to the NCU via private serial communications busses.
(4) Data Transfer Unit (DTU), P/N 1403–( ), 1404–( ), 1405–( )
The Data Transfer Unit (DTU) is a 3.5" floppy disk drive housed within a protective
case. Models 1403 and 1405 may be panel mounted in the cockpit for convenient
access. Model 1404 consists of a P/N 1403–( ) unit and a wire harness housed in a
portable carrying case. The wire harness plugs into a socket that is mounted in the
aircraft and connected to the NCU. The DTU is used to update the standard and
expanded Jeppesen databases. The update is contained on 3–1/2 inch floppy disks
which are distributed periodically. The DTU receives power from the NCU and
communicates directly with it through a digital bus.
Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU), P/N 1408-( ), 1409-( )
NOTE: For use with FMS SCN 60X/70X and Later.
The SSDTU is designed as a data upload and download device interfacing with other
Universal Avionics’ line replaceable units (LRU) and to replace the DTU and DTU-
100. The SSDTU replaces floppy disk and Zip disk technology with flash memory
technology. Two accessible data storage device ports are built into the faceplate of
the SSDTU. These ports support Universal Serial Bus (USB) and Secure Digital (SD)
data storage devices and function as disk drives. The SSDTU transfers data files
between the selected data storage device and other LRUs using an Ethernet bus.
The SSDTU has three serial digital buses that are each capable of receiving and
transmitting data.
¾ A single EIA-485 (RS-422) bus which can be used to exchange data between
FMSs.
¾ An Ethernet bus, consisting of an eight port Ethernet switch used to exchange
data with up to eight UASC Ethernet network compatible LRUs such as TAWS
and Vision-1 systems.
¾ An EIA-232 bus that provides access to the diagnostic interface.
Page 7
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
The SSDTU is available in two models, a fixed installation model that is permanently
installed in the aircraft and a portable model which is carried into the aircraft,
attached to an interface connector, used, then disconnected and removed prior to
flight. The SSDTU is the same fit as a DTU and DTU-100, although using USB and
SD data storage devices allows more flexibility for SSDTU installation.
The functions of the discrete inputs that were used to enable or disable data bus
communications (Ethernet or EIA-485) have been disabled. These functions are now
enabled by software.
The DTU, or SSDTU, is used to load aircraft specific performance data. Pilot–defined
flight plans and checklists created with PC-Compatible off–line flight planning
software can be loaded. FMS inflight data parameters or the maintenance log stored
in non-volatile memory can be written to a disk or storage device utilizing the
DTU/SSDTU.
(5) EFIS Radar Panel, P/N 1015–1–XX
The EFIS Radar Panel (ERP) provides two knobs with push buttons and six buttons
for pilot control of various EFIS and RADAR functions of the Collins Pro Line 4
Avionics System. The ERP also receives pilot inputs from the Pro Line 4 Altitude
Awareness Panel (AAP) and the Pro Line 4 Course Heading Panel (CHP). All
pilot/user inputs are forwarded to the UNS–1B Navigation Computer Unit via a
CSDB interface. The Super CDU/ERP combination replaces the Collins CDU. The
UNS–1B FMS becomes the navigation control or External Navigator.
E. System Data
(1) Inputs
The UNS–1B NCU P/N 1190–XX–XXXX has 8 standard and 8 optional ARINC
input ports which function as either multiple or single function input ports (15
multiple/single inputs, and a single ADC input). Other digital and analog inputs for
systems interfacing are also accommodated. Listed below are the sensor types that
can be interfaced with the UNS–1B NCU. The following information is of a general
nature. (For more detailed information on specific sensors compatible and interfacing
data, refer to the Installation And Wiring section of this manual.)
(a) Up to four long range navigation sensors:
¾ Loran–C Sensor System (LCS) – Maximum of one.
¾ GPS Sensor – Two (or three depending on SCN).
¾ Doppler
¾ Inertial Reference (Sensor) System (IRS or ISS)(or IRGPS) – Maximum
of three of same type, configured in any order or combination.
Page 8
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(b) Radar “joystick” input for waypoint definition – One.
(c) Air Data Computer – One (either ARINC 429 or 575).
(d) Radio Reference Sensor (RRS)
¾ One with NCU P/N 1190–XX–1XXX or 1190–XX–2XXX
¾ Two with NCU P/N 1190–XX–2XXX if one is ARINC and the other is
CSDB.
NOTE: RRS is used in lieu of DME/VOR/TACAN receivers. An RRS
and Radio Tune Unit (RTU) can be installed on the same
aircraft. In this case, the RRS is used for radio navigational
inputs, and the RTU for pilot command tuning of radios. If an
RRS is used, a separate TACAN receiver (listed below) is not
normally installed.
(e) Short Range Navigation Radios – The system is capable of receiving and
using inputs from multiple short range navigation radio sensors as follows:
¾ ARINC 429 DME – Maximum of one.
¾ ARINC 429 VOR – Maximum of one.
¾ ARINC 429 TACAN, AN/ARN–118 – Maximum of one.
¾ CSDB Only (RS–422) DME – Maximum of one.
¾ CSDB Only (RS–422) VOR – Maximum of one.
NOTE: Either ARINC 429 or Collins CSDB interface may be used for
the short range navigation radios, but not both. CSDB (RS–
422) is preferred, since this type of interface is in addition to
the 16 ARINC 429 input ports described above.
(Interconnection of ARINC 429 type radios requires adherence
to acceptable system input configurations detailed in the
Installation And Wiring section of this manual.)
(f) Engine Fuel Flow Inputs – Maximum of four of the same type, i.e., (dc, ac,
pulse, frequency, or digital).
(g) Flight Guidance and Flight Control Systems – Interfacing inputs/outputs
provided in both digital and analog formats.
(h) AFIS (Global Airborne Flight Information System) – Fully supported
(i) Collins Pro Line 4 Avionics System
(2) Outputs
Analog as well as digital outputs to the Flight Guidance System and roll steering to
the Flight Control System are available. In addition, digital/analog outputs are
available for flight instrumentation systems (both electronic and mechanical)
Page 9
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
equipment. Remote annunciators and other discrete outputs are also provided. Listed
below are standard outputs available from the NCU.
(a) Analog
¾ Pitch and Roll Steering
¾ Desired Track – (Synchro/Resolver)
¾ Bearing to Waypoint/Drift Angle– (Synchro/Resolver)
¾ Lateral Deviation
¾ Vertical Deviation
¾ TO/FROM
¾ Flags and Valids
(b) Digital
¾ ARINC 429 High–Speed Output Data Bus – Two isolated outputs
¾ ARINC 429 Low–Speed Output Data Bus – Two isolated outputs
¾ ARINC 429 Tune 1 Output Bus ARINC 429 – One isolated output
¾ Tune 2 Output Bus – One isolated output
¾ ARINC 429 Output Bus (Spare) – Two isolated outputs
¾ ARINC 561 Output Data Bus – Standard
¾ ARINC 571 Output Data Bus – Standard
¾ RS–422 Output Data Bus – Collins CSDB for DME/Radio tuning
functions
(c) Annunciators
¾ Message
¾ Selected Crosstrack
¾ FMS Approach Mode
¾ Waypoint
¾ FMS Heading Mode
¾ GPS INTEG
¾ ON BATT
(3) Internal Data Base
Each NCU has the internal storage capability of more than 100,000 locations. This
data is supplied on a data storage device directly from Universal Avionics Systems
Corporation. on a 28 day revision cycle. This data base will normally contain data for
the following:
Page 10
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(a) Standard
¾ Airports
¾ Navaids
¾ Enroute Waypoints
¾ Terminal Waypoints
¾ NDB Navaids
¾ LOW and HIGH Altitude Airways
¾ Plain language VOR & NDB names
¾ Plain language AIRPORT names
(b) Extended
¾ SIDs and STARs
¾ Approaches
¾ Runways
This data base is retained in non–volatile flash RAM which allows aircraft data base
loading. To load each revision cycle, a DTU is required.
2. Operation
A. General
Detailed operating procedures for the UNS–1B FMS are provided in the Operator’s Manual
for the specific software loaded into your NCU( e.g., SCN 401.X). The operating procedures
presented here are intended to provide you the information you will need to perform tasks
later in this manual.
B. Control Display Unit P/N 1016–X–( ) and 1018–X–( )
The UNS–1B FMS Operator’s Manuals introduce the CDU, explain the CDU operating
philosophy, and provide a detailed explanation of the keyboard keys and their associated
functions.
The CDU, as part of a Flight Management System (FMS) provides the operator with all the
controls necessary to communicate with the navigation computer and associated navigation
sensors. A CDU presents an eleven–line display using two character sizes. P/N 1016–1–( )
displays colors in the red to green spectrum to differentiate the type of data being displayed.
P/N 1016–2–( ) is a monochromatic (green) CDU. The FPCDU, P/N 1018–X–( ), has a full
color display. The operator may adjust display brightness. Line select keys are located on
either side of the display. We refer to individual line select keys, in this manual, by the terms
[1L] through [5L] and [1R] through [5R] as illustrated. Function keys are immediately below
the display and an alphanumeric keyboard is below and to the right of the function keys. The
CDU provides for manual data entry, system mode selection, computed and raw data
displays, control (selection and deselection) of navigational sensors, and system message
Page 11
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
displays. The CDU may be used to tune the aircraft radios if a Radio Tuning Unit (RTU) or
Pro Line 4 system is installed.
UNIVERSAL
[1L] [1R]
[2L] [2R]
[3L] [3R]
[4L] [4R]
[5L] [5R]
DATA NAV VNAV DTO LIST PREV

1 2 3
FUEL FPL PERF TUNE MENU NEXT 4 5 6
A B C D E F G 7 8 9
H I J K L M N BACK 0 MSG
O P Q R S T DIM ±
U V W X Y Z ENTER
Front of Super CDU and FPCDU
Page 12
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
The following paragraphs provide general information about the operator–CDU interface
which is applicable to installation and checkout of the UNS–1B FMS.
(1) Cursor
Data is always entered into the system at a cursor location. The cursor marks variable
parameters by means of reverse field.
When appropriate, the cursor location aligns with one of the ten line select keys used
to control the cursor. The home position of the cursor is usually off the display when
a page is initially accessed, although some pages have a cursor default position that is
on the screen. Pushing the ENTER key completes the entry of data. If there is a
logical next field for data entry, the cursor will automatically advance to this next
field when the ENTER key is pushed.
(2) Item Selection
Selections are made with the line select keys whenever possible. In some cases a
combination of line select keys and reference numbers are used on the same display
page. This allows two levels of selection to exist simultaneously on the same display.
For example, while the content or nature of a list is controlled by the line select keys,
an item from that list can be selected by using a reference number. In the following
illustration the reference numbers appear to the left of the items available for
selection. The cursor is on the dash in the data entry field next to the pound (#) sign.
To make a selection, input the number corresponding to your choice and push
[ENTER]. The arrow next to the word RETURN points to the adjacent line select key
[5R]. Pushing [5R] will return the display to the previous page.
Any selection that will change the active flight plan, guidance of the aircraft, or the
stored data base requires confirmation. Confirmation is accomplished by pushing the
line select key a second time or by pushing the ENTER key. Selection of fields that
do not require confirmation will cause the page or mode change to occur immediately
when the corresponding line select key is pushed.
(3) Information Display
In the color CDU, color and graphics are used to draw attention to the most important
items on a display. Background colors and/or boxes are used to group data into
important areas such as control or selection boxes.
Page 13
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
In the Monochrome SCDU, character size and graphics are used to call attention to
the most important items on a display. Boxes are used to group data into important
areas such as control or selection boxes.
(4) Display Control
400.X , , 401.X , 402.X , 403.X , 404.X , 405.X , and 60X.X
NOTE: For SCN 60X.X, the SCDU requires SCN 5.X or 6.X, and the FPCDU
must be P/N 1018–1–( ) — no video.
The ON/OFF–DIM key provides power–up, display control, and unit shutdown
functions.
Pushing the ON/OFF–DIM key for initial power–up will energize the system and
initiate self test of the navigation computer. When self test is initiated, the Self–test
page will appear. The Self–test page will automatically be followed by the
Initialization page if all tests are successfully completed. If a failure that would cause
the system to be unusable occurs, the Initialization page will not appear. Once the
Initialization page appears, no other page can be displayed until the initialization data
is accepted.
After the system is turned on, pushing the ON/OFF–DIM key will cause a control
window to be displayed on the right side of the active page with the options
BRIGHT, DIM, CANCEL, OFFSET and OFF. Pushing the line select key next to one
of these options selects the option.
Dimming Control Window

BRIGHT – Pushing the line select key for BRIGHT will cause the CRT to steadily
brighten as the key is held down.
DIM – Pushing the line select key for DIM will cause the CRT display to steadily dim
as the key is held down.
CANCEL – Pushing the line select key for CANCEL will cause the control window
to be removed from the active display page.
Page 14
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
OFFSET – Pushing the line select key for OFFSET will cause the parallax
adjustment window to display.
Parallax Adjustment Window

The parallax adjustment window presents three options (UP, DOWN, and CANCEL)
selectable using the line select keys. Selecting UP will cause the entire display to shift
upwards by as much as one half-character to adjust the parallax for the line select
keys. Selecting DOWN will adjust the display downwards an equal amount. Selecting
CANCEL will return the display to the main
(BRIGHT/DIM/CANCEL/OFFSET/OFF) window.
OFF – Pushing the line select key for OFF will cause the CONFIRM OFF window to
be displayed. This window has two options (CONFIRM OFF and CANCEL)
selectable using the line select keys. Selecting CONFIRM OFF will turn the system
off. Selecting CANCEL will return the display to the main
(BRIGHT/DIM/CANCEL/OFFSET/OFF) window.
(5) Display Control 600.X

NOTE: This applies only to the FPCDU P/N 1018–2–( ) — equipped for video.
The ON/OFF–DIM key provides power–up, display control, and unit shutdown
functions.
After the system is turned on, pushing the ON/OFF-DIM key will cause the dimming
control window to be displayed on the right side of the active page with the options
BRIGHT [1R], DIM [2R], CANCEL [3R], DISPLAY [4R], and OFF [5R]. Pushing
the line select key next to one of these options selects the option.
·underlying
BRIGHT®
screen
DIM®
will
CANCEL®
appear
DISPLAY®
here
OFF®
Page 15
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
BRIGHT - Pushing and holding the line select key for BRIGHT will cause the
Display to steadily brighten as the key is pushed.
DIM - Pushing and holding the line select key for DIM will cause the display to
steadily dim as the key is pushed.
CANCEL - Pushing the line select key for CANCEL will cause the control window
to be removed from the active display page.
DISPLAY - Pushing the line select key for DISPLAY will cause the Display Option
window to be displayed.
UP®
DOWN®
existing text
CANCEL®
VIDEO®
Display Option Window

The display option window presents four options (UP [1R], DOWN [2R], CANCEL
[3R], and VIDEO [4R]) selectable using the line select keys. Selecting UP will cause
the entire display to shift upwards by as much as one-half character to adjust the
parallax for the line select keys. Selecting DOWN will adjust the display downwards
an equal amount. Selecting CANCEL will return the display to the dimming control
window.
VIDEO - Pushing VIDEO [4R] accesses the video mode. This option will appear
only on units equipped with video capability (1018–XX–1XX). Active video, such as
a wheel well camera will be displayed.
OFF - Pushing OFF [5R] will cause the CONFIRM OFF window to display.
CONFIRM®
OFF
existing text
CANCEL®
Confirm Off Window

This window has two options (CONFIRM OFF and CANCEL) selectable using the
line select keys. Selecting CONFIRM OFF will turn the system off. Selecting
CANCEL will return the display to the dimming control window.
Page 16
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
C. Navigation Computer Unit, P/N 1190–XX–XXXX
The NCU has no controls or displays of its own. It is operated indirectly through the CDU as
part of the FMS. The CDU provides all the controls necessary to communicate with the
navigation computer and associated navigation sensors.
D. Configuration Module, P/N 11901
The Configuration Module has no controls or displays of its own.
E. Data Transfer Unit, P/N 1403–( ), 1404–( ), 1405–( )
The following paragraphs provide general information about operating the DTU (Models
1403, 1404, and 1405). Refer to your Operator’s Manual applicable to your Flight
Management System and software program version for detailed operating procedures. When
using the Portable DTU, connect the DTU cable to the appropriate panel–mounted connector
before turning the unit on.
(1) Power
With external power applied to the DTU, push the push-button switch on the Front
Panel to turn the unit on or off. The red LED illuminates when power is applied and
the switch is on.
(2) Carrying Case (Model 1404)
This model has a Model 1403 DTU mounted inside a carrying case that has a hinged,
removable cover.
(3) Disk Insertion and Removal
(a) Open the Dust Cover (Model 1405 only) by pulling out and upward on the
tabs. The pivot arms and latch mechanisms will hold the Dust Cover in the
fully open position.
(b) Grasp the disk by the edge away from the metal shutter so that the arrow
points away from you. Orient the disk so that the arrow points toward the slot
in the Disc Drive and the face of the disk is toward the top of the unit and then
insert the disk into the drive. Push on the exposed edge of disk until it is fully
inserted.
(c) Push on the small button on the Disc Drive to eject the disk.
(d) Grasp the disk and pull it out of the drive.
(e) Push the Dust Cover (Model 1405 only) toward the unit until it snaps closed.
The pivot arms and latch mechanisms will hold the Dust Cover closed.
Page 17
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
F Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU)

NOTE: For use with FMS SCN 60X/70X and Later
The following paragraphs provide general information about operating the SSDTU,
models 1408-( ) and 1409-( ). Refer to the Operator’s Manual applicable to the Flight
Management System and software version for detailed operating procedures.
(1) Power
NOTE: When using the Portable SSDTU, connect the SSDTU cable to the appropriate
panel-mounted connectors before applying power to the aircraft.
When power is applied, the SSDTU undergoes a Lamp Test and Power-on Built-In-
Test (PBIT). The SSDTU operates the front panel LED indicators in the following
order.
(a) All LEDs Off: Power supply not present.
(b) All LEDs Amber: Power supply good, processor initializing.
(c) All LEDs Green: Loading and verifying the operating system image and
verifying the file system image.
(d) All LEDs Blue: Initializing operating system.
During PBIT, all three indicators will display the same status at any given time. The
purpose of the operation is to test the LEDs and to give a clear indication of which
PBIT step failed, should the SSDTU fail to begin normal operation.
Page 18
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
Following PBIT (normal operation), the SSDTU operates the front panel LED
indicators as shown in the following table.
Indicator Indicator Color and Action
Type
Blank Green Solid Green Amber Blue Solid Blue
Blinking Solid Blinking
STATUS SSDTU Off Operational N/A CBIT has Self test N/A
(front) detected an
error
(SSDTU
will reboot)
USB No device Device OK, Device is Bad or Device OK, Device is
(Front) present not in use being unsupported in use being
accessed device (Indicates accessed
Primary
storage
device)
SD (Front) No device Device OK, Device is Bad or Device OK, Device is
present not in use being unsupported in use being
accessed device (Indicates accessed
Primary
storage
device)
NET Not Yet N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
(Front) Operational
Ethernet No Device A network Network N/A N/A N/A
(Rear) present link is activity
established
(2) Flash Memory
(a) Insertion
¾ Open the Dust Cover by pulling upward on the tabs. The pivot arms and latch
mechanisms will hold the Dust Cover in the fully open position.
¾ Insert the flash memory card. Push on the exposed edge until it is fully inserted,
the memory card will remain seated all the way in the slot when pressure is
released.
NOTE: If the card does not slide into the slot easily, do not try to force it; the card
will not fit in backwards. Turn the card around 180º and reinsert card.
¾ Close the dust cover.
Page 19
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(b) Removal
NOTE: If the data storage device is removed during a read operation, the read
operation will fail. If the data storage device is removed during a write
operation, the device may become corrupt and will require the data storage
device to be formatted on a personal computer (not an FMS format command
which only deletes files from the media).
¾ Push on the exposed edge of the memory card, release pressure and the memory
card will eject slightly out of the slot.
¾ Grasp the edge of the flash memory and pull it out of the SSDTU.
¾ Close the dust cover.
(3) USB Memory Insertion
(a) Insertion
¾ Insert USB memory all the way into the USB slot until seated.
NOTE: If the USB Memory does not slide into the slot easily, do not try to force it; the card
will not fit in backwards. Turn the memory card around 180º and reinsert.
NOTE: Do not close dust cover.
(b) Removal
NOTE: If the data storage device is removed during a read operation, the read operation will
fail. If the data storage device is removed during a write operation, the device may
become corrupt and will require the data storage device to be formatted on a personal
computer (not an FMS format command which only deletes files from the media).
¾ Pull USB Memory card straight out of memory slot.
¾ Close dust cover.
Page 20
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
G. EFIS Radar Panel (ERP), P/N 1015–1–XX
NOTE: This is applicable to aircraft equipped with Pro Line 4; for example, Learjet
60.
The UNS–1B FMS Operator’s Manuals introduce the ERP and provide a detailed
explanation of the radar controls and MFD keys and their associated functions.
EFIS Radar Panel

(1) ERP (EFIS Radar Panel) Radar Controls.
The ERP faceplate contains several Weather Radar System controls, each of which
functions identically independent of which type of weather radar system is installed.
When the pilot pushes one of the radar control buttons or turns a knob, the ERP sends
the change to the UNS–1B.
(a) PUSH RDR ON Switch – This switch, located in the center of the RANGE
knob, is used to display weather radar on the MFD. Pushing this switch on,
when the MAP mode is displayed on the MFD, will present weather radar
superimposed on the map display. Pushing this switch when weather radar is
superimposed on the MAP mode will remove the weather radar. Also, when
this switch is pushed while the MFD is in HSI format, weather only format
will be displayed on the MFD.
(b) RANGE Knob – Turning this knob selects radar/map display range from 5
NM to 300 NM and up to 600 NM in plan map. Range annunciation will be
displayed on the MFD.
(c) RDR Key – This key provides display of the Radar Functions Page (RADAR
CNTRL) on the onside CDU. Pushing this key a second time will display the
second Radar Function Page. Radar functions are selected from these two
pages.
(d) PUSH ZERO Switch – This switch, located in the center of the TILT knob, is
pushed to set the vertical tilt of the weather radar antenna to 0 degrees.
(e) TILT Knob – Turning this knob selects the tilt angle of the weather radar
antenna from –14 degrees to +14 degrees. Tilt annunciation will be displayed
on the ND/MFD.
Page 21
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(2) ERP/MFD Keys and Switches.

(a) HSI Key – This key provides display of a conventional compass rose on the
MFD. A traditional Horizontal Situation Indicator will be displayed. Radar
targets will not display in HSI format.
(b) MAP Key – This key is used to display a present position map on the MFD.
(c) TFC Key – This is only active if TCAS is installed, in which case this key
will provide and display a traffic map on the MFD.
(d) NAV Key – This key is used to display a navigation source menu (NAV
SOURCE 1/1) on the onside CDU from which navigation sensors may be
selected for onside display on the PFD/MFD.
(e) BRG Key – This key is used to display a Bearing Pointers (BRG PTRS)
Menu. The menu lists sensors which may be selected for driving bearing
pointers on the PFD/MFD.
Page 22
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
FAA Approval
1. General
Installation approval of the UNS-1B NCU System exists under a variety of STCs. For a new
installation to be eligible for installation approval, it is necessary to apply to the FAA for an
STC, or to utilize an existing STC.
A. Applicable TSOs
(1) TSO-C115 6/12/86: Airborne Area Navigation Equipment using Multi-sensor Inputs.
(2) TSO-C115a 2/22/91: Airborne Area Navigation Equipment using Multi-sensor
Inputs.
(3) TSO C115b 9/30/94: Airborne Area Navigation Equipment using Multi-sensor
Inputs.
(4) TSO C129 12/10/92: Airborne Supplemental Navigation Equipment using the Global
Positioning System.
NOTE: For SCNs 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X, 600.X, 60X.X and all first-
time approvals using performance V-speeds and engine thrust rating
computations for a specific aircraft model, the TC or STC approval
process must be used.
B. Applicable Advisory Circulars
(1) AC 20-121A 8/24/88: Airworthiness Approval of Airborne Loran-C Systems for use
in the U.S. National Airspace System.
(2) AC 20-130 9/12/88: Airworthiness Approval of Multi-Sensor Navigation Systems for
use in the U.S. National Airspace System (NAS) and Alaska.
(3) AC 20-129 9/12/88: Airworthiness Approval of Vertical Navigation (VNAV)
Systems for use in the U.S. National Airspace System (NAS) and Alaska.
(4) AC 25-4 2/18/66: Inertial Navigation System (INS)
(5) AC 25-15 11/20/89: Approval of Flight Management Systems in Transport Category
Airplanes.
(6) AC 120-33 6/24/77: Operational Approval of Airborne Long Range Navigation
Systems for Flight within the North Atlantic Minimum Navigation Performance
Specifications Airspace.
(7) AC 91-49 8/23/77: General Aviation Procedures for Flight in North Atlantic
Minimum Navigation Performance Specifications Airspace.
(8) AC 90-94 12/14/94: Guidelines for using Global Positioning System Equipment for
IFR En-Route and Terminal Operations and for Non-Precision Instrument
Approaches in the U.S. National Airspace System.
Page 101
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
C. Applicable Documents
The following listed documents are in effect as of the date of the UNS-1B System
certification, and form the part of the certification criteria to the extent specified herein.
(1) RTCA Document No. DO-160B July 1984: Environmental Conditions and Test
Procedures for Airborne Equipment.
(2) RTCA Document No. DO-160C December 1989: Environmental Conditions and Test
Procedures for Airborne Equipment.
(3) RTCA Document No. DO-187 November 1984: Minimum Operational Performance
Standards for Airborne Area Navigation Equipment using Multi-Sensor Inputs.
(4) RTCA Document No. DO-178A March 1985: Software considerations in Airborne
Systems and Equipment Certification.
(5) ARINC Specification 419-1 December 1, 1975: Digital Data System Compendium.
(6) ARINC Specification 429-10 November 17, 1986: Mark 33 Digital Information
Transfer System (DITS).
(7) ARINC Specification 561-11 January 17, 1975: Air Transport Inertial Navigation
System (INS).
(8) ARINC Characteristic 571-2 May 15, 1974: Inertial Sensor System (ISS)
(9) ARINC Specification 600-7 January 12, 1987: Air Transport Avionics Equipment
Interfaces.
(10) ARINC Characteristic 704-5 October, 1983: Inertial Reference System.
(11) ARINC Characteristic 706-4 June, 1985: Mark 5 Subsonic Air Data System.
2. Continuous Airworthiness, FAR 23.1529, 25.1529, 27.1529, and
29.1529
Permission is hereby granted to use all or part of our statement for STC/337 certification
purposes.
Our statement in compliance with FAR 23.1529, 25.1529, 27.1529, and 29.1529 follows:
A. general Information
SYSTEM: UNS-1B Flight Management System
Modification of an aircraft by this Supplemental Type Certificate or Form 337 obligates the
aircraft operator to include the maintenance information provided by this document in the
operator’s Aircraft Maintenance manual and the operator’s Aircraft Scheduled Maintenance
Program.
(1) Maintenance Manual information for the UNS-1B is contained in Universal Avionics
Systems Corporation’s (UASC) Installation Manual………..
(2) Line Replaceable Unit (LRU) part numbers and other necessary part numbers
contained in the installation data package should be placed in the aircraft operator’s
appropriate aircraft Illustrated Parts Catalog (IPC).
Page 102
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
(3) Wiring diagram information contained in this data package should be placed into the
aircraft operator’s appropriate aircraft Wiring Diagram Manuals.
(4) Revision to this document will be accomplished via Service Bulleting and/or
Installation Manual Revision.
B. Airworthiness Limitations
Scheduled Maintenance
Program tasks to be added to the aircraft operator’s appropriate aircraft maintenance program
are as follows:
(1) Recommended Periodic Scheduled Servicing Tasks: None Required
(2) Recommended Periodic Scheduled Preventative Maintenance Tests/
Checks to Determine System Condition and/or Latent Failures: None Required
(3) Recommended Periodic Inspections: None Required
(4) Recommended Periodic Structural Inspections: None Required
(5) Recommended Replacement Interval: None Required
Unscheduled Maintenance
Unscheduled maintenance may include upgrade of the program software contained in the
FMS. If the FMS is removed and the software changed, the configuration settings should be
checked and amended as necessary in accordance with the instructions contained in
applicable manuals.
Page 103
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
3. Environmental Qualification Forms
The environmental categories under which the UNS-1B FMS is approved (Reference RTCA.
DO-160C) are listed on the accompanying Environmental Qualification Forms in this
section.
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALIFICATION FORM
NOMENCLATURE: CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT (SUPER CDU)
PART NO.: 1016-X-( ) TSO NUMBER: C115
MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATION AND/OR OTHER APPLICABLE SPECIFICATION:
Contained in Technical Manual
MANUFACTURER: Universal Avionics Systems Corporation
3260 E. Universal Way
Tucson, AZ. 85756-5097
CONDITIONS DO-160B DESCRIPTION OF CONDUCTED TESTS

SECTION #
PARAGRAPH #
TEMPERATURE AND ALTITUDE 4.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY A2D2
LOW TEMPERATURE 4.5.1 -55°C OPERATING, -55°C SURVIVAL

HIGH TEMPERATURE 4.5.3 +70°C OPERATING, +85°C SURVIVAL
IN-FLIGHT LOSS OF COOLING 4.5.4 NOT APPLICABLE
ALTITUDE 4.6.1 50,000 FT
DECOMPRESSION 4.6.2 50,000 FT
OVERPRESSURE 4.6.3 -15,000 FT
TEMPERATURE VARIATION 5.3 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY B
HUMIDITY 6.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY A

50°C, 95%, 48 HOURS
SHOCK 7.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED PER DO-160B, PARA 7.2.1
OPERATIONAL 7.2 6.0 g

CRASH SAFETY 7.3 15.0 g
VIBRATION 8.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED WITHOUT SHOCK

MOUNTS TO CATEGORIES S, K & P
(INSTRUMENT PANEL/CONSOLE MOUNTING
DO-160B, TABLE 8-1)
EXPLOSION 9.0 EQUIP. IDENTIFIED AS "X" NO TEST REQ'D
WATERPROOFNESS 10.0 EQUIP. IDENTIFIED AS "X" NO TEST REQ'D
FLUIDS SUSCEPTIBILITY 11.0 EQUIP. IDENTIFIED AS "X" NO TEST REQ'D

* THE INFORMATION LISTED PROVIDES LEVELS TESTED. IT IS NOT INTENDED TO BE A
COMPREHENSIVE LISTING OF ALL TEST CONDITIONS.
EQF 1016-X-( )
Page 104
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
NOMENCLATURE: CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT (SUPER CDU)

PART NO. : 1016-X-( )
CONDITIONS DO-160B DESCRIPTION OF CONDUCTED TESTS*

SECTION #
PARAGRAPH #
SAND AND DUST 12.0 EQUIP. IDENTIFIED AS "X" NO TEST REQ'D
FUNGUS 13.0 EQUIP. IDENTIFIED AS "X" NO TEST REQ'D
SALT SPRAY 14.0 EQUIP. IDENTIFIED AS "X" NO TEST REQ'D
MAGNETIC EFFECT 15.0 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFIED AS CLASS "Z"
POWER INPUT 16.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY "A"
VOLTAGE SPIKE CONDUCTED 17.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY "A"
AUDIO FREQUENCY 18.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY "Z"

CONDUCTED SUSCEPTIBILITY
INDUCED SIGNAL 19.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY "Z"

SUSCEPTIBILITY
RADIO FREQUENCY 20.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY "Z"

SUSCEPTIBILITY
RADIO FREQUENCY EMISSION 21.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY "Z"
LIGHTNING INDUCED 22.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY "XXC3"

TRANSIENT SUSCEPTIBILITY TESTED PER DO-160C & AC 20-136
REMARKS:
1. ENVIRONMENTAL TESTS WERE CONDUCTED AT INDEPENDENT TESTING

LABORATORIES, INC., COSTA MESA, CA.
2. EMI/RFI TESTS WERE CONDUCTED AT MSCO LABORATORIES, BURBANK, CA
EQF 1016-X- ( )
Page 105
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION
NOMENCLATURE: FLAT PANEL CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT

PART NO.: 1018–X–( ) TSO NUMBER: C115b

Contained in the appropriate Technical Manual Report

Tucson, AZ. 85756-5097
CONDITIONS DO-160C Rev 3 DESCRIPTION OF CONDUCTED TESTS*

SECTION#
PARAGRAPH#
TEMPERATURE AND ALTITUDE 4.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY A1D1


50°C, 95%, 48 HOURS
SHOCK 7.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED PER DO-160C, PARA 7


MOUNTS TO CATEGORIES B, M & N
(EQUIPMENT RACK, NON-ISOLATED DO-160C,
TABLE 8-1)
EXPLOSION 9.0 EQUIP. IDENTIFIED AS X NOT TESTED
WATERPROOFNESS 10.0 EQUIP. IDENTIFIED AS X NOT TESTED
FLUIDS SUSCEPTIBILITY 11.0 EQUIP. IDENTIFIED AS X NOT TESTED

EQF 1018-XX
Page 106
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
NOMENCLATURE: FLAT PANEL CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT
PART NO. : 1018–X–( )
CONDITIONS DO-160C Rev 3 DESCRIPTION OF CONDUCTED TESTS*

SECTION#
PARAGRAPH#
SAND AND DUST 12.0 EQUIP. IDENTIFIED AS X NOT TESTED
FUNGUS 13.0 EQUIP. IDENTIFIED AS X NOT TESTED
SALT SPRAY 14.0 EQUIP. IDENTIFIED AS X NOT TESTED
MAGNETIC EFFECT 15.0 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFIED AS CLASS Z
POWER INPUT 16.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY Z
VOLTAGE SPIKE CONDUCTED 17.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY A
AUDIO FREQUENCY 18.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY Z

INDUCED SIGNAL 19.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY Z

SUSCEPTIBILITY
RADIO FREQUENCY 20.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY R

SUSCEPTIBILITY
RADIO FREQUENCY EMISSION 21.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY Z
LIGHTNING INDUCED TRANS 22.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY A3E3

SUSCEPTIBILITY
LIGHTNING DIRECT EFFECTS 23.0 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFIED AS X NOT TESTED
ICING 24.0 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFIED AS X NOT TESTED
Remarks: 1. EMI/RFI Tests were conducted at the following locations:

Section 20 - DNB Engineering, Fullerton, California.
Section 21 - Eldec Corp., Lynnwood, Washington.
2. All other tests conducted at UASC, Kirkland, Washington.

EQF 1018-XX
Page 107
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
NOMENCLATURE: NAVIGATION COMPUTER UNIT

PART NO.: 1190-OX-1XXX TSO NUMBER: C115a, C129
OR
PART NO.: 1190-OX-2XXX TSO NUMBER: C115b, C129a, B1/C1

Contained in the appropriate Technical Manual

Tucson, AZ. 85756-5097
CONDITIONS DO-160C DESCRIPTION OF CONDUCTED TESTS*

SECTION#
PARAGRAPH#
TEMPERATURE AND ALTITUDE 4.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY A2E1


50°C, 95%, 48 HOURS
SHOCK 7.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED PER DO-160C, PARA 7.2.1


TABLE 8-1)
EXPLOSION 9.0 EQUIP. IDENTIFIED AS E2 INTRINSICALLY SAFE

EQF 1190-XX-1XXX
Page 108
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
PART NO. : 1190-XX-1XXX

SECTION#
PARAGRAPH#
WATERPROOFNESS 10.0 EQUIP. IDENTIFIED AS W
FLUIDS SUSCEPTIBILITY 11.0 EQUIP. IDENTIFIED AS X NO TEST REQ'D
SAND AND DUST 12.0 EQUIP. IDENTIFIED AS X NO TEST REQ'D
FUNGUS 13.0 EQUIP. IDENTIFIED AS X NO TEST REQ'D
SALT SPRAY 14.0 EQUIP. IDENTIFIED AS X NO TEST REQ'D


SUSCEPTIBILITY
RADIO FREQUENCY 20.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY V

SUSCEPTIBILITY
LIGHTNING INDUCED TRANS 22.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY K

SUSCEPTIBILITY
LIGHTNING DIRECT EFFECTS 23.0 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFIED AS X NO TEST

REQUIRED
ICING 24.0 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFIED AS X NO TEST

REQUIRED
REMARKS: 1. EMI/RFI TESTS WERE CONDUCTED AT EMC SCIENCE CENTER, GLENDALE,

CALIFORNIA AND MICROCOMPUTER ELECTRONICS CORP., KIRKLAND,
WASHINGTION.
2. ENVIRONMENTAL TESTS WERE CONDUCTED AT PTL (PACIFIC TESTING

LABORATORIES), SEATTLE, WASHINGTON AND MICROCOMPUTER ELECTRONICS
CORP., KIRKLAND, WASHINGTION.
EQF 1190-XX-1XXX
Page 109
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
NOMENCLATURE: CONFIGURATION MODULE

PART NO.: 11901 TSO NUMBER: C115a, C129

Contained in the appropriate Technical Manual

Tucson, AZ. 85756-5097

SECTION#
PARAGRAPH#
TEMPERATURE AND ALTITUDE 4.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY A2E1


50°C, 95%, 48 HOURS


TABLE 8-1)

EQF 11901
Page 110
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
NOMENCLATURE: CONFIGURATION MODULE
PART NO. : 11901

SECTION#
PARAGRAPH#


SUSCEPTIBILITY

SUSCEPTIBILITY
LIGHTNING INDUCED TRANS 22.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY K

SUSCEPTIBILITY

REQUIRED

REQUIRED

WASHINGTION.

CORP., KIRKLAND, WASHINGTION.
EQF 11901
Page 111
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
NOMENCLATURE: DATA TRANSFER UNIT (DTU)

PART NO.: 1404-01-( ), 1405-01-( ) TSO NUMBER: C109

Contained in the Technical Manual

Tucson, AZ. 85756-5097

SECTION #
PARAGRAPH #
TEMPERATURE AND ALTITUDE 4.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY C4
LOW TEMPERATURE 4.5.1 0°C OPERATING, -55°C SURVIVAL


50°C, 95%, 48 HOURS


TABLE 8-1)

EQF 140X
Page 112
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
NOMENCLATURE: DATA TRANSFER UNIT (DTU)
PART NO. : 1404-01-( ), 1405-01-( )
SECTION #
PARAGRAPH #


SUSCEPTIBILITY

SUSCEPTIBILITY
LIGHTNING INDUCED 22.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY K

TRANSIENT SUSCEPTIBILITY

REQUIRED

REQUIRED

WASHINGTON.

CORP., KIRKLAND, WASHINGTON.
EQF 140X
Page 113
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
NOMENCLATURE: DATA TRANSFER UNIT (DTU-100)
PART NO.: 1406-( ) and 1407-( ) TSO NUMBER: C109
Tucson, AZ. 85756-5097
CONDITIONS DO-160D DESCRIPTION OF CONDUCTED TESTS

SECTION #
PARA #
TEMPERATURE AND ALTITUDE 4.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY C4
LOW TEMPERATURE 4.5 0ØC OPERATING
HIGH TEMPERATURE 4.5 +70ØC OPERATING
ALTITUDE 4.6 50,000 FT
DECOMPRESSION 4.6 50,000 FT
OVERPRESSURE 4.6 -15,00 FT
TEMPREATURE VARIATION 5.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY B
(NOTE 2)
(NOTE 2)
OPERATIONAL SHOCK & CRASH 7.2.2, 6.0g AND 15.0g RESPECTIVELY
SAFETY 7.3.1.1
VIBRATION 8.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORIES SM
AND SB (NOTE 2)
EXPLOSION 9.0 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFIED AS X (NOTE 3)
WATERPROOFNESS 10.0 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFIED AS X (NOTE 3)
FLUIDS SUSCEPTIBILITY 11.0 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFIED AS X (NOTE 3)
7SAND AND DUST 12.0 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFIED AS X (NOTE 3)
FUNGUS 13.0 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFIED AS X (NOTE 3)
SALT SPRAY 14.0 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFIED AS X (NOTE 3)
MAGNETIC EFFECT 15.0 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFIED AS X (NOTE 3)
(NOTE 2)
VOTAGE SPIKE CONDUCTED 17.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY A
(NOTE 1)
AUDIO FREQUENCY CONDUCTED 18.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY Z
SUSCEPTIBILITY (NOTE 1)
INDUCED SIGNAL SUSCEPTIBLITY 19.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY Z
(NOTE 1)
RADIO FREQUENCY EMISSION 21.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY M
(NOTE 1)
LIGHTENING INDUCED TRANS 22.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO C ATEGORY XXE3
LIGHTENING DIRECT EFFECTS 23.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY X
(NOTE 3)
ICING 24.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY X
(NOTE 3)
ESD 25.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY A
(NOTE 1)
NOTE: 1. These tests conducted at CKC laboratories in Redmond, WA.
2 These tests conducted at Universal Avionics Systems Corporation, Redmond, WA.
3. Unit to be mounted inside cabin/cockpit in controlled climate environment.
Page 114
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
NOMENCLATURE: SOLID STATE DATA TRANSFER UNIT (SSDTU)
PART NO.: 1408-( ) TSO NUMBER: C109 DO178B: Level D


Tucson, AZ. 85756-5097
CONDITIONS DO-160E CATEGORY DESCRIPTION OF CONDUCTED

SECTION # TESTS
GROUND SURVIVAL LOW 4.5.1 C4 -20øC
TEMPERATURE
OPERATING LOW TEMPERATURE
GROUND SURVIVAL HIGH 4.5.3 C4 +70øC
TEMPERATURE
SHORT TERM HIGH OPERATING
TEMPERATURE
IN-FLIGHT LOSS OF COOLING 4.5.4 X NOT REQUIRED
ALTITUDE 4.6.1 C4 +35,000 FT
DECOMPRESSION 4.6.2 C4 +35,000 FT
OVERPRESSURE 4.6.3 - -15,000 FT
TEMPREATURE VARIATION 5.0 B
HUMIDITY 6.0 A STANDARD HUMIDITY
ENVIRONMENT
OPERATIONAL SHOCKS AND 7.0 E
CRASH SAFETY
VIBRATION 8.0 SM
SB
EXPLOSION PROOFNESS 9.0 H
WATERPROOFNESS 10.0 X NOT REQUIRED
FLUID SUSCEPTIBILITY 11.0 X NOT REQUIRED
SAND AND DUST 12.0 X NOT REQUIRED
FUNGUS RESISTANCE 13.0 X NOT REQUIRED
SALT SPRAY 14.0 X NOT REQUIRED
MAGNETIC EFFECT 15.0 Z
POWER INPUIT 16.0 Z
VOTAGE SPIKE 17.0 A HIGH DEGREE OF PROTECTION
REQUIRED
AUDIO FREQUENCY CONDUCTED 18.0 Z
SUSCEPTIBILITY
INDUCED SIGNAL 19.0 ZC EQUIPMENT INTERFERENCE-
SUSCEPTIBILITY FREE OPERATION IS REQUIRED
AND WHOSE PRIMARY POWER
IS A CONSTANT FREQUENCY
OR DC.
RADIO FREQUENCY 20.0 R EQUIPMENT MAY BE INSTALLED
SUSCEPTIBILITY IN “ELECTROMAGNETICALLY
MODERATE” ENVIRONMENT.
EMISSION OF RADIO FREQUENCY 21.0 M
LIGHNING INDUCED TRNSIENT 22.0 E3 CABLE BUNDLE TEST SET:E
SUSCEPTIBILITY CABLE BUNDLE TEST LEVEL:3
LIGHNING DIRECT EFFECTS 23.0 X NOT REQUIRED
ICING 24.0 X NOT REQUIRED
ELECTRIC DISCHARGE 25.0 A
FIRE, FLAMMABILITY 26.0 X NOT REQURED
Page 115
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
NOMENCLATURE: EFIS RADAR PANEL (ERP)

PART NO.: 1015-1-( ) TSO NUMBER: C115a


Tucson, AZ. 85756-5097

SECTION #
PARAGRAPH #
TEMPERATURE AND ALTITUDE 4.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY A2

TEMPERATURE VARIATION 5.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY C

50°C, 95%, 48 HOURS


TABLE 8-1)
EXPLOSION 9.0 EQUIP. IDENTIFIED AS X NO TEST REQ’D
WATERPROOFNESS 10.0 EQUIP. IDENTIFIED AS X NO TEST REQ’D

EQF 1015-X-XX
Page 116
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALIFICATION FORM (cont.)
NOMENCLATURE: EFIS RADAR PANEL (ERP)
PART NO. : 1015-1-( )

SECTION #
PARAGRAPH #


SUSCEPTIBILITY

SUSCEPTIBILITY
LIGHTNING INDUCED 22.0 EQUIPMENT TESTED TO CATEGORY A3E3

TRANSIENT SUSCEPTIBILITY

REQUIRED

REQUIRED

WASHINGTON.

CORP., KIRKLAND, WASHINGTON.
EQF 1015-1-( )
Page 117
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
Equipment Specifications
1. Equipment Identification
A. UNS–1B FMS Equipment
UNS–1B FMS EQUIPMENT
EQUIPMENT NOMENCLATURE PART NUMBER
Super CDU – Control Display Unit 1016–X–11 (or 1016–X–110) (Gray 5 V lights)
X = 1 = Color 1016–X–12 (or 1016–X–120) (Gray 28 V lights)
X = 2 = Monochrome 1016–X–21 (or 1016–X–210) (Black 5 V lights)
1016–X–22 (or 1016–X–220) (Black 28 V lights)
Flat Panel CDU 1018–X–XXX
DTU – Data Transfer Unit 1403–01–1X

1404–01–1X (Portable unit)
1405–01–X
DTU-100 Data Transfer Unit (Iomega Zip Drive) 1406-01-1X Dzus Mount
(603/703 and later option) 1407-01-1 Portable Unit
SSDTU – Solid State Data Transfer Unit 1408-00-X

(SCN 60X/70X and Later) 1409-00-2 (Portable Unit)
NCU – Navigation Computer Unit 1190–XX–XXXX
Configuration Module 11901
ERP – EFIS Radar Panel 1015–1–11 (Gray 5 V lights)

1015–1–21 (Black 5 V lights)
Refer to later paragraphs for more information about UNS–1B FMS equipment.
Page 201
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
B. Compatible Peripheral Equipment
UASC COMPATIBLE PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
NAME PART NUMBER
LCS – Loran–C Sensor 1040
LCS–850–Loran–C Sensor 1045–01
RTU – Radio Tuning Unit

Collins CSDB 1055
ARINC RTU 1056–01–XX
RRS – Radio Reference Sensor 1058–01–1X
LCS – Loran–C Antenna 10401

10402 (LCS–850)
GPS Antenna (UASC) 100–602061–000 (764–1)

10702 (GPS–950, 764–2)
10703 (GPS–1000, GPS–1200)
10704 (GPS–1000, GPS–1200)
GPS–950 GPS Sensor 1070–0X
GPS–1000 GPS Sensor 1075–01
GPS–1200 GPS Sensor 1080–01
ADS–550 Air Data Sensor 1550–0X–XX
CD–2000 Cabin Display Computer 1700–0X–0X
Refer to Installation and Wiring section for other compatible equipment.
Page 202
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
C. Technical Manuals
EQUIPMENT MANUAL
LCS – Loran–C Sensor Report No. 2219
RTU – Radio Tuning Unit Report No. 2222

Collins CSDB
ARINC RTU
RRS – Radio Reference Sensor Pub No. 2221
LCS – Loran–C Antenna Report No. 2219
GPS Antenna (UASC) Report No. 2217, 2233, and 2234
GPS–950 GPS Sensor Report No. 2217
GPS–1000 GPS Sensor Report No. 2233
GPA–1200 GPS Sensor Report No. 2234
ADS–550 Air Data Sensor Report No. 2228
CD–2000 Cabin Display Computer Report No. 2231 or 23–30–02 (future)
NOTE: Refer to these manuals for more information about compatible peripheral equipment.
These manuals are available from Universal Avionics Systems Corporation.
Page 203
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
D. Super Control Display Unit (SCDU)
When the SCDU is used with NCU SCN 600.X, the Color SCDU must run SCN 5.0 or
greater and the monochrome SCDU must run SCN 6.0 or greater.
1016 – X – X X
1016 – X – X X X
Basic Part Number
1 = Color Super CDU

2 = Monochrome Super CDU
1 = Gray w/Logo
2 = Black w/Logo
3 = Gray No Logo
4 = Black No Logo
5 = Gray Night Vision
6 = Black Night Vision
1 = 5 volts
2 = 28 volts
0 = Front Panel is P/N 101677–XX

Blank = Front Panel is P/N 101670–XX or 101676–XX
Super CDU P/N Matrix

The following part numbers apply to the Super CDU used in the UNS–1B FMS.
The Super CDUs are assigned individual part numbers:
1016–1–11, 1016–1–110, 1016–1–12, 1016–1–120,
1016–1–21, 1016–1–210, 1016–1–22, 1016–1–220,
1016–1–31, 1016–1–32,
1016–1–41, 1016–1–42,
1016–1–51, 1016–1–510, 1016–1–52, 1016–1–520,
1016–1–61, 1016–1–610, 1016–1–62, 1016–1–620,
1016–2–11, 1016–2–110, 1016–2–12, 1016–2–120,
1016–2–21, 1016–2–210, 1016–2–22, 1016–2–220,
1016–2–51, 1016–2–510, 1016–2–52, 1016–2–520,
1016–2–61, 1016–2–610, 1016–2–62, 1016–2–620
NOTE: SCDU part numbers ending with a three–digit dash number have a newer
style faceplate without a Data Transfer Unit (DTU) Connector.
Page 204
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
E. Flat Panel Control Display Unit (FPCDU)

The FPCDU is copmpatible with NCU SCN 600.X or greater.
1018 – X – X X X
Basic Part Number
1 = No Video
2 = Video
1 = Gray
2 = Black
5 = Gray Night Vision
6 = Black Night Vision
Future use
Future use
FPCDU P/N Matrix

The following part numbers apply to the FPCDU used in the UNS–1B FMS.
The FPCDUs are assigned individual part numbers:
1018–1–1XX, 1018–1–2XX, 1018–1–3XX, 1018–1–4XX,
1018–2–1XX, 1018–2–2XX, 1018–2–3XX, 1018–2–4XX
Page 205
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
F. UNS–1B Navigation Computer Unit
1190 – XX – X X X X
Basic Part Number
Backplane Wiring Configuration

01 = FMS; All Digital Aircraft Interface
02 = FMS; Analog Air Data
03 = FMS; 2 DD ARINC Boards or
1 DD ARINC and 1 ACSB Board
CPU Memory Board

1 = SCN prior to 600.X / 700.X
2 = SCN 600.X / 700.X or later
Auxiliary Board
Double Density ARINC Board #1
0 = No Board installed
1 = Analog Board
2 = Double Density ARINC Board #2
3 = Analog Board w/ ac analog pitch steering
4 = ASCB Board
UNS–1B P/N Matrix
Page 206
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(1) The following part numbers apply to UNS–1B NCUs used in the Flight Management
System.
PART NUMBER TYPE
1190–01–1110 All digital, no analog in or out
1190–01–1111 Standard digital and analog interfaces
1190–01–1113 Standard digital and analog interfaces plus ac analog pitch

steering
1190–02–1111 565 analog airdata in plus standard digital and analog

interfaces
1190–02–1113 565 analog air data in, digital and analog interfaces plus ac
analog pitch steering
1190–03–1112 Second ARINC card for 16 inputs and eight outputs, no

analog in or out
1190–03–1114 Standard digital and ASCB interfaces, no analog in or out
1190–01–2110 All digital, no analog in or out
1190–01–2111 Standard digital and analog interfaces
1190–01–2113 Standard digital and analog interfaces plus ac analog pitch

steering
1190–02–2111 565 analog airdata in plus standard digital and analog

interfaces
1190–02–2113 565 analog air data in, digital and analog interfaces plus ac
analog pitch steering
1190–03–2112 Second ARINC card for 16 inputs and eight outputs, no

analog in or out
1190–03–2114 Standard digital and ASCB interfaces, no analog in or out
(2) The All Digital configuration (P/N 1190–01–X110) has a CPU board, Auxiliary
board, and an ARINC board. This option supports aircraft with no need for analog
interfaces other than annunciators and fuel flow inputs.
Page 207
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(3) The Standard configuration (P/N 1190–01–X111) has a CPU board, Auxiliary board,
ARINC board, and an Analog board. The Analog board supplies DC pitch steering
outputs. This option is wired for analog navigational signals and is a replacement for
the UNS–1A. Standard Digital Interface Capabilities with single Double Density
ARINC (DDA) Board:
¾ Short Range Nav Radios – DME, DME/P, VOR, TACAN, Doppler, or RRS and
MLS.
¾ Long Range Nav Sensors (ARINC) IRS, IRGPS, & LCS
¾ Radar Joystick Interfaces – ARINC 429, 571 or CSDB
¾ Air Data Computer Input – ARINC 429 or 575
¾ Sensor Inputs in Various Combinations of:
– Up to 3 IRS or IRGPS
–1 LCS–1 Radar Joystick– 1 DME
–2 GPS
¾ Airborne Flight Information System (AFIS)
¾ Crossfill from offside FMS
¾ ARINC Digital Data Output Buses
– 429 High–Speed (2 ea.)
– 561 (6 wire) (1 ea.)
– FMS Crossfill (1 ea.)
– 429 Low–Speed (2 ea.)
– 571 (1 ea.)
(4) The Standard AC Pitch configuration (P/N 1190–01–X113) has a CPU board,
Auxiliary board, ARINC board, and an Analog board. The Analog board supplies AC
pitch steering outputs. This option is wired for analog navigational signals and is a
replacement for the UNS–1A. Optional digital interface capabilities with second
DDA Board:
¾ Short Range Nav Radios – ARINC 429 VOR
¾ Crossfill from second offside FMS
¾ ARINC 429 DME Tune Output Buses (2 ea.)
Page 208
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(5) The Analog configuration (P/N 1190–02–X111) has a CPU board, Auxiliary board,
ARINC board, and an Analog board. This option is wired for analog air data inputs in
addition to the capabilities of the standard configuration. This configuration included
allows input of analog air data. Analog Interface Capabilities
¾ Synchro Heading Input
¾ Roll Command Steering Output
¾ Standard Analog Outputs Including:
¾ Desired Track – Synchro/Resolver
¾ Bearing To Waypoint – Synchro/Resolver
¾ Lateral and Vertical Deviation
¾ Flags and Valids
¾ TO/FROM
(6) The Analog AC Pitch configuration (P/N 1190–02–X113)has a CPU board, Auxiliary
board, ARINC board, and an Analog board. This option is wired for analog air data
inputs in addition to the capabilities of the standard configuration and the Analog
board supports AC pitch steering outputs. This configuration included allows input of
analog air data.
(7) The dual ARINC configuration (P/N 1190–33–X112) has a CPU board, Auxiliary
board, and two Double Density ARINC boards. This option supports aircraft with a
requirement for additional ARINC input/output capability and no need for analog
(8) The ASCB configuration (P/N 1190–33–X114) has a CPU board, Auxiliary board,
ARINC board, and an ASCB board. This option supports aircraft equipped with
ASCB and with no need for analog interfaces other than annunciators and fuel flow
inputs.
(9) Fuel Flow Interface Capabilities – Fuel Flow Processing Available.
¾ Interfaces with fuel flow systems outputting:
– DC Analog
– G.E. ac pickoff
– Pulse width and Frequency
– Intertechnique Pulse
– ARINC Digital
¾ Interfaces include some models of the following manufacturers: Ametek,
Canadian Marconi (CMA), Eldec, X & O Engineering, General Electric (G.E.),
Gull, Howell, Intertechnique, J.E.T., Ragen, and Simmons fuel flow systems.
¾ For fuel flow systems compatible with the NCU, refer to the Fuel Flow Inputs
section.
Page 209
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
G. Configuration Module
The part number of the Configuration Module is 11901.
H. Data Transfer Unit (DTU)
1403–01–11
Basic Part Number for DTU
1404–01 – 1X
Basic Part Number for Portable DTU
10 = SCN 1.0
11 = SCN 1.1 and subsequent
NOTE: SCN 1.2 and subsequent are
indicated on the DTU Nameplate.
1405–01 – X
Basic Part Number for Cockpit DTU
1 = Gray Faceplate
2 = Black Faceplate
3 = Brown Faceplate
DTU P/N Matrix

The following part numbers apply to the DTU used in the UNS–1B FMS.
1403–01–11 1404–01–10 1405–01–1
1404–01–11 1405–01–2
1405–01–3
NOTE: The Cockpit DTU (P/N 1405–01–X) has a dust cover; the DTU (P/N 1403–
01–11) does not. The Portable DTU (P/N 1404–01–1X) consists of a DTU
(P/N 1403–01–11) with an Interface Cable in a Carrying Case.
Page 210
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
I. DTU-100 (Iomega Zip Drive)
1406 - 01 - X
Base part number for cockpit DTU-100
Future use
1 - Gray Faceplate
2 - Black Faceplate
1407 - 01 - X
Base part number for portable DTU-100
Future use
NOTE: The DTU-100 is compatible with SCN 603/703 and subsequent.
J. Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU)

NOTE: For use with SCN 60X/70X and later.
1408 - 00 - X
Basic P/N
Future Use Variable
Gray = 1
Black = 2
Portable SSDTU
NOTE: For use with SCN 60X/70X and later.
1409 - 00 - 2
Basic P/N
Future Use Variable
Black = 2
Page 211
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
K. EFIS Radar Panel
1015 – 1 – X X
Basic Part Number for EFIS Radar Panel
First Configuration
1 = Gray
2 = Black
5 = Gray, Night Vision
6 = Black, Night Vision
1 = 5 volts
2 = 28 volts
EFIS Radar Panel P/N Matrix

The following part numbers apply to the EFIS Radar Panel used in some installations of the
UNS–1B FMS.
1015–1–11
1015–1–12
1015–1–21
1015–1–22
1015–1–51
1015–1–52
1015–1–61
1015–1–62
Page 212
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
2. Circuit Board Location And Functions

A. Super Control Display Unit (P/N 1016–X–( ))
LCD
POWER SUPPLY BOARD
DEFLECTION BOARD
VIDEO BOARD
GRAPHICS BOARD
CPU BOARD
Front View
(1) SCDU Board Part Numbers
CIRCUIT BOARD SCDU P/N 1016–1–( ) (COLOR) SCDU P/N 1016–2–( ) (MONO)
COMPONENT PART NUMBER COMPONENT PART NUMBER
Power Supply Board 01016050 01016050

Deflection Board 01016040 01016040
Video Board 01016030 01016030
Graphics Board 01016020 01016020

CPU Board 01016010 01016210
Liquid Crystal Shutter 80005100 None
(2) Power Supply Board

¾ Main Power Supply
¾ CRT High Voltage Power Supply
¾ Synchronization Logic
Page 213
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(3) Deflection Board
¾ Vertical Deflection Amplifier
¾ Horizontal Deflection Amplifier
¾ Scan Failure Detection Logic
(4) Video Board
¾ Video Amplifier
¾ Liquid Crystal Shutter Driver
(5) Graphics Board
¾ Graphics Processor
¾ Video Frame Buffer Memory
¾ System Clock Oscillator
(6) CPU Board
¾ Microprocessor
¾ Program Memory
¾ Keyboard Interface Logic
¾ NCU Serial Interface
(7) Liquid Crystal Shutter
¾ CRT Light Filter (1016–1–( ) only)
¾ Red To Green Color
Page 214
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
B. Flat Panel Control Display Unit (P/N 1018–X–( ))
FR ONT INTERFACE BO ARD DISPLAY POWER

PANEL (INCLUDES LCD) BO ARD SUPPLY
MOTHER BO ARD
FPCDU Top View
CIRCUIT BOARD FPCDU P/N 1018–1–( ) FPCDU P/N 1018–2–( )

NO VIDEO VIDEO
Interface Board / LCD 00101765 00101765
Display Board 01018060 01018060
Power Supply 01018080 01018080
Mother Board 01018090 01018090
Page 215
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
C. UNS–1B Navigation Computer Unit (P/N 1190–XX–XXXX)
B F
A J1 CPU BOARD R
P S
C C O U O
J2 AUXILIARY BOARD
K O W P N
J3 ARINC BOARD E P T
N R L
N J4 SEE TABLE OF NCU BOARD PART NUMBERS Y
Top View
(1) NCU Board Part Numbers 400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X
NCU COMPONENT NCU FINAL

ASSEMBLY P/N
1190-01-
1190-01-
1190-01-
1190-02-
1190-02-
1190-03-
1190-03-
Po PART
s. NUMBER CIRCUIT BOARD
J1 1190010 CPU D D D D D D D
J2 1190020 Auxiliary D D D D D D D
J3 1190030 Double Density D D D D D D D
ARINC
J4 1190030 Double Density D
ARINC
J4 1190040 Analog D D
J4 1190041 AC Pitch Steering D D
Analog
J4 1190110 ASCB Board D
(Version A)
(2) NCU Board Part Numbers 600.X

NCU COMPONENT NCU FINAL
ASSEMBLY P/N
1190-01-
1190-01-
1190-01-
1190-02-
1190-02-
1190-03-
1190-03-
Po PART
s. NUMBER CIRCUIT BOARD
J1 1190010 CPU D D D D D D D
J2 1190020 Auxiliary D D D D D D D
Page 216
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
J3 1190030 Double Density D D D D D D D
ARINC
J4 1190030 Double Density D
ARINC
J4 1190040 Analog D D
J4 1190041 AC Pitch Steering D D
Analog
J4 1190110 ASCB Board D
(Version A)
Page 217
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(3) CPU Board Functions
¾ Calendar Clock
¾ Watchdog Timer
¾ Power Fail Interrupt
¾ Program Memory
¾ Database Memory
(4) Auxiliary Board Functions
¾ Fuel Flow (up to 4 engines)
¾ Message Annunciator
¾ Waypoint Annunciator
¾ Selected Crosstrack Annunciator
¾ Approach Annunciator
¾ Heading Annunciator
¾ AC Roll Steering
¾ Steering Valid
¾ FMS Valid
¾ Tune transmit/receive
¾ VOR transmit/receive
¾ MFD/RTU receive
¾ DME transmit/receive
¾ CDU transmit/receive
¾ Sperry VNAV capture
¾ 561 resolver
¾ FGS receive
¾ Strut Switch input
¾ Test Switch input
¾ True/Magnetic switch input
¾ #2 FMS select
¾ #3 FMS select
¾ Frequency Management select
¾ On Battery Annunciator
¾ CSDB Transmitter/Receiver
Page 218
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(5) Double Density ARINC Board Functions

Acts as an interface between DTU and CPU. Contains six ARINC 429/571 transmit
ports and eight ARINC 429/571 receive ports. Also acts as an interface between the
DTU and CPU.
(6) Analog Board. Functions
The Analog board communicates with the CPU.
Outputs:
¾ Crosstrack
¾ Vertical Deviation
¾ Pitch Command
¾ FROM/TO Flag
¾ NAV Valid
¾ NAV Flag
¾ Digital Valid
¾ Pitch Valid
¾ Vertical Valid
¾ Vertical Flag
¾ ARINC 561
Synchro/Resolver outputs:
¾ X or SIN
¾ Bearing Y or COS
¾ Desired Track Y or COS
Inputs:
¾ Heading X, Y, Z
¾ ALT Coarse
¾ ALT Fine
¾ TAS DC
¾ SAT DC
¾ Heading reference
¾ ALT Reference
¾ TAS Reference
¾ SAT Reference
Page 219
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(7) ASCB Board
This board supports aircraft equipped with ASCB and with no need for analog
(8) Power Supply
The Power Supply converts 28 VDC aircraft power to +5 VDC, +15 VDC and –15
VDC for NCU circuitry and the Configuration Module. Provides output voltage
monitoring and current limiting. Switches to backup battery in the event of loss of
aircraft power. Power fail warning for orderly computer shut down.
D. Data Transfer Unit (P/N 1403–01–11 or 1405–01–X)
B M B F
A O O R
C DISK DRIVE ASSY O
T A
K H R N
E D T
R CONTROLLER BD ASSY
Side View
DTU COMPONENT PART NUMBERS

ASSEMBLY PART NUMBER
Controller Board Assy 01403010
Mother Board Assy 01403060
Disc Drive Assy 70036000
E. EFIS Radar Panel
Front View
The EFIS Radar Panel contains only one PC board, P/N 01015010
Page 220
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
3. Power Specifications
Power specifications for the components of the UNS–1B FMS and compatible peripherals
are as follows:
¾ The current and power values for the 1190-XX-1XXX NCU include powering one Super
CDU.
¾ The current and power values for the 1190-XX-2XXX NCU include powering one
FPCDU.
COMPONENT CURRENT (A @ V) POWER (W @ V)
TYPE PART 19.0 V 27.5 V 32.0 V 19.0 V 27.5 V 32.0 V
NCU 1190–01–1110 2.4 1.5 1.3 45.6 41.3 41.6
NCU 1190–01–1111 2.7 1.8 1.5 51.3 49.5 48.0
NCU 1190–01–1113 2.7 1.8 1.5 51.3 49.5 48.0
NCU 1190–02–1111 2.7 1.8 1.5 51.3 49.5 48.0
NCU 1190–02–1113 2.7 1.8 1.5 51.3 49.5 48.0
NCU 1190–03–1112 2.8 1.8 1.5 53.2 49.5 48.0
NCU 1190–03–1114 2.6 1.6 1.6 49.4 44.0 51.2
NCU 1190–01–2110 1.4 1.2 1.1 26.6 33.0 35.2
NCU 1190–01–2111 1.6 1.2 1.1 30.4 33.0 35.2
NCU 1190–01–2113 1.7 1.2 1.1 32.3 33.0 35.2
NCU 1190–02–2111 1.6 1.2 1.1 30.4 33.0 35.2
NCU 1190–02–2113 1.7 1.2 1.1 32.3 33.0 35.2
NCU 1190–03–2112 1.8 1.2 1.1 34.2 33.0 35.2
NCU 1190–03–2114 1.6 1.3 1.2 30.4 35.8 38.4
Super CDU 1016–X–XX 1.3 0.9 0.8 24.7 24.8 25.6
FPCDU 1018–X–XXX 0.8 0.6 0.6 15.2 16.5 19.2
NOTE: FPCDU startup current is slightly higher.
Page 221
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
COMPONENT CURRENT (A @ V) POWER (W @ V)
TYPE PART 19.0 V 27.5 V 32.0 V 19.0 V 27.5 V 32.0 V
RTU 1055 0.5 0.3 0.3 9.5 8.3 9.6
RTU(ARINC) 1056–01–XX 0.7 0.5 0.4 13.8 13.2 12.8
DTU 1403, 1404 0.3 0.3 0.2 5.7 8.3 6.4
DTU 1405 0.3 0.4 0.2 5.7 11.0 6.4
SSDTU 1408-00-X 0.41 0.3 0.28 7.79 8.4 8.96
Portable SSDTU 1409-00-2 0.41 0.3 0.28 7.79 8.4 8.96
RRS 1058 1.1 0.8 0.6 20.9 22.0 19.2
OSS 100–601200–003 1.2 0.8 0.7 22.8 22.0 22.4
OSS + LC–CDU 100–601200–003 27.5
+100–601037–00X 1.5 1.0 0.9 28.5 28.8
LCS 1040 1.1 0.7 0.6 20.9 19.3 19.2
GPS–950 1070–01 0.4 0.3 0.2 7.6 8.3 6.4
ERP 0.1 2.8
NOTE: 1. Nominal @ 27.5 VDC; Maximum @ 32.0 VDC
2. An X in the part number indicates variable that does not affect power consumption
3. Values are rounded to the nearest tenth..
Page 222
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
4. Equipment Specification Tables

The following tables list the physical, environmental and electrical parameters of the
UNS–1B System.
A. Control Display Unit
(1) Super CDU
CHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATION
Size 5.75” W x 6.375” H x 7.88” D

Component Weight 7.6 lb. (Monochrome)
7.8 lb. (Color)
Mounting Solid Mounting
Power Requirements Power input from NCU

(25 Watts maximum)
Panel Lighting 28 V @ 1/4 A maximum or
5 V @ 1/2 A maximum
Environmental Categories Refer to Environmental Qualification
form in Section II of this manual.
(2) 5-inch FPCDU

Size 5.75” W x 6.37” H x 4.177” D
Component Weight 3.8 lb.


(19.2 Watts maximum)
Panel Lighting 28 V @ .46Amaximum or
5 V @ 1.54A maximum
(3) 4-inch FPCDU (Optional on UNS-1B)

Size 5.75” W x 4.50” H x 3.25” D

Page 223
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(19.2 Watts maximum)
Panel Lighting 28 V @ .5A maximum or
5 V @ 1.6A maximum
form in this manual.
B. UNS–1B Navigation Computer Unit

Size 2 MCU – 2.24” W x 7.64” H x 15.26” D
Weight: NCU 1190–01–1110 = 6.75 lb.

1190–01–1111 = 7.6 lb.
1190–01–1113 = 7.6 lb.
1190–02–1111 = 7.6 lb.
1190–02–1113 = 7.6 lb.
1190–03–1112 = 7.6 lb.
1190–03–1114 =
1190–01–2110 =
1190–01–2111 = 7.35 lb.
1190–01–2113 =
1190–02–2111 = 7.35 lb.
1190–02–2113 =
1190–03–2112 =
1190–03–2114 =
Configuration Module 1.0 oz.
Rack 11.6 oz.
Connector 6.0 oz.
Power Requirements (includes CDU) 27.5 VDC Nominal

66 Watts Nominal
26 Vac 400 Hz, 1 VA
Electrical Specifications
Minimum Input Voltage 20.0 VDC
Maximum Input Voltage 32.0 VDC
Environmental Categories: Refer to Environmental Qualification
Page 224
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
C. Data Transfer Unit (DTU)
Size 5.750” W x 2.124” H x 8.182” D

(1403–01–1X)
5.750” W x 2.250” H x 8.182” D
(1405–01–X)
Component Weight 3.5 lb. (P/N 1403–01–1X)
3.25 lb. (P/N 1405–01–X)
5.8 lb. (P/N 1404–01–1X)
Mounting Dzus Mounting
(1403–01–X, 1405–01–X only)
Power Requirements 27.5 VDC @ .350 A Nominal
10 Watts Nominal
D. DTU-100 (SCN 603/703 and later option)

Size 5.750” W x 2.124” H x 8.14” D

(1406–01–X)
Component Weight 3.25 lb. (P/N 1406–01–X)
5.8 lb. (P/N 1407–01–1)
(1406–01–X only)
Power Requirements 18 VDC @ .22 A
27.5 VDC @ .350 A Nominal
32 VDC @ .14 A
Page 225
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
E. Solid State DTU (P/N 1408-00-X)

NOTE: For use with FMS SCN 60X/70X and later.
Size 5.75” W x 2.25” H x 7.764” D

Mounting ¼ Turn Dzus Fastener
Power Requirements (Nominal) 27.5 VDC, 0.3 A, 8.4 W
F. Portable Solid State DTU (P/N 1409-00-2)

Size 6” W x 12.5” H x 5.5” D
Component Weight N/A.

Mounting SSDTU mounted in portable carrying case.
Power Requirements (Nominal) 27.5 VDC, 0.3 A, 8.4 W

Cooling N/A
Interconnect Wiring Harness P/N 81304072 – PSSDTU J1 to aircraft

Part Numbers (see NOTE) bulkhead J1 (New installation and previous
Portable DTU connection)
Contact Universal Avionics for more
information P/N 81140811 – PSSDTU J2 to aircraft
bulkhead J2 (Previous Portable DTU
connection)
P/N 81140821 – PSSDTU J2 to aircraft
bulkhead J2 (New Installation)
NOTE: When using the Portable SSDTU in new installations or upgrading the Portable
DTU bulkhead connectors to the Portable SSDTU bulkhead connectors, up to 8
Ethernet ports may be wired and configured.
When bulkhead connectors from a prior Portable DTU installation are used for
the portable SSDTU, up to 4 Ethernet ports may be available for use and
configuration. Consult aircraft wiring diagrams to verify the number of Ethernet
ports that are wired.
Page 226
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
G. EFIS Radar Panel
Size 5.750” W X 1.125” H X 5.002” D
Component Weight .9 lb.

Power Requirements 27.5 VDC @ 22 mA Nominal
System Operating Power 304 mW Nominal
Panel Backlighting 5 V @ 228 mA, 1.14 W
Page 227
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
5. Installation Kits
A. Control Display Unit
(1) SCDU
See UNS–1B Installation Kit # 12000, below.
(2) FPCDU
FPCDU WITHOUT VIDEO INSTALLATION
KIT # K12026–1
FOR FPCDU P/N 1018–1–XXX
QUANTITY NAME
1 ea Connector, P/N 83001150
FPCDU WITH VIDEO INSTALLATION KIT

# K12026–2
FOR FPCDU P/N 1018–2–XXX
QUANTITY NAME
1 ea Connector, P/N 83001150

1 ea Video Connector,
MS27473T12F8S
1 ea. Video Connector Backshell,
P/N 620FS012M18
B. UNS–1B Navigation Computer Unit

UNS–1B INSTALLATION KIT # K12000
QUANTITY NAME
1 ea. 2 MCU RACK

1 ea. RACK CONNECTOR
1 ea. CDU CONNECTOR

1 ea. KIT, SCREWS, NUTS,
INSTRUCTIONS
NOTE: UNS–1B Configuration Module, P/N 11901, is not part of the UNS–1B NCU
installation kit.
Page 228
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
C. Data Transfer Unit

(1) Dzus mount DTU (P/N 1405-01-11) and DTU-100 (P/N 1406-01-X).
DTU CONNECTOR KIT # 1282
QUANTITY NAME
1 ea. DTU Connector
(2) Portable DTU (P/N 1404-01-1X) and Protable DTU-100 (P/N 1407-01-X).
PORTABLE DTU INSTALLATION KIT # 1324
QUANTITY NAME
1 ea. Bulkhead Connector
D. Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU)

(1) Dzus mount SSDTU Installtion Kit (P/N K1079-1).
QUANTITY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
1 83000255 Connector J2
1 83000257 Backshell J2
1 83001150 Connector J1
2 83001157-1 Bushing for J1 Strain Relief
(2) Portable SSDTU Installation Kit (P/N K12079-2).

QUANTITY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
1 83000550 Connector
2 83000550-1 Cover, Protective
Page 229
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
E. EFIS Radar Unit
DB–25S CONNECTOR FOR EFIS RADAR
PANEL, KIT # K12017
QUANTITY NAME
1 ea. Connector
(with sockets and tool)
Page 230
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
6. Wiring Specifications
A. CDU Input and Output Wiring Specifications
(1) SCDU
CAUTION: FOR 1016–X–X1( ) USE 5 V.
FOR 1016–X–X2( ) USE 28 V.
NAME PINS CHARACTERISTICS
SCDU PANEL LIGHTING E From 5 V or 28 V Aircraft Dim bus.

SCDU LAMP RETURN F Dim bus common
(2) FPCDU
CAUTION: USE 5 V OR 28 V, NOT BOTH.
THE FPCDU PANEL LAMPS MAY BE DAMAGED IF YOU CONNECT
THE AIRCRAFT DIM BUS TO THE WRONG PIN
FPCDU PANEL LIGHTING (28 V) E From 28 V Aircraft Dim bus.

FPCDU PANEL LIGHTING (5 V) G From 5 V Aircraft Dim bus.
FPCDU LAMP RETURN F Dim bus common
(3) 4” FPCDU
CAUTION: USE 5 V (P1G) OR 28 V (P1E), NOT BOTH. THE FPCDU
PANEL LAMPS MAY BE DAMAGED IF YOU CONNECT THE
AIRCRAFT DIM BUS TO THE WRONG PIN.
+RS-422 Display Data Rx P1A RS-422

-RS-422 Display Data Rx P1B RS-422
RS-422 Common Rx P1C RS-422

NC P1D NC
4” FPCDU Panel Lighting (28V) P1E From 28 V Aircraft Dim Bus

4: FPCDU Lamp return P1F Dim Bus Common
4: FPCDU Panel Lighting (5V) P1G From 5 V Aircraft Dim Bus

NC P1H NC
+RS-422 Display Data Tx P1J RS-422
-RS-422 Display Data Tx P1K RS-422
Page 231
34–60–04 12 August, 2009

RS-422 Common Tx P1L RS-422
FMSPWR P1M FMSPWR
Ground P1N Ground
[FMSPWRCOM] P1P [FMSPWRCOM]

[POWER CONTROL] P1R [POWER CONTROL]
Page 232
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
B. UNS–1B NCU Input and Output Wiring Specifications
(1) NCU Analog Inputs
NCU ANALOG INPUTS
A/P Reference MP11D 26 Vac, 400 Hz H

MP11E 26 Vac, 400 Hz C
Input Voltage: 26 Vac rms ± 10%,
400 Hz ± 20 Hz
Input Impedance: 80 kΩ (minimum)
Input Load: 2 mA (maximum)
Altitude Coarse Synchro TP1H X/DC ARINC 565 Coarse Synchro

(1190–02–X111, 1190–02–X113) TP1J Y/Ref or Coarse DC altitude
TP1K Z/Com
Altitude Fine Synchro TP1D X/Sin ARINC 565 Fine Synchro

(1190–02–X111, 1190–02–X113) TP1E Y/Cos or Fine Resolver
TP1F Z/Com Altitude
Altitude Synchro Reference TP1A 26 Vac, 400 Hz H

(1190–02–X111) TP1B 26 Vac, 400 Hz C
Input Voltage: 26 Vac rms ± 20 Hz
Input Impedance: 80 kΩ (minimum)
Altitude Valid Discrete TP3J 28 VDC = Valid

(1190–02–X111, 1190–02–X113)
Altitude Valid Discrete TP3K GND = Valid

(1190–02–X111, 1190–02–X113)
ARINC 561 DTG Resolution MP6H Open = 0–3999/Ground = 0–399.9

1190–XX–1XXX
Discrete Input 1 MP6G Configurable (Ground / Open)

(1190–XX–2XXX) See System Data Installation for list of
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 2 MP6H Configurable (Ground / Open)

1190–XX–2XXX See System Data Installation for list of
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 3 MP6J Configurable (Ground / Open)

discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 4 MP15J Configurable (Ground / Open)

discrete inputs.
Page 233
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
NCU ANALOG INPUTS
Discrete Input 5 MP11G Configurable (Ground / Open)

discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 5 MP11H Configurable (+28 VDC / Open)

discrete inputs.
NOTE: Discrete Input 5 may be configured as (Ground / Open) on MP11G or

as either +28 VDC / Open on MP11H but not both.
Discrete Input 6 MP15K Configurable (Ground / Open)

discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 7 MP6A Configurable (Ground / Open)

discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 8 MP6E Configurable (Ground / Open)

discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 9 MP6F Configurable (Ground / Open)

discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 10 MP6B Configurable (+28 VDC / Open)

discrete inputs.
Page 234
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
NCU ANALOG INPUTS
Expanded/Linear Display MP6J Enroute Mode:

(1190–XX–1XXX 400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X
(Not applicable to SCN 405.X, 600.X) Open = 7.5 NM full Scale Lat.
Gnd = 2.0 NM full Scale Lat.
Vertical Scaling Unchanged
Enroute Mode:
404.X
Open = 5.0 NM full Scale Lat.
Vertical Scaling Unchanged
Approach Mode:
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X
404.X
Open = Angular Deviation
Lateral and Vertical
200 ft. Full Scale Vert.
FMS #2 MP11J Ground selects as #2 Unit
FMS #3 MP11K Ground selects as #3 Unit
Fuel Flow #1 MP15A A Depends on Configuration

MP15B B
Fuel Flow #2 MP15C A Depends on Configuration

MP15D B
Fuel Flow #3 MP15E A Depends on Configuration

MP15F B
Fuel Flow #4 MP15G A Depends on Configuration

MP15H B
Fuel flow inputs will accept DC Analog

voltages n the range of 0-12 VDC, AC
Analog voltages in the range of 0 to 8
vrms, or DC pulse. Highside impedance is
470kohms. Lowside impedance is 470
kohms. 970 kohms differential. Each may
be configured to provide fuel flow
information to the FMS.
Page 235
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
NCU ANALOG INPUTS
Heading Input MAG/TRUE MP9G Open – MAG / +28 VDC = TRUE

(1190–01–X111, 1190–02–X111,
1190–01–X113, 1190–02–X113)
Heading Synchro MP9A X Impedance = 33 kΩ

(1190–01–X111, 1190–02–X111, MP9B Y Impedance = 33 kΩ
1190–01–X113, 1190–02–X113) MP9C Z Impedance = 24 kΩ
Standard ARINC 407 three–wire synchro
transmitter (or equivalent) with two–wire
reference signal from aircraft compass
system.
Heading Synchro Reference MP9D 26 Vac, 400 Hz H
(1190–01–X111, 1190–02–X111, MP9E 26 Vac, 400 Hz C
1190–01–X113, 1190–02–X113) Input Voltage: 26 Vac rms ± 10%,
400 Hz ± 20 Hz
Input Impedance: 80k Ω (minimum)
Heading Valid MP9F Heading input valid from compass,
(1190–01–X111, 1190–02–X111) Compass Valid: 18.5 to 30.0 VDC
Compass Invalid: 0.0 to 3.5 VDC
Instrument Synchro Reference MP1E 26 Vac, 400 Hz H
(1190–01–X111, 1190–02–X111, MP1F 26 Vac, 400 Hz C
1190–01–X113, 1190–02–X113) Input Voltage: 26 Vac rms ± 10%,
400 Hz ± 20 Hz
Input Impedance = 80k Ω (minimum)
Input Load: 2 ma (maximum)
MAG / TRUE Switch MP11H Open = Magnetic: >10 k Ω
(1190–XX–1XXX) Ground = True: <10 k Ω
MAG / TRUE Switch, alternate MP11G Open = Magnetic, +28 VDC = True
(1190–XX–1XXX)
RTU Present (1190–XX–1XXX) MP6A RTU Installed = GND
Spare Discrete Inputs MP6B 28 VDC/Ground
(1190–XX–1XXX) MP6E Ground/Open
400.X 401.X 402.X
Spare Discrete Inputs MP6F Ground/Open

(1190–XX–1XXX)
Static Air Temperature (SAT) TP3E Reference voltage ARINC 565
(1190–02–X111, 1190–02–X113) TP3F DC Return Reference and Signal
TP3G Voltage ARINC 565
Impedance = 66 kΩ
Page 236
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
NCU ANALOG INPUTS
SAT Valid Discrete TP5E 28 VDC = Valid

(1190–02–X111, 1190–02–X113)
Strut Switch MP15K Ground on the ground: <10 Ω

(1190-XX-1XXXX) Open in Air: >10 k Ω or 10.5
VDC
Test Switch MP15J Ground = Test

(1190-XX-1XXX) Open = Normal
True Airspeed (TAS) TP3A Reference voltage ARINC 565 TAS

(1190–02–X111, 1190–02–X113) (Type 4, DC)
TP3B dc Return Reference and

TP3C Signal Voltage ARINC 565
Impedance = 66 kΩ
NOTE: TAS may be configured for 565 DC, IAS input of 20 mV/knot, 11.11 mV/knot or digital.
TAS Valid Discrete TP5A 28 VDC = Valid

(1190–02–X111, 1190–02–X113)
VNAV Arm MP6B

(1190-XX-1XXX)
403.X
1. VNAV Arm or MP6B
2. MOT
(1190-XX-1XXX)
404.X 405.X
VNAV Coupled MP6E

(1190-XX-1XXX)
403.X
1. VNAV Coupled or MP6E
2. FPL Erase
(1190-XX-1XXX)
404.X 405.X
Page 237
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(2) NCU Digital Inputs: ARINC Data
SENSOR INPUT PORTS – ARINC ARINC 429/571/575 AND 429 DATA TYPE
All input (multiple and single) ports, Input Type: RZ
for all sensors with ARINC outputs Bit Rate: 9.6 to 14.5 kbps
and their connectors/pins, are Voltage Level: –10, 0, +10 VDC A to B +10%
listed below. Input Impedance: >12K Ω each leg to ground
12K Ω leg to leg
50 pF each leg to ground
100 pF leg to leg
Pulse Rise/FallTime:
Lo Speed 10 ± 5 micro sec (10% to 90% amplitude)
Hi Speed: 1.5 ± 0.5 micro sec (10% to 90% amplitude)
NCU DIGITAL INPUTS: ARINC DATA
ARINC Input Port #0 MP4C A ARINC 429 or 419 (LS)

MP4D B
ARINC Input Port #1 MP4G A ARINC 429 or 419 (LS)

MP4H B

MP12D B

MP12H B
ARINC Input Port #4 MP8A A ARINC 429 or 419 (LS or HS)

MP8B B
ARINC Input Port #5 MP8C A ARINC 429 or 419 (LS or HS)

MP8D B
ARINC Input Port #6 MP8E A ARINC 429 or 419 (LS or HS)

MP8F B
ARINC Input Port #7 MP8G A ARINC 429 or 419 (LS or HS)

MP8H B

(1190–03–X112) MP1D B

(1190–03–X112) MP1H B

(1190–03–X112) MP5D B

(1190–03–X112) MP5H B
Page 238
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
NCU DIGITAL INPUTS: ARINC DATA
ARINC Input Port #12 MP3A A ARINC 429 or 419 (LS or HS)
(1190–03–X112) MP3B B
ARINC Input Port #13 MP3C A ARINC 429 or 419 (LS or HS)
(1190–03–X112) MP3D B
ARINC Input Port #14 MP3E A ARINC 429 or 419 (LS or HS)
(1190–03–X112) MP3F B
ARINC Input Port #15 MP3G A ARINC 429 or 419 (LS or HS)
(1190–03–X112) MP3H B
Configuration Module MP14G Return

MP14H +5 VDC
MP14J Data Clock
MP14K Data I/O
(3) NCU Digital Inputs: Commercial Standard Digital Bus (CSDB)

Data packets and protocol are as RS–422 NRZ format:
described in Collins Document Input Device: Differential Receiver
Number 523–0772774–0000411R
Input Impedance: Greater than 4 kΩ
VOR Data has label 21
Bit Rate: Up to 100 kbps
DME Data has label 25
Reference: Opposite balanced line
NCU DIGITAL INPUTS: COMMERCIAL STANDARD DIGITAL BUS (CSDB)
CDU #1 In MP2A A RS–422 Private

MP2B
B
CDU #2 In MP2C A RS–422 Private

MP2D B
DME CSDB Input Port #3 MP14A A CSDB

MP14B B
DTU Input MP8J + RS–422 Transceiver

MP8K –
RTU/MFD CSDB Input Port #2 MP2G A CSDB

MP2H B
Page 239
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
NCU DIGITAL INPUTS: COMMERCIAL STANDARD DIGITAL BUS (CSDB)
FGS CSDB Input Port #4 MP14E A CSDB

(Provisions) MP14F B
VOR CSDB Input Port #1 MP14C A CSDB

MP14D B
(4) NCU Digital Inputs: ASCB Discrete Inputs

The ASCB board provides the FMS with an interface to the ASCB Version A data
bus developed by Honeywell and supplements the ARINC, CSDB, and analog
interfaces of the FMS. Ascb is a multi–user synchronous digital communications bus
running at .66 Mhz.
Reference documents from Honeywell:
¾ Design Specification for the Avionics Standard Communications Bus (ASCB)—
Version A, dated 28 November 1988 or later.
¾ ASCB Applications Specification—Version A (clocked) Bus Users, dated 19
June 1987 or later.
(a) NCU (FMS #1)
WIRING FOR NCU (FMS) #1 ASCB VERSION A DISCRETE INPUTS
DISCRETE OPEN / GROUND CONFIGURATION
Discrete #1, MP1D Open = 1
Discrete #2, MP1J Open = 1 Not Used
Discrete #3, MP5E Ground = 0
Discrete #4, MP5K Open = 1 Version A
Discrete #5, MP1C Open = 1
Discrete #6, MP1K Ground = 0 Listen Only False
Discrete #7, MP5F Open = 1
Discrete #8, MP5J Ground = 0 L ASCB Bus Selected
NOTE: Assuming NCU #1 is to be configured for TX / RX on Left ASCB bus,

ASCB A Port (On–Side) is connected to the Left ASCB Bus and ASCB B
Port (Off–Side) is connected to the Right ASCB Bus
Page 240
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(b) NCU (FMS #2)
WIRING FOR NCU (FMS) #2 ASCB VERSION A DISCRETE INPUTS
DISCRETE OPEN / GROUND CONFIGURATION
Discrete #1 Open = 1
Discrete #2 Open = 1 Not Used
Discrete #3, MP5E Ground = 0

Discrete #4, MP5K Open = 1 Version A
Discrete #5, MP1C Open = 1

Discrete #6, MP1K Ground = 0 Listen Only False
Discrete #7, MP5F Ground = 0

Discrete #8, MP5J Open = 1 R ASCB Bus Selected
NOTE: Assuming NCU #2 is to be configured for TX / RX on Right ASCB bus,

ASCB A Port (On–Side) is connected to the Right ASCB Bus and ASCB
B Port (Off–Side) is connected to the Left ASCB Bus
(c) ASCB Version

ASCB VERSION
DISCRETE INPUT #3 DISCRETE INPUT #4 FUNCTION

PIN MP5E PIN MP5K ASCB VERSION
0 = Ground 0 = Ground Invalid
1 = Open 0 = Ground Invalid
0 = Ground 1 = Open Version A

1 = Open 1 = Open Invalid
(d) Listen Only Truth Table

LISTEN ONLY

PIN MP1C PIN MP1K LISTEN ONLY

1 = Open 0 = Ground False
0 = Ground 1 = Open True

Page 241
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(e) Bus Selected Truth Table
BUS SELECTED
PIN MP5F PIN MP5J BUS SELECTED
1 = Open 0 = Ground L ASCB Bus Selected
0 = Ground 1 = Open R ASCB Bus Selected
(5) NCU Analog Outputs
NCU ANALOG OUTPUTS
Approach Annunciator MP13D Active when Approach Mode has been

(1190–XX–1XXX) selected on CDU.
Active Condition: 0 to +1.25 VDC
(< 5 Ω to ground)
Rated Load: 350 mA maximum
Inactive Condition: Open
Desired Track MP3A A (X or SIN)

(1190–01–X111, 1190–02–X111, MP3B B (Y or COS)
1190–01–X113, 1190–02–X113) MP3C C (Z)
MP3D D SIN–COS Return)
Source: Linear voltage gen Z or RTN output

may be grounded
Type: ARINC 407 Transmitter Synchro
Range: 0 to 360 degrees
Index Reference: 0 (North or Top of
instrument case)
Sense: + increasing angle
Scale factor: 1 degree/1 degree
Accuracy: +0.7 degree
Resolution: +0.3 degree
Rated Load: 3 parallel synchro Control
transformers (500 Ω each)
Phase Angle: 0 + 5 degrees relative to
instrument Reference
Digital Valid MP5G +28 VDC = Valid

(1190–01–X111, 1190–02–X111)
Discrete Output 1 BP1 Configurable (Ground / Open)

(1190–XX–2XXX) See System Data Installation for list of discrete
inputs.
Page 242
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
NCU ANALOG OUTPUTS
Discrete Output 2 MP13B Configurable (Ground / Open)

inputs.
Discrete Output 3 MP13C Configurable (Ground / Open)
inputs.
Discrete Output 4 MP13D Configurable (Ground / Open)
inputs.
Discrete Output 5 MP13E Configurable (Ground / Open)
inputs.
Discrete Output 6 MP7A Configurable (Ground / Open)
inputs.
Discrete Output 7 MP7B Configurable (Ground / Open)
inputs.
Discrete Output 8 MP6C Configurable (Ground / Open)
inputs.
Discrete Output 9 MP13F Configurable (+28 VDC / Open)
inputs.
FMS 1 NAV Source MP7A Ground = FMS 1 active NAV Source
PL4 Configured, 1190–01–1113,
1190–02–1113)
402.X
FMS 2 NAV Source MP7B Ground = FMS 2 is active NAV Source

PL4 Configured, 1190–01–1113,
1190–02–1113)
402.X 403.X
1. FMS 2 NAV Source MP7B 1. Ground = FMS 2 is active NAV Source

PL4 Configured,
2. Doppler Mode, or 2. Ground = Intermittent

Open = Continuous Wave
3. GPS Integrity Monitor 3. Ground = GPS Integrity Alarm or None
404.X 405.X
Page 243
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
NCU ANALOG OUTPUTS

FMS Heading Annunciator MP13E Active when heading has been commanded
(1190–XX–1XXX) on CDU.
Active Condition: 0 to +1.25 VDC (< 5 Ω
to ground)
Rated Load: 350 ma maximum
FMS Valid MP13F Active when FMS is turned on.
(1190–XX–1XXX) Active Condition: +18.5 to 30.0 VDC
Inactive Condition: 0 to 3.5 VDC (open)
Rated Loads: 350 ma maximum
Lateral Dev MP3F Source: Linear Voltage generator referenced
(1190–01–X111, 1190–02–X111, to ground return.
1190–01–X113, 1190–02–X113) Range: 0 to +250 mVDC
Accuracy: 10% to a max of 10 mV
Resolution: 0.5 mV
Index Reference: Desired leg or selected
crosstrack Fly right is indicated when +R
(MP3F) is more positive than +L
(MP3G).
Rated Load: Up to 4 parallel 1000 Ω loads.
Scale Factor:
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X
Enroute = 20 mV/NM
Enroute Expanded Scale = 75 mV/NM
Approach Mode – Angular 50 mV per
degree of error
Approach Mode – Linear = 120 mV/NM
404.X
Scale Factor:
Enroute = 30 mV/NM
Enroute Expanded Scale = 75 mV/NM
degree of error
Approach Mode – Linear = 120 mV/NM
405.X 600.X
Scale Factor:
degree of error to point where course
width is 0.3 NM, then linear deviation is
+ 0.3 NM.
Return
MP3G
Page 244
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
NCU ANALOG OUTPUTS
Message Annunciator MP13A Active when NCU has message for operator
(see Operator’s Manual)
(< 5 Ω to ground)
Nav Flag MP3J 180–250 mV = Valid

(1190–01–X111, 1190–02–X111,
1190–01–X113, 1190–02–X113)
Nav Valid MP3H Active Condition: 18.5 to 30.0 VDC (valid)

(1190–01–1111, 1190–02–1111) MP3K Inactive Condition: 0.0 to 3.5 VDC (open)
1190–01–1113, 1190–02–1113) Rated Loads: 350 mA maximum
400.X 401.X 402.X Active Condition:
Enroute: Current leg defined
403.X 404.X Approach: Current leg defined and Nav
Mode is radio–based
1. Reference Navaid is tuned to correct
freq. (and must be valid).
2. Valid ADC System.
3. System Q is less than required:
a. VFR approach – Q < 28
b. IFR Terminal – Q ≤ 10
(50 to 15 miles from end of
approach)
c. IFR Approach – Q ≤ 5
(< 15 miles from end of approach)
Page 245
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
NCU ANALOG OUTPUTS
NAV Valid MP3H Active Condition: 18.5 to 30.0 VDC (valid)

(1190–01–X111, 1190–02–X111) MP3K Inactive Condition: 0.0 to 3.5 VDC (open)
1190–01–X113, 1190–02–X113) Rated Loads: 350 mA maximum
405.X 600.X Active Condition:
Enroute: Current leg defined
Approach: Current leg defined and Nav
Mode is valid:
freq. (and must be valid) or GPS
with integrity.
2. Valid airspeed.
(30 to 15 miles from end of
approach)
c. IFR Approach – Q ≤ 5
(< 15 miles from end of approach)
On Battery Annunciator BP1 Active when primary power input is lost and
(1190–XX–1XXX) NCU is running on battery or auxiliary power.
(< 5 Ω to ground)
Use to wire to “FMS On Batt” relay, if installed.
Pitch Command MP1G DC ± 7500 mV

(1190–01–X111, 1190–02–X111) MP1H
Pitch Command MP1G AC ± 7500 mV

(1190–01–X113, 1190–02–X113) MP1H
1. Pitch CMD Valid #2 MP7A 1. Ground = VNAV engage request
2. FMS 1 NAV Source 2. Ground = FMS 1 active NAV Source

PL4 Configured,
(1190–01–1113,
1190–02–1113,
1190–XX–1XXX)
403.X
Page 246
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
NCU ANALOG OUTPUTS
1. Pitch CMD Valid #2; MP7A 1. Ground = VNAV engage request
2. FMS 1 NAV Source 2. Ground = FMS 1 active NAV Source

PL4 Configured,
3. Doppler Sea State 3. Ground = High Sea State

(1190–XX–1XXX) Open = Low Sea State
404.X 405.X
Pitch Command Valid MP1J +28 VDC = Valid

(1190–01–X111, 1190–02–X111, MP1K Return
1190–01–X113, 1190–02–X113)
Page 247
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
NCU ANALOG OUTPUTS
Roll Steering MP11A 393 mV/degree = Rt H = Lt

Source: Isolation Transformer
Range: 12 Vac rms maximum
Scale Factor: 0.393 Vac rms/degree at 400
Hz reference = 26 Vac
Sense: In phase with autopilot 400 Hz
reference for roll to right.
Accuracy: 0.3 degree roll command
(depending on 400 Hz ref accuracy)
Resolution: 0.03 degree roll command
Phase Angle: 0 + 5 degrees, relative to
autopilot reference
Flight Control
Equation: 0.00281 XTK (ft) +
0.002 GS (ft/sec) x TKE x (deg)
405.X
Approach mode roll steering
gains are defined in configuration
module options (1x, 2x, … 7x).
Limits: 3 degrees roll/second

maximum change 0 to 30 degrees.
Rollmax and altitude limits are
configurable.
Rated Load: 5000 Ω minimum.
Return
MP11B
Page 248
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
NCU ANALOG OUTPUTS
Roll Steering Valid MP11C Active Condition: +18.5 to 30.0 VDC

Inactive Condition: 0.0 to 3.5 VDC (open)
Active Condition Enroute:
1. Valid FR–TO leg selected.
2. Passing dynamic self test.
3. IRS or HDG/TAS input or Doppler.
Active Condition Approach is same as Enroute
plus:
frequency (and must be valid) or
GPS with integrity
2. Valid TAS.
( 400.X 401.X 402.X
403.X 50 to 15 miles
from end of Approach)
( 404.X 405.X 30 to 15 miles
c. IFR Approach – Q ≤ 5 (< 15
miles from end of Approach)
Sel Crosstrack Annunciator MP13C Active when parallel offset has been selected.
(1190–XX–1XXX) Active Condition: 0 to 1.25 VDC (< 5 Ω to
ground)
Spare MP6C
(1190–XX–1XXX)
400.X 401.X 402.X
Spare Discrete Output MP7B Ground/Open

(1190–XX–1XXX)
400.X 401.X
Page 249
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
NCU ANALOG OUTPUTS
TO/FROM MP5J Source: Linear Voltage generator

(1190–01–X111, 1190–02–X111, MP5K referenced to ground return
1190–01–X113, 1190–02–X113) Index Reference: “TO” waypoint
Sense: MP3J more positive than MP3K
when the aircraft position and the
“FROM” waypoint are on the same
side of the “TO” waypoint.
Voltage: 180 to 250 mV
Off Voltage: 0 + 10 mV in OFF condition
(no leg)
Rated Load: Two parallel 200 Ω loads
Page 250
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
NCU ANALOG OUTPUTS
Vertical Deviation MP7F Source: Linear Voltage generator referenced

(1190–01–X111, 1190–02–X111, to (gnd) return
1190–01–X113, 1190–02–X113) Range: 0 to 1 VDC
Accuracy: 10 mV or 10%
Resolution: 0.5 mV
Index Reference: Desired vertical leg
Sense: Fly up when MP7F more positive than
MP7G.
Rated Load: Up to 4 parallel 1000 Ω loads.
Output Characteristics
(normal VNAV – MP10A open)
Enroute: 0.1 mV/ft (150mV = 1500 ft. =
full scale).
(75 mV = 750 ft = 1 dot)
[SCN 404 and later 40X]
Terminal 0.3 mV/ft (150mV = 500 ft. = full

scale.
(75 mV = 250 ft = 1 dot)
Approach: Angular 0.7 degrees full scale

0.35 degrees per dot.
Approach Mode – Angular = MP6J open
Output Characteristics (Sperry type VNAV –
VN–212): (Set in Config Module)
1. Vertical angle – (MP6G open)
Sense: Negative flight path
produces positive voltage on
MP7E with respect
to MP7G
Scale Factor: 70 mV/degree
Range: ±9° Flight Path Angle
2. Vertical Error – (MP6G gnd)
Sense: Aircraft above Flight Path
produces positive voltage on
MP7E with respect to MP7G.
Scale Factor: .5 mV/foot of error
Range: ±1500 feet from Flight Path
Return
MP7G
Vertical Flag MP7J 180–250 mV = Valid
MP7K Return
Page 251
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
NCU ANALOG OUTPUTS
Vertical Valid MP7H Active Condition: 18.5 to 30.0 VDC

(1190–01–X111, 1190–02–X111, Inactive Condition: 0.0 to 3.5 VDC (open)
1190–01–X113, 1190–02–X113) Rated Load: 350 mA maximum
Active Condition Enroute:
1. Valid FROM–To Leg
2. Vertical flight path defined on active
FROM–TO Leg
3. Position not “uncertain” (Q < 28)
4. Crosstrack < 12 NM
5. Altitude valid for VNAV
Active Condition Approach:
frequency (and must be valid)
2. Valid ADC System
( 400.X 401.X
402.X 403.X 50 to 15 miles
( 404.X 405.X 600.X
30 to 15 miles from end of
Approach)
c. IRF Approach – Q < 5 (< 15
miles from end of approach)
5. The following geometry constraints
are met:
a. Within 20.0 degree wedge on
either side of inbound course.
b. Within altitude region plus 1.75
times the difference between
reference path altitude and end
of approach altitude.
c. Aircraft is on “TO” side of the
approach.
MP7K Return
VNAV Arm Annunciator MP6C Ground = VNAV Arm

DHC Configured,
1190–01–1113, 1190–02–1113)
403.X
Page 252
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
NCU ANALOG OUTPUTS
1. VNAV Arm Annunciator MP6C 1. Ground = VNAV Arm

DHC Configured,
1190–01–1113,
1190–02–1113), or
2. Doppler Self Test 2. Ground = Self Test Start
404.X 405.X
Waypoint Alert Annunciator MP13B 400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X

(1190-XX-1XXX) lluminates two minutes (15 seconds in
Approach.) prior to automatic leg change,
flashes for flight path angle change
405.X Illuminates two minutes (5 seconds in
Approach.) prior to automatic leg change,
flashes for flight path angle change
(see Operator’s Manual)
Active Condition: 0 to +1.25 VDC (< 5 Ω
to ground)
Waypoint Bearing/Drift Angle MP1A A (X or SIN)

(1190–01–X111, 1190–02–X111, MP1B B (Y or COS)
1190–01–X113, 1190–02–X113) MP1C C (Z)
MP1D D (SIN–COS Return)
Page 253
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(6) NCU Digital Outputs: ARINC Data
OUTPUT PORTS – ARINC All ARINC output ports and their connectors/pins, for the
following ARINC number types, are listed after the number
type data.
NCU DIGITAL OUTPUTS: ARINC DATA

DATA PARAMETER CHARACTERISTICS
429 LO–SPEED DATA Output Type: RZ
Bit Rate: 12.5 kbps +0.1%
Voltage Level: –10, 0 +10 VDC, A to B +10%
Output
Impedance: 78 +2 Ω
Pulse
Rise/Fall
Time: 10 + 5 microseconds
429 HI–SPEED DATA Output Type: RZ
Bit Rate: 100 kbps +0.1%
Voltage Level: –10, 0, +10 VDC, A to B +10%
Output
Impedance: 78 + 2 Ω
Pulse
Rise/Fall
Time: 1.5 ± 0.5 microsecond
571 (419) DATA Output Type: RZ
Voltage Level: –10, 0, +10 VDC, A to B +10%
Output
Impedance: 78 +2 Ω
Pulse
Rise/Fall
Time: 10 = 5 microsecond
Page 254
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(7) NCU Digital Outputs: ARINC 2 Wire
ARINC 2 Wire – General Word Format: 32 Bits, first 8 Bits for label
Characteristics Maximum number of receivers on one transmitter: = 20
Receiver Differential Input
Characteristics: R = 6000 Ω, minimum
Differential Input C = 50 pF
maximum Resistance to Ground ≥ 12,000 Ω (each line)
Capacitance to Ground ≤ 50 pF
Reference: Opposite Balanced Line.
NCU DIGITAL OUTPUTS: ARINC 2 WIRE
ARINC Transmitter #0 (0A) MP4A A ARINC 429 Hi Speed

MP4B B
(0B) MP12A A
MP12B B
ARINC Transmitter #1 MP4E A ARINC 571
MP4F B
ARINC Transmitter #2 (2A) MP4J A ARINC 429 Lo Speed
MP4K B
(2B) MP12J A
MP12K B
ARINC Transmitter #3 MP12E A ARINC 429 Crossfill (Hi)
MP12F B
ARINC Transmitter #4 (4A) MP1A A ARINC 429 Lo Speed (Tune)
(1190–03–X112) MP1B B
(4B) MP5A A
MP5B B
ARINC Transmitter #5 MP1E A Spare
(1190–03–X112) MP1F B
ARINC Transmitter #6 (6A) MP1J A Spare
(1190–03–X112) MP1K B
(6B) MP5J A
MP5K B
ARINC Transmitter #7 MP5E A Spare
(1190–03–X112) MP5F B
Page 255
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(8) NCU Digital Outputs: ARINC 561
ARINC 561 – General ARINC 561 to HSI or EFIS for display of Dis ETE, GS, XTK, T
Characteristics SIX WIRE DIGITAL HDG, VAR, WIND DIR/SPD, Status, T BRG, Display Dev, TO–
DATA OUT FR WPT Dis, T DSR CRS to TO WPT.
Output Type: ARINC 561
Voltage Level, Active: +11 to 14 VDC
Voltage Level, Inactive: –0.5 to –0.5 VDC
Rated Load: 4 parallel 12 k Ω Loads
NCU DIGITAL OUTPUTS: ARINC 561
ARINC 561 MP5A Sync H

(1190–01–X111, 1190–02–X111, MP5B Sync L
1190–01–X113, 1190–02–X113) MP5C Data H
MP5D Data L
MP5E Clock H
MP5F Clock L
MP5G Valid
Page 256
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(9) NCU Digital Outputs: Commercial Standard Digital Bus (CSDB)
Collins CSDB All frequency management functions with or without RTU.
Output Type: RS–422 NRZ
Start Bits: 1
Data Bits: 8
Parity: Odd
Stop Bits: 1
NCU DIGITAL OUTPUTS: COMMERCIAL STANDARD DIGITAL BUS (CSDB)
CDU Out MP2E A RS–422 Private

MP2F B
Tune CSDB Output Port #2 MP2J A CSDB
MP2K B
RTU Tune CSDB Output Port #1 MP10A A CSDB
MP10B B
Data packets and protocol are as described in Collins Document Number 523–
0772774–0411R
DME Tuning Labels used are as follows:
¾ Single DME/Single Control Head #1: Label 34, Channel 1 (#1 Remote)
¾ Single DME/Single Control Head #2: Label 34, Channel 2 (#2 Remote)
¾ Single DME/Dual Control Heads: Label 34, Channel 0 (#1 Preset)
¾ Direct to DME: Label 24, Channel 0 (#1 Preset or Remote)
(10) NCU Digital Outputs: RS–232

NCU DIGITAL OUTPUTS – RS–232
Monitor MP13G RS–232 TxD

MP13H RS–232 RxD
Download MP13J RS–232 RxD
MP13K RS–232 TxD
Page 257
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(11) NCU Digital Outputs: ASCB Version A
The ASCB board provides the FMS with an interface to the ASCB Version A data
bus developed by Honeywell and supplements the ARINC, CSDB, and analog
interfaces of the FMS. Ascb is a multi–user synchronous digital communications bus
running at .66 Mhz.
Reference documents from Honeywell:
¾ Design Specification for the Avionics Standard Communications Bus (ASCB)—
Version A, dated 28 November 1988 or later.
¾ ASCB Applications Specification—Version A (clocked) Bus Users, dated 19
June 1987 or later.
NCU DIGITAL OUTPUTS – AVIONICS STANDARD COMMUNICATION BUS (ASCB) VERSION A
Discrete Output 1 MP3H Configurable (Ground / Open) (Provisional)
Discrete Output 2 MP3F Configurable (Ground / Open) (Provisional)
Discrete Output 3 MP3D Configurable (Ground / Open) (Provisional)
Discrete Output 4 MP3B Configurable (Ground / Open) (Provisional)

Discrete Output 5 MP3G Configurable (Ground / Open) (Provisional)
Discrete Output 6 MP3E Configurable (Ground / Open) (Provisional)
Discrete Output 7 MP3C Configurable (+28 VDC / Open)

outputs.
Discrete Output 8 MP3A Configurable (+28 VDC / Open)
(1190–XX–2XXX) This discrete is set when the FMS computed
gross weight exceeds a configured weight.
See System Data Installation for list of discrete
outputs.
Page 258
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
7. ARINC Data Bus Inputs
A. ARINC 429 AHRS Input (Lo–Speed)
ARINC 429 AHRS INPUT (LO–SPEED)
DEFINITION LABEL FORMAT MIN. XMSN UPDATE NOTES
RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
AHRS Status 270 2 –
Magnetic Heading 320 10 –
Pitch Angle 324 5 10
Roll Angle 325 5 10
B. ARINC 429 DADC Input (Lo–Speed)

ARINC 429 DADC INPUT (LO–SPEED)
RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
Selected Altitude 102 BNR – –
Pressure Altitude (29.92) 203 BNR 2 2
Baro Corrected Altitude 204 BNR 2 2
Mach Number 205 BNR 2 2
Indicated Airspeed 206 BNR 2 2
True Airspeed 210 BNR 2 2
Static Air Temperature 213 BNR 2 2
C. ARINC 575 DADC Input

ARINC 575 DADC INPUT
RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
Pressure Altitude (29.92) 203 BNR 2 2
Baro Corrected Altitude 204 BNR 2 2
Mach 205 BNR 2 2
Indicated Airspeed 206 BNR 2 2
Page 259
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
D. ARINC 429 / 582 Doppler Input (Lo–Speed)
ARINC 429 / 582 DOPPLER INPUT (LO–SPEED)ARINC 575 DADC INPUT

RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
ANS–137 Velocity X Direction 362 BNR .73 .73

ANS–137 Velocity Y Direction 363 BNR .73 .73
ANS–137 Velocity Z Direction 364 BNR .73 .73
E. ARINC 429 Doppler Input (Lo–Speed)

ARINC 429 DOPPLER INPUT (LO–SPEED)

RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
CMC 2012 Elapsed Time Data 006 Request Requuest

CMC 2012 007 Power Up
Software Version No.
CMC 2012 Velocity X Direction 050 25 25
CMC 2012 Velocity Y Direction 051 25 25
CMC 2012 Velocity Z Direction 052 25 25
RACAL X Axis Velocity Data 260 .98 .98
RACAL Y Axis Velocity Data 261 .98 .98
RACAL Z Axis Velocity Data 262 .98 .98

Doppler 91 Mode and Bit Data 263 .98 .98
CMC 2012 DVS Status 272 25 25
RACAL Monitored Word 1 350 .98 .98


CMC 2012 Bit Status 356 .62 .62
Page 260
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
F. ARINC 429 LCS Input (Lo–Speed)
ARINC 429 LCS INPUT (LO–SPEED)
RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
Status / Error 270 DIS 2 –
Chain Station Used 271 DIS 25 4
Sel Mem Addrs Cnts 273 DIS 2 –
Sta Desel/Select 274 DIS 25 4
Lat Covariance 300 BNR 2 –
Lat/Long Covariance 301 BNR 2 –
Long Covariance 302 BNR 2 –
Latitude 310 BNR 2 –
Longitude 311 BNR 2 –
LORAN Snr 350 BNR/ DIS 2 –
LORAN Intrf Freq 351 BNR/ DIS 2 –
G. ARINC 429 IRS Input (Hi and Lo–Speed)

ARINC 429 IRS INPUT (HI AND LO–SPEED)
RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
Status / Error 270 DIS 2 –
Latitude 310 BNR 2 –
Longitude 311 BNR 2 –
True Heading 314 BNR 10 –
Magnetic Heading 320 BNR 2 Note
Pitch Angle 324 BNR 5 10 Note
Roll Angle 325 BNR 5 10 Note
N–S Velocity 366 BNR 2 –
E–W Velocity 367 BNR 2 –
NOTE: Magnetic Heading, Pitch Angle, and Roll Angle became effective with SCN 600.X
Page 261
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
H. ARINC 571 IRS Input
ARINC 571 IRS INPUT

RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
Latitude 210 BNR 2 1

Longitude 211 BNR 2 1
True Heading 214 BNR 2 1
N–S Velocity 266 BNR 2 1

E–W Velocity 267 BNR 2 1
I. ARINC 571 KFC FGS Input (Lo–Speed)

ARINC 571 KFC FGS INPUT (LO–SPEED)

RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
Selected Course 100 5 –

Pitch Discrete Data 271 10 –
Roll Discrete Data 214 10 –
Equipment Hex ID Code 377 10 / 5 –
Page 262
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
J. ARINC 429 Primus IC600 Input (Lo–Speed)

ARINC 429 PRIMUS IC600 INPUT (LO–SPEED)

RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
VHF COM Frequency 030 BCD 2 –

Beacon Transponder Code 031 BCD 2 –
ADF Freequency 032 BCD 2 –

VOR Frequency 034 BCD 2 –
Selected Course 100 BNR 2 –
Selected Heading 101 BNR 10 –

Selected Altitude 102 BNR 2 –
Flap Position (measured) 107 BNR 2 –
Altitude (29.92) 203 BNR 10 –
Baro–Corrected Altitude 204 BNR 10 –
Mach 205 BNR 2 –

Indicated Airspeed 206 BNR 2 –
Max Allowable Airspeed 207 BNR 2 –
True Airspeed 210 BNR 10 –
Total Air Temperature 211 BNR 2 –

Altitude Rate 212 BNR 10 –
Static Air Temperature 213 BNR 10 –

Total Fuel 247 BNR 2 –
DGC Status 270 DIS 10 –
Designator (Radar Wpt) Lat. 306 BNR 5 –

Designator (Radar Wpt) Long. 307 BNR 5 –

Magnetic Heading 320 BNR 10 –
Pitch Angle 324 BNR 10 –
Roll Angle 325 BNR 10 –

Body Normal Acceleration 333 BNR 10 –
Page 263
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
ARINC 429 PRIMUS IC600 INPUT (LO–SPEED)

RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
Fuel Flow Per Engine 347 BNR 2 –
Equipment ID Code 371 DIS 1 –
K. ARINC 429 Radar Input (Lo–Speed)

ARINC 429 RADAR INPUT (LO–SPEED)
RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
EFIS Selected 300 – –
WPT Latitude 306 BNR – – Note
WPT Longitude 307 BNR – – Note
Equip Hex ID 377 BNR – –
NOTE: Update rate is 5 times per second for only one second.
NOTE: When the label 306/307 pair is missing from the bus for 3 seconds or more, the FMS arms to
capture a new Radar waypoint. When the FMS sees both labels of the 306/307 pair
simultaneously valid, it will store a Radar waypoint. Thus the EFIS should burst the 306/307
pair for at least 3 seconds, and have at least 3 seconds of no transmission (or SSM=NCD,
but no data is preferred) between differenrt Radar waypoints. The update rate should be 1
Hz or faster.
Page 264
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
L. ARINC 429 Radar Type 1500 (RDR 1500) Input (Lo–Speed)
ARINC 429 RADAR TYPE 1500 (RDR 1500) INPUT (LO–SPEED)
RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
Currrent Target Marker 100 BNR 1 1 Note
Position (waypopint) Latitude
Currrent Target Marker 101 BNR 1 1 Note
Position (waypopint) Longitude
NOTE: These inputs apply to NCU P/N 1190–XX–2XXX.
M. ARINC 571 Radar Input

ARINC 571 RADAR INPUT
RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
WPT 1 Latitude 040 BCD 2 – Note
WPT 1 Longitude 041 BCD 2 – Note
NOTE: Output as waypoint is modified.
Page 265
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
N. ARINC 429 TACAN Input (Lo–Speed)

ARINC 429 TACAN INPUT (LO–SPEED)
RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
TACAN Channel 141 2 –
TACAN Distance 201 2 –
TACAN Bearing 222 2 –
O. ARINC 429 DME Input (Lo–Speed)

ARINC 429 DME INPUT (LO–SPEED)
RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
DME Frequency 035 BCD 2 – 1
DME Distance 202 BNR 2 – 1
NOTE: 1. Function of DME Receiver.
P. ARINC 429 VOR Input (Lo–Speed)

ARINC 429 VOR INPUT (LO–SPEED)
RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
VOR Frequency 034 BCD 2 – 1
VOR Frequency 034 BCD 4 – 1, 2, 3
Localizer Deviation 173 30 – 1, 3
Glideslope Deviation 174 30 – 1, 3
VOR Omnibearing 222 2 – 1, 2, 4
NOTES: 1. Function of VOR Receiver.
2. 711 VOR only
3. Effective with 1190–XX–2XXX
4. Bendix Format VN–411
Q. Commercial Standard Data Bus (CSDB)

COMMERCIAL STANDARD DATA BUS (CSDB)
The data packets and protocol are as described in the Collins document titled, Commercial Standard
Data Bus (CSDB). It is Collins document number 523–0772774–00411R.
The VOR data has Label 21.
Page 266
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
R. ARINC 429 RRS Input (Lo–Speed)
ARINC 429 RRS INPUT (LO–SPEED)
RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
TACAN #1 Freq. 032 BCD 4 –
TACAN #2 Freq. 033 BCD 4 –
VOR Frequency 034 BCD 1 –
DME #1 Freq. 035 BCD 4 –
DME #2 Freq. 036 BCD 4 –
TACAN #1 Dist 201 BNR 4 –
TACAN #2 Dist 202 BNR 4 4
DME #1 Dist 203 BNR 4 4
DME #2 Dist 204 BNR 4 4
TACAN #1 BRG 221 BNR 4 4
VOR Bearing 222 BNR 4 4
TACAN #2 BRG 223 BNR 4 4
RRS Status 275 DIS 4 4
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X

S. ARINC 429 GPS Input (Lo–Speed)
ARINC 429 GPS INPUT (LO–SPEED)
RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
GPS Latitude 110 BNR 1.1 –
GPS Longitude 111 BNR 1.1 –
GPS Fine Latitude 120 BNR 1.1 –
GPS Fine Longitude 121 BNR 1.1 –
GPS Latitude Figure of Merit 226 BNR 1.1 –
GPS Longitude Figure of Merit 227 BNR 1.1 –
GPS Horizontal Integrity Limit 130 BNR 1.1 –
GPS Constellation Data #1 240 DIS 1 –
GPS Horizontal Figure of Merit 247 BNR 1.1 –
GPS Status 273 DIS 2 –
Contents of Selected Memory 276 DIS 2 –
Data
GPS Diagnostic 277 DIS 2 –
Equipment Identifier 371 DIS 2 –
Page 267
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
404.X 405.X 600.X
T. ARINC 429 GPS Input (Hi– and Lo–Speed)
ARINC 429 GPS INPUT (HI– AND LO–SPEED)
RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
GPS HDOP 101 BNR 1 1
GPS VDOP 102 BNR 1 1
GPS Latitude 110 BNR 1.1 –
GPS Longitude 111 BNR 1.1 –
GPS Fine Latitude 120 BNR 1.1 –
GPS Fine Longitude 121 BNR 1.1 –
Satellite Deselection 126 1 –
Satellite Deselection 127 1 –
GPS Horizontal Integrity Limit 130 BNR 1.1 –
RAIM Predict Req (Dest Long) 131 1 –
RAIM Predict Req (Dest Lat) 132 1 –
RAIM Predict Req (Dest ETA) 135 1 –
GPS UTC Time 150 BNR 1 –
GPS Lat Figure of Merit 226 1.1 –
GPS Long Figure of Merit 227 1.1 –
GPS Horizontal Figure of Merit 247 BNR 1.1 –
GPS UTC Date 261 BCD 1 –
GPS Status 273 DIS 2 –
Contents of Selected Memory 276 DIS 2 –
GPS Diagnostic 277 DIS 2 –
RAIM Predict Dest HIL 343 1 –
RAIM Predict Req HIL 345 1 –
Equipment Identifier 371 DIS 2 –
Page 268
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X
U. ARINC 429 GPS/IRS Input (Hi–Speed)
ARINC 429 GPS/IRS INPUT (HI–SPEED)
RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
Autonomous GPS Latitude 110 BNR 1 –
Autonomous GPS Longitude 111 BNR 1 –
Autonomous GPS Fine 120 BNR 1 –
Latitude
Longitude
Autonomous GPS North 166 BNR 1 –
Velocity
Autonomous GPS East 174 BNR 1 –
Velocity
Autonomous GPS Horizontal
Figure of Merit
247 BNR 1 –
Hybrid GPS Latitude 254 BNR 10 –
Hybrid GPS Longitude 255 BNR 10 –
Hybrid GPS Fine Latitude 256 BNR 10 –
Hybrid GPS Fine Longitude 257 BNR 10 –
Hybrid GPS Horizontal Figure 264 BNR 1 –
of Merit
Hybrid GPS North Velocity 266 BNR 10 –
Hybrid GPS East Velocity 267 BNR 10 –
IRS Status 270 DIS 2 –
Autonomous GPS Status 273 DIS 2 –
Hybrid GPS Status 274 DIS 2 –
IRS Latitude 310 BNR 5 –
IRS Longitude 311 BNR 5 –
IRS Maintenance Discrete 350 BNR 2 –
GPS Receiver Maintenance 352 BNR 1 –
Discrete
GPIRS Maintenance Discrete 353 BNR 1 –
GPS Nav Maintenance 355 BNR 1 –
Discrete
Page 269
34–60–04 12 August, 2009

RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
IRS North Velocity 366 BNR 10 –
IRS East Velocity 367 BNR 10 –
V. ARINC 429 GPS/IRS Input (Hi–Speed) 404.X 405.X 600.X


RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
GPS HDOP 101 BNR 1 1
GPS VDOP 102 BNR 1 1
Autonomous GPS Latitude 110 BNR 1 –
Autonomous GPS Longitude 111 BNR 1 –

Latitude
Longitude
Horizontal Integrity Limit 130 BNR – –
RAIM Predict Req (Dest Long) 131 1 –

RAIM Predict Req (Dest Lat) 132 1 –
RAIM Predict Req (Dest ETA) 135 1 –
Autonomous GPS North 166 BNR 1 –

Velocity
Autonomous GPS East 174 BNR 1 –
Velocity
Autonomous GPS Horizontal
Figure of Merit
247 BNR 1 –
Hybrid GPS Latitude 254 BNR 10 –
Hybrid GPS Longitude 255 BNR 10 –

Hybrid GPS Fine Latitude 256 BNR 10 –
Hybrid GPS Fine Longitude 257 BNR 10 –
Hybrid GPS Horizontal Figure 264 BNR 1 –

of Merit
Page 270
34–60–04 12 August, 2009

RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
Hybrid GPS North Velocity 266 BNR 10 –
Hybrid GPS East Velocity 267 BNR 10 –
IRS Status 270 DIS 2 –
Autonomous GPS Status 273 DIS 2 –

Hybrid GPS Status 274 DIS 2 –
IRS Latitude 310 BNR 5 –

IRS Longitude 311 BNR 5 –

Pitch Angle 324 20 –
Roll Angle 325 20 –
RAIM Predict Dest HIL 343 1 –

RAIM Predict Req HIL 345 1 –
IRS Maintenance Discrete 350 BNR 2 –
GPS Receiver Maintenance 352 BNR 1 –

Discrete
GPIRS Maintenance Discrete 353 BNR 1 –
GPS Nav Maintenance 355 BNR 1 –

Discrete
IRS North Velocity 366 BNR 10 –
IRS East Velocity 367 BNR 10 –
Page 271
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
W. ARINC 429 GPIRS Aided Input (Lo–Speed) 404.X 405.X 600.X


RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
Internal Heading 300 .5 –

Internal Latitude 306 .5 –
Internal Longitude 307 .5 –
Display Latitude (Aided) 354 .5 –
Display Longitude (Aided) 355 .5 –
Inertial North Velocity 361 .5 –
Inertial East Velocity 362 .5 –
Aided C–IV Status 364 .5 –
X. ARINC 429 AFIS Input (Lo–Speed)

ARINC 429 AFIS INPUT (LO–SPEED)

RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
AFIS Sys Status 270 DIS .1 –
AFIS Data Status 271 DIS .1 –

AFIS File Data 357 WRD – – Note
NOTE: Block Transfer.
Page 272
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
Y. ARINC 429 IOC Pro Line 4 Input Buses (Hi–Speed) (PL4–01 Bus Version)
ARINC 429 IOC PRO LINE 4 INPUT BUSES (HI–SPEED)
(PL4–01 BUS VERSION)
DEFINITION LABEL NOTES
(FMS Status) 014
(FMS Status) 015
(FMS Status) 016
VHF Comm. Frequency 030
Beacon Code 031
ADF Frequency 032
VOR/ILS Frequency 034
Joystick Latitude 050
Joystick Longitude 051
TTR–920 Diagnostics 054
AHC–85E Diagnostics Wd 1 060
ADC–850 Diagnostics Wd 1 062
ADF–462 Diagnostics 063
TDR–94 Diagnostics 064
SIA–850 Diagnostics 066
DME–442 Diagnostics 067
FCC–850 Diagnostics 071
EFD–871 Diagnostics (PFD) 072
EFD–871 Diagnostics (MFD) 073
VHF–422 Diagnostics 074
VIR–432 Diagnostics 075
RAC–870 Diagnostics 077
Selected Altitude 102
MFD Mode Wd 155
PFD Mode Select Wd 1 163
Localizer Deviation (Onside only) 173
Glideslope Deviation (Onside only) 174
Pressure Altitude 203
Baro–Corrected Altitude 204
Page 273
34–60–04 12 August, 2009

Mach 205
Filtered Indicated Airspeed 206
True Airspeed 210
Static Air Temperature 213
VOR Bearing 222
FCC Mode Wd 1 250
FCC Mode Wd 2 253
FCC Mode Wd 3 254
FCC Mode Wd 4 255
FCC Mode Wd 5 256
DAU Discrete Wd 1 (left) (Onside only) 261
DAU Discrete Wd 1 (right) (Onside only) 262
AHRS Discrete Data, PL4–01 only 270
MFD Map Request 277
Magnetic Heading, PL4–01 only 320
IOC–851 Diagnostics 350
DAU–650 Diagnostics 351
WXT–8XX Diagnostics Wd 1 354
MLS Diagnostics 356
NOTE: The Pro Line 4 IOC input buses are used to receive data from the ADC, AHRS, radios,
EFIS, and FGS on Pro Line 4 aircraft. The A receiver should be connected to the onside
IOC bus and the B to the offside.
Page 274
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
Z. ARINC 429 IOC Pro Line 4 Input Buses (Hi–Speed) (PL4–02 Bus Version)
405.X 600.X 014
(Onside / Offside EFIS Text Line 1)
405.X 600.X 015
405.X 600.X 016
405.X 600.X 017
405.X 600.X 020
405.X 600.X 021
405.X 600.X 022
405.X 600.X 023
VHF Comm. Frequency 030
Beacon Code 031
ADF Frequency 032
VOR/ILS Frequency 034


ADC–850 Diagnostics Wd 1 062



Page 275
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
MFD Mode Wd 155
PFD Mode Select Wd 1 163
Localizer Deviation (Onside only) 173
Glideslope Deviation (Onside only) 174
Pressure Altitude 203
Baro–Corrected Altitude 204
Mach 205
Filtered Indicated Airspeed 206
True Airspeed 210
Static Air Temperature 213
VOR Bearing 222
FCC Mode Wd 1 250
FCC Mode Wd 2 253
FCC Mode Wd 3 254
FCC Mode Wd 4 255
FCC Mode Wd 5 256
DAU Discrete Wd 1 (left) (Onside only) 261
DAU Discrete Wd 1 (right) (Onside only) 262
AHRS Discrete Data, PL4–01 only 270
MFD Map Request 277
Magnetic Heading, PL4–01 only 320
MLS Diagnostics 356
NOTE: The Pro Line 4 IOC input buses are used to receive data from the ADC, AHRS,
radios, EFIS, and FGS on Pro Line 4 aircraft. The A receiver should be connected to
the onside IOC bus and the B to the offside.
Page 276
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
AA. ARINC 429 IOC Pro Line 4 Input Buses (Hi–Speed) (PL4–03 and PL4–04 Bus
Version) 600.X
(PL4–03 AND PL4–04 BUS VERSION)
DME Frequency (MLS) 021
VHF Comm Frequency 030
Beacon Code 031
ADF Frequency 032
VOR / ILS Frequency 034
TCN 7628A Receiver Status Word 041
DME 422 Diagnostics (TCN) 042
DME Frequency (TCN) 053
AHC–85E Diagnostics Word 1 060
AHC–85E Diagnostics Word 2 061
ADC–850 Diagnostics Word 1 062
MFD Mode Word 155
PFD Mode Select Word 1 163
Localizer Deviation 173 Onside Only
Glideslope Deviation 174 Onside Only
Page 277
34–60–04 12 August, 2009

Pressure Altitude 203 Onside Only
Baro–Corrected Altitude 204 Onside Only
Mach 205 Onside Only
Filtered Indicated Airspeed 206 Onside Only
True Airspeed 210 Onside Only
Static Air Temperature 213 Onside Only
VOR Bearing 222
TACAN Bearing 223
FCC Mode Word 1 250
FCC Mode Word 2 253
FCC Mode Word 3 254
FCC Mode Word 4 255
FCC Mode Word 5 256
DAU Discrete Word 1 (Left) 261 Onside Only
DAU Discrete Word 2 (Right) 262 Onside Only
AHRS Discrete Data 270 P4–03 Only
MFD Map Request 277
Magnetic Heading 320 P4–03 Only
WXT–8XX Diagnostics Word 1 354
MLS Diuagnostics 356
BCU–4000 Diagnostics 372
Page 278
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
AB. ARINC 429 IOC Pro Line 4 Input Buses (Hi–Speed)
(PL4–05 and PL4–06 Bus Version) 600.X
VHF Comm Frequency 030
Beacon Code 031
ADF Frequency 032
VOR / ILS Frequency 034
Selected Heading Track 101
Preselect Altitude 102 Onside Only
Indicated Airspeed 106 Onside Only
MFD Mode Word 155
Localizer Deviation 173 Onside Only
Glideslope Deviation 174 Onside Only
Pressure Altitude 203 Onside Only
Baro–Corrected Altitude 204 Onside Only
Indicated Mach 205 Onside Only
True Airspeed 210 Onside Only
VOR Bearing 222
Static Air Temperature 233 Onside Only
Total Fuel Quantity 247
FCC Mode Word 1 250
FCC Mode Word 2 253
FCC Mode Word 3 254
FCC Mode Word 4 255
FCC Mode Word 5 256
DAU Discrete Word 1 261 Onside Only
AHRS Discrete Data 270 P4–05 Only
Heading Track Error 302
Magnetic Heading 320 P4–05 Only
Page 279
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
AC. ASCB Input Data — FGS
ASCB INPUT DATA—FGS ASCB INPUT DATA—FGS
WSP FUNCTION WSP FUNCTION
0 HDLC Flag 29—33 Test Points

1 FGS Control 34 Maintenance Test
2 FGS Status 35 FGC Bus Status
3 Sensor Sel Status 36 Selected Altitude
4 Mode Active Ident 37 Advisory Line Control
5 SG Engaged Logic 38 Advisory Message Data
6 Pitch Mode Armed 39—51 Advisory Messages
7 Heading Error Offset 52 Sensor Mis–Compare Resolved Status
8 Autothrottle Modes Armed 1 53 Vert Ref Sync Data
9 Reserved 54 Lat Ref Sync Data
10 Mach Ref Sync Data 55 Alt Ref Sync Data

11 IAS Ref Sync Data 56 Checksum
12 Mach Ref Sync Data 57 Error Check
13 IAS Ref Sync Data 58 HDLC Flag
14—17 Requested Test Data NOTE: WSP = Word Sequence Position.
18 Pitch Command Bar
19 Roll Command Bar
20 Fast–Slow Command
21 Status Flags
22 Vertical Mode Annunciation
23 Lateral Mode Annunciation
24 Air Data Command
25 FMS Mode Annunciation
26 Speed Intervention (CAS / Mach
Target To FMC)
27 V/S Ref Sync Data (Display)
28 V/S Ref Sync Data
(Control Law)
Page 280
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
AD. ASCB Input Data—EFIS / MFD
ASCB INPUT DATA—EFIS / MFD ASCB INPUT DATA—EFIS / MFD

0 HDLC Flag 18 Designator Lat 1
1 EFIS / MFD Control 19 Designator Lat 2
2 Source Identifier 20 Designator Long 1
(Displayed Altitude)
21 Designator Long 2
3 Source Identifier
22 DME Distance
(Displayed Heading)
23 RSV–Displayed Roll
4 Source Identifier
(Selected SRN) 24 RSV–Displayed Pitch
5 Source Identifier 25 Course Error
6 MLS Selected Elevation 26 Displayed Heading
Angle
27 Maintenance Test and Flight
7 Comparator Monitor Status Fault Codes
8 Heading / Track Error 28 Displayed Speed Ref
9 Decision Height 29 Displayed Speed Ref
10 Displayed Discretes 30 RSV–Displayed IAS
11 Armed Lat Dev 31 RSV–Displayed Baro Alt
12 Armed Vert Dev 32 Checksum
13 Selected Course (SRN) 33 Error Check
14 MLS Growth 34 HDLC Flag
15 Displayed Lat Deviation NOTE: WSP = Word Sequence Position.
16 Displayed Vert Deviation
17 Displayed Radio Altitude
Page 281
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
8. ARINC DATA BUS OUTPUTS
A. ARINC 429 Outputs Hi and Lo–Speed Buses
ARINC 429 OUTPUTS (NOTE 6)
HI AND LO–SPEED BUSES
RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
RRS TACAN Frequency 033 BCD 2 .25
RRS VOR Frequency 034 BCD 1 .25 9
DME Freq 035 BCD 2 .25
RRS DME Frequency 035 BCD 2 .25 11
MLS Chan 036 BCD 5 As Entered 14
Set Lat 041 BCD 2 1 1
Set Long 042 BCD 2 1 1
Set Mag Hdg 043 BCD 5 – 2
V Ref 070 5 As Entered 13, 14
V2 071 5 As Entered 13, 14
VR 072 5 As Entered 13, 14
V1 073 5 As Entered 13, 14
Data Record Hdr 074 BNR 10 – 4
Active WPT Data 075 BCD 10 – 4
V TGT 077 5 As Entered 13, 14
Selected HDG 101 2 –
ILS Final CRS 105 1 – 14
Pseudo ILS Fnl CRS 110 1 – 14
Msg Checksum 113 BNR 10 – 4
True Desired TRK 114 BNR 2 –
True WPT BRG 115 BNR 10 1
Cross Trk Dist 116 BNR 10 –
Vert Deviation 117 BNR 10 –
Horz Cmd Sig 121 BNR 10 –
Vert Cmd Sig 122 BNR 10 –
UTC (GMT) 125 BCD 5 1
Satellite Deselection 126 BNR 1 –
Page 282
34–60–04 12 August, 2009

RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
Satellite Deselection 127 BNR 1 –
RAIM Predict Req Long 131 2 – 5
RAIM Predict Req Lat 132 2 – 5
RAIM Predict Req ETA 135 2 – 5
RAIM Predict Dest Long 143 2 – 5
RAIM Predict Dest Lat 144 2 – 5
Mag Variation 147 BNR 2 –
UTC (GMT) (Binary) 150 BCD 1 1
RAIM Predict Dest ETA 152 2 – 5
Sel Az 153 BCD 5 As Entered 14
Sel El 155 BCD 5 As Entered 14
Wind on Nose 163 BNR 2 1
Pseudo Loc Dev 173 BNR 10 –
Pseudo G/S Dev 174 BNR 10 –
Sel B Az 175 BCD 5 As Entered 14
Pressure Altitude 203 BNR 1 –
Altitude 204 BNR 2 – 12
True Airspeed 210 BNR 2 – 3
Static Air Temp 213 BNR 1 – 3
Satellite Constellation Data # 1 240 BCD 1 –
Dist to WPT 251 BNR 2 1
Time to WPT 252 BNR 2 1
Cruise N1 Limit 254 5 As Entered 13, 14
Climb N1 Limit 255 5 As Entered 13, 14
Date 260 BCD 2 1
GPS Disc Word 1 261 2 2
MOT Bearing 266 10 1 14
MOT Distance 267 2 1 14
Status 270 DIS 2 1
Page 283
34–60–04 12 August, 2009

RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
OSS Mode Cntrl 271 DIS 2 As
commanded
Man Statn Desel 272 DIS 2 As Entered
Sel Mem Addr 273 DIS 2 As Entered
LORAN Stat Desel 274 DIS 2 As Entered
FMS Status 275 DIS 2 1
Selected Mem Data 276 DIS 2 –
Cab Disp Cntl Disc 277 5 As Entered 13
STN Data 300 BNR 10 – 4
Msg. Characters 7–9 301 BNR 10 – 4
Msg. Length/Type 303 BNR 10 – 4
Nav/WPT/Apt Lat 306 BNR 10 – 4
Nav/WPT/Apt Long 307 BNR 10 – 4
Latitude 310 BNR 2 10 15
Longitude 311 BNR 2 10 15
Ground Speed 312 BNR 2 1
True Track Angle 313 BNR 2 1
Wind Speed 315 BNR 2 1
Wind Angle 316 BNR 2 1
Drift Angle 321 BNR 10 10
Pitch Angle 324 BNR 5 10 16
Roll Angle 325 BNR 5 10 16
Lat Dev Scale Factor 326 10 –
Vert Dev Scale Factor 327 10 –
Takeoff N1 Limit 342 10 – 14
Dist to Dest 351 BNR 2 1 7
Page 284
34–60–04 12 August, 2009

RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
Time to Dest 352 BNR 2 1 8
Dest Lcl Time Offset 353 1 As Entered 13
AFIS ARINC File Data Xfer 357 Block Xfer
Eqpt Ident Code 371 DIS 1 1
NOTES: 1. Output for 12 seconds after lift–off or when commanded.
2. Output for 12 seconds after manual Heading entry.
3. Function of ADC, but is output a maximum of once per second after valid ADC is
selected.
4. Part of Flight Plan output – one record each 100 ms.
5. Lo–Speed Bus only.
6. In accordance with GAMA–429.
7. Label 351 outputs 16 significant bits non–GAMA or 18 bits GAMA scaling.
8. Label 352 outputs 12 significant bits GAMA scaling. Label 352 outputs 13 significant
bits non–GAMA scaling.
9. This label is only transmitted if an RRS is configured as the radio sensor.
10. Not Used.
11. This format is only transmitted if an RRS is configured as the radio sensor,
otherwise label 035 DME Frequency is transmitted.
12. This label’s contents may be either baro–corrected or non–baro–corrected
depending on data available from Air Data Computer.
13. Effective SCN 401.X, 402.X, and 403.X.
14. Hi Speed Bus only.
15. Update Rate: SCN 400.X – 403.X = 1; SCN 404.X = 10.
16. SCN 404.X only.
Page 285
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
B. ARINC 419 (571) Outputs
ARINC 419 (571) OUTPUTS
RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
Dist to go 001 BCD 2 1
Time to go 002 BCD 2 1
Cross Trk Dist 003 BCD 10 10
Des Trk True 004 BCD 2 1
Trk Angle Error 005 BCD 2 1
Present Lat 010 BCD 2 1
Present Long 011 BCD 2 1
Ground Speed 012 BCD 2 1
True Track Angle 013 BCD 2 1
True Heading 014 BCD 5 –
Wind Speed 015 BCD 2 1
Wind Direction 016 BCD 2 1
Sel Trk leg 024 BCD 2 1
Date 027 BCD 2 1
Mag Var 031 BCD 2 As modified
Heading Rate 035 BCD 2 –
WPT 0 Latitude 036 BCD 2 – 1
WPT 0 Longitude 037 BCD 2 – 1
Page 286
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
ARINC 419 (571) OUTPUTS

RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
Wind on Nose 063 BCD 2 1
To/From Status 075 BCD 2 As modified
Target Vertical Speed 104 10 10
Status 110 DIS 2 As modified
Bearing to WPT 115 BNR 2 1
Cross Track Distance 116 10 –
Vertical Deviation 117 10 –
Horizontal Command Signal 121 10 –
Vertical Command Signal 122 10 –
Pseudo Localizer Deviation 173 10 –
Pseudo Glideslope Deviation 174 10 –
Latitude 210 BNR 2 1
Longitude 211 BNR 2 1
Flight Management Computer 273
Discrete (Bendix King FGS)
Dist to Dest 347 BNR 2 1
Equipment Ident. Code 371 2 1
Equipment Hex ID Code 377 2 1
NOTE: 1. Output as waypoints are modified.
Page 287
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
C. ARINC 429 Primus IC 600–01 Outputs (Hi–Speed)

ARINC 429 PRIMUS IC 600–01 OUTPUTS (HI–SPEED)
RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
V2 071 BNR 5 1
VR 072 BNR 5 1
V1 073 BNR 5 1
Data Record Header 074 DIS 10 2
(Part of flight plan output)
Active Wpt From / To Data 075 DIS 10 21
VTGT 077 BNR 5 1
Selected Heading 101 BNR 2 1
Message Checksum 113 BNR 10 2
True Desired Track 114 BNR 2 1
True Waypoint Bearing 115 BNR 10 1
Cross Track Distance 116 BNR 10 10
Vertical Deviation 117 BNR 10 1
Horizontal Command Signal 121 BNR 10 1
Vertical Command Signal 122 BNR 10 10
Magnetic Variation 147 BNR 2 3
Wind on Nose 163 BNR 2 1
System Altitude 204 BNR 2 2
Distance to Waypoint 251 BNR 2 2
Estimated Time to Waypoint 252 BNR 2 1
Date 260 BCD 2 1
GPS Discrete Word 1 261 DIS 2 1
Status 275 DIS 2 1
Station Data 300 BNR 10 2
Page 288
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
ARINC 429 PRIMUS IC 600–01 OUTPUTS (HI–SPEED)

RATE (HZ) RATE (HZ)
Message Characters 7—9 301 BNR 10 2
Message Length / Type 303 BNR 10 2
NAV / WPT / APT Latitude 306 BNR 10 2
NAV / WPT / APT Longitude 307 BNR 10 2
Present Latitude 311 BNR 10 10
True Track Angle 313 BNR 2 1
Wind Speed 315 BNR 2 1
True Wind Angle 316 BNR 2 1
Drift Angle 321 BNR 10 10
Lateral Deviation Scale Factor 326 BNR 10 1
Vertical Deviation Scale Factor 327 BNR 10 1
Distance to Destination 351 BNR 2 1
Estimated Time to Destination 352 BNR 2 1
Equipment Ident Code 371 DIS 1 1
LNAV Submode Annunciator 373 BNR 2 1
(Characters 4—6)
LNAV Submode Annunciator 373 BNR 2 1
(Characters 1—3)
NOTE: 1 = Update as entered
2 = Updated at end of previous flight plan output
3 = Updated at 2 minutes or as entered
Page 289
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
D. ARINC 429 Pro Line 4 Outputs (Hi–Speed) (PL4–02 and PL4–03 Bus Versions)
ARINC 429 PRO LINE 4 OUTPUTS (HI–SPEED)
(PL4–02 AND PL4–03 BUS VERSIONS)
DEFINITION LABEL MIN. XMSN NOTES
RATE (HZ)
FMS Msg Line 1 Word 1 014 5 Onside
FMS Msg Line 1 Word 1 014 5 Offside
VHF Comm Frequency 030 10
Beacon Code 031 10
ADF Frequency 032 10
NAV Rcvr Tune Word 034 10
DME Tune Word 035 10
Set Latitude 041 5
Set Longitude 042 5
Set Heading 043 5
Lateral Wpt 1 ID Word 3 045 1
Lateral Wpt 2 ID Word 3 046 1 1
Lateral Wpt 1 Latitude 055 1 1
Page 290
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
RATE (HZ)
Lateral Wpt 1 Longitude 057 1 1
Selected Course 100 10 1
Selected Heading 101 10 1
Heading Sync 111 2
Present Pos Map Course 112 10 1
(Mag)
Desired Track (True) 114 10 2
Desired Track (Magnetic) 114 10 2
Waypoint Bearing (True) 115 10 2
Waypoint Bearing (Magnetic) 115 10 2
Cross Track Distance 116 10
Vertical Deviation 117 10
Roll Command 121 5
Pitch Command 122 5
Vertical Capture Latitude 130 1 1
Vertical Capture Longitude 131 1 1
Vertical Capture Ident 132 1 1
Vertical Waypoint Latitude 133 1 1
Vertical Waypoint Longitude 134 1 1
Vertical Waypoint ID Word 1 135 1 1
Vertical Waypoint ID Word 2 136 1 1
Vertical Waypoint 1 Altitude 145 1
Page 291
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
RATE (HZ)
Magnetic Variation 147 1
UTC 150 5
MFD Mode Word 155 5 1
Distance to Vertical Track 160 2
Distance to Vertical Waypoint 161 2
PFD Mode Select 163 10 1
Selected MDA 164 10 1
ND Range / Mode Select 171 10 1
ND Source Select 172 10 1
EFIS Source Select 172 5 2
Reference FPL Altitude 215 10 2
Reference VNAV Altitude 217 10 2
TO Waypoint Constraint 225 5 2
Altitude
ETA at TO Waypoint 241 2
Fuel at TO Waypoint 242 2 1
Total Fuel Quantity 242 1 2
Selected Reporting Altitude 243 10 1
Distance to NX Waypoint 244 2 1
Time to Go to NX Waypoint 245 2 1
ETA at NX Waypoint 246 2 1
Fuel at NX Waypoint 247 2 1
Distance to Waypoint 251 2
Time to Waypoint 252 2
Date 260 1 2
Onside
FMS Discrete Word 1 261 10 2
Offside
FMS Discrete Word 1 261 10
WX Control Word 1 270 5 1
WX Control Word 2 271 5 1
FMC Mode Word 1 272 5
Page 292
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
RATE (HZ)
FMC Mode Word 2 276 2
MFD Map Request 277 5 1
VHF Comm Tune Word 301 10
NAV Rcvr Tune Word 302 10
DME Tune Word 303 10
ADF Frequency 304 10
Beacon Code 305 10
Present Position Latitude 310 5
Present Position Longitude 311 5
Ground Sp-eed 312 2
Track Angle (True) 313 10 2
Wind Speed 315 2
Wind Direction 316 2 2
Track Angle (Magnetic) 317 10 1
Drift Angle 321 10
Lateral Deviation Scale Factor 326 10
Vertical Deviation Scale Factor 327 10
Active Nav Srch 1 Waypoint ID 331 1 2
Word 1
Word 2
Distancd to Active Nav Srch 1 333 2 2
Waypoint
Word 1
Word 2
Distancd to Active Nav Srch 2 336 2 2
Waypoint
Distance to Destination 351 1
Time to Destination 352 1
Page 293
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
RATE (HZ)
Distance to NX + 1 Waypoint 361 2 1
Time to NX + 1 Waypoint 362 2 1
ETA at NX + 1 Waypoint 363 2 1
Fuel at NX + 1 Waypoint 364 2 1
Selected Decision Height 370 10 1
Wind Direction (Magnetic) 372 2 1
NOTE: 1. Effective with PL4–02 only.
2. Effective with PL4–03 only.
Page 294
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
E. ARINC 429 Pro Line 4 Map Outputs (Hi–Speed) (P4–01 Map Outputs)
ARINC 429 PRO LINE 4 MAP OUTPUTS (HI–SPEED)
(P4–01 MAP OUTPUTS)

RATE (HZ)
Fill in Word 000 10

Vertical Capture Point 004 10
Vertical Waypoint 005 10
Map Range Discrete Word 014 10
TO Waypoint and ID 070 10

Active FPL Vectors 100 10
Map Center Magnetic Variance 147 10

NDB and ID 154 10
DME / TACAN and ID 230 10
VORTAC and ID 250 10

Airport and ID 270 10
FMC Remote Test 300 10

Background Start of Trans 301 10
Background End of Trans 302 10
Dynamic Start of Trans 303 10

VOR / DME and ID 304 10
FPL Waypoint and ID 330 10
VOR and ID 350 10
Map Mode Discrete Word 364 10
Intersection and ID 370 10
Page 295
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
F. ARINC 429 Pro Line 4 Map Outputs (Hi–Speed) (P4–02 Map A and P4–02 Map B)
ARINC 429 PRO LINE 4 MAP OUTPUTS (HI–SPEED)
(P4–02 MAP A AND P4–02 MAP B)

RATE (HZ)
Fill in Word 000 10

Altitude Profile Point and ID 004 10
Map Range Discrete Word 014 10
TO Waypoint and ID 070 10
Active FPL Vectors 100 10

Map Center Magnetic Variance 147 10
NDB and ID 154 10

DME / TACAN and ID 230 10
VORTAC and ID 250 10
Airport and ID 270 10

FMC Remote Test 300 10
Background Start of Trans 301 10

Background End of Trans 302 10
Dynamic Start of Trans 303 10
VOR / DME and ID 304 10

FPL Waypoint and ID 330 10
VOR and ID 350 10
Map Mode Discrete Word 364 10
Page 296
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
G. ASCB Output Data—FMS Basic Data
ASCB OUPUT DATA—FMS BASIC ASCB OUPUT DATA—FMS BASIC

DATA DATA
1 FMS Control 19 Spare

2 FMS Status 20 Bank Angle Command
3 Sensor / Radio Information 21 Mach Target
4 FMS Control Status 22 Vertical Speed Target
5 Present Position Latitude 23 Altitude Target
6 Present Position Longitude 24 Cas Target
7 Present Position Longitude 25 Misc. Logic
8 Ground Speed 26 Radio Channel Number
9 Track Angle True 27 Magnetic Variation
10 Drift Angle 28 Spare
11 Wind Direction 29 Spare

12 Wind Speed 30 Spare
13 XTK Distance 31 Maintenance Test
14 Vertical Deviation 32 Checksum
15 Distance to Waypoint 33 Error Check
16 Bearing to Waypoint 34 HDLC Flag
17 Dual Nav Flight Plan Control NOTE: WSP = Word Sequence
Position.
18 Desired Course
Page 297
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
H. ASCB Output Data—FMS Misc. Data Packet
ASCB OUTPUT DATA— ASCB OUTPUT DATA—
FMS MISC. DATA PACKET FMS MISC. DATA PACKET
0 HDLC Flag 23 UTC (GMT) Date
1 FMS Control 24 Spare
2 Header Code 25 UTC (GMT) at Waypoint
3 Curved Path Control 26 UTC (GMT) at Destination
4 Inbound Course 27 Spare
5 Turn Radius 28 Spare
6 Course Change 29 Spare
7 Initial Turn Point Latitude 30 Time to Waypoint
8 Initial Turn Point Longitude 31 Distance to Destination
9 Longitude 32 Magnetic Variation
10 Final Turn Point Latitude 33 Parallel Offset
11 Final Turn Point Longitude 34 Present Position Latitude
12 Longitude 35 Present Position Longitude
13 Amber Vspeed 36 Spare
14 Blue Vspeed 37 Spare
15 Green Vspeed 38 Spare
16 Inbound Course (Hold Point) 39 Sync Status
17 Circular Arc Radius 40 Leg Sequence Count
18 Leg Length 41 Active Vertical Leg
19 White Speed 42 Current Vertical Mode
20 Growth Vspeed 43 Holding Pattern Entry
21 Growth Vspeed 44 Spare
22 UTC (GMT) 45 Spare
Page 298
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
ASCB OUTPUT DATA—

FMS MISC. DATA PACKET
WSP FUNCTION
46 Spare
47 Lts #1 Sensor Latitude
48 Lts #1 Sensor Longitude
56 Spare
57 Spare
58 Spare
59 Nav Operations Mode
Page 298.1
34-60-04 12 August 2009
I. ASCB Output Data—FMS Background Waypoint

0 HDLC Flag 24 Waypoint # ( ) Latitude
1 FMS Control 25 Latitude, Waypoint # ( ) Longitude
2 Header Code 26 Longitude
3 Curved Path Control 27 Course into Wpt # ( )
4 Waypoint #( ) Ident Character 3 & 4 28 Course into Wpt # ( )
5 Waypoint #( ) Ident Character 5 & 6 29 Waypoint Distance
6 Waypoint #( ) Discretes #1 30 Waypoint Distance
7 Spare 31 Waypoint # ( ) Ident Character 1 & 2
8 Waypoint # ( ) Alt Constraints 32 Waypoint # ( ) Ident Character 3 & 4
9 Waypoint # ( ) Alternate Alt 33 Waypoint #( ) Ident Character 5 & 6
10 Waypoint # ( ) Latitude 34 Waypoint #( ) Discretes #1
11 Latitude, Waypoint # ( ) Longitude 35 Spare
12 Longitude 36 Waypoint # ( ) Alt Constraints
13 Course into Wpt # ( ) 37 Waypoint # ( ) Alternate Alt
14 Course into Wpt # ( ) 38 Waypoint # ( ) Latitude
15 Waypoint Distance 39 Latitude, Waypoint # ( ) Longitude
16 Waypoint Distance 40 Longitude
17 Waypoint # ( ) Ident Character 1 & 2 41 Course into Wpt # ( )
18 Waypoint # ( ) Ident Character 3 & 4 42 Course into Wpt # ( )
19 Waypoint #( ) Ident Character 5 & 6 43 Waypoint Distance
21 Spare 45 Waypoint # ( ) Ident Character 1 & 2
22 Waypoint # ( ) Alt Constraints 46 Waypoint # ( ) Ident Character 3 & 4
23 Waypoint # ( ) Alternate Alt 47 Waypoint #( ) Ident Character 5 & 6
Page 298.2
34-60-04 12 August 2009

49 Spare 73-76 Spare
50 Waypoint # ( ) Alt Constraints 77 Checksum
51 Waypoint # ( ) Alternate Alt 78 Error Check
52 Waypoint # ( ) Latitude 79 HDLC Flag
56 Course into Wpt # ( )
57 Waypoint Distance
59 Waypoint # ( ) Ident Character 1 & 2
60 Waypoint # ( ) Ident Character 3 & 4
61 Waypoint #( ) Ident Character 5 & 6
62 Waypoint #( ) Discretes #1
63 Spare
64 Waypoint # ( ) Alt Constraints
65 Waypoint # ( ) Alternate Alt
66 Waypoint # ( ) Latitude
67 Latitude, Waypoint # ( ) Longitude
68 Longitude
Page 298.3
34-60-04 12 August 2009
J. ASCB Output Data—FMS Background Navaids

0 HDLC Flag 78 Error Check
1 FMS Control 79 HDLC Flag
2 Header Code
3 Navaid #1 Latitude
4 Latitude, Navaid #1 Longitude
5 Longitude
6 Navaid #1 Elevation
7 Navaid Type
8 Navaid # 1 Ident Character 1 & 2
9 Navaid # 1 Ident Character 3 & 4
10-16 Navaid #2
17-23 Navaid #3
24-30 Navaid #4
31-37 Navaid #5
38-44 Navaid #6
45-51 Navaid #7
52-58 Navaid #8
59-65 Navaid #9
66-72 Navaid #10
73-76 Navaid #
77 Checksum
Page 298.4
34-60-04 12 August 2009
K. ASCB Output Data—FMS Background Airports

0 HDLC Flag 78 Error Check
1 FMS Control 79 HDLC Flag
3 Airport #1 Latitude
4 Latitude, Navaid #1 Longitude
5 Longitude
6 Airport #1 Elevation
7 Airport #1 Use
8 Airport # 1 Runway Course
9 Airport # 1 Ident Character 1 & 2
10 Airport # 1 Ident Character 3 & 4
11-18 Airport #2
19-26 Airport #3
27-34 Airport #4
35-42 Airport #5
43-50 Airport #6
51-58 Airport #7
59-65 Airport #8
67-74 Airport #9
75-76 Spare
77 Checksum
Page 298.5
34-60-04 12 August 2009
L. ARINC 561 Outputs

ARINC 561 OUTPUTS
RATE(HZ) RATE (HZ)
Dist to go 001 BCD 4 1
Time to go 002 BCD 4 1
Cross Trk Dist 003 BCD 10 10
Drift Angle 006 BCD 10 10
True Heading 014 BCD 10 10
Wind Speed 015 BCD 4 1
Wind Dir 016 BCD 4 1

Mag Var 031 BCD 4 As Computed
Status 110 DIS 4 As Modified
BRG to TO WPT 115 BNR 4 1

Disp Dev 155 BNR 10 10
Dist to Nth WPT 156 BNR 4 1
Des CRS to Nth WPT 157 BNR 4 1

Distance to ‘TO’ WPT 201 BCD 4 1
M. Output to GPS (RAIM)

ARINC 561 OUTPUTS
RATE(HZ) RATE (HZ)
Requested Longitude 131 BNR 2
Requested Latitude 132 BNR 2
Requested ETA 135 BNR 2
Destination Longitude 143 BNR 2

Destination Latitude 144 BNR 2
Destination ETA 152 BNR 2
Page 298.6
34-60-04 12 August 2009
9. Required Tools
A. Crimping Tools Required for Souriau Connectors
CRIMPING TOOLS REQUIRED FOR SOURIAU CONNECTORS
QTY. MANUFACTURER PART NAME PART NUMBER
1 and DANIELS MFG. CRIMPING TOOL/AF8 M22520/1–01
1 DANIELS MFG. POSITIONER M22520/1–04
1 and DANIELS MFG. CRIMPING TOOL/AFM8 M22520/2–01

1 and DANIELS MFG. POSITIONER K13–1
1 DANIELS MFG. POSITIONER K181
1 or DANIELS MFG. CRIMP GAGE G–125

1 SOURIAU CRIMP GAGE 8660/162
1 AMP CRIMPING TOOL 220066–2

For RRS Coax connector
B. Insert/Extract Tools Required

INSERT / EXTRACT TOOLS REQUIRED
QTY. MANUFACTURER PART NAME PART NUMBER USED FOR
1 or SOURIAU INSRT / XTRCT TOOL 8660–160 TOP/MID PLUG

(All Pins)
1 or AMP INSRT / XTRCT TOOL 91066–1 TOP/MID PLUG

(All Pins)
1 MIL SPEC INSRT / XTRCT TOOL MS3156–22 TOP/MID PLUG

(All Pins)
1 or SOURIAU INSRT / XTRCT TOOL 8522–20 BOTTOM PLUG

(Pins 1, 4, 5, and 6)
1 or AMP INSRT / XTRCT TOOL 91066–4 BOTTOM PLUG

(Pins 1, 4, 5, and 6)
1 MIL SPEC INSRT / XTRCT TOOL MS3447–20 BOTTOM PLUG

(Pins 1, 4, 5, and 6)

(Pins 9, 10, and 11)

(Pins 9, 10, and 11)

(Pins 9, 10, and 11)
Page 298.7
34-60-04 12 August 2009
INSERT / EXTRACT TOOLS REQUIRED
QTY. MANUFACTURER PART NAME PART NUMBER USED FOR

(Pins 2, 3, 7, and 8)

(Pins 2, 3, 7, and 8)

(Pins 2, 3, 7, and 8)

(Pins 12, 13)
1 or ITT CANNON INSRT / XTRCT TOOL CET–C8 BOTTOM PLUG

(Pins 12, 13)
1 AMP INSRT / XTRCT TOOL 91074–1 BOTTOM PLUG

(Pins 12, 13)
The following is a list of connector manufacturers and representatives that can supply tools needed
for installation:
AMP Inc. (800) 722-1111

P.O. Box 3608 Fax: (717) 540-2310
Harrisburg, PA 1701
ITT Cannon/PEI-Genesis (215) 961-2840

2180 Horning Road Fax (215) 552-8022
Philadelphia, PA 19116
Daniels Manufacturing Corporation (407) 855-6161

526 thorpe Road Fax: (407) 855-6844
Orlando, FL 32824-8133 dmc@dmctools.com
Souriau – Manufacturer’s representative (303) 699-7106

Con-Tek Marketing
Page 298.8
34-60-04 12 August 2009
10. Wire and Cable Manufacturers

The following is a list of wire and cable manufacturers that can supply, but are not the only
source of, multiconductor cables for use during system installations:
A.E. Petsche Company, Incorporated (817) 461-9473
2112 West Division Fax: (817) 277-2887
Arlington, TX 76012
Calmont Engineering & Electronics Corporation (714) 549-0336

420 E. Alton Ave. Fax: (714) 549-4028
Santa Ana, CA 92707-4242 www.calmont.com
Electronic Cable Specialists (800) 327-9473

5300 W. Franklin Dr. (414) 421-5300
Franklin, WI 53132 Fax: (414) 421-5301
PIC Wire & Cable (800) 742-3191

Division of the Angelus Corp. (414) 246-0500
N53 W24747 South Corporate Circle Fax: (414) 246-0450
Sussex, WI 53089-0330 sales@picwire.com
Page 298.9
34-60-04 12 August 2009
11. Alternate Vendor Part Numbers

ALTERNATE VENDOR PART NUMBERS
UASC PART PART ALTERNATE ALTERNATE PART

NUMBER VENDOR NUMBER
1219 Connector AMP, INC 208597–1
Connector TRI–STAR G0681–0101–1100
1219–1 Coaxial Insert AMP, INC 225791–2
1220 Connector MS27467T11F35P with

MS27506F–10–2
1254 Rack, 1/4 ATR Barry Controls 404A–25S D/D PXB–0
1255 Connector Cannon DPBX MA40–33S–0001

with 30 each contacts
031–9134–001
1256 Connector Amphenol 48–06R–14–15S–300 with

48–2343 or MS27291–3
1257 Connector Deutsch AFD56–12–10SN–059
1328 Connector Cannon BKAD1–065–30022

067400–0024
80009000 2 MCU Rack Barry Controls 93921–1
83001150 Connector Cannon KJ6E14A15SN with

MS27506A14–2
83303130 Connector Souriau S612–MGLNW2P0004AN
83303139 Connector Souriau S612–MG13W2PL301AN
34-60-04 12 Page 298.10

August 2009
12. Drawings
A. Super CDU Outline Drawing (P/N 1016 – ( ) )
MODEL
CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT
P/N 1016-
CDU
L A P1
2.498
S/N M
SCN K B
5.04 MAX
.0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9
LBS J R N C
WT
SW VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION P
DO-178A LEVEL 2 H D
1 2 3 4 5 6
MODS 2.55
7 8 9 10 11 12 G E
TSO C115
MANUFACTURED BY
F
REAR CONNECTOR P1
TUCSON, AZ 85706 U.S.A.
N12051 PIN IDENTIFICATION 3.70
7.880
REAR CONNECTOR P1
1.075
.550 6.602 .723
6.38 MAX
6.26 MAX
5.250
4.530
3.478
3.05
1.597
5.365
5.75 MAX NOTES:

1. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
2. WEIGHT; P/N 1016-1-( ) = 7.8 LBS.
P/N 1016-2-( ) = 7.6 LBS.
CDU Outline Drawing
34-60-04 12 Page 298.11

August 2009
B. 5” Flat Panel CDU (P/N 1018 - X - ( ) )

REAR VIEW TOP VIEW
MODEL
CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT

CDU
P/N 1018-
S/N
SCN
.0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9
WT LBS 5.000
SOFTWAREVERIFICATION AND VALIDATION
DO-178B LEVEL C
1 2 3 4 5 6
MODS
7 8 9 10 11 12
TSO C115b
MANUFACTURED BY

N12055
3.617
FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW

UNIVERSAL
6.380 6.260
5.250 DATA NAV VNAV DTO LIST PREV
1 2 3
FUEL FPL PERF TUNE MENU NEXT 4 5 6
A B C D E F G 7 8 9
H I J K L M N
BACK
0 MSG
O P Q R S T
ON/OFF
DIM ±
U V W X Y Z ENTER
5.365
.560
5.750 3.25
5” FPCDU Outline Drawing
34-60-04 12 Page 298.12

August 2009
C. 4” Flat Panel CDU (P/N 1117-XX)

1/4 TURN DZUS FASTENERS
5.750
UNIVERSAL
MSG NAV
DATA DTO
FUEL FPL
TUNE VNAV
3.375
4.985 PREV LIST 4.500
NEXT
A B C D E F G 1 2 3 MENU
PWR
DIM H I J K L M N 4 5 6 PERF
O P Q R S T U 7 8 9
V W X Y Z ENTER BACK 0 0.560
5.365
3.634
TOP VIEW FRONT VIEW
0.884
4.370
2.300
3.250 BACK VIEW

0.585
SIDE VIEW
4” FPCDU Outline Drawing
34-60-04 12 Page 298.13

August 2009
MODEL D.
NAVIGATION COMPUTER UNIT NOTES:
NCU
P/N
1. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
S/N
SCN 2. WEIGHT (POUNDS):
.0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9
WT LBS 1190011110 = 6.75 1190012110 =

SW VERIFICATION
AND VALIDATION LEVEL 2 1190011111 = 7.6 1190012111 = 7.35
1 2 3 4 5 6 1190011113 = 1190012113 =
MODS 7 8 9 10 11 12
1190021111 = 7.6 1190022111 = 7.35
ARINC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ABCDEFGHJ AUX 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1190031112 = 1190022113 =
1 1 ANALOG 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1190021113 = 7.7 1190032112 =
5 5 TSO C115a 1190031114 = 1190032114 =
TP1 MANUFACTURED BY
10 10 3. MATING CONNECTOR P/N 83303130

N12015
15 15
1 1
5 5
MP1 10 10
15 15
1190-01-XXXX 1190-02-XXXX 1190-03-XXXX
UNS-1B NCU REAR CONNECTOR KEYING UNS-1B NCU REAR CONNECTOR KEYING UNS-1B NCU REAR CONNECTOR KEYING
ARINC 600 INDEX PIN CODE 03 ARINC 600 INDEX PIN CODE 05 ARINC 600 INDEX PIN CODE 06
4 3 2 1 (LIGHT SEGMENT INDICATES (LIGHT SEGMENT INDICATES (LIGHT SEGMENT INDICATES
6 8 7 5
RECEPTACLE FOR RACK POST) RECEPTACLE FOR RACK POST) RECEPTACLE FOR RACK POST)
10 11 9
BP1
13 12
NCU Outline Drawing (P/N 1190-0X-XXXX)
NCU REAR OCNNECTOR

PIN IDENTIFICATION
2.24
NCU Outline Drawing

7.85 1.12
6.39
7.64
UNIVERSAL UNS-1B
3.70
34-60-04 12 Page
12.61 2.62
August 2009
298.14
E. NCU Rack Drawing (P/N 80009000)

.18 DIA 4 PLCS
.20 DIA 2 PLCS
1.50 14.92
9.00 2.38
12.756 1.77
2 PLACES
1.312
14.92
.20 DIA 2 PLCS
2.50
.69 12.457
7.28
Notes:
1. Rack Weight = 11.2 oz.
2. Connector Weight = 9.0 oz.
NCU Rack Drawing
34-60-04 12 Page 298.15

August 2009
F. Configuration Module Installation

SELF LOCKING NUT SCREW
P/N MS21083C06 P/N MS51957-35
CONNECTOR
P/N 83303130
CONFIGURATION MODULE
P/N 11901
RACK P/N 80009000
SCREW
P/N MS51957-28
Configuration Module Installation (Sheet 1 of 2)
34-60-04 12 Page 298.16

August 2009
TSO C115b
P/N 11901
0.315"
S/N
WT 1.0 oz
2.055" TUCSON, AZ 85706 U.S.A.
±.02" 0.375"
N12520
1.425" ±.02"
0.325"
0.650"
±.02"
0.480"
.142" TO .148"
DIA. (2 PLCS.)
WIRE LENGTH
APPROX, 6.00"
P/N 11901
WT = 1.0 OZ.
Configuration Module Installation (Sheet 2 of 2)
34-60-04 12 Page 298.17

August 2009
G. DTU Outline Drawing (P/N 1405)
A
L
K M B
R N C
J
P
H D
G E
F
DTU CONNECTOR
5.00 PIN IDENTIFICATION
3.35
MODEL
DATA TRANSFER UNIT

DTU
P/N
S/N
SCN
.0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9
WT LBS
DO-178A LEVEL 3
1 2 3 4 5 6
MODS
7 8 9 10 11 12
TSO C109 NOTES:
MANUFACTURED BY
1. WEIGHT = 3.5 lbs.

N12452 2. MATING CONNECTOR P/N 83001151
0.88 D CONNECTOR SHELL
5.750 7.762
0.38
0.562
2.250 2.124
1.06
DTU Outline Drawing
34-60-04 12 Page 298.18

August 2009
H. DTU-100 Outline Drawing (P/N 1406-01-X) (SCN 603/703 and subsequent)
UNIVERSAL
5.750
2.250
0.562
7.762
1.88
3.60 0.38
5.00 2.124
DTU CONNECTOR
PIN IDENTIFICATION
NOTES: (UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. A

L L
A
K M B K M B
2. WEIGHT: APPROXIMATELY 3.25 LBS. J R N C
J R N C
P P
H D H D
3. MATING CONNECTOR: MS27473RE14F15S(SR), G F E G F E
U.A.S.C. #830001150.
4. J2 IS NOT USED.
J1 J2
DTU-100 Outline Drawing
34-60-04 12 Page 298.19

August 2009
I. SSDTU Outline Drawing (P/N 1408-00-X)

5.750
2.250
0.604
2.90
6.66
2.50 0.88
0.385
4.99 2.100
5.365
1.495 2.000
NOTES:
1.125 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
2. WEIGHT: APPROXIMATELY 2.4 LBS
SSDTU Outline Drawing
34-60-04 12 Page 298.20

August 2009
J. ERP Outline Drawing (P/N 1015-1-XX)

5.0
MODEL
EFIS/RADAR PANEL
P/N
S/N
SCN
.0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9
4.44 WT LBS
DO-178A LEVEL 2
1 2 3 4 5 6
MODS
7 8 9 10 11 12
TSO C115a
MANUFACTURED BY

N12053
.562
NOTES:
1. Weight + .9 lbs.
2. Mating Connector Weight + 0.5 oz.
5.75
RANGE HSI MAP TFC RDR NAV BRG TILT
1.125 1.00
.562
UNIVERSAL
5.365
ERP Outline Drawing
34-60-04 12 Page 298.21

August 2009
Installation And Wiring

1. General
The basic UNS–1B NCU system architecture is shown in the Description and Operation
section for single and dual systems. Non–shielded wires are MIL–W–22759, and shielded
wires are MIL–W–27500 or equivalent.
A. Form – Dimensions and Communications
The UNS–1B NCU system is designed to comply with the dimensional standards specified in
ARINC Specification 600, Air Transport Avionics Equipment Interfaces.
Inter–unit communications between navigation sensors / equipment and the NCU, as well as
between the NCU and the flight guidance system, are transmitted and received in two–wire
ARINC 429 digital format. The digital ARINC 571 and 575 are also standard formats for
interface with Data NAV and Air Data systems.
A representative listing of UNS-1B compatible sensors and equipment is listed in the
following tables. The tables include Digital Inputs, Analog Inputs, Digital Outputs, and
Analog Outputs. Additional information includes the formats/types of input and output data
required and used for each sensors or equipment type.
The listings are used to determine and select compatible sensors/equipment for use with the
NCU, and obtain data format/type information for system interconnection strapping during
installation. The UNS–1B FMS is configured to its specific aircraft installation by the use of
a "Configuration Module" which is a part of the aircraft installed NCU rack. At the time of
installation, the Configuration Module is programmed through CDU inputs to completely
define the sensor input ports, fuel flow types, air data type, EFIS interface, etc. A
replacement UNS–1B NCU can be inserted into a rack with a programmed configuration
module and no reprogramming is required.
B. Sensor / Equipment Compatibility / Selection
When determining compatibility and selecting sensors, the following information applies:
(1) IRS or IRS/GPS Sensors
A maximum of three may be used, configured in any order or combination. All IRS
or IRS/GPS sensors are to be of the same type.
(2) GPS Sensors
A maximum of two GPS sensors may be used with NCU P/N 1190–XX–1XXX. A
maximum of three GPS sensors may be used with NCU P/N 1190–XX–2XXX. These
Sensors may be configured in any order or combination.
(3) RRS Sensor
An RRS may be used in place of DME/VOR/TACAN receivers. (The RRS contains
the electronics of a multi–channel DME/TACAN receiver/transmitter with a VOR
receiver, and is tuned remotely by the UNS–1B using the ARINC 429 data bus).
Page 301
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(4) RRS/RTU
The RRS and RTU can be installed and used in the same aircraft. The RRS provides
radio navigational inputs, and the RTU is used for pilot command tuning of radios. In
event of an RRS failure, the pilot must select CSDB tuning of the DME (if installed)
to allow uninterrupted DME–DME navigation.
(5) ADVANCED EFIS
CAUTION: IF 429 ADV IS PROGRAMMED WITHOUT A COMPATIBLE EFIS, THE
FLIGHT PLAN WILL BE DRAWN INCORRECTLY.
429 GAMA MUST BE PROGRAMMED WITH ANALOG INSTRUMENT
INTERFACES OR NON COMPATIBLE EFIS.
Collins EFIS 85/86 status B–4, B–14, C–4, C–14, E–F, E–14 or Bendix/King EFIS
40/50 (SG 465 symbol generators) or equivalent can be configured for interface with
the UNS–1B by selecting ‘429 ADV’ when programming the configuration module.
When 429 ADV is selected, the EFIS will be capable of correctly displaying a flight
plan on the map display when the flight plan contains a gap or procedural leg. The
map display will draw the flight plan line to the last fixed waypoint before the gap or
procedural leg and end there. The flight plan display will start again at the next fixed
waypoint after the gap and be drawn to the following waypoints.
(6) Radar
The UNS–1B FMS NCU may be configured to accept input from one or two radar
sensors. When two radars are used, one must be a Doppler radar and the other must
be either a 429 Radar, 571 Radar, or a 1500 Radar. The UNS–1B FMS supports the
following radars:
¾ Collins WXR–300 MFD
¾ Sperry Data Nav III
¾ Bendix Radar Nav IU–2023B
¾ Bendix Radar 1500 IU–1507A
¾ CMC 2012 Doppler
¾ Racal Avionics Limited Doppler 91
¾ 600.X AN/ASN–137 Doppler
Page 302
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
C. Digital Inputs
DIGITAL INPUTS
DATA FORMAT/TYPE
FROM NCU COMPATIBLE

SENSOR/EQUIPMENT ARINC OTHER REMARKS
IRS
Honeywell Laseref/Lasernav 429 HS –
Litton LTN–92 429 HS –
Delco Carousel IRS 429 LS & – Depends on mods included.
571
Litton LTN–72–R, 72 RL 571 –
Loran C System (LCS)
Universal LCS 429 LS –
Universal LCS–850 429 LS –
ONI–7000 (NOTE 3) 429 LS – ONI CDU must be retained.
ADC
Collins ADC–80 (NOTE 1) 575 – ADC80K or Collins equivalent.
Collins ADC–850 429 LS –
Sperry ADZ–800/810–( ) 429 LS –
IDC Modified TAS 429 LS –
B & D TAS Plus 2600 Series 429 LS –
B & D 2800 429 LS –
UNC ACU 429 LS –
UNC ADS–550 429 LS –
DME
Bendix DM–441( ) 429 LS –
Collins DME–42 – CSDB
Collins DME–442, 429 LS CSDB (NOTE 2)
Foster DME–670, or TX–670 429 LS – One or other, not both (NOTE 2)
Page 303
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
DIGITAL INPUTS
DATA FORMAT/TYPE
FROM NCU COMPATIBLE

VOR
Bendix VN–411 ( ) 429 LS –
Collins VIR–32 – CSDB (NOTE 2)
Collins VIR–432 429 CSDB One or other, not both.(NOTE 2)
Cabin Display
UASC CD–2000 429 HS
RRS
Universal UNC–RRS 429 LS –
RADAR/RADAR INTERFACE/MFD
Collins WXR–844, –854 571 –
Collins WXR–300 MFD 571 –
Sperry Data Nav III 571 – Joystick operation
Bendix Radar Nav IU–2023B 429 LS –
Bendix Radar 1500 IU–1507A 429 LS
CMC 2012 Doppler 429 LS
Racal Avionics Limited 429 LS
Doppler 91
600.X AN/ASN–137 Doppler 429 LS
GPS
Universal UNS 764–1 429 LS –
GPS/OSS
Universal UNS 764–2 429 LS – Configure Port ( ) as OSS
GPS/OSS and Port ( ) as GPS 429–LS
Universal GPS–950 429 LS –
Honeywell GPIRU 429 LS or –
HS
Honeywell GPIRS 429 HS –
FMS Xfill 429 HS – Private data
Page 304
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
DIGITAL INPUTS
DATA FORMAT/TYPE
FROM NCU COMPATIBLE

I/O Concentrator
Collins ADC–850 429HS – ONSIDE Pro Line 4–XX bus
Collins WXR–300 MFD 571 – Joystick operation, Pro Line 4–XX
bus
Collins WXR–844 429HS Joystick operation, Pro Line 4–XX
bus
Collins WXR–854 429HS Joystick operation, Pro Line 4–XX
bus
EFIS/MFD (Refer to table of NCU Inputs/Outputs)
NOTE: 1. Must be specified for type aircraft, and have both TAS and altitude data.
2. Short Range Navigation Radios which utilize CSDB interface are preferred.
3. Part Number and software must be correct. Refer to the applicable sensor manual.
.
Page 305
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
D. Analog Inputs
ANALOG INPUTS
GEN INFO—FORMAT / TYPE / ETC.
FROM NCU COMPATIBLE DC AC DIS VOLTAGE REMARKS

SENSOR/EQUIPMENT RANGE
FUEL FLOW (4 separate inputs)

DC Analog DC 0—5 VDC Compatible
0—8 VDC transducers in
0—10 VDC this range
AC Analog AC AC Pickoff
Pulse AC Freq and Pulse width
NAV/INSTRUMENTS
Instrument Reference AC 26 VAC, 400 Hz Hdg, Brng to Wpt
& Desired Track
Steering Reference AC 26 VAC, 400 Hz F/D–A/P Roll Comm.
Synchro Heading AC Standard 3 wire xmtr
ARINC 407
Synchro Heading Valid DC DIS +28 VDC +28 VDC valid
Synchro Heading Select DC DIS Open or Open = MAG

+28 VDC
Mag/True Output Control DIS Open / Ground Open = MAG
Alternate Mag/True Out DC DIS Open or Open = MAG
Control +28 VDC
Deviation Scaling Options:

Enroute Mode (Lateral DIS Open / Ground Open = Normal
only, Vertical – no Ground = Expanded
change) (NOTE 2)
Approach Mode (Lat & DIS Open / Ground Open = Angular
Vertical) Ground = Linear
(NOTE 2)
VNAV Scaling Options DIS Open / Ground Open = Normal
Ground = Sperry Type
Page 306
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
ANALOG INPUTS
GEN INFO—FORMAT / TYPE / ETC.
FROM NCU COMPATIBLE DC AC DIS VOLTAGE REMARKS

SENSOR/EQUIPMENT RANGE
MISCELLANEOUS
Oleo Strut Switch DIS Open / Ground Open–Air / Gnd–Gnd
Select FMS No. 2 DIS Ground Gnd – Active
Select FMS No. 3 DIS Ground Gnd – Active
Analog Out Test DIS Ground Gnd – Active
Sperry VNAV Capture DIS Open / Ground Ground – Capture
Frequency Management DIS Open / Ground
DHC VNAV Arm DIS Open / Ground
DHC VNAV Coupled DIS Open / Ground
ARINC 561 DTG DIS Open / Ground
Resolution DIS Open / Ground

INPUT POWER (NOTE 1)
DC DC +28 VDC Acft Primary
50 W (NOTE 1)
+28 VDC
DC (battery) DC 50 W (NOTE 1) Backup / Aux
AC AC 26 VAC, 400 Hz
1 VA (NOTE 1)
NOTE: DIS = Discrete

1. Maximum Power required.
2. The Deviation Scaling Options: Both Enroute Mode Ground = Expanded and
Approach Mode Ground = Linear only apply to SCN 400.X through 404.X.
Page 307
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
E. Digital Outputs
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
DATA FORMAT/TYPE
TO NCU COMPATIBLE ARINC OTHER REMARKS

SENSOR/EQUIPMENT
IRS
Honeywell Laseref/Lasernav 429 LS –
Litton LTN–90 429 LS –
Litton LTN–92 429 LS –
Delco Carousel IRS 429 LS – Depends on mods included.
Delco Carousel IRS 571 – Depends on mods included.
Loran C System (LCS)
Universal LCS 429 LS –
Universal LCS–850 429 LS –
ONI–7000 429 LS – (Specific P/N RCU only, must
retain its CDU)
RADAR/RADAR INTERFACE/MFD
Sperry Data Nav III 571 – Nine waypoints
Sperry Data Nav IV 561 – Three waypoints
Sperry MG–600/800 Series 429/561 – Depends on MG Part No.
Bendix Radar Nav (429 type) 429 LS –
Bendix Radar Nav IU–2023B 571 – Nine waypoints
Racal Avionics Limited Discretes
Doppler 91
CMC 2012 Doppler 429 LS Tune Bus
Bendix Radar 1500
RADIOS (Note 1)
DME (Tune)
Bendix DM–441 429 LS – Type RZ
Collins DME–42 – CSDB
Collins DME–442 429 LS CSDB One or other, not both
VOR (Tune)
Collins VIR–32 – CSDB Freq Mgmt by pilot
Collins VIR–432 – CSDB Entered commands
Bendix VN–411 429
Page 308
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
DATA FORMAT/TYPE

SENSOR/EQUIPMENT
ADF (Tune)
Collins ADF–60 – CSDB Freq Mgmt by pilot
Collins ADF–462 – CSDB entered commands (Note 2)
COMM (Tune)
Collins VHF–21 – CSDB Freq Mgmt by pilot
Collins VHF–22 – CSDB entered commands (Note 2)
Collins VHF–422 – CSDB
TRANSPONDER
Collins TDR–90 w/CAD–62 – CSDB Freq Mgmt by pilot
entered commands (Note 2)
Collins TDR–90 w/CAD–870 CSDB To ARTU (talks to CAD–870)
Collins TDR–94 428HS
CONTROL HEADS
Collins CTX–XX/Pro Line II – CSDB
Gables Type 814 – CSDB
RRS
Universal UNC–RRS 429 LS –
(Note 4)
GPS
Universal UNS 764–1 GPS/OSS 429 LS –
Universal UNS 764–2 GPS/OSS 429 LS –
Universal GPS 950 429 LS –
Honeywell GPSSU 429 LS or –
HS
Honeywell IRS/GPS 429 HS –
AFIS
Global/Wulfsberg 429 LS –
HSI
Collins 331A–9G 561 – Six Wire
Sperry RD–650 561 – Six Wire (DIST only) (Note 5)
Page 309
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
DATA FORMAT/TYPE

SENSOR/EQUIPMENT
I/O Concentrator
Collins WXR–300 561 – Three Waypoints
Collins WXR–844 429HS IOC bus
Collins WXR–845 429HS IOC bus
Collins RTU–870 429HS CSDB To ARTU (talks to RTU–870)
NOTE: 1. RS–422 NRZ data format for all CSDB listings.

2. Not autotuned by NCU (requires installation of RTU).
3. RS–422 NRZ data format for all CSDB listings.
4. Used in place of DME/VOR/TACAN receiver.
5. LRN DIS w/ARINC 568 Label 201.
Page 310
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
F. Analog Outputs
ANALOG OUTPUTS
GEN INFO—FORMAT/TYPE/ETC.
SENSOR/EQUIPMENT DC AC DIS VOLTAGE REMARKS
RANGE
Vertical DEV & Lateral XTRK DEV DC 0–250 mVDC Linear
Roll Steer Command AC 12 V 0.393 VAC/Deg.
400 Hz max.
Lateral, Vertical & TO / FROM DC DIS 180 – 250 Except below
FLAGS mVDC
SYNCHRO / RESOLVER AC 0–11 VAC Std ARINC 407
400 Hz
0–9 VAC Std Resolver
400 Hz
Vert DEV, Roll Steer, NAV, DC DIS 18.5 – 30 VDC Active (350 mA Max)
Digital & FMS Valids 0 – 3.5 VDC Inactive
SXTRK, Message, DC DIS 0 – 1.25 VDC Active
WPT ALERT, “ON BATT”, 18.5 – 30 VDC Inactive
FMS HDG, &
FMS Approach Annunciators
AC PITCH STEERING AC +7500 mV
DC PITCH STEERING DC +7500 mV
DHC Arm DIS
DHC VNAV Engage Request DIS
Doppler Mode DIS
Doppler Sea State DIS
Doppler Self Test DIS
Pro Line 4 FMS #1 NAV Source DIS
Pro Line 4 FMS #1 NAV Source DIS
Sperry VNAV Flag DIS
NOTE: DIS = Discrete
Page 311
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
G. NCU Inputs/Outputs
NCU INPUTS/OUTPUTS
DATA FORMAT/TYPE
TO/FROM SENSOR/EQUIPMENT ARINC OTHER REMARKS
Bendix EFIS–10 571 – +Analog RCS (Note 1)
Collins
AP 105/5M5 – – No forced ROLL Steering (Note 2)
APS 65 – – Force Capture not avail. (Note 2)
APS 80/85 – – Force Capture available
EHSI–74 561 – (All data) (Note 3)
EFIS–85A/B 561 – +Analog CRS, BRG, RCS (Note 3)
EFIS–86A 561 – +Analog CRS, BRG, RCS (Note 3)
EFIS–85E(4) 429 –
EFIS–86C(14) 429 –
EFIS–871 429HS
FCS–850 429HS
JET
FC 110 – – No RCS channel (Note 4)
FC 200 – – No RCS channel (Note 4)
FC 230 – – Roll Steer
FC 530 – – Force Capture available
FC 531 – – Force Capture available
FC 550
Honeywell
EDZ–705 EFIS 429 –
EDZ 801
SG–801 561 – + Analog CRS, BRG, RCS (Note 3)
MG–801 561 – + Analog CRS, BRG, RCS (Note 3)
EDZ 803
SG–803 561 – + Analog CRS, BRG, RCS (Note 3)
–
MG–803 429 LS Map data only
EDZ 805 –
SG–805 429 – HS or LO (All data)
MG–805 429 HS or LO (All data)
Page 312
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
NCU INPUTS/OUTPUTS
DATA FORMAT/TYPE
TO/FROM SENSOR/EQUIPMENT ARINC OTHER REMARKS
EDZ 8000 –
EDZ 810 429 – HS or LO (All data)
EDZ 811
SG–811 429 – HS or LO (All data)
MG–811 429 – HS or LO (All data)
SPZ 200 – – w/o LNAV mode on panel (Note 5)
RNZ–850 – CSDB
NOTE: 1. EFIS requires separate demodulator to accept DC STEER.
2. Must open DEV input at AP 105/5M5 to force capture RCS.
3. Standard six wire data.
4. No NCU HDG mode operation.
5. Must switch logic to cause force capture.
H. Electrical Connectors
The UNS–1B NCU uses low insertion force, size 2 shell, ARINC 600 service connectors.
The NCU's connector guide pins are arranged differently to prevent their connection to non–
compatible racks. For the ARINC 600 index pin coding of the NCU connector, refer to the
NCU outline drawing in the Equipment Specification section.
I. Remote Annunciators
The NCU provides outputs to five remotely mounted panel annunciators. These include
remote Message, Waypoint Alert, Selected Crosstrack, FMS Heading, and FMS Approach
advisories. Also, an optional ON BATT annunciator is available when installed with a back–
up power source.
In addition, a "system on" discrete output is available to the installer for use in activating
remote switching (if required).
J. General Mounting Considerations
The NCU must not be mounted next to excessive heat producing equipment or in such a way
as to impede normal convective cooling. The NCU can however be mounted in any
orientation with respect to the aircraft longitudinal axis.
NCU racks must be grounded to airframe ground by wire braid. This provides positive
grounding of the racks, to which data shields are tied.
The Configuration Module is mounted directly onto the NCU rack. Refer to Configuration
Module Installation drawing in the Equipment Specifications section.
Page 313
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
2. NCU Interfaces
A. NCU Wiring—General Configuration
Interconnection wiring information between the aircraft, NCU, CDU, DTU, Radios, Flight
Guidance, and ARINC 429 radar data interface is provided in the following paragraphs.
Information on configuring ports/sensors is also included.
(1) NCU (P/N 1190–01–XXXX, 1190–02–XXXX and 1190–03–XXXX) ARINC Input
Ports
The pins on the NCU connector that are used for ARINC ports on the DDARINC
board in the third slot are shown below.
ARINC INPUT PORTS
Port 0 MP4C, MP4D
Port 1 MP4G, MP4H
Port 2 MP12C, MP12D

Port 3 MP12G, MP12H
Port 4 MP8A, MP8B

Port 5 MP8C, MP8D
Port 6 MP8E, MP8F
Port 7 MP8G, MP8H
(2) NCU (P/N 1190–03–X112) ARINC Input Ports

The ARINC input ports of the P/N 1190–03–X112 NCU are the same as the ARINC
input ports of the P/N 1190–01–XXXX, 1190–02–XXXX, and 1190–03–X114 NCUs
with the addition of Ports 8 through 15. The pins on the NCU connector that are used
for these ARINC ports on the DDARINC board in the fourth slot are shown below.
ARINC INPUT PORTS
Port 8 MP1D, MP1C
Port 9 MP1H, MP1G

Port 10 MP5D, MP5C
Port 11 MP5H, MP5G
Port 12 MP3A, MP3B

Port 13 MP3D, MP3C
Port 14 MP3F, MP3E
Port 15 MP3H, MP3G
Page 314
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(3) ARINC 429/571 Input Port Capabilities
The following table lists the sensors and functions that may be connected to the
ARINC input ports on the NCU. These sensors and functions may be assigned to any
ARINC 419/571 input port unless restricted to a specific port. The available ARINC
419/571 input ports are numbered 0 through 7 (0 through 15 for NCU P/N 1190–03–
X112). Use the CDU Menu Names in the ARINC RECEIVERS worksheet found
under ARINC OPTIONS in the section on System Data Installation.
SENSOR OR FUNCTION CDU MENU NAME ALLOWABLE PORT(S)
No Sensor NO SENSOR 0–15
ADC 429 429 ADC 0–15
ADC 575 575 ADC 0–15
AFIS AFIS 400.X 401.X 401.1
402.X 403.X 404.X
1–7, 9–15 only.
405.X 600.X 0–15

AHRS 1 429 (ARINC 705) 429 AHRS 1 4
AHRS 2 429 (ARINC 705) 429 AHRS 2 5
AN/ARN–118 (TACAN) AN/ARN 118 0–15
DME 429 (Bendix DM 441) 429 DME 0–15
DME 709 Radio 709 DME 0–15

Doppler 429 (CMC 2012) DOPPLER 2012 0–15
Doppler 429 (RACAL 91) DOPPLER 91 0–15
FMS Crossfire 1 CROSSFIRE 1 7
FMS Crossfire 2 (–P) CROSSFIRE 2 15
GPIs 1 (Delco C–IV) C–IV GRIPES 6, 14
GPIRS 1 429 429 IRGPS 1 6, 14
GPIRS 2 (Delco C–IV) C–IV GPIRS2 5, 13
GPIRS 2 429 429 IRGPS 2 5, 13
GPIRS 3 (Delco C–IV) C–IV GPIRS3 4, 12
GPIRS 3 429 429 IRGPS 3 4, 12
GPS 1 429 (ARINC 743) (non–RAIM) HS429 GPS 1 0–15
GPS 1 429 (ARINC 743) (non–RAIM) LS429 GPS 1 0–15
GPS 1 429 (ARINC 743) (RAIM) HS GPS1 B1 1–15
Page 315
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
GPS 1 429 (ARINC 743) (RAIM) LS GPS1 B1 1–15

GPS 2 429 (ARINC 743) (non–RAIM) HS429 GPS 2 0–15
GPS 2 429 (ARINC 743) (non–RAIM) LS429 GPS 2 0–15
GPS 3 429 (ARINC 743) (non–RAIM) HS GPS 3 1–15
GPS 3 429 (ARINC 743) (non–RAIM) LS GPS 3 1–15
IC 600–L (Primus 1000) (LS 429) IC600–L 6
(ADC, AHRS, Radar, Radios, FGS Mode)
IC 600–R (Primus 1000) (LS 429) IC600–R 5
(ADC, AHRS, Radar, Radios, FGS Mode)
IRS 1 429 HS HS429 IRS 1 6, 14
IRS 1 429 LS LS429 IRS 1 6, 14
IRS 1 571 571 IRS 1 6, 14
IRS 2 429 HS HS429 IRS 2 5, 13
IRS 2 429 LS LS429 IRS 2 5, 13
IRS 2 571 571 IRS 2 5, 13
IRS 3 429 HS HS429 IRS 3 4, 12
IRS 3 429 LS LS429 IRS 3 4, 12
IRS 3 571 571 IRS 3 4, 12
KFC FGS (KFC–400 or KFC 3100 Autopilot) KFC FGS 0–15
Loran C System LCS 0–15
Pro Line 4–01 IOC Bus P4–01 IOC 0–15

Pro Line 4–02 IOC Bus P4–02 IOC 0–15
Pro Line 4–01 OFFSD P4–01 OFFSD 5
(AHRS, Radios, EFIS mode, FGS mode)
Page 316
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
Pro Line 4–01 ONSD P4–01 ONSD 6

(ADC, AHRS, Radios, EFIS mode, FGS mode)
(Radios, EFIS mode, FGS mode)
(ADC, Radios, EFIS mode, FGS mode)
(AHRS, Radios, TACAN, EFIS mode, FGS
mode)
(ADC, AHRS, Radios, TACAN, MLS, EFIS
mode, FGS mode)
(Radios, TACAN, EFIS mode, FGS mode)
(ADC, Radios, TACAN, MLS, EFIS mode, FGS
mode)
Pro Line 4–05 OFFSD (4000 Series) P4–05 OFFSD 5
(AHRS, Radios, EFIS Mode, FGS Mode)
Pro Line 4–05 ONSD (4000 Series) (ADC, P4–05 ONSD 6
AHRS, Radios, EFIS Mode, FGS Mode)
Pro Line 4–06 OFFSD (4000 Series) P4–06 OFFSD 5
(Radios, EFIS Mode, FGS Mode)
Pro Line 4–05 ONSD (4000 Series) P4–06 ONSD 6
(ADC, Radios, EFIS Mode, FGS Mode)
Radar 429 429 RADAR 0–15
Radar 571 571 RADAR 0–15
Radar 1500 RADAR 1500 0–15
RRS (VOR, DME, TACAN) RRS 0–15 NOTE
RRS w/o TACAN (VOR, DME) RRS–T 0–15 NOTE
SPARE NO SENSOR 0–15
TXC–670 (TACAN) AN/ARN118 0–15
VOR BRG 429 (King KNR–634A) (Provisional) NA 0–15
VOR RAD 429 (Bendix VN 411) 429 VOR RAD 0–15
VOR 711 Radio 711 VOR 0–15
Some of the sensors in the above list are mutually exclusive. When one sensor is
selected, others are no longer available. These sensors are:
Page 317
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
ADC 429 ADC, 575 ADC
DME 429 DME, RRS, RRS–T
RADAR 429 RADAR, 571 RADAR
VOR 429 VOR–R, RRS, RRS–T
MLS MLS–21, ARINC 727 MLS
B. Valid Configurations
(1) Sensors
Only one sensor of a particular type may be configured for an FMS. The following
list shows the sensors of similar type that are mutually exclusive in the configuration:
VALID CONFIGURATIONS
SENSOR TYPE MUTUALLY EXCLUSIVE
ADC 429 ADC, 575 ADC, IC600–L, P4–01 ONSD, P4–02 ONSD, P4–03 ONSD,
P4–04 ONSD, P4–05 ONSD, P4–06 ONSD
ADC 429 ADC, 575 ADC, IC600–R, P4–01 OFFSD, P4–02 OFFSD, P4–03 OFFSD,
P4–04 OFFSD, P4–05 OFFSD, P4–06 OFFSD
AHRS 1 429 AHRS 1, IC600–L, P4–01 ONSD, P4–03 ONSD, P4–05 ONSD
AHRS 1 429 AHRS 1, IC600–L, P4–01 OFFSD, P4–03 OFFSD, P4–05 OFFSD
AHRS 1 429 AHRS 1, IC600–R, P4–01 ONSD, P4–03 ONSD, P4–05 ONSD
AHRS 1 429 AHRS 1, IC600–R, P4–01 OFFSD, P4–03 OFFSD, P4–05 OFFSD
AHRS 2 429 AHRS 2, IC600–L, P4–01 ONSD, P4–03 ONSD, P4–05 ONSD
AHRS 2 429 AHRS 2, IC600–L, P4–01 OFFSD, P4–03 OFFSD, P4–05 OFFSD
AHRS 2 429 AHRS 2, IC600–R, P4–01 ONSD, P4–03 ONSD, P4–05 ONSD
AHRS 2 429 AHRS 2, IC600–R, P4–01 OFFSD, P4–03 OFFSD, P4–05 OFFSD
Attitude 1 429 IRGPS 1, LS429 IRS 1, HS429 IRS 1, 571 IRS 1, C–IV GPIRS 1
DME 1 429 DME, 709 DME, P4–DME1, RRS, RRS–T, TXC–670

DME 2 429 DME, 709 DME, P4–DME2, RRS, RRS–T, TXC–670
Doppler DOPPLER 91, DOPPLER 2012, DOPPLER 137
FGS KFC FGS, IC600–L

FGS KFC FGS, IC600–R
GPS 1 LS GPS 1 B1, LS GPS 1, HS GPS 1 B1, HS GPS 1
Page 318
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
VALID CONFIGURATIONS
SENSOR TYPE MUTUALLY EXCLUSIVE

P4 IOC P4–01 ONSD, P4–02 ONSD,

P4–03 OFFSD, P4–04 OFFSD, P4–05 OFFSD, P4–06 OFFSD
P4 IOC P4–01 OFFSD, P4–02 OFFSD,
P4–03 ONSD, P4–04 ONSD, P4–05 ONSD, P4–06 ONSD
P4 IOC P4–03 ONSD, P4–04 ONSD, P4–05 OFFSD, P4–06 OFFSD
P4 IOC P4–03 OFFSD, P4–04 OFFSD, P4–05 ONSD, P4–06 ONSD
NOTE: If a Pro Line 4 IOC is configured on Input Port 6, the IC600–R bus is not available on
PORT 5. If a Pro Line 4 IOC is configured on Input Port 5, the IC600–L bus is not available
on PORT 6.
For the Pro Line 4 800 Series configuration (standard LR60), any of the four combinations
of the P4–01 ONSD or P4–02 ONSD with P4–01 OFFSD or P4–02 OFFSD is allowed.
For the Pro Line 4 800 Series FIAS configuration, any of the four combinations of the
P4–03 ONSD or P4–04 ONSD with P4–03 OFFSD or P4–04 OFFSD is allowed.
For the Pro Line 4 4000 Series configuration (F2000), any of the four combinations of the
P4–05 ONSD or P4–06 ONSD with P4–05 OFFSD or P4–06 OFFSD is allowed.
RADAR WPT 429 RADAR, 571 RADAR, RADAR 1500,
P4–01 ONSD, P4–02 ONSD, P4–03 ONSD, P4–04 ONSD, IC600–L
RADAR WPT 429 RADAR, 571 RADAR, RADAR 1500,
P4–01 ONSD, P4–02 ONSD, P4–03 ONSD, P4–04 ONSD, IC600–R
TACAN AN/ARN–118, RRS, P4–03 ONSD, P4–04 ONSD, TXC–670
NOTE: In the FIAS aircraft there is one TACAN and two MLS sensors installed. FMS 1 gathers
TACAN on its onside IOC bus, and FMS 2 gathers TACAN on its offside IOC bus. FMS 1
gathers MLS 1 on its onside IOC bus, and FMS 2 gathers MLS 2 on its onside IOC bus.
VOR 429 VOR–R, 429 VOR–B, 711 VOR, RRS, RRS–T, P4–01 ONSD, P4–02 ONSD,
P4–03 ONSD, P4–04 ONSD, P4–05 ONSD, P4–06 ONSD
Configuration of the Pro Line 4 system requires five components:

¾ Pro Line 4–01 ONSD, Pro Line 4–02 ONSD, Pro Line 4–03 ONSD, or Pro Line
4–04 ONSD receiver
¾ Pro Line 4–01 OFFSD, Pro Line 4–02 OFFSD, Pro Line 4–03 OFFSD, or Pro
Line 4–04 OFFSD receiver
Page 319
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
¾ Pro Line 4–01 IOC transmitter
¾ Pro Line 4–01 MAP transmitter
¾ ERP CSDB receiver
If any one of the five components is missing, then an “INVALID
CONFIGURATION” message is displayed. Any of the four combinations of the Pro
Line 4–01 ONSD or Pro Line 4–02 ONSD with the Pro Line 4–01 OFFSD or Pro
Line 4–02 OFFSD is allowed in a standard Pro Line 4 configuration. In addition, any
of the four combinations of the Pro Line 4–03 ONSD or Pro Line 4–04 ONSD with
the Pro Line 4–03 OFFSD or Pro Line 4–04 OFFSD is allowed in a FIAS Pro Line 4
configuration.
However, if the type Pro Line 4–01 x or Pro Line 4–03 x( i.e., the IOC input with
AHRS) is configured, then the AHRS 1 is not configurable. For FMS 1 this is Pro
Line 4–01 ONSD or Pro Line 4–03 ONSD, and for FMS 2 this is Pro Line 4–01
OFFSD or Pro Line 4–03 OFFSD. The exclusion for AHRS 2 and Pro Line 4–01 x or
Pro Line 4–03 x is accomplished by restriction of certain sensors to specific ARINC
ports.
In the FIAS aircraft there are one TACAN and two MLS sensors installed. FMS 1
gathers TACAN on its onside IOC bus, and FMS 2 gathers TACAN on its offside
IOC bus. FMS 1 gathers MLS 1 on its onside IOC bus, and FMS 2 gathers MLS 2 on
its onside IOC bus.
If Pro Line 4 is configured on any of the ARINC receive ports, Doppler 91 will not
be available. These two sensors share output pin assignments and configuring both
would create a conflict. Pro Line 4 has the higher priority and would use the discrete
outputs, but the Doppler 91 would not respond to FMS commands even though it was
transmitting valid data and appeared to be healthy.
Page 320
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(2) ARINC Output Ports
The following table shows a list of the configurable ARINC 429 transmitters along
with the ports to which they default when the configuration module is initialized.
Each of these ports is configurable and can be set to any of the buses shown below as
defaults or to AN/ARN–118 (TACAN).
ARINC 429 OUTPUT PORTS
TRANSMITTER DEFAULT PORT
ARINC 429 High Speed Port 0

ARINC 571 LRN Data Port 1
ARINC 429 Low Speed Port 2

ARINC 429 High Speed Crossfill Data Port 3
ARINC 429 Low Speed Tune Bus Port 4
Second DDARINC installed Pro Line 4–01 IOC
No default port Pro Line 4–01 MAP
(3) CSDB Sensors

The following list identifies the CSDB sensors that may be configured on the four
CSDB input ports. No sensor may be configured on more than one input port. We
have made provisions for future support of some sensors.
¾ No Sensor
¾ RTU
¾ Single DME = One DME unit and two control heads.
¾ Dual DME = Two DME units, each with it’s control head or one DME with one
control head.
¾ DME Direct (Direct to DME) = One DME unit, no control head.
¾ VOR
¾ MFD
¾ ERP
MUTUALLY EXCLUSIVE CSDB INPUTS
SENSOR TYPE MUTUALLY EXCLUSIVE INPUTS
RADAR Waypoint MFD, RTU, ERP, ASCB

DME single DME, dual DME, DME direct, ERP
Page 321
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(4) CSDB Output Ports
There are two CSDB transmitters. These two output ports may be configured as
NONE, TUNE bus or RTU TUNE bus.
C. Invalid Configurations
An "INVALID CONFIGURATION” message will be generated if the DHC Autopilot and
Pro Line 4 are configured. This creates a conflict with the Analog Output pin assignments.
Pro Line 4 has higher priority so the DHC VNAV Arm and Pitch Cmd Valid #2 features
would not be available.
Configuring the following when the NCU configuration is ASCB will cause an “INVALID
CONFIGURATION” message to be displayed:
¾ Pro Line 4 configuration.
¾ A CSDB MFD, ERP or FGS is configured on the CSDB input bus.
¾ If CSDB MFD, RTU, or ERP is configured on the CSDB output bus.
¾ If any of the following Radars are configured: ARINC 429 Radar, 571 Radar, Radar
1500, Pro Line 4–01 ONSD, Pro Line 4–02 ONSD, Pro Line 4–03 ONSD, or Pro Line
4–04 ONSD.
¾ KFC FGS (KFC–400 or KFC 3100 autopilot) or DHC.
Page 322
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
NCU P/N 1190–XX–1XXX
3. NCU Wiring P/N 1190–XX–1XXX
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X
A. NCU (P/N 1190–01–1110 and 1190–03–1112) Wiring—Collins Pro Line 4
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X
The following wiring diagrams (five sheets) represent the basic wiring for NCU P/N 1190–
01–1110 and 1190–03–1112 when installed as an external navigator with Collins Pro Line 4
Avionics System.
NCU P/N 1190–01–1110 is all digital with no analog in or out.
NCU P/N 1190–03–1112 has two double density ARINC boards.
Page 323
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-01-1110 CDU
or 1190-03-1112) (P/N 1016-X-XX)
MP P1 P1
4 4 5 OR 28 VDC 4
A 2E A H E PANEL LIGHTING
CDU DATA CDU
OUTPUT B B LTG L F 20
2F
C
A 2A J
CDU DATA
INPUT B K
2B
L
BP
CDU 28 VDC PWR 6 20 M
CDU DC RETURN 11 20 P
PWR CONTROL 4 R
28 VDC IN 2 16 5 28 VDC AIRCRAFT BUS
3 28 VDC BATT IN 3 16 16 EMER. BATT.

5 (IF INSTALLED)
ON BATT ANNUNCIATOR
ON BATT ANNUN OUT 1 (IF EMER. BATT INSTALLED)
(GND = ON)
DC RETURN 8 16
CHASSIS GND 7 16
TO #2 FMS
DTU
(P/N 1405-XX-X)
MP P1
DTU 28 VDC 28 VDC
A 8J A INPUT M 1 AIRCRAFT BUS
DATA
BUS B 8K B
DC RETURN P
5
PORTABLE DTU DETAIL

NOTES: 1. ALL WIRING TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. (P/N 1404-XX-XX)
2. DO NOT 'DAISY CHAIN' SHIELD GROUNDS.

1 A
3 28 VDC BATTERY INPUT APPLIES ONLY IF EMERGENCY 5 DTU DATA
BATTERY IS USED. 2 B OUTPUT
4 CDU LIGHTING POWER INPUT POWER IS EITHER 5 OR 28 VDC 5

AND IS DEPENDENT UPON CDU PART NUMBER.
22 AWG 12 DC RETURN
5 REFER TO DETAIL FOR PORTABLE DTU OPTION. ARICRAFT
+28 VDC 1 22 AWG 13 28 VDC INPUT
BUS
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO DETERMINE AND J1
VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER
THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

NCU (P/N 1190–01–1110 and 1190–03–1112) Wiring with Collins Pro Line 4
Sheet 1 of 5
Page 324
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-01-1110
or 1190-03-1112)
MP
MSG 13A
WPT 13B
FMS REMOTE FMS
ANNUN SXTK 13C ANNUNCIATORS
OUTPUTS IF INSTALLED
APRCH 13D (GND = ON)
HDG 13E
(P/N 11901)
GND 14G 24 AWG BROWN UNC
CONFIGURATION
CONFIG +5 VDC 14H 24 AWG RED MODULE
MODULE DATA CLK 14J 1
24 AWG YELLOW
2
DATA I/O 14K 24 AWG BLUE
GND
STRUT SWITCH 15K 3 UNS-1B
DISCRETE MP
AIR
NCU
(ARINC A 12E 8G (CROSSIDE)
429 HS) OUTPUT
(XFILL) PORT #3 B 12F 8H
(ARINC INPUT A 8G 12E

429) PORT #7
B 8H 12F
NOTES: 1 CONFIGURATION MODULE TO BE MOUNTED TO NCU RACK,

AND WIRED TO THE NCU CONNECTOR THROUGH A PIGTAIL.
2 THE CONFIGURATION MODULE WILL BE PROGRAMMED

THROUGH THE CDU.
3 WEIGHT ON WHEELS LOGIC IS MP15K GROUNDED WHEN

AIRCRAFT IS ON THE GROUND.
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

Sheet 2 of 5
Page 325
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-01-1110 EFIS RADAR PANEL
or 1190-03-1112) 2 (P/N 1015-1-11)
MP P1
(CSDB) INPUT A 14C 13 H

(ERP) PORT #1 CSDB TRANSMIT
B 14D 25 L
5 A
AAP ALTITUDE
18 B KNOB
17 AAP ALTITUDE SWITCH

(GND = PRESSED)
19 AAP COMMON
7 A
AAP DECISION
20 B HEIGHT KNOB A
6 AAP DECISION HEIGHT

SWITCH (GND = PRESSED)
4 AAP MDA/RPT ALT
SEL (GND = RPT ALT)
9 A
CHP COURSE
22 B SELECT KNOB
1
10 A
CHP HEADING
23 B SELECT KNOB
21 CHP HEADING SYNC

8 CHP DTO SWITCH
(GND = PRESSED)
24 CHP COMMON
11 SPARE DISCRETE
INPUT #1
12 SPARE DISCRETE
INPUT #2
3 RTU 1 & 2 DISABLE
DISCRETE (GND = DISABLED)
28 VDC
AIRCRAFT BUS .5 1 +28 VDC
14 POWER RETURN
5 VDC 2 LIGHTING POWER
15 LIGHTING RETURN
GND = #1 ATC 16 ATC 1/2 SELECT DISCRETE
NOTES: 1 REFER TO COLLINS MANUAL.

2 MATING CONNECTOR IS M24308/2-2 OR AMP P/N 205557-3
(STANDARD DB-25S CONNECTOR).
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

Sheet 3 of 5
Page 326
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-01-1110
or 1190-03-1112)
MP
(ARINC OUTPUT A 4J
429 LS) PORT #2A
B 4K
GENERAL PURPOSE LS 429 OUTPUTS
(ARINC OUTPUT A 12J

429 LS) PORT #2B
B 12K
(ARINC OUTPUT A 4A
429 HS) PORT #0A IOC OUTPUT
B 4B
(ARINC OUTPUT A 4E
429 HS) PORT #1 MFD OUTPUT
B 4F
(ARINC OUTPUT A 12A

429 HS) PORT #0B GENERAL PURPOSE HS 429 OUTPUT
B 12B
(ARINC INPUT A 4C
LS 429/ PORT #0
571) B 4D
(ARINC INPUT A 4G
LS 429/ PORT #1
571) B 4H
(ARINC
INPUT A 12C OPTIONAL DME, AFIS 2
LS 429/ OR LRN SENSOR INPUTS
571) PORT #2
B 12D (LS 429 OR 571)
(ARINC A 12G
LS 429/ INPUT UNS-1B NCU
PORT #3 1
571) B 12H (P/N 1190-03-1112)
MP
3E A
429 HS INPUT
(ARINC IRS #1 PORT 14
LS 429/ INPUT A 8A 3F B
571) PORT #4
B 8B
3C A
429 HS INPUT
IRS #2 PORT 13
3D B
NOTES: 1 IF HS 429 INPUT (e.g. IRS) IS REQUIRED,

NCU P/N MUST BE 1190-03-1111 WITH
SECOND ARINC BOARD.
(REFER TO 1190-03-XXXX WIRING).
2 CAUTION: DO NOT CONNECT AFIS TO PORT 0 OR PORT 8

FOR USE WITH NCU SCN 400.X,401.X,
402.X, 403.X OR 404.X.
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

Sheet 4 of 5
Page 327
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-01-1110
or 1190-03-1112)
MP
(ARINC INPUT A 8C
429 HS) PORT #5 OFFSIDE IOC INPUT
B 8D
(ARINC INPUT A 8E
429 HS) PORT #6 ONSIDE IOC INPUT
B 8F
#2 FMS SELECT 11J GND IF APPLICABLE 7
#3 FMS SELECT 11K GND IF APPLICABLE 8
ANALOG TEST DISCRETE 15J OPEN = NORMAL, GND = TEST
FREQ MGMT ENABLE 6A
VNAV ARM OR MOT 6B 2

DISCRETE INPUT
VNAV ARM OR 6C 3
DOPPLER SELF TEST
DISCRETE OUTPUT
VNAV COUPLED OR FPL 6E 4
ERASE DISCRETE INPUT
GO AROUND DISCRETE 6F 5
INPUT (PROVISIONAL)
MAG/TRUE OUT SEL 11H OPEN = MAGNETIC, GND = TRUE
EFIS NAV FMS 1 7A GND = FMS 1 NAV SOURCE 1 6

SOURCE SEL
OUTPUTS FMS 2 7B GND = FMS 2 NAV SOURCE 1 6
1
NOTES: 1 STD 350 MA OUTPUT FOR REMOTE ANNUNCIATORS.

2 VNAV ARM APPLIES TO SCN 403.X, 404.X AND 405.X.

DOPPLER SELF TEST APPLIES TO SCN 404.X AND 405.X.
4 VNAV COUPLED APPLIES TO SCN 403.X, 404.X AND 405.X.
5 GO AROUND APPLIES TO SCN 404.X AND 405.X.

6 FMS #1 AND #2 NAV APPLY TO SCN 402.X, 404.X AND 405.X.
7 GROUND MP11J FOR FMS #2 AND FMS #3 THAT LISTENS FOR

#2 SIDE VOR AND DME.
8 GROUND MP11K FOR FMS #3 (UNCONDITIONAL).
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

Sheet 5 of 5
Page 328
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
B. NCU (P/N 1190–01–1XXX) Wiring
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X
The following wiring diagrams, (seven sheets) represent the basic wiring for NCU P/N
1190–01–1XXX.
NCU P/N 1190–01–1111 is standard analog and digital interfaces.
NCU P/N 1190–01–1113 is standard analog and digital interfaces with ac analog pitch
steering.
Page 329
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU CDU

(P/N 1190-01-1XXX) (P/N 1016-X-XX)
MP P1 P1
4 5 OR 28 VDC 4
CDU DATA CDU
OUTPUT B 2F B LTG L F 20
C
A 2A J
CDU DATA
INPUT B 2B K
L
BP
PWR CONTROL 4 R

5 (IF INSTALLED)
ON BATT ANNUNCIATOR
(GND = ON)
DC RETURN 8 16
CHASSIS GND 7 16
MP
26 Vac H 26 VDC
1E 1 AIRCRAFT BUS
INSTRUMENT
REVERENCE L 1F
TO #2 FMS IF INSTALLED
ANALOG H 9D
HEADING DTU
REVERENCE L 9E (P/N 1405-XX-X)
P1 P1
DTU 28 VDC 28 VDC
DATA
BUS B 8K B
DC RETURN P
5
PORTABLE DTU DETAIL


1 A
5 DTU DATA
3 28 VDC BATTERY INPUT APPLIES ONLY IF EMERGENCY

22 AWG 12 DC RETURN
BUS
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO DETERMINE AND J1
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

NCU (P/N 1190–01–1XXX) Wiring
Sheet 1 of 7
Page 330
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-01-1XXX)
MP
MSG 13A
WPT 13B
FMS REMOTE FMS
HDG 13E
26 VAC H 11D 1 26 VAC AIRCRAFT BUS

A/P REF
L 11E
(P/N 11901)
CONFIGURATION
24 AWG YELLOW
2
GND
STRUT SWITCH 15K 3
DISCRETE
AIR
F/D SWITCH HSI
H 5C UNIT
DATA
4 L 5D
ARINC H 5A
561 SYNC
OUTPUT L 5B
H 5E 4
CLK
L 5F
DIGITAL VALID 5G
4 TO 5J
FROM 5K


THROUGH THE CDU.
4 PINS MP5A THRU MP5K NOT APPLICABLE TO NCU
P/N 1190-01-1110.
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

Sheet 2 of 7
Page 331
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-01-1XXX)
MP
F/D SWITCH HSI
R 3F UNIT
LATERAL
DEV. (XTK) L 3G
HI LVL NAV VALID 3H
LO LVL NAV VALID 3J

NAV VALID RETURN 3K
UP 7F
VERTICAL
DEV DN 7G
HI LVL VERT VALID 7H
LO LVL VERT VALID 7J

VERT VALID RETURN 7K
F/D
3 FMS VALID 13F SWITCH
VHF NAV
UNIT
F/D NAV CONTROL
FMS NAV
SELECT
X 1A
SYNCHRO
WAYPOINT Y 1B
BEARING-D/A
Z 1C
1
SIN 1A
RESOLVER
WAYPOINT COS 1B
BEARING-D/A
COM 1D
X 3A
SYNCHRO
DESIRED Y 3B
TRACK
Z 3C
2
SIN 3A
RESOLVER
DESIRED COS 3B
TRACK
COM 3D
NOTES: 1 USE EITHER SYNCHRO OR RESOLVER BEARING OUTPUT, NOT BOTH.
2 USE EITHER SYNCHRO OR RESOLVER DESIRED TRACK, NOT BOTH.
3 WITH THE EXCEPTION OF PIN MP13F, THIS SHEET DOES NOT APPLY
TO NCU P/N 1190-01-1110.
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

Sheet 3 of 7
Page 332
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-01-1XXX)
MP
X 9A #1 COMPASS
SYNCHRO SYSTEM
2 HEADING Y 9B
INPUT
Z 9C
2
HDG VALID INPUT 9F
SYNCHRO HDG INPUT 9G

SELECT (MAG/TRUE)
1
ROLL STRG VALID 11C FD/AP COMPUTER

R 11A
ROLL STRG
OUTPUT L 11B
A 14E
(CSDB) INPUT
(FGS) PORT #4 B 14F
H 15A
#1
L 15B
H 15C
#2
L 15D
FUEL AIRCRAFT FUEL FLOW SYSTEM
FLOW (DC LINEAR, AC LINEAR,
H 15E PULSE FREQUENCY, PULSE WIDTH)
#3
L 15F
H 15G
#4
L 15H
NOTES: 1 OPEN = MAGNETIC, 28 VDC = TRUE

2 PINS MP9A, 9B, 9C, 9F AND 9G NOT APPLICABLE TO NCU
P/N 1190-01-1110.
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

Sheet 4 of 7
Page 333
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU (P/N 1055 OR
(P/N 1190-01-1XXX) 1056-01-( ))
MP
A 2J RTU
(CSDB) OUTPUT (IF INSTALLED)
(RTU) PORT #1 B 2K
1
A 2G
RTU/MFD INPUT
CSDB PORT #2 B 2H
FREQ MGMT ENABLE 6A GND IF APPLICABLE
TUNE OUTPUT A 10A

CSDB PORT #2
B 10B
DME INPUT A 14A

CSDB TYPE
CSDB PORT #3 RADIO'S DME/VOR 2 3 4
B 14B
VOR INPUT A 14C

CSDB PORT #1
B 14D
(ARINC OUTPUT A 12E

429 HS) CROSSIDE FMS
PORT #3 IF INSTALLED
(XFILL) B 12F
A 8G 1) XFILL, IF CROSSIDE FMS IS INSTALLED

(ARINC INPUT 2) AFIS
429/571) PORT #7 3) POSITION SENSOR
B 8H
NOTES: 1 REFER TO UNS RTU INSTALLATION AND SPECIFICATION MANUAL,

REPORT NO. 2222 FOR WIRING INFORMATION.
2 IF RTU, P/N 1055 IS INSTALLED, CONNECT THE CSDB TYPE RADIOS

THROUGH THE RTU, AND NOT AS SHOWN.
3 IF RTU, P/N 1056-01-( ) IS INSTALLED, THE CSDB RADIO INTERFACE

SHOWN IS NOT APPLICABLE.
4 RS-422 NRZ DATA FORMAT FOR ALL CSDB LISTINGS.
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

Sheet 5 of 7
Page 334
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-01-1XXX)
MP
(ARINC OUTPUT A 4J
429 LS) PORT #2A
B 4K
(ARINC OUTPUT A 12J

429 LS) PORT #2B
B 12K
(ARINC OUTPUT A 4A
429 HS) PORT #0A
B 4B
(ARINC OUTPUT A 12A

429 HS) PORT #0B
B 12B
1) POSITION SENSORS
2) RADAR
(ARINC INPUT A 4C 3) ARINC DME/VOR
429/571) PORT #0 4) AFIS 1
B 4D 5) CD-2000 CABIN DISPLAY (OUTPUTS ONLY)
6) MLS
(ARINC INPUT A 4G
429/571) PORT #1
B 4H
(ARINC INPUT A 12C

429/571) PORT #2
B 12D
(ARINC INPUT A 12G

429/571) PORT #3
B 12H
(ARINC INPUT A 8A
1) IRS3
429/571) PORT #4 2) AHRS1
B 8B
NOTES: 1 CAUTION: DO NOT CONNECT AFIS TO PORT 0 OR PORT 8

FOR USE WITH NCU SCN 400.X, 401.X,
402.X, 403.X OR 404.X.
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

Sheet 6 of 7
Page 335
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-01-1XXX)
MP
(ARINC INPUT A 8C
1) IRS2
429/571) PORT #5 2) AHRS2
B 8D
1) POSITION SENSORS
A 8E 2) RADAR
(ARINC INPUT 3) ARINC DME/VOR
429/571) PORT #6 IRS1 4) AFIS
B 8F
5) MLS
(ARINC OUTPUT A 4E
571) PORT #1
B 4F
VNAV ARM INPUT 6B 4
VNAV ARM, DOPPLER 6C 5

SELF TEST OR SPARE
VNAV COUPLED INPUT 6E 6
GO AROUND (PROV) 6F 7
DISCRETE INPUT
SPERRY VNAV CAPTURE 6G GND IF APPLICABLE
561 DIST FORMAT 6H OPEN = 0-3999.9 NM

GND = 0-399.9 NM 2
OPEN = NORMAL-ENROUTE/ANGULAR-APPROACH
11 LAT DEV. SCALING 6J GND = EXPANDED-ENROUTE/LINEAR-APPROACH 2
PITCH COMMAND VALID 2, 7A 8

PL4 FMS #1 NAV,
DOPPLER SEA STATE, OR
SPARE DISCRETE OUT
PL4 FMS #2 NAV, 7B 8
DOPPLER MODE, GPS
INTEG MON, OR SPARE
DISCRETE OUT
1 MAG/TRUE OUT SEL 11H OPEN = MAGNETIC, GND = TRUE
(ALT) MAG/TRUE OUT SEL 11G OPEN = MAGNETIC, 28 VDC = TRUE
NOTES: 1 USE ONE OR THE OTHER MAG/TRUE OUTPUT SELECTS, BUT NOT BOTH.
2 PINS MP6G, 6H AND 6J NOT APPLICABLE TO NCU P/N 1190-01-1110.
3 (NOT APPLICABLE)

DOPPLER SELF TEST APPLIES TO SCN 404.X.
6 VNAV COUPLED APPLIES TO SCN 403.X AND 405.X.

8 FMS #1 AND #2 NAV APPLY TO SCN 402.X AND 404.X.
9 GROUND MP11J FOR FMS #2 AND FMS #3 THAT LISTENS FOR #2 SIDE VOR AND DME.
11 LAT DEV SCALING (MP6J) APPLIES TO SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X AND 404.X.
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

Sheet 7 of 7
Page 336
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
C. NCU (P/N 1190–02–1XXX) Wiring
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X
The following wiring diagrams (eight sheets) represent the basic wiring for NCU P/N 1190–
02–1111.
NCU P/N 1190–02–1111 supports 565 analog air data in plus standard analog and digital
out.
NCU P/N 1190–02–1113 supports 565 analog air data in, standard analog and digital out and
ac analog pitch steering.
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-02-1XXX)
TP
SIG 3G
SAT REF 3E
COM 3F
SIG 3C
TAS/IAS REF 3A
COM 3B
ALT CRS SYNC X/SIG 1H
ALT CRS SYNC Y/REF 15V 1J

ALT CRS SYNC Z/COM 1K REFER TO
NCU TO ADC
WIRING DIAGRAM
IN THE RADIO
ALT FINE X/SIN 1D INTERFACE-GENERAL
SECTION
ALT FINE Y/COS 1E
ALT FINE Z/COM 1F
ALT INPUT 26 VAC REF 1A
ALT INPUT 26 VAC REF RTN 1B

(28 VDC) TAS/IAS IN VALID 5A
(28 VDC) SAT INPUT VALID 5E
(28 VDC) ALT INPUT VALID 3J
(GND) ALT INPUT VALID 3K
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

Sheet 1 of 8
Page 337
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU CDU
(P/N 1190-02-1XXX) (P/N 1016-X-XX)
MP P1 P1
4 5 OR 28 VDC 4
CDU DATA CDU
C
A 2A J
CDU DATA
INPUT B 2B K
L
BP
PWR CONTROL 4 R

5 (IF INSTALLED)
ON BATT ANNUNCIATOR
(GND = ON)
DC RETURN 8 16
CHASSIS GND 7 16
MP
26 VAC H 1E 1 26 VAC AIRCRAFT BUS
INSTR
REF L 1F
ANALOG H 9D
HDG REF DTU
L 9E (P/N 1405-XX-X)
P1 P1
DTU 28 VDC 28 VDC
DATA
BUS B 8K B
DC RETURN P
5
PORTABLE DTU DETAIL

1 A
22 AWG 12 DC RETURN
BUS
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO DETERMINE AND
VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER J1
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

Sheet 2 of 8
Page 338
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-02-1XXX)
MP
MSG 13A
WPT 13B
FMS REMOTE FMS
HDG 13E

A/P REF
L 11E
(P/N 11901)
CONFIGURATION
24 AWG YELLOW
2
GND
STRUT SWITCH 15K 3
DISCRETE
AIR
F/D SWITCH HSI
H 5C UNIT
DATA
L 5D
ARINC H 5A
561 SYNC
OUTPUT L 5B
H 5E
CLK
L 5F
DIGITAL VALID 5G
TO 5J
FROM 5K


THROUGH THE CDU.

400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

Sheet 3 of 8
Page 339
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-02-1XXX)
MP
F/D SWITCH HSI
R 3F UNIT
LATERAL
DEV. (XTK) L 3G
HI LVL NAV VALID 3H

LO LVL NAV VALID 3J
NAV VALID RETURN 3K
UP 7F
VERTICAL
DEV DN 7G


F/D
FMS VALID 13F SWITCH
VHF NAV
UNIT
F/D NAV CONTROL
FMS NAV
SELECT
X 1A
SYNCHRO
WAYPOINT Y 1B
BEARING-D/A
Z 1C
1
SIN 1A
RESOLVER
WAYPOINT COS 1B
BEARING-D/A
COM 1D
X 3A
SYNCHRO
DESIRED Y 3B
TRACK
Z 3C
2
SIN 3A
RESOLVER
DESIRED COS 3B
TRACK
COM 3D

400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

Sheet 4 of 8
Page 340
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-02-1XXX)
MP
X 9A #1 COMPASS
SYNCHRO SYSTEM
HEADING Y 9B
INPUT
Z 9C
HDG VALID INPUT 9F

SELECT (MAG/TRUE)
1

R 11A
ROLL STRG
OUTPUT L 11B
A 14E
(CSDB) INPUT
(FGS) PORT #4 B 14F
H 15A
#1
L 15B
H 15C
#2
L 15D
#3
L 15F
H 15G
#4
L 15H
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

Sheet 5 of 8
Page 341
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(P/N 1190-02-1XXX) 1056-01-( ))
MP
A 2J RTU
(RTU) PORT #1 B 2K
1
A 2G
RTU/MFD INPUT
CSDB PORT #2 B 2H
TUNE OUTPUT A 10A

CSDB PORT #2
B 10B
DME INPUT A 14A

CSDB TYPE
B 14B
VOR INPUT A 14C

CSDB PORT #1
B 14D
(ARINC OUTPUT A 12E

(XFILL) B 12F

B 8H



400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

Sheet 6 of 8
Page 342
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-02-1XXX)
MP
(ARINC OUTPUT A 4J
429 LS) PORT #2A
B 4K
(ARINC OUTPUT A 12J

429 LS) PORT #2B
B 12K
(ARINC OUTPUT A 4A
429 HS) PORT #0A
B 4B
(ARINC OUTPUT A 12A

429 HS) PORT #0B
B 12B
1) POSITION SENSORS
2) RADAR
429/571) PORT #0 4) AFIS 1
6) MLS
(ARINC INPUT A 4G
429/571) PORT #1
B 4H
(ARINC INPUT A 12C

429/571) PORT #2
B 12D
(ARINC INPUT A 12G

429/571) PORT #3
B 12H
(ARINC INPUT A 8A
1) IRS3
429/571) PORT #4 2) AHRS1
B 8B

402.X, 403.X OR 404.X.
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

Sheet 7 of 8
Page 343
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-02-1XXX)
MP
(ARINC INPUT A 8C
1) IRS2
429/571) PORT #5 2) AHRS2
B 8D
1) POSITION SENSORS
A 8E 2) RADAR
429/571) PORT #6 IRS1 4) AFIS
B 8F
5) MLS
(ARINC OUTPUT A 4E
571) PORT #1
B 4F
VNAV ARM INPUT 6B 3
VNAV ARM, DOPPLER 6C 4

SELF TEST OR SPARE
VNAV COUPLED INPUT 6E 5
DISCRETE INPUT
SPERRY VNAV CAPTURE 6G GND IF APPLICABLE
561 DIST FORMAT 6H OPEN = 0-3999.9 NM

GND = 0-399.9 NM
OPEN = NORMAL-ENROUTE/ANGULAR-APPROACH
10 LAT DEV. SCALING 6J GND = EXPANDED-ENROUTE/LINEAR-APPROACH
PITCH COMMAND VALID 2, 7A 7

PL4 FMS #1 NAV,
DOPPLER SEA STATE, OR
SPARE DISCRETE OUT
PL4 FMS #2 NAV, 7B 7
DOPPLER MODE, GPS
INTEG MON, OR SPARE
DISCRETE OUT
2 (NOT APPLICABLE)

DOPPLER SELF TEST APPLIES TO SCN 404.X.
5 VNAV COUPLED APPLIES TO SCN 403.X AND 405.X.
7 FMS #1 AND #2 NAV APPLY TO SCN 402.X AND 404.X.
10 LAT DEV SCALING (MP6J) APPLIES TO SCN 400.X, 401.X, 414.X, 402.X, 403.X AND 404.X.
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

Sheet 8 of 8
Page 344
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
D. NCU (P/N 1190–03–1XXX) Wiring
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X
The following wiring diagrams (eight sheets) represent the basic wiring for NCU P/N 1190–
03–1XXX.
NCU P/N 1190–03–1112 contains a second Double Density ARINC board for 16 inputs and
eight outputs with no analog in or out except fuel flow.
NCU P/N 1190–03–1114 contains an Avionics Standard Communications Bus (ASCB)
board in place of the second Double Density ARINC board. This configuration supports
aircraft equipped with ASCB and with no need for analog interfaces other than annunciators
and fuel flow inputs.
Page 345
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU CDU
(P/N 1190-03-1XXX) (P/N 1016-X-XX)
MP P1 P1
4 5 OR 28 VDC 4
CDU DATA CDU
C
A 2A J
CDU DATA
INPUT B 2B K
L
BP
PWR CONTROL 4 R

5 (IF INSTALLED)
ON BATT ANNUNCIATOR
(GND = ON)
DC RETURN 8 16
CHASSIS GND 7 16
DTU
(P/N 1405-XX-X)
MP P1 P1
DTU 28 VDC 28 VDC
DATA
BUS B 8K B
DC RETURN P
5
PORTABLE DTU DETAIL

1 A
22 AWG 12 DC RETURN
BUS
VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER J1
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

Sheet 1 of 8
Page 346
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-03-1XXX)
MP
MSG 13A
WPT 13B
FMS REMOTE FMS
HDG 13E

A/P REF
L 11E 16
(P/N 11901)
CONFIGURATION
24 AWG YELLOW
2
GND
STRUT SWITCH 15K 3
DISCRETE
AIR
(ARINC OUTPUT A 1A
429 HS) PORT #4A 4
B 1B
(ARINC OUTPUT A 5A
429 HS) PORT #4B
B 5B
(ARINC
429 HS) OUTPUT A 5E
(XFILL) PORT #7 1) POSITION SENSORS
B 5F
2) RADAR
A 1J 3) ARINC DME/VOR
(ARINC OUTPUT 4) AFIS
429 HS) PORT #6A
B 1K
(ARINC OUTPUT A 5J
429 HS) PORT #6B
B 5K
(ARINC OUTPUT A 1E
429/571) PORT #5
B 1F


THROUGH THE CDU.

4 THESE ARINC OUTPUT PORTS APPLY ONLY TO NCU

P/N 1190-03-1112.
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

Sheet 2 of 8
Page 347
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-03-1112 ONLY)
MP
(ARINC INPUT A 1C
429/571) PORT #8
B 1D
(ARINC INPUT A 1G
429/571) PORT #9
B 1H
(ARINC INPUT A 5C
429/571) PORT #10
B 5D
(ARINC INPUT A 5G
429/571) PORT #11 1) POSITION SENSORS
B 5H
2) RADAR
A 3A 3) ARINC DME/VOR
429/571) PORT #12 1
B 3B
(ARINC INPUT A 3C
429/571) PORT #13
B 3D
(ARINC INPUT A 3E
429/571) PORT #14
B 3F
(ARINC INPUT A 3G
429/571) PORT #15
B 3H
NOTES: 1 CAUTION: DO NOT CONNECT AFIS TO PORT 0 OR PORT 8 FOR USE

WITH NCU SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X OR 404.X.
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

Sheet 3 of 8
Page 348
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-03-1XXX)
MP
FMS VALID 13F

R 11A
ROLL STRG
OUTPUT L 11B
A 14E
(CSDB) INPUT
(FGS) PORT #4 B 14F
H 15A
#1
L 15B
H 15C
#2
L 15D
#3
L 15F
H 15G
#4
L 15H
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

Sheet 4 of 8
Page 349
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(P/N 1190-03-1XXX) 1056-01-( ))
MP
A 2J RTU
(RTU) PORT #1 B 2K
1
A 2G
(CSDB) INPUT
(RTU) PORT #2 B 2H
(CSDB) OUTPUT A 10A

(TUNE) PORT #2
B 10B
(CSDB) INPUT A 14A

CSDB TYPE
(DME) PORT #3 RADIO'S DME/VOR 2 3 4
B 14B
(CSDB) INPUT A 14C

(VOR) PORT #1
B 14D
(ARINC OUTPUT A 12E

(XFILL) B 12F

B 8H



400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

Sheet 5 of 8
Page 350
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-03-1XXX)
MP
(ARINC OUTPUT A 4J
429 LS) PORT #2A
B 4K
(ARINC OUTPUT A 12J

429 LS) PORT #2B
B 12K
(ARINC OUTPUT A 4A
429 HS) PORT #0A
B 4B
(ARINC OUTPUT A 12A

429 HS) PORT #0B
B 12B
1) POSITION SENSORS
2) RADAR
4) AFIS 1
429/571) PORT #0
6) MLS
(ARINC INPUT A 4G
429/571) PORT #1
B 4H
(ARINC INPUT A 12C

429/571) PORT #2
B 12D
(ARINC INPUT A 12G

429/571) PORT #3
B 12H
(ARINC INPUT A 8A
1) IRS3
429/571) PORT #4 2) AHRS1
B 8B

402.X, 403.X OR 404.X.
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

Sheet 6 of 8
Page 351
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-03-1XXX)
MP
(ARINC INPUT A 8C
1) IRS2
429/571) PORT #5 2) AHRS2
B 8D
1) POSITION SENSORS
A 8E 2) RADAR
429/571) PORT #6 IRS1 4) AFIS
B 8F
5) MLS
(ARINC OUTPUT A 4E
571) PORT #1
B 4F
DOPPLER SELF TEST OR 6C 3

SPARE DISRETE OUTPUT
DISCRETE INPUT
DOPPLER SEA STATE, OR 7A 5

SPARE DISCRETE OUTPUT
GPS INTEG MONITOR, OR 7B 5

SPARE DISCRETE OUTPUT
2 (NOT APPLICABLE)
3 DOPPLER SELF TEST APPLIES TO SCN 404.X AND 405.X.
5 DOPPLER SEA STATE, DOPPLER MODE AND GPS INTEGRITY MONITOR APPLY TO SCN 404.X AND 405.X.
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

Sheet 7 of 8
Page 352
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-03-1114)
MP
ASCB A DATA + 1A
ASCB A DATA - 1B
ASCB DISCRETE IN 5 1C
ASCB DISCRETE IN 1 1D
ASCB B CLK + 1G
ASCB B CLK - 1H
ASCB DISCRETE IN 2 1J
ASCB DISCRETE IN 6 1K
ASCB DISCRETE OUT 8 3A
ASCB DISCRETE OUT 4 3B
ASCB DISCRETE OUT 7 3C
ASCB DISCRETE OUT 3 3D
ASCB DISCRETE OUT 6 3E
ASCB DISCRETE OUT 2 3F
ASCB DISCRETE OUT 5 3G
ASCB DISCRETE OUT 1 3H
ASCB B DATA + 5A
ASCB B DATA - 5B
ASCB DISCRETE IN 3 5E
ASCB DISCRETE IN 7 5F
ASCB A CLK + 5G
ASCB A CLK - 5H
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

Sheet 8 of 8
Page 353
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
E. NCU to CDU 400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

#1 CDU
UNS-1B NCU P/N 1016-X-XXX 5
(P/N 1190-XX-1XXX) MP
A 2E A
CDU DATA 1
OUTPUT B
B 2F
C
CDU DATA A 2A J
INPUT #1 2
B 2B K
L
R
CDU DATA A 2C
INPUT #2 M
B 2D
P
BP
DC POWER +28 V 6 20
OUTPUT TO
CDU GND 11 20
3
POWER ON 4
6 CONTROL PANEL 20 E
INPUT
LTG 7
20 F
#2 CDU
P/N 1016-X-XXX 5
A
1
B
C
J
2
K
L
AC +28 VDC POWER 20 M

2A
4 8 P
PANEL 20 E
LTG 7
20 F
1 BOTH CDUS CAN RECEIVE FROM THE NCU TRANSMIT BUS.
2 AT ANY GIVEN TIME, ONLY ONE CDU CAN TRANSMIT DATA TO THE NCU.
3 THE NCU PROVIDES FILTERED DC POWER FOR ONE CDU ONLY. REFER TO NOTE 4.
4 DC POWER FOR THE #2 CDU IS TO BE SUPPLIED FROM AIRCRAFT +28 VDC POWER THROUGH A CIRCUIT BREAKER AS SHOWN.
5 IF SCDU IS BEING USED WITH NCU P/N 1190-XX-2XXX, IT MUST BE SCN 5.0 OR LATER TO BE COMPATIBLE.
6 EACH CDU HAS THE ABILITY TO TURN ON THE NCU. THE NCU REMAINS ON UNTIL ALL CDUS ARE TURNED OFF.
7 CDU LIGHTING POWER INPUT (5 OR 28 VDC) IS DEPENDENT UPON CDU PART NUMBER.
8 USE TRANSORB FOR ADDITIONAL SPIKE PROTECTION (TRANSORB P/N IN6284A. REFER TO UNC SERVICE LETTER 2716A.
400.X 401.X 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X

UNS–1B NCU (P/N 1190–XX–1XXX) To Super CDU
Page 354
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
4. NCU Wiring P/N 1190–XX–2XXX 600.X

A. NCU (P/N 1190–01–2110 and 1190–03–2112) Wiring—Collins Pro Line 4 600.X
The following wiring diagrams (seven sheets) represent the basic wiring for NCU P/N 1190–
01–2110 and 1190–03–2112 when installed as an external navigator with Collins Pro Line 4
Avionics System.
NCU P/N 1190–03–2112 has two double density ARINC boards.
Page 355
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU SCDU P/N 1016-X-XXX
(P/N 1190-01-2110 OR 9
or 1190-03-2112) FPCDU P/N 1018-X-XXX
MP 8 P1
A 2E A H E PANEL LIGHTING 4
CDU DATA SCDU
OUTPUT 4 LTG
B 2F B L F 20
C
P2
A 2A J 28 VDC H E 20 28 VDC
CDU DATA
INPUT B 2B K FPCDU
L F 20 PANEL LIGHTING 6
LTG
L 5 VDC H G 5 VDC
BP 6 20

P1
RED A
PWR CONTROL 4 R
RED RTN B
GREEN C
VIDEO APPLICABLE
GREEN RTN D ONLY TO FPCDU
VIDEO
BLUE E P/N 1018-2-XXX 7
7
BLUE RTN F
SYNC G
SYNC RTN H
28 VDC
28 VDC IN 2 16 5 AIRCRAFT BUS

5 (IF INSTALLED)
DC RETURN 8 16
CHASSIS GND 7 16
TO #2 FMS
DTU
(P/N 1405-XX-X)
MP P1 P1
DTU 28 VDC 28 VDC
DATA
BUS B 8K B
DC RETURN P
5
PORTABLE DTU DETAIL

NOTES: 1. ALL WIRING TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE (P/N 1404-XX-XX)
INDICATED.
1 A
2. DO NOT 'DAISY CHAIN' SHIELD GROUNDS. DTU DATA
5
2 B OUTPUT
3 28 VDC BATTERY INPUT APPLIES ONLY IF
EMERGENCY BATTERY IS USED. 5
4 P1 PINS E AND F ARE APPLICABLE ONLY TO 22 AWG 12 DC RETURN
SCDU P/N 1016-X-XXX. CDU LIGHTING INPUT ARICRAFT
(5 OR 28 VDC) IS DEPENDENT UPON THE PART +28 VDC 22 AWG 13 28 VDC INPUT
NUMBER. REFER TO UNS-1B NCU TO SUPER CDU 1
BUS
WIRING DIAGRAM.
J1
5 REFER TO DETAIL FOR PORTABLE DTU OPTION.
6 P2 PINS E, F AND G ARE APPLICABLE ONLY TO FPCDU P/N 1018-X-XXX.
USE ONLY 5 OR 28 VDC, NOT BOTH. REFER TO UNS-1B NCU TO FPCDU
WIRING DIAGRAMS.
7 P1 PINS 1 THRU 8 ARE APPLICABLE ONLY TO FPCDU P/N 1018-2-XXX.
REFER TO UNS-1B NCU TO FPCDU WIRING DIAGRAMS.
8 P1 FOR SCDU P/N 1016-X-XXX. P2 FOR FPCDU P/N 1018-X-XXX.
9 SCDU P/N 1016-X-XXX MUST BE SCN 5.0 OR LATER TO BE COMPATIBLE WITH
NCU P/N 1190-XX-2XXX (SCN 600.X).

600.X
Sheet 1 of 7
Page 356
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-XX-2XXX)
BP
3 +28 VDC IN 2 16 AWG 5
EMERGENCY BATTERY
+28 VDC BATT IN 3 16 AWG 5 (IF INSTALLED)
DC RETURN 8 16 AWG
CHASSIS GND 7 16 AWG

4 FPCDU P/N 1117-XX
FMS ON BATTERY 1
ANNUNCIATOR OUT P1
5 4
+28 VDC POWER 6 20 AWG M H E 20 AWG 28 VDC
FPCDU
CDU DC RETURN 11 20 AWG P LIGHTING L F 20 AWG
POWER CONTROL 4 R H G 20 AWG 5 V (AC OR DC)
MP
2
A 2E A
CDU DATA
OUTPUT B 2F B
C
A 2A J
CDU DATA
INPUT #1 B 2B K
NOTES:
1 ALL WIRING TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
2 DO NOT DAISY CHAIN SHIELD GROUNDS.
3 BATTERY INPUT (28 V) APPLIES ONLY IF EMERGENCY BATTERY IS USED.
4 USE ONLY 5 V OR 28 VDC, NOT BOTH.

5 REFER TO THE NCU TO DUAL FPCDU WIRING DIAGRAM WHEN MORE THAN ONE FPCDU IS INSTALLED.
CAUTION: FPCDU LIGHTING CIRCUITS MAY BE DAMAGED IF P2 PINS E, F, AND G ARE WIRED
INCORRECTLY. THESE PIN ASSIGNMENTS FOR THE FPCDU ARE DIFFERENT FROM
THOSE FOR OTHER UASC CONTROL DISPLAY UNITS.
NCU Power and 4” FPCDU (P/N 1190–XX–2XXX)

Sheet 1a of 7
Page 357
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-01-2110
or 1190-03-2112)
MP
MSG ANNUNCIATOR 13A REMOTE MESSAGE ANNUNCIATOR
(P/N 11901)
CONFIGURATION
24 AWG YELLOW
2
UNS-1B
MP
(ARINC A 12E 8G NCU
429 HS) OUTPUT (CROSSIDE)
(XFILL) PORT #3
B 12F 8H
(ARINC INPUT A 8G 12E

429) PORT #7
B 8H 12F


THROUGH THE CDU.
600.X
Sheet 2 of 7
Page 358
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-01-2110 EFIS RADAR PANEL
or 1190-03-2112) 2 (P/N 1015-1-11)
MP P1
(CSDB) INPUT A 14C 13 H

(ERP) PORT #1 CSDB TRANSMIT
B 14D 25 L
5 A
AAP ALTITUDE
18 B KNOB
17 AAP ALTITUDE SWITCH

(GND = PRESSED)
19 AAP COMMON
7 A
AAP DECISION
20 B HEIGHT KNOB A
6 AAP DECISION HEIGHT

4 AAP MDA/RPT ALT
SEL (GND = RPT ALT)
9 A
CHP COURSE
22 B SELECT KNOB
1
10 A
CHP HEADING
23 B SELECT KNOB
21 CHP HEADING SYNC

8 CHP DTO SWITCH
(GND = PRESSED)
24 CHP COMMON
11 SPARE DISCRETE
INPUT #1
12 SPARE DISCRETE
INPUT #2
3 RTU 1 & 2 DISABLE
DISCRETE (GND = DISABLED)
28 VDC
AIRCRAFT BUS .5 1 +28 VDC
14 POWER RETURN
5 VDC 2 LIGHTING POWER
15 LIGHTING RETURN
GND = #1 ATC 16 ATC 1/2 SELECT DISCRETE
NOTES: 1 REFER TO COLLINS MANUAL.
2 MATING CONNECTOR IS M24308/2-2 OR AMP P/N 205557-3

(STANDARD DB-25S CONNECTOR).
600.X
Sheet 3 of 7
Page 359
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-01-2110
or 1190-03-2112)
MP
(ARINC OUTPUT A 4J
429 LS) PORT #2A
B 4K
GENERAL PURPOSE LS 429 OUTPUTS
(ARINC OUTPUT A 12J

429 LS) PORT #2B
B 12K
(ARINC OUTPUT A 4A
429 HS) PORT #0A IOC OUTPUT
B 4B
(ARINC OUTPUT A 4E
429 HS) PORT #1 MFD OUTPUT
B 4F
(ARINC OUTPUT A 12A

429 HS) PORT #0B GENERAL PURPOSE HS 429 OUTPUT
B 12B
(ARINC INPUT A 4C
LS 429/ PORT #0
571) B 4D
(ARINC INPUT A 4G
LS 429/ PORT #1
571) B 4H
(ARINC A 12C OPTIONAL DME, AFIS OR

LS 429/ INPUT
PORT #2 LRN SENSOR INPUTS
571) B 12D (LS 429 OR 571)
(ARINC A 12G
LS 429/ INPUT
571) PORT #3
B 12H
1
UNS-1B NCU
(ARINC (P/N 1190-03-1112)
LS 429/ INPUT A 8A
MP
571) PORT #4
B 8B 3E A
429 HS INPUT
IRS #1 PORT #14
3F B
3C A
429 HS INPUT
IRS #2 PORT #13
NOTES: 1 IF HS 429 INPUT (e.g. IRS) IS REQUIRED, 3D B
NCU P/N MUST BE 1190-03-2111 WITH
SECOND ARINC BOARD.
(REFER TO 1190-03-2XXX WIRING).
600.X
Sheet 4 of 7
Page 360
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-01-2110
or 1190-03-2112)
BP
LIST OF CONFIGURABLE
DISCRETE 1 OUT 1 1 OUTPUT SIGNALS
(GND/OPEN) (GND / OPEN)
MP APPROACH ANNUNCIATOR
DHC ARM ANNUNCIATOR
DISCRETE 2 OUT 13B 1 DHC VNAV ENGAGE REQUEST
(GND/OPEN) DOPPLER MODE
DOPPLER SEA STATE
DISCRETE 3 OUT 13C 1 DOPPLER SELF TEST
(GND/OPEN) FMS HEADING ANNUNCIATOR
GPS INTEGRITY
DISCRETE 4 OUT 13D 1 ON BATT ANNYNCIATOR
(GND/OPEN) PROLINE 4 FMS #1 NAV SOURCE
PROLINE 4 FMS #2 NAV SOURCE
DISCRETE 5 OUT 13E 1 SELECTED CROSSTRACK ANNUNCIATOR
(GND/OPEN) SPERRY VNAV FLAG
WAYPOINT ANNUNCIATOR
DISCRETE 6 OUT 7A 1
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 7 OUT 7B 1
(GND/OPEN) LIST OF CONFIGURABLE
OUTPUT SIGNALS
DISCRETE 8 OUT 6C 1 (28 V / OPEN)
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 9 OUT 13F 2 FMS VALID
(28 VDC/OPEN)
NOTES: 1 CONFIGURABLE GROUND/OPEN TYPE OUTPUT SIGNAL.

REFER TO THE LIST OF CONFIGURABLE OUTPUT SIGNALS.
2 CONFIGURABLE 28 VDC/OPEN TYPE OUTPUT SIGNAL.

600.X
Sheet 5 of 7
Page 361
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-01-2110
or 1190-03-2112)
MP
DISCRETE 1 IN 6G 1 LIST OF CONFIGURABLE

(GND/OPEN) INPUT SIGNALS
DISCRETE 2 IN 6H (GND / OPEN)
1
(GND/OPEN)
ARINC 561 DTG RESOLUTION
DISCRETE 3 IN 6J 1 ATC1 SELECT
(GND/OPEN) DHC VNAV COUPLED
FREQUENCY MANAGEMENT
DISCRETE 4 IN 15J 1 REVERSION TUNE ENAGLE
(GND/OPEN) SPERRY VNAV CAPTURE
STRUT DISCRETE
DISCRETE 5 IN 11G 2 TEST DISCRETE
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 5 IN 11H 2
(28 VDC/OPEN)
DISCRETE 6 IN 15K 1
DISCRETE 7 IN 6A INPUT SIGNALS
1 (28 V / OPEN)
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 8 IN 6E 1 DHC VNAV ARM
(GND/OPEN) MAGNETIC/TRUE SWITCH
MARK ON TARGET (SCN 70X ONLY)
DISCRETE 9 IN 6F 1
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 10 IN 6B 3
(28 VDC/OPEN)
NOTES: 1 CONFIGURABLE GROUND/OPEN TYPE INPUT SIGNAL.

REFER TO THE LIST OF CONFIGURABLE INPUT SIGNALS.
2 DISCRETE 5 INPUT CAN BE CONFIGURED AS EITHER A 28 VDC/OPEN

TYPE INPUT SIGNAL ON MP11H OR AS A GND/OPEN TYPE INPUT
SIGNAL ON MP11G, BUT NOT BOTH. REFER TO THE LIST OF
CONFIGURABLE INPUT SIGNALS.
3 CONFIGURABLE 28 VDC/OPEN TYPE INPUT SIGNAL.

600.X
Sheet 6 of 7
Page 362
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-01-2110
or 1190-03-2112)
MP
(ARINC INPUT A 8C
429 HS) PORT #5 OFFSIDE IOC INPUT
B 8D
(ARINC INPUT A 8E
429 HS) PORT #6 ONSIDE IOC INPUT
B 8F
NOTES: 1 GROUND MP11J FOR FMS #2 AND FMS #3 THAT LISTENS

FOR #2 SIDE VOR AND DME.
600.X
Sheet 7 of 7
Page 363
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
B. NCU (P/N 1190–01–2XXX) Wiring 600.X

The following wiring diagrams, (nine sheets) represent the basic wiring for NCU P/N 1190–
01–2XXX.
NCU P/N 1190–01–2111 is standard analog and digital interfaces.
NCU P/N 1190–01–2113 is standard analog and digital interfaces with ac analog pitch
steering.
Page 364
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
SCDU P/N 1016-X-XXX
UNS-1B NCU OR 9
(P/N 1190-01-2XXX) FPCDU P/N 1018-X-XXX
MP 8 P1
CDU DATA SCDU
OUTPUT 4 LTG
B 2F B L F 20
C
P2
CDU DATA
INPUT B 2B K FPCDU
LTG
L 5 VDC H G 5 VDC
BP 6 20
CDU 28 VDC PWR 6 20 M P1

RED A
PWR CONTROL 4 R
RED RTN B
GREEN C
VIDEO APPLICABLE
VIDEO
7
BLUE RTN F
SYNC G
SYNC RTN H
28 VDC

5 (IF INSTALLED)
DC RETURN 8 16
CHASSIS GND 7 16
MP
H 26 VAC TO #2 FMS
26 Vac 1E 1 AIRCRAFT
INSTRUMENT BUS
REVERENCE L 1F
ANALOG H 9D DTU
HEADING (P/N 1405-XX-X)
REVERENCE L 9E P1 P1
28 VDC 28 VDC
DTU A 8J A INPUT M 1 AIRCRAFT BUS
DATA
BUS B 8K B
DC RETURN P
5
PORTABLE DTU DETAIL

INDICATED.
1 A
5
2 B OUTPUT
BUS
WIRING DIAGRAM.
J1

WIRING DIAGRAMS.

REFER TO UNS-1B NCU TO FPCDU WIRING DIAGRAMS.


600.X
Sheet 1 of 9
Page 365
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-01-2XXX)
MP

A/P REF
L 11E
(P/N 11901)
CONFIGURATION
24 AWG YELLOW
2
F/D SWITCH HSI

H 5C UNIT
DATA
3 L 5D
ARINC H 5A
561 SYNC
OUTPUT L 5B
H 5E 3
CLK
L 5F
DIGITAL VALID 5G
3 TO 5J
FROM 5K

THROUGH THE CDU.
3 PINS MP5A THRU MP5K NOT APPLICABLE TO NCU
P/N 1190-01-2110.
600.X
Sheet 2 of 9
Page 366
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-01-2XXX)
MP
F/D SWITCH HSI
R 3F UNIT
LATERAL
DEV. (XTK) L 3G
HI LVL NAV VALID 3H

LO LVL NAV VALID 3J
NAV VALID RETURN 3K
UP 7F
VERTICAL
DEV DN 7G

F/D
3 (DISC 9 OUT) VHF NAV
UNIT
F/D NAV CONTROL
FMS NAV
SELECT
X 1A
SYNCHRO
WAYPOINT Y 1B
BEARING-D/A
Z 1C
1
SIN 1A
RESOLVER
WAYPOINT COS 1B
BEARING-D/A
COM 1D
X 3A
SYNCHRO
DESIRED Y 3B
TRACK
Z 3C
2
SIN 3A
RESOLVER
DESIRED COS 3B
TRACK
COM 3D

3 WITH THE EXCEPTION OF PIN MP13F, THIS SHEET DOES NOT APPLY
TO NCU P/N 1190-01-2110. MP13F IS CONFIGURABLE 28 VDC/OPEN
TYPE OUTPUT DISCRETE.
600.X
Sheet 3 of 9
Page 367
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-01-2XXX)
MP
X 9A #1 COMPASS
SYNCHRO SYSTEM
2 HEADING Y 9B
INPUT
Z 9C
2
HDG VALID INPUT 9F

SELECT (MAG/TRUE)
1

R 11A
ROLL STRG
OUTPUT L 11B
A 14E
(CSDB) INPUT
(FGS) PORT #4 B 14F
H 15A
#1
L 15B
H 15C
#2
L 15D
#3
L 15F
H 15G
#4
L 15H
2 PINS MP9A, 9B, 9C, 9F AND 9G NOT APPLICABLE TO NCU

P/N 1190-01-2110.
600.X
Sheet 4 of 9
Page 368
34–60–04 12 August, 2009

(P/N 1190-01-2XXX) 1056-01-( ))
MP
A 2J RTU
(RTU) PORT #1 B 2K
1
A 2G
RTU/MFD INPUT
CSDB PORT #2 B 2H
TUNE OUTPUT A 10A

CSDB PORT #2
B 10B
DME INPUT A 14A

CSDB TYPE
B 14B
VOR INPUT A 14C

CSDB PORT #1
B 14D
(ARINC OUTPUT A 12E

(XFILL) B 12F

B 8H


600.X
Sheet 5 of 9
Page 369
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-01-2XXX)
MP
(ARINC OUTPUT A 4J
429 LS) PORT #2A
B 4K
(ARINC OUTPUT A 12J

429 LS) PORT #2B
B 12K
(ARINC OUTPUT A 4A
429 HS) PORT #0A
B 4B
(ARINC OUTPUT A 12A

429 HS) PORT #0B
B 12B
1) POSITION SENSORS
(ARINC INPUT A 4C 2) RADAR
429/571) PORT #0 3) ARINC DME/VOR
B 4D 4) AFIS
5) CD-2000 CABIN DISPLAY (OUTPUTS ONLY)
(ARINC INPUT A 4G
429/571) PORT #1
B 4H
(ARINC INPUT A 12C

429/571) PORT #2
B 12D
(ARINC INPUT A 12G

429/571) PORT #3
B 12H
(ARINC INPUT A 8A
1) IRS3
429/571) PORT #4 2) AHRS1
B 8B
600.X
Sheet 6 of 9
Page 370
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-01-2XXX)
BP
DHC ARM ANNUNCIATOR
DHC VNAV ENGAGE REQUEST
DISCRETE 2 OUT 13B 1 DOPPLER MODE
(GND/OPEN) DOPPLER SEA STATE
DISCRETE 3 OUT 13C 1
DOPPLER SELF TEST
GPS INTEGRITY
DISCRETE 4 OUT 13D 1 ON BATT ANNUNCIATOR
DISCRETE 6 OUT 7A 1
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 7 OUT 7B 1
DISCRETE 8 OUT 6C OUTPUT SIGNALS
1 (28 V / OPEN)
(GND/OPEN)
(28 VDC/OPEN)


USED FOR FMS VALID IF APPLICABLE.
600.X
Sheet 7 of 9
Page 371
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-01-2XXX)
MP
DISCRETE 1 IN 6G 1 INPUT SIGNALS
DISCRETE 2 IN 6H 1
(GND/OPEN) ARINC 561 DTG RESOLUTION
ATC1 SELECT
DISCRETE 3 IN 6J 1 DHC VNAV COUPLED
(GND/OPEN) FREQUENCY MANAGEMENT
REVERSION TUNE ENABLE
DISCRETE 4 IN 15J 1 SPERRY VNAV CAPTURE
(GND/OPEN) STRUT DISCRETE
TEST DISCRETE
DISCRETE 5 IN 11G 2
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 5 IN 11H 2
(28 VDC/OPEN)
DISCRETE 6 IN 15K 1
INPUT SIGNALS
DISCRETE 7 IN 6A 1 (28 V / OPEN)
(GND/OPEN)
DHC VNAV ARM
DISCRETE 8 IN 6E 1 MAGNETIC/TRUE SWITCH
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 9 IN 6F 1
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 10 IN 6B 3
(28 VDC/OPEN)


600.X
Sheet 8 of 9
Page 372
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-01-2XXX)
MP
(ARINC INPUT A 8C
1) IRS2
429/571) PORT #5 2) AHRS2
B 8D
1) POSITION SENSORS
(ARINC INPUT A 8E 2) RADAR
429/571) PORT #6 IRS1 3) ARINC DME/VOR
B 8F 4) AFIS
(ARINC OUTPUT A 4E
571) PORT #1
B 4F
NOTES: 1 GROUND MP11K FOR FMS #3 (UNCONDITIONAL). GROUND MP11J FOR

FMS #2 AND FMS #3 THAT LISTENS FOR #2 SIDE VOR AND DME.
600.X
Sheet 9 of 9
Page 373
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
C. NCU (P/N 1190–02–2XXX) Wiring 600.X

The following wiring diagrams (ten sheets) represent the basic wiring for NCU P/N 1190–
02–2211.
NCU P/N 1190–02–2111 supports 565 analog air data in plus standard analog and digital
out.
NCU P/N 1190–02–2113 supports 565 analog air data in, standard analog and digital out and
ac analog pitch steering.
Page 374
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
SCDU P/N 1016-X-XXX

UNS-1B NCU OR 9
MP 8 P1
CDU DATA SCDU
OUTPUT 4 LTG
B 2F B L F 20
C
P
CDU DATA
INPUT B 2B K FPCDU
LTG
L 5 VDC H G 5 VDC
BP 6 20
CDU 28 VDC PWR 6 20 M P1
RED A
PWR CONTROL 4 R
RED RTN B
GREEN C
VIDEO APPLICABLE
VIDEO 7
BLUE E P/N 1018-2-XXX
7
BLUE RTN F
SYNC G
SYNC RTN H
28 VDC
EMER. BATT.
3 28 VDC BATT IN 3 16 5 16 (IF INSTALLED)
DC RETURN 8 16
CHASSIS GND 7 16
MP
26 VAC
26 VAC H 1E 1 AIRCRAFT TO #2 FMS
INSTRUMENT
BUS
REFERENCE L 1F
ANALOG H 9D 5
HEADING DTU 10
(P/N 1406-01-X)
REFERENCE L 9E P1 P1
DTU 28 VDC 28 VDC
DATA
BUS B 8K B
DC RETURN P
5
PORTABLE DTU
P/N 1404-XX-XX 5
NOTES: 1. ALL WIRING TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE 10 PORTABLE or DTU-100 P/N 1407-01-X
INDICATED. DTU CABLE
1 1 A
2. DO NOT 'DAISY CHAIN' SHIELD GROUNDS. DATA
2 2 B
EMERGENCY BATTERY IS USED. 5 5
4 P1 PINS E AND F ARE APPLICABLE ONLY TO 12 12 DC RTN
SCDU P/N 1016-X-XXX. CDU LIGHTING INPUT
(5 OR 28 VDC) IS DEPENDENT UPON THE PART 28VDC 1 13 13 28 VDC INPUT
NUMBER. REFER TO UNS-1B NCU TO SUPER CDU AIRCRAFT
WIRING DIAGRAM. BUS AIRCRAFT BULKHEAD
CONNECTOR
WIRING DIAGRAMS.
REFER TO UNS-1B NCU TO FPCDU WIRING DIAGRAMS (STANDARD RGB FORMAT).
10 P2 NOT USED.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO DETERMINE AND VERIFY

PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN
UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
600.X
Sheet 1 of 10
Page 375
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
FMS #1 SSDTU
UNS-1B P/N 1190-XX-2XXX 3 (P/N 1408-01-X)
MP P1
H 8J A EIA-485 SIDE A
RS-422
DTU DATA BUS
L 8K B EIA-485 SIDE B
20 L CHASSIS GROUND
C +
ETHERNET
RX CH1
D -
F +
ETHERNET
TX CH1
G -
E SHIELD
TO FMS #2
AND FMS #3 20 P DC RETURN
28 VDC M 28 VDC IN
AIRCRAFT BUS 1
P2
1 2
11 +
ETHERNET
RX CH2
4 -
18 +
ETHERNET
TX CH2
10 -
P2
1 2 19 SHIELD
51 +
ETHERNET 1 +
RX CH6 ETHERNET
55 - RX CH3
6 -
50 +
ETHERNET 2
TX CH6 + ETHERNET
54 - TX CH3
7 -
44 SHIELD
13 SHIELD
40 + ETHERNET
RX CH7 16 +
ETHERNET
41 - RX CH4
15 -
47 + ETHERNET
TX CH7 9 + ETHERNET
48 - TX CH4
8 -
42 SHIELD
23 SHIELD
36 +
ETHERNET 38 +
RX CH8 ETHERNET
28 - RX CH5
46 -
35 +
ETHERNET 31 +
TX CH8 ETHERNET
27 - TX CH5
39 -
29 SHIELD
30 SHIELD
NOTES:
1 USE ETHERNET CABLE ECS P/N 392404 OR THERMAX/CDT P/N 956-426 OR EQUIVALENT.
2 THE EXPOSED UNSHIELDED ETHERNET WIRE BETWEEN THE SHIELD AND THE CIRCULAR CONNECTOR SHOULD BE
LESS THAN 0.5 INCHES LONG.
3 UNS-1B FMS MUST BE SCN 600 OR LATER.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLERS RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN
600.X
Sheet 1a of 10
Page 376
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
FMS #1 SSDTU
UNS-1B P/N 1190-XX-2XXX 3 (P/N 1408-01-X)
MP P1
H 8J A EIA-485 SIDE A
RS-422
DTU DATA BUS
L 8K B EIA-485 SIDE B
20 L CHASSIS GROUND
C +
ETHERNET
RX CH1
D -
F +
ETHERNET
TX CH1
G -
E SHIELD
TO FMS #2
AND FMS #3 20 P DC RETURN
28 VDC M 28 VDC IN
AIRCRAFT BUS 1
P2
1 2
11 +
ETHERNET
RX CH2
4 -
18 +
ETHERNET
TX CH2
10 -
P2
1 2 19 SHIELD
51 +
ETHERNET 1 +
RX CH6 ETHERNET
55 - RX CH3
6 -
50 +
ETHERNET 2
TX CH6 + ETHERNET
54 - TX CH3
7 -
44 SHIELD
13 SHIELD
40 + ETHERNET
RX CH7 16 +
ETHERNET
41 - RX CH4
15 -
47 + ETHERNET
TX CH7 9 + ETHERNET
48 - TX CH4
8 -
42 SHIELD
23 SHIELD
36 +
ETHERNET 38 +
RX CH8 ETHERNET
28 - RX CH5
46 -
35 +
ETHERNET 31 +
TX CH8 ETHERNET
27 - TX CH5
39 -
29 SHIELD
30 SHIELD
NOTES:
3 UNS-1B FMS MUST BE SCN 600 OR LATER.
600.X
Sheet 1b of 10
Page 377
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
PORTABLE SSDTU
J1 BULKHEAD HARNESS (P/N 1409-00-2)
CONNECTOR 5 P/N 81304072 P1
TO FMS #2
AND FMS #3 9 9 C +
ETHERNET
RX CH1
8 8 D -
3 4
FMS #1
UNS-1B P/N 1190-XX-XXXX 2 6 6 F +
P3 ETHERNET
TX CH1
7 7 G -
5 5 E SHIELD
H NN 1 1 A H
RS-422
DTU DATA BUS EIA-485 DATA
L PP 2 2 B L
12 12 P DC RETURN
20 11 11 L CHASSIS GROUND
28 VDC 20 13 M 28 VDC IN
AIRCRAFT BUS 1 13
J2 BULKHEAD HARNESS
CONNECTOR 5 P/N 81140811 P2
11 11 11 +
ETHERNET
RX CH2
4 4 4 -
3 4
18 18 18 +
ETHERNET
TX CH2
10 10 10 -
19 19 19 SHIELD #2
1 1 1 +
ETHERNET
RX CH3
6 6 6 -
2 2 2 + ETHERNET
TX CH3
7 7 7 -
13 13 13 SHIELD #3
16 16 16 +
ETHERNET
RX CH4
15 15 15 -
9 9 9 +
ETHERNET
TX CH4
8 8 8 -
23 23 23 SHIELD #4
NOTES:
1. THE DASHED LINES BETWEEN THE PORTABLE DTU AND P1 AND P2 CONNECTORS REPRESENT A WIRING HARNESS
WHICH IS PART OF THEPORTABLE DTU.
2 FMS MUST BE SCN 600 OR LATER.
5 THE PORTABLE SSDTU MAY BE USED IN PLACE OF THE PORTABLE DTU BY USING WIRING HARNESS P/N 81304072 TO
CONNECT J1 AND P/N 81140811 TO CONNECT J2 OF THE SSDTU TO BULKHEAD CONNECTORS USED FOR THE PORTABLE
DTU. USING THE SSDTU IN THIS CONFIGURATION LIMITS THE ETHERNET PORTS TO #1-4, PORTS #5-7 ARE NOT AVAILABLE
IN THIS CONFIGURATION.
600.X
Sheet 1c of 10
Page 378
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-02-2XXX)
TP
SIG 3G
SAT REF 3E
COM 3F
SIG 3C
TAS/IAS REF 3A
COM 3B
ALT CRS SYNC X/SIG 1H
ALT CRS SYNC Y/REF 15V 1J
ALT CRS SYNC Z/COM 1K REFER TO

NCU TO ADC
WIRING DIAGRAM
FOUND IN THE RADIO
ALT FINE X/SIN 1D INTERFACE-GENERAL
SECTION
ALT FINE Y/COS 1E
ALT FINE Z/COM 1F
ALT INPUT 26 VAC REF 1A
ALT INPUT 26 VAC REF RTN 1B
(28 VDC) TAS/IAS IN VALID 5A

(28 VDC) SAT INPUT VALID 5E
(28 VDC) ALT INPUT VALID 3J
(GND) ALT INPUT VALID 3K
600.X
Sheet 2 of 10
Page 379
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-02-2XXX)
MP

A/P REF
L 11E
(P/N 11901)
CONFIGURATION
24 AWG YELLOW
2
F/D SWITCH HSI

H 5C UNIT
DATA
L 5D
ARINC H 5A
561 SYNC
OUTPUT L 5B
H 5E
CLK
L 5F
DIGITAL VALID 5G
TO 5J
FROM 5K

THROUGH THE CDU.
600.X
Sheet 3 of 10
Page 380
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-02-2XXX)
MP
F/D SWITCH HSI
R 3F UNIT
LATERAL
DEV. (XTK) L 3G
HI LVL NAV VALID 3H

LO LVL NAV VALID 3J
NAV VALID RETURN 3K
UP 7F
VERTICAL
DEV DN 7G


F/D
3 (DISC 9 OUT) VHF NAV UNIT
F/D NAV CONTROL
SELECT FMS NAV
X 1A
SYNCHRO
WAYPOINT Y 1B
BEARING-D/A
Z 1C
1
SIN 1A
RESOLVER
WAYPOINT COS 1B
BEARING-D/A
COM 1D
X 3A
SYNCHRO
DESIRED Y 3B
TRACK
Z 3C
2
SIN 3A
RESOLVER
DESIRED COS 3B
TRACK
COM 3D

3 MP13F IS CONFIGURABLE 28 VDC/OPEN TYPE OUTPUT DISCRETE.
600.X
Sheet 4 of 10
Page 381
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-02-2XXX)
MP
X 9A #1 COMPASS
SYNCHRO SYSTEM
HEADING Y 9B
INPUT
Z 9C
HDG VALID INPUT 9F

SELECT (MAG/TRUE)
1

R 11A
ROLL STRG
OUTPUT L 11B
A 14E
(CSDB) INPUT
(FGS) PORT #4 B 14F
H 15A
#1
L 15B
H 15C
#2
L 15D
#3
L 15F
H 15G
#4
L 15H
600.X
Sheet 5 of 10
Page 382
34–60–04 12 August, 2009

(P/N 1190-02-2XXX) 1056-01-( ))
MP
A 2J RTU
(RTU) PORT #1 B 2K
1
(CSDB) A 2G
INPUT
(RTU) PORT #2 B 2H
TUNE OUTPUT A 10A

CSDB PORT #2
B 10B
DME INPUT A 14A

CSDB TYPE
B 14B
VOR INPUT A 14C

CSDB PORT #1
B 14D
(ARINC OUTPUT A 12E

(XFILL) B 12F

B 8H


600.X
Sheet 6 of 10
Page 383
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-02-2XXX)
MP
(ARINC OUTPUT A 4J
429 LS) PORT #2A
B 4K
(ARINC OUTPUT A 12J

429 LS) PORT #2B
B 12K
(ARINC OUTPUT A 4A
429 HS) PORT #0A
B 4B
(ARINC OUTPUT A 12A

429 HS) PORT #0B
B 12B
1) POSITION SENSORS
(ARINC INPUT A 4C 2) RADAR
429/571) PORT #0 3) ARINC DME/VOR
B 4D 4) AFIS
5) CD-2000 CABIN DISPLAY (OUTPUTS ONLY)
(ARINC INPUT A 4G
429/571) PORT #1
B 4H
(ARINC INPUT A 12C

429/571) PORT #2
B 12D
(ARINC INPUT A 12G

429/571) PORT #3
B 12H
(ARINC INPUT A 8A
1) IRS3
429/571) PORT #4 2) AHRS1
B 8B
600.X
Sheet 7 of 10
Page 384
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-02-2XXX)
BP
DHC ARM ANNUNCIATOR
DISCRETE 2 OUT 13B 1 DOPPLER MODE
DISCRETE 3 OUT 13C DOPPLER SELF TEST
1
GPS INTEGRITY
DISCRETE 4 OUT 13D 1 ON BATT ANNUNCIATOR
DISCRETE 6 OUT 7A 1
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 7 OUT 7B 1
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 8 OUT 6C 1 OUTPUT SIGNALS
(GND/OPEN) (28 V / OPEN)
DISCRETE 9 OUT 13F 2
(28 VDC/OPEN) FMS VALID

600.X
Sheet 8 of 10
Page 385
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-02-2XXX)
MP
DISCRETE 1 IN 6G 1
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 2 IN 6H 1 LIST OF CONFIGURABLE
(GND / OPEN)
DISCRETE 3 IN 6J 1
(GND/OPEN) ARINC 561 DTG RESOLUTION
ATC1 SELECT
DISCRETE 4 IN 15J 1 DHC VNAV COUPLED
(GND/OPEN) FREQUENCY MANAGEMENT
DISCRETE 5 IN 11G REVERSION TUNE ENABLE
2
(GND/OPEN) SPERRY VNAV CAPTURE
STRUT DISCRETE
DISCRETE 5 IN 11H 2
TEST DISCRETE
(28 VDC/OPEN)
DISCRETE 6 IN 15K 1
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 7 IN 6A 1 LIST OF CONFIGURABLE
(28 V / OPEN)
DISCRETE 8 IN 6E 1
(GND/OPEN)
DHC VNAV ARM
DISCRETE 9 IN 6F 1 MAGNETIC/TRUE SWITCH
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 10 IN 6B 3
(28 VDC/OPEN)


600.X
Sheet 9 of 10
Page 386
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-02-2XXX)
MP
(ARINC INPUT A 8C
1) IRS2
429/571) PORT #5 2) AHRS2
B 8D
1) POSITION SENSORS
B 8F 4) AFIS
(ARINC OUTPUT A 4E
571) PORT #1
B 4F

600.X
Sheet 10 of 10
Page 387
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
D. NCU (P/N 1190–03–2XXX) Wiring 600.X

The following wiring diagrams (ten sheets) represent the basic wiring for NCU P/N 1190–
03–2XXX.
NCU P/N 1190–03–2112 contains a second Double Density ARINC board for 16 inputs and
eight outputs with no analog in or out except fuel flow.
NCU P/N 1190–03–2114 contains an Avionics Standard Communications Bus (ASCB)
board in place of the second Double Density ARINC board. This configuration supports
aircraft equipped with ASCB and with no need for analog interfaces other than annunciators
and fuel flow inputs.
Page 388
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
SCDU P/N 1016-X-XXX

UNS-1B NCU OR 9
MP 8 P1
CDU DATA SCDU
OUTPUT 4 LTG
B 2F B L F 20
C
P2
CDU DATA
INPUT B 2B K FPCDU
LTG
L 5 VDC H G 5 VDC
BP 6 20
P1
RED A
PWR CONTROL 4 R
RED RTN B
GREEN C
VIDEO APPLICABLE
VIDEO
7
BLUE RTN F
SYNC G
SYNC RTN H
28 VDC

5 (IF INSTALLED)
DC RETURN 8 16
CHASSIS GND 7 16
TO #2 FMS
DTU
(P/N 1405-XX-X)
MP P1 P1
DTU 28 VDC 28 VDC
DATA
BUS B 8K B
DC RETURN P
5
PORTABLE DTU DETAIL

INDICATED.
1 A
5
2 B OUTPUT
BUS
WIRING DIAGRAM.
J1

WIRING DIAGRAMS.
REFER TO UNS-1B NCU TO FCDU WIRING DIAGRAMS.


600.X
Sheet 1 of 10
Page 389
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-03-2XXX)
MP
MSG ANNUNCIATOR 13A MESSAGE ANNUNCIATOR

A/P REF
L 11E 16
(P/N 11901)
CONFIGURATION
24 AWG YELLOW
2
(ARINC OUTPUT A 1A
429 HS) PORT #4A 3
B 1B
(ARINC OUTPUT A 5A
429 HS) PORT #4B
B 5B
(ARINC
429 HS) OUTPUT A 5E
(XFILL) PORT #7 1) POSITION SENSORS
B 5F
2) RADAR
3) ARINC DME/VOR
(ARINC OUTPUT A 1J
4) AFIS
429 HS) PORT #6A
B 1K
(ARINC OUTPUT A 5J
429 HS) PORT #6B
B 5K
(ARINC OUTPUT A 1E
429/571) PORT #5
B 1F


THROUGH THE CDU.
3 THESE ARINC OUTPUT PORTS APPLY ONLY TO NCU
P/N 1190-03-2112.
600.X
Sheet 2 of 10
Page 390
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-03-2XXX)
MP
(ARINC INPUT A 1C
429/571) PORT #8
B 1D
(ARINC INPUT A 1G
429/571) PORT #9
B 1H
(ARINC INPUT A 5C
429/571) PORT #10
B 5D
(ARINC INPUT A 5G
429/571) PORT #11 1) POSITION SENSORS
B 5H
2) RADAR
A 3A 3) ARINC DME/VOR
429/571) PORT #12
B 3B
(ARINC INPUT A 3C
429/571) PORT #13
B 3D
(ARINC INPUT A 3E
429/571) PORT #14
B 3F
(ARINC INPUT A 3G
429/571) PORT #15
B 3H
600.X
Sheet 3 of 10
Page 391
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-03-2XXX)
MP
1
FMS VALID 13F
(DISC 9 OUT)
R 11A
ROLL STRG
OUTPUT L 11B
A 14E
(CSDB) INPUT
(FGS) PORT #4 B 14F
H 15A
#1
L 15B
H 15C
#2
L 15D
FLOW (DC LINEAR, AC LINEAR.
#3
L 15F
H 15G
#4
L 15H
NOTES: 1 MP13F IS CONFIGURABLE 28 VDC/OPEN OUTPUT DISCRETE.
600.X
Sheet 4 of 10
Page 392
34–60–04 12 August, 2009

(P/N 1190-03-2XXX) 1056-01-( ))
MP
A 2J RTU
(RTU) PORT #1 B 2K
1
A 2G
(CSDB) INPUT
(RTU) PORT #2 B 2H
(CSDB) OUTPUT A 10A

(TUNE) PORT #2
B 10B
(CSDB) INPUT A 14A

CSDB TYPE
(DME) PORT #3 RADIO'S DME/VOR 2 3 4
B 14B
(CSDB) INPUT A 14C

(VOR) PORT #1
B 14D
(ARINC OUTPUT A 12E

(XFILL) B 12F

B 8H



600.X
Sheet 5 of 10
Page 393
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-03-2XXX)
MP
(ARINC OUTPUT A 4J
429 LS) PORT #2A
B 4K
(ARINC OUTPUT A 12J

429 LS) PORT #2B
B 12K
(ARINC OUTPUT A 4A
429 HS) PORT #0A
B 4B
(ARINC OUTPUT A 12A

429 HS) PORT #0B
B 12B
1) POSITION SENSORS
2) RADAR
429/571) PORT #0 4) AFIS
(ARINC INPUT A 4G
429/571) PORT #1
B 4H
(ARINC INPUT A 12C

429/571) PORT #2
B 12D
(ARINC INPUT A 12G

429/571) PORT #3
B 12H
(ARINC INPUT A 8A
1) IRS3
429/571) PORT #4 2) AHRS1
B 8B
600.X
Sheet 6 of 10
Page 394
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-03-2XXX)
MP
(ARINC INPUT A 8C
1) IRS2
429/571) PORT #5 2) AHRS2
B 8D
1) POSITION SENSORS
B 8F 4) AFIS
(ARINC OUTPUT A 4E
571) PORT #1
B 4F

600.X
Sheet 7 of 10
Page 395
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-03-2XXX)
BP
DISCRETE 1 OUT 1 1
OUTPUT SIGNALS
(GND / OPEN)
MP
DISCRETE 2 OUT 13B 1

APPROACH ANNUNCIATOR
(GND/OPEN) DHC ARM ANNUNCIATOR
DISCRETE 3 OUT 13C 1 DOPPLER MODE
DOPPLER SELF TEST
DISCRETE 4 OUT 13D 1 FMS HEADING ANNUNCIATOR
(GND/OPEN) GPS INTEGRITY
ON BATT ANNUNCIATOR
DISCRETE 5 OUT 13E 1 PROLINE 4 FMS #1 NAV SOURCE
SELECTED CROSSTRACK ANNUNCIATOR
DISCRETE 6 OUT 7A 1 SPERRY VNAV FLAG
(GND/OPEN) WAYPOINT ANNUNCIATOR
DISCRETE 7 OUT 7B 1
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 8 OUT 6C 1 OUTPUT SIGNALS
(GND/OPEN) (28 V / OPEN)
(28 VDC/OPEN)


600.X
Sheet 8 of 10
Page 396
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-03-2XXX)
MP
DISCRETE 1 IN 6G 1
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 2 IN 6H 1
DISCRETE 3 IN 6J INPUT SIGNALS
1 (GND / OPEN)
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 4 IN 15J 1 ARINC 561 DTG RESOLUTION
(GND/OPEN) ATC1 SELECT
DHC VNAV COUPLED
DISCRETE 5 IN 11G 2 FREQUENCY MANAGEMENT
(GND/OPEN) REVERSION TUNE ENAGLE
SPERRY VNAV CAPTURE
DISCRETE 5 IN 11H 2 STRUT DISCRETE
(28 VDC/OPEN) TEST DISCRETE
DISCRETE 6 IN 15K 1
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 7 IN 6A 1
DISCRETE 8 IN 6E INPUT SIGNAL
1 (28 V / OPEN)
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 9 IN 6F 1 DHC VNAV ARM
(GND/OPEN) MAGNETIC/TRUE SWITCH
DISCRETE 10 IN 6B 3
(28 VDC/OPEN)


600.X
Sheet 9 of 10
Page 397
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-03-2XX3)
MP
ASCB A DATA + 1A
ASCB A DATA - 1B
ASCB DISCRETE IN 5 1C
ASCB DISCRETE IN 1 1D
ASCB B CLK + 1G
ASCB B CLK - 1H
ASCB DISCRETE OUT 8 3A
ASCB DISCRETE OUT 4 3B
ASCB DISCRETE OUT 7 3C
ASCB DISCRETE OUT 3 3D
ASCB DISCRETE OUT 6 3E
ASCB DISCRETE OUT 2 3F
ASCB DISCRETE OUT 5 3G
ASCB DISCRETE OUT 1 3H
ASCB B DATA + 5A
ASCB B DATA - 5B
ASCB DISCRETE IN 3 5E
ASCB DISCRETE IN 7 5F
ASCB A CLK + 5G
ASCB A CLK - 5H

Sheet 10 of 10
Page 398
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
E. NCU to CDU 600.X

UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-XX-2XXX) #1 SCDU
MP P1 P/N 1016-X-XXX 5
CDU DATA A 2E A
OUTPUT 1
B 2F B
CDU DATA A 2A J
INPUT #1 2
B 2B K
CDU DATA A 2C R
INPUT #2
B 2D M
P
BP
DC POWER +28 V 6 20
OUTPUT TO
CDU GND 11 20
3
PANEL 20 E
POWER ON 4 LTG 7
6 CONTROL INPUT 20 F
#2 SCDU
P1 P/N 1016-X-XXX 5
A
1
B
C
J
2
K
L
R
AC +28 VDC POWER 2A 20 M

4
8
P
PANEL 20 E
LTG 7
20 F
NOTES: 1 BOTH CDUS CAN RECEIVE FROM THE NCU TRANSMIT BUS.
3 THE NCU PROVIDES FILTERED DC POWER FOR ONE CDU ONLY.
REFER TO NOTE 4.
4 DC POWER FOR THE #2 CDU IS TO BE SUPPLIED FROM AIRCRAFT
+28 VDC POWER, THROUGH A CIRCUIT BREAKER AS SHOWN.
5 IF SCDU IS BEING USED WITH NCU P/N 1190-XX-2XXX, IT MUST
BE SCN 5.0 OR LATER TO BE COMPATIBLE.
6 EACH CDU HAS THE ABILITY TO TURN ON THE NCU. THE NCU
REMAINS ON UNTIL ALL CDUS ARE TURNED OFF.
7 CDU LIGHTING POWER INPUT (5 OR 28 VDC) IS DEPENDENT UPON CDU PART NUMBER.
8 USE TRANSORB FOR ADDITIONAL SPIKE PROTECTION
(TRANSORB P/N = 1N6284A, REFER TO SERVICE LETTER 2716A)
600.X
UNS–1B (P/N 1190–XX–2XXX NCU to Super CDU
Page 398.1
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
F. NCU to FPCDU 600.X

UNS-1B NCU #1 FPCDU
(P/N 1190-XX-2XXX) MP P2 P/N 1018-X-XXX 5 P2
CDU DATA A 2E A H E 20 28 VDC 5

OUTPUT 1 FPCDU
B 2F B L F 20 PNL
LTG LTG
C 5 H G 20 5 VDC
CDU DATA A 2A J P1
INPUT #1 2
B 2B K RED A
L RED RTN B
GREEN C
CDU DATA A 2C R 7
INPUT #2 GREEN RTN D VIDEO
B 2D M VIDEO
BLUE E
7
P BLUE RTN F
BP SYNC G
DC POWER +28 V 6 20 SYNC RTN H
OUTPUT TO
CDU GND 11 20
3
#2 FPCDU
POWER ON 4 P2 P/N 1018-X-XXX 5 P2
6 CONTROL INPUT
A H E 20 28 VDC 5
1 FPCDU PNL
B LTG L F 20
LTG
5 H G 20 5 VDC
C
J P1
2
K RED A
L RED RTN B
GREEN C
R 7
GREEN RTN D VIDEO
VIDEO
AC +28 VDC POWER 20 M BLUE E
2A 7
4 BLUE RTN F
8 P SYNC G
SYNC RTN H
NOTES: 1 BOTH CDUS CAN RECEIVE FROM THE NCU TRANSMIT BUS.
3 THE NCU PROVIDES FILTERED DC POWER FOR ONE CDU ONLY. REFER TO NOTE
4.
4
DC POWER FOR THE #2 CDU IS TO BE SUPPLIED FROM AIRCRAFT
+28 VDC POWER, THROUGH A CIRCUIT BREAKER AS SHOWN.
5
USE EITHER 5 VDC OR 28 VDC, NOT BOTH.
6
EACH CDU HAS THE ABILITY TO TURN ON THE NCU. THE NCU
REMAINS ON UNTIL ALL CDUS ARE TURNED OFF.
7
VIDEO IS APPLICABLE ONLY TO FPCDU P/N 1018-2-XXX.
8
USE TRANSORB FOR ADDITIONAL SPIKE PROTECTION.
(TRANSORB P/N = 1N6284A, REFER TO SERVICE LETTER 2716A.)
600.X
UNS–1B (P/N 1190–XX–2XXX NCU to FPCDU
Page 398.2
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
Basic NCU Wiring for the UNS-1B with Dual 4" FPCDUs
UNS-1B NCU
(P/N 1190-XX-2XXX) BP 1 P1 #1 4-FPCDU P/N 1117-XX P1
3
6 20 AWG H E 20 AWG 28 VDC
+28 VDC POWER M FPCDU
11 LIGHTING L F 20 AWG
CDU DC RETURN 20 AWG P
4 H G 20 AWG 5 V (AC OR DC)
POWER CONTROL R
2
MP
A
A 2E
CDU DATA B
OUTPUT B 2F
C
J
CDU DATA A 2A
INPUT #1 K
B 2B
L
CDU DATA A 2C
INPUT #2
B 2D
P1 #2 4-FPCDU P/N 1117-XX

A FPCDU LIGHTING AND
EXTERNAL VIDEO SOURECE
B FOR #2 FPCDU ARE WIRED
AS SHOWN ABOVE FOR #1
C FPCDU.
J
K
L
R
AIRCRAFT 28 VDC POWER 2 20 AWG M
20 AWG P
4
NOTES:
1 ALL WIRING TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED
2 DO NOT DAISY CHAIN SHIELD GROUNDS.
3 USE ONLY 5 V OR 28 VDC, NOT BOTH.
4 USE TRANSORB (P/N 1N6284A) FOR ADDITIONAL SPIKE PROTECTION.

REFER TO UASC SERVICE LETTER 2716A.
Page 398.3
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
5. NCU to External Devices
A. NCU to Skylight CDI–500 (P/N 50–0002–X1 or 50–0002–X2)
NCU #1 CDI P/N 50-0002-XX
ARINC 429 LS 8 429 LS A IN

DATA OUTPUT
15 429 LS B IN
14 SHIELD
6 429 LS SELECT
5 INTERNAL GND
NC 4 INTERNAL GND
NC 3 429 SELECT
NC 7 429 HS SELECT
DC POWER SOURCE 1 11 POWER 27.5 VDC
13 POWER GND
10 CHASSIS GND
1 HI
1 5 V OR 28 V
PANEL LIGHTS
9 LO
NOTES: 1 P/N 50-0002-01 = 5V
P/N 50-0002-02 = 28 V
P/N 50-0002-11 = 5V
P/N 50-0002-12 = 28 V
2 Installation Kit P/N 1244 used for CDI-500.
3 Connector - DA 15P (Amp P/N 745093-1) Mate - DA 15S

(Standard 15 Pin) w/Male Screw Retainer.
4 Refer to Skylight Avionics Installation Manual

for specifics on the CDI-500.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN

NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN
UNS–1B NCU to CDI
Page 398.4
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
B. ARINC 419/571 Radar Interface – Bendix/King IU2023B.
NCU BENDIX/KING IU2023B
P5006
ARINC
571 OUTPUT A MP4E 28 LINE A IN
RADAR PORT #1 B MP4F 11 LINE B IN
44 GROUND
ARINC INPUT A 7 LINE A OUT
429/571 1
PORT B 24 LINE B OUT
LATERAL DEV RT+ MP3F 15 HSI RT+

OUTPUT LT+ MP3G 30 HSI LT+
MASTER NAV VALID MP3H 27 HSI FLAG

FLAG
MASTER WARN FLAG MP13F 10 MASTER WARN FLAG
HSI
NOTES: 1 Multiple ports. Refer to the applicable UNS-1B W/D for

installation of NCU, this section.

UNS–1B NCU to Bendix/King IU2023B
Page 398.5
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
C. ARINC 571 Radar Data Interface.
NCU
ARINC 571 A MP4E 571 RADAR
LO SPEED OUTPUT
PORT #1 B MP4F INPUT
OUTPUT
RADAR DATA
RADAR DATA
1 ARINC 571
INPUT PORT
OUTPUT
NOTES: 1 Multiple ports. Refer to the applicable

UNS-1B W/D for installation of NCU, this section.

UNS–IB NCU to ARINC 571 Radar Data
Page 398.6
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
D. ARINC 429 Radar Data Interface.
NCU
ARINC 429
LO SPEED OUTPUT A MP4J 429 RADAR
PORT #2A B MP4K NAV INPUT
OUTPUT
RADAR DATA
RADAR DATA 1 ARINC 429
INPUT PORT
OUTPUT
NOTES: 1 Multiple ports. Refer to the applicable

UNS-1B W/D for installation of NCU, this section.

UNS–1B NCU to ARINC 429 Radar Data ARINC 429 Radar Data
Page 398.7
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
E. Radio Interface – General
Interface data is provided for DME, VOR, and TACAN Radios. Interconnect wiring for
these radios depends on the capabilities of the specific radios used. Both block diagrams and
wiring diagrams have been provided. Diagrams include DME and VOR Radios.
(1) NCU to DME – Collins DME–42 with 2 X 5 Tuning
SYSTEM #1 OR #2 DME-42
56
CSDB OUTPUT A MP10A 54 A TUNE DATA

TUNE PORT #2 B MP10B 55 B INPUT
CSDB INPUT A MP14A 47 A DME DATA

DME PORT #3 B MP14B 46 B OUTPUT
45

NOTE: RS422 NRZ data format for all CSDB listings.
Page 398.8
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(2) NCU to DME – Single NCU, Single Collins DME–42 with Single CTL Head
NCU #1 DME-42 1
#1 NAV
CTL-32 56
CSDB OUTPUT A MP10A a N 54 A TUNE DATA

TUNE PORT #2 B MP10B Z M 55 B INPUT
Y L

45
NOTES: 1 If an IND-42A is used, strap channel 3 blind;

onside and offside frequency will be displayed.
2 RS-422 NRZ data format for CSDB.

Page 398.9
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(3) NCU to DME – Dual NCU, Dual Collins DME–42 with CTL Heads
#1 NCU #1 DME-42
#1 NAV
CTL-32 56

Y L
CSDB INPUT A MP14A 47 A DME-1 DATA

45
#2 NAV
#2 NCU 1 CTL-32 #2 DME-42
b 56

Y L
CSDB INPUT A MP14A 47 A DME-2 DATA

45
NOTES: 1 Add ground strap to identify as #2 NAV for remote tuning.

2 Universal Avionics Systems Corporation recommends Collins IND-42C indicator be
used in lieu of IND-42A. If IND-42A is used, pilot's IND-42 will have channel 2
dashed, and copilot's IND-42 will have channel 1 dashed. Preselect channel will
be displayed if aircraft wiring permits.

Page 398.10
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(4) NCU to VOR/DME Data – Sperry Primus II
PILOT NCU RNZ-850 PILOT NAV UNIT
B
89 A
CSDB INPUT A MP14C
VOR RS422
VOR PORT #1 B MP14D A DATA
59 B
CSDB INPUT A MP14A 57 A DME RS422

DME PORT #3 B MP14B 44 B DATA
RM-850 PILOT RMU
CSDB OUTPUT A MP10A E

FMCS BUS
TUNE PORT #2 B MP10B F
CPLT NCU RNZ-850 COPILOT NAV UNIT

B
102 A
CSDB INPUT A MP14C
VOR RS422
VOR PORT #1 B MP14D A DATA
84 B
CSDB INPUT A MP14A 54 A DME RS422

DME PORT #3 B MP14B 16 B DATA
RM-850 CPLT RMU
CSDB OUTPUT A MP10A E

FMCS BUS
TUNE PORT #2 B MP10B F
NOTES: 1 RS-422 NRZ data format for CSDB.

Page 398.11
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(5) NCU to NAV – Collins VIR–32 with 2 X 5 or CTL Serial Tuning
SYSTEM #1 NCU #1 NAV VIR-32 (P1)
CSDB INPUT A MP14C 48 A VOR DATA

VOR PORT #1 B MP14D 47 B OUTPUT
SYSTEM #2 NCU #2 NAV VIR-32 (P1)
CSDB INPUT A MP14C 48 A VOR DATA

VOR PORT #1 B MP14D 47 B OUTPUT
1 14 #2 SELECT
NOTES: 1 Add ground strap to identify as #2 System.
2 If CTL serial tuning is used, ground Pin b on #2 CTL-32

Control Head for proper serial tuning communication.
3 RS-422 NRZ data format for all CSDB.

Page 398.12
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(6) NCU to DME – Bendix DM–441( ), ARINC 429 Channeling
SYSTEM #1 OR #2 NCU DM-441A R/T
ARINC OUTPUT A W A RNAV TUNE

429 LS 2 DATA INPUT
PORT B s B
ARINC INPUT A R A 429 DATA

429/571 3 OUTPUT
PORT B p B
SYSTEM #1 OR #2 NCU DM-441B R/T
ARINC OUTPUT A 41 A RNAV TUNE

429 LS 2 DATA INPUT
PORT B 30 B
ARINC INPUT A 17 A 429 DATA

429/571 3 OUTPUT
PORT B 55 B
NOTES: 1 FOR COMPATIBILITY WITH UNS-1B, BENDIX DM-441 SERIES

DME REQUIRES SOFTWARE MOD LEVEL F, OR HIGHER.
2 TWO POSSIBLE PORTS.
3 MULTPLE PORTS. REFER TO NCU ARINC INPUT PORT
CAPABILITIES TABLE.

Page 398.13
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(7) NCU to DME – Foster DME–670/TX–670, ARINC 429 Channeling
SYSTEM #1 OR #2 NCU TX-670-02 (NOTE 1)
ARINC OUTPUT A 9 A RNAV TUNE

429 LS 2 DATA INPUT
PORT B 8 B
ARINC INPUT A 10 A 429 DATA

429/571 3 OUTPUT
PORT B 11 B
P6703 (TX-670)
NOTES: 1 For compatibility with UNS-1B NCU, IN-602/TX-670 series
DME requires software Mod A installed.
2 Two possible ports.

3 Multiple ports. Refer to NCU ARINC INPUT PORT
CAPABILITIES Table.

Page 398.14
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(8) NCU to DME – Single NCU, Single Collins DME–42 with Dual CTL Head
NCU #1 DME-42
#1 NAV
CTL-32 56
a N 54 A TUNE DATA
Z M 55 B INPUT
Y L

#2 NAV 45
CTL-32
M
N
L
CSDB OUTPUT A MP10A a
TUNE PORT #2 B MP10B Z
Y
NOTES: 1 If an IND-42A is used, strap channel 3 blind; onside and offside

frequency will be displayed.

Page 398.15
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(9) NCU to NAV – Bendix VN–411( ), ARINC 429 Channeling
SYSTEM #1 OR #2 NCU NAV VN-411A
ARINC INPUT A C A VOR DATA

429/571 1 OUTPUT
PORT B d B
SYSTEM #1 OR #2 NCU NAV VN-411B
ARINC INPUT A 62 A VOR DATA

429/571 1 OUTPUT
PORT B 103 B
NOTES: 1 Multiple ports.

Refer to NCU ARINC Input Port Capabilities Table.
Page 398.16
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(10) NCU to ADC – Sperry AZ–800
UNS-1B NCU SPERRY AZ-800 ADC
(P/N 1190-02-XXXX ONLY) J1A 7000 700-9XX
SIG TP3G 70 SAT SIG OUT
SAT REF TP3E 68 TAS/SAT 20 V REF
IN
COM TP3F 69 SAT/TAS COM
SIG TP3C 67 TAS SIG OUT

TAS/IAS REF TP3A
IN
COM TP3B
X/SIG TP1H 89 X
ALT
COARSE Y/REF 15V TP1J 90 Y CRS ALT
IN Z OUT
Z/COM TP1K 91
X/SIG TP1D 86 X
ALT
FINE Y/COS TP1E 87 Y FINE ALT
IN Z/COM TP1F 88 Z OUT
ALT INPUT REF TP1A 32 REF HI

26 VAC
26 VAC REF RTN TP1B 33 COM OUT
J1B
28 VDC TAS/IAS VALID TP5A 49 #2 A/S VAL OUT
28 VDC SAT VALID TP5E
28 VDC ALT VALID TP3J 34 #2 ALT VAL OUT

Page 398.17
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(P/N 1190-02-XXXX ONLY) 4013241-XXX
J1
SIG TP3C 64 HI
TAS/IAS IN IAS OUT
RET TP3B 11 LO
ALT X/SIG TP1H 52 SIG

COARSE Y/REF 15V TP1J 53 REF CRS ALT
IN NO. 2
Z/COM TP1K 54 GND OUT
X/SIN TP1D 49 SIN

ALT FINE ALT
Y/COS TP1E 50 COS NO. 2
FINE
IN Z/COM TP1F 51 COM OUT
ALT INPUT REF TP1A 1 OUTPUT 26 VAC,

26 VAC 400 HZ
REF RTN TP1B 2 GND
28 VDC ALT VALID TP3J 12 +28 VDC ALT

VALID OUT
28 VDC TAS/IAS VALID TP5A

Page 398.18
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(P/N 1190-02-XXXX ONLY) 4013242-7XX
J1A
SIG TP3G 47 SAT SIG OUT
SAT IN REF TP3E 46 SAT/TAS 20 V REF
COM TP3F 49 SAT/TAS COM
SIG TP3C 48 TAS SIG

TAS/IAS IN REF TP3A
COM TP3B
ALT X/SIG TP1H 5 X

COARSE Y/REF 15V TP1J 6 Y CRS ALT OUT
IN
Z/COM TP1K 7 Z
X/SIN TP1D 8 X
ALT
Y/COS TP1E 9 Y FINE ALT OUT
IN
Z/COM TP1F 10 Z
ALT INPUT REF TP1A 1 REF

26 VAC OUT
26 VAC REF RTN TP1B 2 COM
28 VDC TAS/IAS VALID TP5A 13 #2 A/S VALID
28 VDC SAT VALID TP5E

28 VDC ALT VALID TP3J 12 #2 ALT VALID

Page 398.19
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(13) NCU to ADC – Sperry AZ–241, B&D TAS Plus
UNS-1B NCU B&D TAS PLUS COMPUTER
(P/N 1190-02-XXXX ONLY) P/N 2600-XXX-2421
28 VDC TAS/IAS VALID TP5A 12 FLAG

(NOTE 1)
SIG TP3C 13 SIG
TAS/IAS IN REF TP3A 25 REF TAS

COM TP3B 22 COM
SPERRY AZ-241
4013241-XXX
J1
ALT X/SIG TP1H 52 SIG

COARSE Y/REF 15V TP1J 53 REF 15 V CRS
IN ALT
Z/COM TP1K 54 COM OUT
X/SIN TP1D 49 SIN

ALT FINE ALT
Y/COS TP1E 50 COS NO. 2
FINE
IN COM OUT
Z/COM TP1F 51
ALT INPUT REF TP1A 1 REF

26 VAC
26 VAC REF RTN TP1B 2 COM OUT
28 VDC ALT VALID TP3J 12 #2 ALT VALID OUT
TO SPERRY VNAV
NOTES: 1 ARINC 565 DC TYPE 4 WHEN INSTALLED
REF: 20.0 VDC
SCALE: 161 KNOTS/VOLT
INDEX: 0 KNOTS @ 0 VOLT

Page 398.20
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
F. Flight Guidance Interface – General
The UNS–1B System is designed to interface with both conventional analog as well as with
the new EFIS/Autopilot flight guidance systems. The UNS–1B receives, processes, and
outputs lateral and vertical steering information for use by flight guidance equipment,
instruments and displays such as autopilot, HSI, ADI, flight director, weather and
surveillance radar, flight data recorder, etc.
(1) NCU Outputs/Guidance Systems
1 INPUT PORT #1
FLIGHT FLIGHT
NCU GUIDANCE GUIDANCE
#1 OUTPUT SYSTEM/
PORTS EQUIPMENT
INPUT PORT #2 #1
1 INPUT PORT #1
FLIGHT FLIGHT
NCU GUIDANCE
#2 GUIDANCE
OUTPUT SYSTEM/
PORTS EQUIPMENT
INPUT PORT #2 #2
NOTES: 1 TYPICAL FLIGHT GUIDANCE SYSTEMS/EQUIPMENT HAVING TWO INPUT PORTS ARE
SHOWN. (APPLICABLE PORTIONS OF DIAGRAM APPLY FOR FLIGHT GUIDANCE
SYSTEMS/EQUIPMENT WITH FEWER OUTPUTS.)
2 DATA MAY BE ANALOG OR ARINC, DEPENDING UPON NCU P/N SERIES AND SOFTWARE
VERSION INCORPORATED.
Page 398.21
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(2) NCU to FGS – Honeywell SPZ–8000 AFCS, De Havilland Dash–8
UNS-1B NCU 6C 3461-TB100
(P/N 1190-01-X113,
1190-02-X113) MP
3423-P10-1-2B
AC PITCH H 1G 16
STEER OUTPUT FGC
L 1H 17
NO. 1
PITCH CMD VALID 1J 18
OUTPUT (28V)
1
VNAV ENGAGE 7A 2-2A
REG (GND)
30
2
VNAV COUPLED 6E FGC
INPUT 31
NO. 2
VNAV ARM 6C 32
OUT (GND)
3
VNAV REQ (28V) 6B
2-2B
16
VNAV SEL FGC
3461-TB100 7B 17
NO. 2
VNAV ARM
3461-TB100 7E 18
1-2A
30
DIODE FGC
(1N4007) 31
NO. 1
32
28 VDC 3423-P11-1
VNAV ENABLE 64 GC-801
28 VDC A/P
CONTROL
VNAV CAPTURE 15
3461-TB100 7G
NOTES: 1 ON NCU P/N 1190-XX-2XXX, MP7A IS A CONFIGURABLE GROUND/OPEN

TYPE OUTPUT DISCRETE LABELED DISCRETE OUTPUT #6. IT MAY BE
USED FOR VNAV ENGAGE.
2 ON NCU P/N 1190-XX-2XXX, MP6E IS A CONFIGURABLE GROUND/OPEN
TYPE INPUT DISCRETE LABELED DISCRETE INPUT #8. IT MAY BE
USED FOR VNAV COUPLED INPUT.
3 ON NCU P/N 1190-XX-2XXX, MP6B IS A CONFIGURABLE 28 VDC/OPEN
INPUT TYPE DISCRETE LABELED DISCRETE INPUT #10. IT MAY BE
USED FOR VNAV REQ.

Page 398.22
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(3) NCU to FGS – Collins APS–65, King Air C–90/B–200
COLLINS APS-65
UNS-1B NCU AUTOPILOT COMPUTER
P3
SEC PRI
YEL BRN
32
ROLL STRG
R MP11A 10 K + RNAV
CMD
OUTPUT RED N/C OHMS 560 mV/ø
L MP11B 1/2 W
WHT 5% 36 -
BLK BLU
GRN
PICO TRANSFORMER
K-7530
NOTES: 1 SOURCE FOR TRANSFORMER:

Pico Electronics Inc.
143 Sparks Avenue
Pelham, NY 1083-1837
Ph: (914) 738-1400, (800) 431-1064
Fax: (914) 738-8225
2 K-7530 SPECIFICATIONS:
Primary Impedance: 5000 Ohms
Secondary Impedance: Series - 5000 Ohms
Parallel - 1250 Ohms

Page 398.23
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(4) NCU to HSI or EFIS – Analog VNAV (Non–Sperry)
The following wiring diagram is for installations requiring only display of VNAV
information.
FROM VERTICAL
EXISTING OUTPUT
VERTICAL
DEVIATION
SOURCE(S) VALID
UNS-1B NCU 1 MP HSI OR EFIS
VNAV +UP 7F +UP VNAV

OUTPUT INPUT
+DN 7G +DN
VNAV VALID 7H VNAV VALID

VNAV
CONTROL + + SOURCE
FROM SELECT
SELECTION - RELAY
SOURCE -
NOTES: 1 1190-01-X111
1190-01-X113
1190-02-X111
1190-02-X113

Page 398.24
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(5) Forced Capture Logic (Approach Flown Via Roll Command Only)
The wiring logic shown below is used in installations in which FMS Enroute and
Approach Modes are flown via roll command only. (no pseudo LOC or pseudo G/S
deviation coupling through the flight director/autopilot).
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS
ON EQUIPMENT ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN
VOR HSI
L
L
R
R
VALID
VALID
1 F/D / A/P
UNS-1B NCU MP
ROLL STEER
L 3G VALID
LAT
DEV
R 3F
L LAT
NAV VALID 3H DEV
R
ROLL STEER 11C
VALID
FMS PWR ON
CTL (+28 VDC)
VHF NAV
FMS
ROLL L 11B ROLL

STEER STEER
CMD R 11A CMD
NOTES: 1 1190-01-X111
1190-01-X113
1190-02-X111
1190-02-X113
NOTE: This wiring diagram is not applicable for autopilots with discrete force capture logic
inputs.
Page 398.25
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(6) Forced Capture Logic for Analog Flight Director/Autopilot
The wiring logic shown below is used for FMS operation during SIDs, STARs,
Holding, and FMS Heading. Shorting the lateral deviation input forces the
autopilot/flight director to transition from NAV ARM Mode to NAV CAPTURE
Mode and follow roll steering during FMS Enroute Mode. When in FMS Approach
Mode, normal deviation is provided.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS
ON EQUIPMENT ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN
TO HSI &
ADI FOR
DISPLAY
VOR
R L
R TO FD AND
AUTOPILOT
VALID
UNS-1B NCU 1 MP
LAT L 3G
DEV FMS ENROUTE
R 3F
APPR MODE
ANN DIS 13D
HDG MODE 13E

ANN DIS
NAV VALID 3H
ROLL STEER 11C

VALID
ROLL R 11A TO
STEER AUTOPILOT
CMD L 11B
FMS APPROACH
+28V FMS
FMS FMS SELECT

HDG
1 VHF NAV
FMS NAV
NOTES: 1 1190-01-X111
1190-01-X113
1190-02-X111
1190-02-X113
Page 398.26
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
6. NCU Pin Identification Charts
The data in the following tables are arranged in pin number order. If you need to find the pin
number for a particular function, refer to the Wiring Specifications tables where the data are
arranged in alphabetical order.
A. NCU P/N 1190–01–XXXX Pin Identification Chart
(1) Middle Plug – P/N 1190–01–XXXX
MIDDLE PLUG – P/N 1190–01–XXXX MIDDLE PLUG – P/N 1190–01–XXXX
PIN FUNCTION PIN FUNCTION
1A Sync Wpt Brg, X/Resolv Wpt 2G CSDB, RTU/MFD Data Input

Brg, SIN Note 1 Port #2 (A)
1B Sync Wpt Brg, Y/Resolv Wpt 2H CSDB, RTU/MFD Data Input

Brg, COS Note 1 Port #2 (B)
1C Sync Wpt Brg, Z Note 1 2J CSDB, RTU Data Output Port

#1 (A)
1D Resolv Wpt Brg, COM Note 1
2K CSDB, RTU Data Output Port
1E 26 VAC Instrument Ref (H) #1 (B)
Note 1
3A Sync Des Trk, X/ Resolv. Des
1F 26 VAC Instrument Ref (L) Trk, SIN Note 1
Note 1
3B Sync Desired Trk, Y/ Resolv.
1G AC Pitch Strg Sig Out (H) Desired Trk, COS Note 1
Notes 2
3C Sync Desired Trk Z Note 1
1G DC Pitch Strg Sig Out (H)
Note 3 3D Resolv Desired Trk, COM
Note 1
1H AC Pitch Strg Sig Out (L) Note
2 3E
1H DC Pitch Strg Sig Out Note 3 3F Lateral Dev (XTK) ® Note 1
1J Pitch Cmd Valid 1 Disc Out 3G Lateral Dev (XTK) (L) Note 1
(28 V = Active) Note 2
3H Hi Level Nav Valid Note 1
1K Pitch Cmd Valid 1 Return
3J Lo Level Nav Valid Note 1
2A CDU Data Input #1 (A)
3K Nav Valid Return Note 1
2B CDU Data Input #1 (B)
4A ARINC 429 HS, Output Port
2C CDU Data Input #2 (H) #0A (A)
2D CDU Data Input #2 (L) 4B ARINC 429 HS, Output Port

#0A (B)
2E CDU Data Output (A)
4C ARINC 429/571, Input Port #0
2F CDU Data Output (B) (A)
Page 398.27
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
4D ARINC 429/571, Input Port #0 6A Disc Input 7 (Ground / Open)

(B)
Configurable 60X.X
4E ARINC 571, Output Port #1
(A) 6B VNAV Arm Disc Input
(Momentary 28 V) Note 2
4F ARINC 571, 403.X 404.X 405.X
Output Port #1 (B)
4G ARINC 429/571, 6B Disc Input 10 (28 VDC / Open)
Input Port #1 (A) Configurable
4H ARINC 429/571,
60X.X
Input Port #1 (B)
6C VNAV Arm Annun Disc Output
4J ARINC 429 LS, (Low/Gnd = Act) (DHC
Output Port #2A (A) configured) Note 2
403.X
4K ARINC 429 LS,
Output Port #2A (B) 6C VNAV Arm Annun Disc Output
5A ARINC 561 Output, Sync (H) (Low/Gnd = Act) (DHC
Note 1 configured)
Note 2, or
5B ARINC 561 Output, Sync (L)
Note 1 Doppler Self Test
5C ARINC 561 Output, Data (H) Note 5 404.X 405.X

Note 1
6C Disc Output 8 (Ground /
5D ARINC 561 Output, Data (L) Open) Configurable
Note 1
60X.X
5E ARINC 561 Output, Clk (H)
Note 1 6D
5F ARINC 561 Output, Clk (L) 6E VNAV Coupled Disc In

Note 1 (Low/Gnd = Act) Note 2
5G Digital Valid Note 1

403.X 404.X 405.X
5H 6E Disc Input 8 (Ground / Open)

Configurable
5J TO Note 1
60X.X
5K FROM Note 1
6F Go Around (provisional)
6A Freq Mgmt Enable
400.X 401.X 402.X 404.X 405.X
403.X 404.X 405.X 6F Disc Input 9 (Ground / Open)

Configurable
60X.X
Page 398.28
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
6G Sperry VNAV Capture Note 1 7A Pitch Cmd Vld 2 Disc Out

400.X 401.X 402.X (DHC) (Low/Gnd = Act)
Note 2,
403.X 404.X 405.X FMS1 NAV (Pro Line 4 config)
(Low/Gnd = Act)
6G Disc Input 1 (Ground / Open) Note 3, or
Configurable
Doppler Sea State
60X.X
Note 5
6H 561 Dist Format Note 1 404.X 405.X
400.X 401.X 402.X
7A Disc Output 6 (Ground /
403.X 404.X 405.X Open) Configurable
6H Disc Input 2 (Ground / Open) 60X.X

Configurable
7B FMS2 NAV (Pro Line 4 config)
60X.X (Low/Gnd = Act)
Note 3
6J Lat Dev Scaling Note 1 402.X 403.X
400.X 401.X 402.X
403.X 404.X 7B FMS2 NAV (Pro Line 4 config)
(Low/Gnd = Act)
Note 3, or
6J Spare
405.X Doppler Mode, or
GPS Integrity Monitor
6J Disc Input 3 (Ground / Open)
Configurable Note 5
600.X 404.X 405.X
6K 7B Disc Output 7 (Ground /

Open) Configurable
7A FMS1 NAV (Pro Line 4 config) 60X.X
(Low/Gnd = Act)
Note 3 402.X 7C
7A Pitch Cmd Vld 2 Disc Out 7D

(DHC) (Low/Gnd = Act),or 7E
FMS1 NAV (Pro Line 4 config) 7F Vertical Dev, Up Note 1
(Low/Gnd = Act)
Notes 3 and 5 7G Vertical Dev, Dn Note 1
403.X
7H Hi Level Vert Valid Note 1
7J Lo Level Vert Valid Note 1
7K Vert Dev Valid Return Note 1
Page 398.29
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
8A ARINC 429/571, 10D

Input Port #4 (A)
10E
8B ARINC 429/571,
Input Port #4 (B) 10F
8C ARINC 429/571, 10G

Input Port #5 (A)
10H
8D ARINC 429/571,
10J
Input Port #5 (B)
10K
8E ARINC 429/571,
Input Port #6 (A) 11A Roll Strg Output (R)
8F ARINC 429/571, 11B Roll Strg Output (L)
Input Port #6 (B)
11C Roll Strg Valid
8G ARINC 429/571,
Input Port #7 (A) 11D 26 VAC A/P Ref (H)
8H ARINC 429/571, 11E 26 VAC A/P Ref (L)
Input Port #7 (B)
11F
8J DTU Data Bus (A)
11G Alternate MAG/TRUE Output
8K DTU Data Bus (B) Select
9A Sync Hdg Input X Note 1
400.X 401.X 402.X
9B Sync Hdg Input Y Note 1 403.X 404.X 405.X

9C Sync Hdg Input Z Note 1 11G Disc Input 5 (Ground / Open)
Configurable
9D Analog Hdg Ref (H) Note 1
60X.X
9E Analog Hdg Ref (L) Note 1
11H Disc Input 5 (28 VDC/ Open)
9F Hdg Valid Input Note 1 Configurable
9G Sync Hdg Input Select 60X.X
(MAG/TRUE) Note 1
9H Speaker Return NOTE: 60X.X Discrete Input 5 can be
configured as either (Ground / Open)
9J Speaker Output on Pin 11G or (28 VDC/ Open) on Pin
11H —but not both simultaneously.
9K Mixer Level Output
11H MAG/TRUE Output Select
10A CSDB, Tune Output
Port #2 (A) 400.X 401.X 402.X
10B CSDB, Tune Output 403.X 404.X 405.X
Port #2 (B)
11J #2 FMS Select Discrete
10C Note 6
Page 398.30
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
11K #3 FMS Select Discrete 13C Disc Output 3 Configurable

Note 6 (Ground / Open)
12A ARINC 429 HS, 60X.X
Output Port #0B (A)
13D FMS Annunciator Output,
12B ARINC 429 HS, Approach
Output Port #0B (B) 400.X 401.X 402.X
12C ARINC 429/571, 403.X 404.X 405.X
Input Port #2 (A)
12D ARINC 429/571, 13D Disc Output 4 Configurable
Input Port #2 (B) (Ground / Open)
60X.X
12E ARINC 429 HS, XFILL Output
Port #3(A) 13E FMS Annunciator Output,
12F ARINC 429 HS, XFILL Output Heading
Port #3(B) 400.X 401.X 402.X
12G ARINC 429/571, 403.X 404.X 405.X
Input Port #3 (A)
13E Disc Output 5 Configurable
12H ARINC 429/571, (Ground / Open)
Input Port #3 (B)
60X.X
12J ARINC 429 LS
Output Port #2B (A) 13F FMS Valid
12K ARINC 429 LS 400.X 401.X 402.X
Output Port #2B (B) 403.X 404.X 405.X
13A FMS Annunciator Output,
Message 13F Disc Output 9 Configurable
(28 VDC / Open)
13B FMS Annunciator Output,
Waypoint 60X.X
400.X 401.X 402.X 13G
403.X 404.X 405.X 13H
13B Disc Output 2 Configurable 13J

(Ground / Open)
13K
60X.X
14A CSDB,
13C FMS Annunciator Output, DME Input Port #3 (A)
Selected Crosstrack
400.X 401.X 402.X 14B CSDB,
DME Input Port #3 (B)
403.X 404.X 405.X
14C CSDB,
VOR/ERP Input Port #1 (A)
Page 398.31
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
14D CSDB, 15K Disc Input 6 Configurable

VOR/ERP Input Port #1 (B) (Ground / Open)
14E CSDB, 60X.X

FGS Input Port #4 (A)(Prov)
NOTE:
14F CSDB,
FGS Input Port #4 (B)(Prov) 1. Not applicable to P/N 1190–01–X110.
14G Configuration Module, Ground 2. Applicable only to P/N 1190–01–X113.

– Brown
3. Applicable only to P/N 1190–01–X111.
14H Configuration Module, 4. Used only if Emergency Battery is
5 VDC– Red installed.
14J Configuration Module, 5. The function on this pin depends on the
DATA Clock – yellow configuration of the installation.
14K Configuration Module, 6. See FMS Identification Logic paragraph.
DATA I/O– Blue
15A Fuel Flow #1 (H)
15B Fuel Flow #1 (L)
15C Fuel Flow #2 (H)
15D Fuel Flow #2 (L)
15E Fuel Flow #3 (H)
15F Fuel Flow #3 (L)
15G Fuel Flow #4 (H)
15H Fuel Flow #4 (L)
15J Analog Test Discrete

400.X 401.X 402.X
403.X 404.X 405.X
15J Disc Input 4 Configurable

(Ground / Open)
60X.X
15K Strut Switch Discrete
400.X 401.X 402.X
403.X 404.X 405.X
Page 398.32
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(2) Bottom Plug – P/N 1190–01–
XXXX
BOTTOM PLUG – P/N 1190–01–XXXX
PIN FUNCTION
1 ON BATT Annun Output

400.X 401.X 402.X
403.X 404.X 405.X
NOTE: ON BATT is used only if Emergency

Battery is installed.
1 Disc Output 1 Configurable
(Ground / Open)
60X.X
2 28 VDC Input
3 28 VDC BATT Input
NOTE: 28 VDC BATT is used only if

Emergency Battery is installed.
4 Power Control
6 CDU 28 VDC PWR

7 Chassis Ground
8 DC Return
9
10
11 CDU DC Return
12
13
Page 398.33
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
B. NCU P/N 1190–02–XXXX Pin Identification Chart
(1) Top Plug – P/N 1190–02–XXXX
TOP PLUG – P/N 1190–02–XXXX TOP PLUG – P/N 1190–02–XXXX
1A Alt Ref 26 VAC 5F
1B Alt Ref Rtn 5G
1C 5H
1D Alt (Fine) Sync Input 5J
(X)/Resolver (SIN)
5K
1E Alt (Fine) Sync Input
(Y)/Resolver (COS)
1F Alt (Fine) Sync Input
(Z)/Resolver (COM)
1G
1H Alt (Coarse) Sync Input
(X)/DC (SIG)
1J Alt (Coarse) Sync Input
(Y)/DC (+15)
1K Alt (Coarse) Sync Input
(Z)/DC (COM)
3A DC TAS Input (REF)
3B DC TAS/IAS Input (Return)
3C DC TAS/IAS Input (SIG)
3D
3E SAT Ref
3F SAT DC and Ref Rtn
3G SAT DC Input
3H
3J Alt Valid Input (28 VDC)
3K Alt Valid Input (Gnd)
5A TAS Valid Input (28 VDC)
5B
5C
5D
5E SAT Valid Input (28 VDC)
Page 398.34
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(2) Middle Plug – P/N 1190–02– MIDDLE PLUG – P/N 1190–02–XXXX
XXXX
PIN FUNCTION
MIDDLE PLUG – P/N 1190–02–XXXX
3A Sync Desired Trk, X/ Resolv.
PIN FUNCTION Desired Trk, SIN
1A Sync Wpt Brg, X/Resolv Wpt 3B Sync Desired Trk, Y/ Resolv.

Brg, SIN Desired Trl, COS
1B Sync Wpt Brg, Y/Resolv Wpt 3C Sync Desired Trk Z

Brg, COS
3D Resolv Desired Trk, COM
1C Sync Wpt Brg, Z
3E
1D Resolv Wpt Brg, COM
3F Lateral Dev (XTK) (R)
1E 26 VAC Instrument Ref (H)
3G Lateral Dev (XTK) (L)
1F 26 VAC Instrument Ref (L)
3H Hi Level Nav Valid
1G AC Pitch Strg Sig Out (H)
3J Lo Level Nav Valid
Note 1
3K Nav Valid Return
1G DC Pitch Strg Sig Out (H)
Note 2 4A ARINC 429 HS,
Output Port #0A (A)
1H AC Pitch strg Sig Out (L) Note
1 4B ARINC 429 HS,
Output Port #0A (B)
1H DC Pitch Strg Sig Out (L) Note
2 4C ARINC 429/571,
Input Port #0 (A)
1J Pitch Command Valid 1 Disc
Out(28 V = Act) Note 1 4D ARINC 429/571,
nput Port #0 (B)
1K Pitch Command Return
4E ARINC 571,
2A CDU Data Input #1 (A)
Output Port #1 (A)
2B CDU Data Input #1 (B)
4F ARINC 571,
2C CDU Data Input #2 (H) Output Port #1 (B)
2D CDU Data Input # (L) 4G ARINC 429/571,

Input Port #1 (A)
2E CDU Data Output (A)
4H ARINC 429/571,
2F CDU Data Output(B) Input Port #1 (B)
2G CSDB, RTU/MFD 4J ARINC 429 LS,
Data Input Port #2 (A) Output Port #2A (A)
2H CSDB, RTU/MFD 4K ARINC 429 LS,
Data Input Port #2 (B) Output Port #2A (B)
2J CSDB, RTU 5A ARINC 561 Output, Sync (H)
Data Output Port #1 (A)
5B ARINC 561 Output, Sync (L)
2K CSDB, RTU
Data Output Port #1 (B) 5C ARINC 561 Output, Data (H)
Page 398.35
34–60–04 12 August, 2009

5D ARINC 561 Output, Data (L) 6E VNAV Coupled Disc In
(Low/Gnd = Act) Note 1
5E ARINC 561 Output, Clk (H)
403.X 404.X 405.X
5F ARINC 561 Output, Clk (L)
6E Disc Input 8 Configurable
5G Digital Valid (Ground / Open)
5H 60X.X
5J TO 6F Go Around (provisional)
5K FROM 404.X 405.X
6A Freq Mgmt Enable
6F Disc Input 9 Configurable
400.X 401.X 402.X (Ground / Open)
403.X 404.X 405.X 60X.X
6A Disc Input 7 Configurable 6G Sperry VNAV Capture

(Ground / Open) 400.X 401.X 402.X
60X.X 403.X 404.X 405.X
6B VNAV Arm Disc Input
6G Disc Input 1 Configurable
(Momentary 28 V) Note 1
(Ground / Open)
403.X 404.X 405.X 60X.X
6B Disc Input 10 Configurable 6H 561 Dist Format
(28VDC / Open)
400.X 401.X 402.X
60X.X
403.X 404.X 405.X
6C VNAV Arm Annun Disc Output
(Low/Gnd = Act) (DHC 6H Disc Input 2 Configurable
configured) Note 1 (Ground / Open)
404.X 405.X 60X.X
6C VNAV Arm Annun Disc Output 6J Lat Dev Scaling
(Low/Gnd = Act) (DHC 400.X 401.X 402.X
configured) Note 1, or
403.X 404.X
Doppler Self Test Note 3
402.X 403.X 404.X 6J Spare
405.X 405.X
6C Disc Output 8 (Ground / 6J Disc Input 3 Configurable

Open) Configurable (Ground / Open)
60X.X 60X.X
6D 6K
Page 398.36
34–60–04 12 August, 2009

7A FMS1 NAV (Pro Line 4 config) 7G Vertical Dev, Dn
(Low/Gnd = Act)
Note 2 7H Hi Level Vert Valid
402.X 7J Lo Level Vert Valid
7A Pitch Cmd Vld 2 Disc 7K Vert Dev Valid Return

Out(Low/Gnd = Act)
8A ARINC 429/571,
403.X Input Port #4 (A)
7A Pitch Cmd Vld 2 Disc 8B ARINC 429/571,

Out(Low/Gnd = Act) Note 1, Input Port #4 (B)
FMS1 NAV (Pro Line 4 config) 8C ARINC 429/571,

(Low/Gnd = Act) Input Port #5 (A)
Note 2, or
8D ARINC 429/571,
Doppler Sea State Note 3 Input Port #5 (B)
404.X 405.X 8E ARINC 429/571,
I nput Port #6 (A)
7A Disc Output 6 Configurable
(Ground / Open) 8F ARINC 429/571,
Input Port #6 (B)
60X.X
8G ARINC 429/571,
7B FMS2 NAV (Pro Line 4 config) Input Port #7 (A)
(Low/Gnd = Act)
Note 2 8H ARINC 429/571,
402.X 403.X Input Port #7 (B)
8J DTU Data Bus (A)
7B FMS2 NAV (Pro Line 4 config)
(Low/Gnd = Act) 8K DTU Data Bus (B)
Note 2,
9A Sync Hdg Input X
Doppler Mode, or
9B Sync Hdg Input Y
GPS Integrity Monitor
Note 3 9C Sync Hdg Input Z
404.X 405.X 9D Analog Hdg Ref (H)
7B Disc Output 7 Configurable 9E Analog Hdg Ref (L)

(Ground / Open) 9F Hdg Valid Input
60X.X
9G Sync Hdg Input Select
7C (MAG/TRUE)
7D 9H Speaker Return
7E 9J Speaker Output
7F Vertical Dev, Up 9K Mixer Level Output
Page 398.37
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
MIDDLE PLUG – P/N 1190–02–XXXX

PIN FUNCTION
10A CSDB, Tune Output
Port #2 (A)
Page 398.38
34–60–04 12 August, 2009

10B CSDB, Tune Output 11H MAG/TRUE Output Select
Port #2 (B) 400.X 401.X 402.X
10C 403.X 404.X 405.X
10D
11J #2 FMS Select Discrete
10E Note 4
10F 11K #3 FMS Select Discrete
Note 4
10G
12A ARINC 429 HS, Output Port
10H #0B (A)
10J 12B ARINC 429 HS, Output Port
10K #0B (B)
11A Roll Strg Output (R) 12C ARINC 429/571, Input Port #2
(A)
11B Roll Strg Output (L)
12D ARINC 429/571, Input Port #2
11C Roll Strg Valid (B)
11D 26 VAC A/P Ref (H) 12E ARINC 429 HS, XFILL Output
Port #3(A)
11E 26 VAC A/P Ref (L)
12F ARINC 429 HS, XFILL Output
11F Port #3(B)
11G Alternate MAG/TRUE Output 12G ARINC 429/571, Input Port #3
Select (A)
400.X 401.X 402.X
12H ARINC 429/571, Input Port #3
403.X 404.X 405.X (B)
12J ARINC 429 LS, Output Port
11G Disc Input 5 Configurable #2B (A)
(Ground / Open)
12K ARINC 429 LS, Output Port
60X.X #2B (B)
11H Disc Input 5 Configurable 13A FMS Annunciator Output,
(28 VDC/ Open) Message
60X.X
Waypoint
NOTE: 60X.X Discrete Input 5 can be 400.X 401.X 402.X
configured as either (Ground / Open)
on Pin 11G or (28 VDC/ Open) on 403.X 404.X 405.X
Pin 11H —but not both
simultaneously. 13B Disc Output 2 Configurable
(Ground / Open)
60X.X
Page 398.39
34–60–04 12 August, 2009

13C FMS Annunciator Output, 14B CSDB, DME
Selected Crosstrack Input Port #3 (B)
400.X 401.X 402.X 14C CSDB, VOR Input Port #1 (A)
403.X 404.X 405.X 14D CSDB, VOR Input Port #1 (B)
13C Disc Output 3 Configurable 14E CSDB, FGS Input Port #4 (A)
(Ground / Open)
14F CSDB, FGS Input Port #4 (B)
60X.X
14G Configuration Module, Ground
13D FMS Annunciator Output, – Brown
Approach
14H Configuration Module,
400.X 401.X 402.X 5 VDC – Red
403.X 404.X 405.X 14J Configuration Module,
DATA Clock – yellow
13D Disc Output 4 Configurable
(Ground / Open) 14K Configuration Module,
DATA I/O– Blue
60X.X
13E FMS Annunciator Output,
Heading 15B Fuel Flow #1 (L)
400.X 401.X 402.X 15C Fuel Flow #2 (H)
403.X 404.X 405.X 15D Fuel Flow #2 (L)
13E Disc Output 5 Configurable 15E Fuel Flow #3 (H)

(Ground / Open)
60X.X
13F FMS Valid
400.X 401.X 402.X
403.X 404.X 405.X 400.X 401.X 402.X
13F Disc Output 9 Configurable 403.X 404.X 405.X
(28 VDC/ Open)
60X.X 15J Disc Input 4 Configurable
(Ground / Open)
13G 60X.X
13H
15K Strut Switch Discrete
13J 400.X 401.X 402.X
13K 403.X 404.X 405.X
14A CSDB, DME
Input Port #3 (A)
Page 398.40
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
MIDDLE PLUG – P/N 1190–02–XXXX (3) Bottom Plug – P/N 1190–02–XXXX

PIN FUNCTION BOTTOM PLUG – P/N 1190–02–XXXX
15K Disc Input 6 Configurable PIN FUNCTION
(Ground / Open)
60X.X
400.X 401.X 402.X
NOTE:
403.X 404.X 405.X
1. Applicable only to P/N 1190–02–1113.
NOTE: ON BAT is used only if Emergency
2. Applicable only to P/N 1190–01–1111
3. The function of this pin depends on the
configuration of the installation. 1 Disc Output 1 Configurable
(Ground / Open)
4. See FMS Identification Logic paragraph. 60X.X
2 28 VDC Input
3 28 VDC BATT Input

Note 1
NOTE: 28 VDC BAT input is used only if

4 Power Control
6 CDU 28 VDC PWR
7 Chassis Ground
8 DC Return
9
10
11 CDU DC Return
12
13
Page 398.41
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
1
C. NCU P/N 1190–03–XXXX Pin Identification Chart

(1) Middle Plug – P/N 1190–03–XXXX

1A ARINC 429 HS, 1H ASCB B CLK – Notes 1 & 3.

Output Port #4A (A) 404.X 405.X 60X.X
1A ASCB A DATA +
Notes 1 & 3. 1J ARINC 429 LS,
Output Port #6A (A)
404.X 405.X 60X.X
1J ASCB Discrete In 2
1B ARINC 429 HS, Notes 1 & 3.
Output Port #4A (B) 404.X 405.X 60X.X
1B ASCB A DATA –
Notes 1 & 3. 1K ARINC 429 LS,
Output Port #6A (B)
404.X 405.X 60X.X
1K ASCB Discrete In 6
1C ARINC 429/571, Notes 1 & 3.
Input Port #8 (A)
404.X 405.X 60X.X
1C ASCB Discrete In 5
Notes 1 & 3. 2A CDU Data Input #1 (A)
404.X 405.X 60X.X 2B CDU Data Input #1 (B)
1D ARINC 429/571, 2C CDU Data Input #2 (A)

Input Port #8 (B)
2D CDU Data Input #2 (B)
1D ASCB Discrete In 1
Notes 1 & 3. 2E CDU Data Output (A)
404.X 405.X 60X.X 2F CDU Data Output (B)

2G CSDB, RTU/MFD
1E ARINC 571,
Data Input Port #2 (A)
Output Port #5 (A)
2H CSDB, RTU/MFD
1F ARINC 571,
Data Input Port #2 (B)
Output Port #5 (B)
2J CSDB, RTU Data
1G ARINC 429/571,
Output Port #1 (A)
Input Port #9 (A)
2K CSDB, RTU Data
1G ASCB B CLK + Notes 1 & 3.
Output Port #1 (B)
404.X 405.X 60X.X
2K CSDB, RTU Data
1H ARINC 429/571, Output Port #1 (B)
Input Port #9 (B) 3A ARINC 429/571, Input Port
#12 (A)
Page 398.42
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
1

3A ASCB Discrete Out 8 3H ASCB Discrete Out 1
Notes 1 & 3. Notes 1 & 3.
404.X 405.X 60X.X 404.X 405.X 60X.X
3B ARINC 429/571, 3J
Input Port #12 (B)
3K
3B ASCB Discrete Out 4
Notes 1 & 3. 4A ARINC 429 HS,
Output Port #0A (A)
404.X 405.X 60X.X
4B ARINC 429 HS,
3C ARINC 429/571, Input Port Output Port #0A (B)
#13 (A)
4C ARINC 429/571,
3C ASCB Discrete Out 7 Input Port #0 (A)
Notes 1 & 3.
4D ARINC 429/571,
404.X 405.X 60X.X Input Port #0 (B)
3D ARINC 429/571, Input Port 4E ARINC 571,

#13 (B) Output Port #1 (A)
3D ASCB Discrete Out 3 4F ARINC 571,

Notes 1 & 3. Output Port #1 (B)
404.X 405.X 60X.X 4G ARINC 429/571,
Input Port #1 (A)
3E ARINC 429/571, Input Port
#14 (A) 4H ARINC 429/571,
Input Port #1 (B)
3E ASCB Discrete Out 6
Notes 1 & 3. 4J ARINC 429 LS,
Output Port #2A (A)
404.X 405.X 60X.X
4K ARINC 429 LS,
3F ARINC 429/571, Input Port Output Port #2A (B)
#14 (B)
5A ARINC 429 HS,
3F ASCB Discrete Out 2 Output Port #4B (A)
Notes 1 & 3.
5A ASCB B DATA +
404.X 405.X 60X.X Notes 1 & 3.
404.X 405.X 60X.X
3G ARINC 429/571, Input Port
#15 (A)
5B ARINC 429 HS,
3G ASCB Discrete Out 5 Output Port #4B (B)
Notes 1 & 3.
5B ASCB B DATA –
404.X 405.X 600.X Notes 1 & 3.
404.X 405.X 60X.X
3H ARINC 429/571, Input Port
#15 (B)
Page 398.43
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
1

5C ARINC 429/571, 5K ASCB Discrete In 4
Input Port #10 (A) Notes 1 & 3.
5D ARINC 429/571, 404.X 405.X 60X.X
Input Port #10 (B)
6A Freq Mgmt Enable
5E ARINC 429 HS, XFILL 400.X 401.X 402.X
Out Port #7 (A)
5E ASCB Discrete In 3
403.X 404.X 405.X
Notes 1 & 3.
6A Disc Input 7 Configurable
404.X 405.X 60X.X (28VDC / Open)
5F ARINC 429 HS, XFILL 60X.X

Out Port #7 (B)
6B VNAV Arm Disc Input
5F ASCB Discrete In 7 (Momentary 28 V) Note 2
Notes 1 & 3. 403.X 404.X 405.X
404.X 405.X 60X.X
6B Disc Input 10 Configurable
5G ARINC 429/571, (28VDC / Open)
Input Port #11 (A) 60X.X
5G ASCB A CLK +
Notes 1 & 3 6C VNAV Arm Annun Disc Output
(Low/Gnd = Act) (DHC
404.X 405.X 60X.X configured) Note 2, or
5H ARINC 429/571, Doppler Self Test Note 5

Input Port #11 (B) 404.X 405.X
5H
404.X 405.X 60X.X 6C Disc Output 8 Configurable
ASCB A CLK – (Ground / Open)
Notes 1 & 3. 60X.X
404.X 405.X 60X.X
6D
5J ARINC 429 LS, 6E VNAV Coupled Disc In
Output Port #6B (A) (Low/Gnd = Act) Note 2
5J 403.X 404.X 405.X
404.X 405.X 60X.X
ASCB Discrete In 8 6E Disc Input 8 Configurable
Notes 1 & 3. (Ground / Open)
404.X 405.X 60X.X 60X.X
5K ARINC 429 LS, 6F Go Around (provisional)
Output Port #6B (A)
404.X 405.X
Page 398.44
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
1

6F Disc Input 9 Configurable 7B Disc Output 7 Configurable
(Ground / Open) (Ground / Open)
60X.X 60X.X
6G Sperry VNAV Capture Note 1 7C
400.X 401.X 402.X 7D
403.X 404.X 405.X 7E
6G Disc Input 1 Configurable 7F

(Ground / Open)
7G
60X.X
7H
6H 561 Dist Format Note 1
7J
400.X 401.X 402.X
7K
403.X 404.X 405.X
8A ARINC 429/571,
6H Disc Input 2 Configurable Input Port #4 (A)
(Ground / Open)
8B ARINC 429/571,
60X.X Input Port #4 (B)
6J Lat Dev Scaling Note 1 8C ARINC 429/571,

400.X 401.X 402.X Input Port #5 (A)
403.X 404.X 8D ARINC 429/571,

Input Port #5 (B)
6J Spare 8E ARINC 429/571,
405.X Input Port #6 (A)
6J Disc Input 3 Configurable 8F ARINC 429/571,

(Ground / Open) Input Port #6 (B)
8G ARINC 429/571,
6K Input Port #7 (A)
7A Doppler Sea State Note 1 8H ARINC 429/571,

Input Port #7 (B)
404.X 405.X
8J DTU Data Bus (A)
7A Disc Output 6 Configurable
8K DTU Data Bus (B)
(Ground / Open)
60X.X 9A
9B
7B Doppler Mode, or
9C
GPS Integrity Monitor Note 1
9D
404.X 405.X
Page 398.45
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
1

9E 11H Disc Input 5 Configurable
(28 VDC / Open)
9F
60X.X
9G
9H Speaker Return NOTE: Discrete Input 5 can be configured as
either (Ground / Open) on Pin 11G or
9J Speaker Output (28 VDC / Open) on Pin 11H —
but not both simultaneously.
9K Mixer Level Output
10A CSDB, Tune
Output Port #2 (A)
10B CSDB, Tune
Output Port #2 (B)
10C
10D
10E
10F
10G
10H
10J
10K
11A Roll Strg Output (R)
11B Roll Strg Output (L)
11C Roll Strg Valid
11D 26 VAC A/P Ref (H)
11E 26 VAC A/P Ref (L)
11F
11G Alternate MAG/TRUE Output
Select
400.X 401.X 402.X
403.X 404.X 405.X
11G Disc Input 5 Configurable

(Ground / Open)
60X.X
Page 398.46
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
1

11H MAG/TRUE Output Select 13B Disc Output 2 Configurable

400.X 401.X 402.X (Ground / Open)
60X.X
403.X 404.X 405.X
13C FMS Annunciator Output,
11J #2 FMS Select Discrete Selected Crosstrack
Note 2 400.X 401.X 402.X
11K #3 FMS Select Discrete
403.X 404.X 405.X
Note 2
12A ARINC 429 HS, 13C Disc Output 3 Configurable
Output Port #0B (A) (Ground / Open)
12B ARINC 429 HS, 60X.X

Output Port #0B (B)
13D FMS Annunciator Output,
12C ARINC 429/571, Approach
Input Port #2 (A) 400.X 401.X 402.X
12D ARINC 429/571, 403.X 404.X 405.X
Input Port #2 (B)
12E ARINC 429 HS, XFILL Output 13D Disc Output 4 Configurable
Port #3(A) (Ground / Open)
60X.X
12F ARINC 429 HS, XFILL Output
Port #3(B) 13E FMS Annunciator Output,
12G ARINC 429/571, Heading
Input Port #3 (A) 400.X 401.X 402.X
12H ARINC 429/571, 403.X 404.X 405.X
Input Port #3 (B)
13E Disc Output 5 Configurable
12J ARINC 429 LS, (Ground / Open)
Output Port #2B (A)
60X.X
12K ARINC 429 LS,
Output Port #2B (B) 13F FMS Valid
13A FMS Annunciator Output, 400.X 401.X 402.X
Message
403.X 404.X 405.X
Waypoint 13F Disc Output 9 Configurable
400.X 401.X 402.X (28 VDC / Open)
60X.X
403.X 404.X 405.X
13G
13H
Page 398.47
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
1

13J 15J Disc Input 4 Configurable
(Ground / Open)
13K
60X.X
14A CSDB, DME
Input Port #3 (A) 15K Strut Switch Discrete
14B CSDB, DME

400.X 401.X 402.X
Input Port #3 (B) 403.X 404.X 405.X
14C CSDB, VOR
Input Port #1 (A) 15K Disc Input 6 Configurable
(Ground / Open)
14D CSDB, VOR
Input Port #1 (B)
60X.X
14E CSDB, FGS NOTE:

Input Port #4 (A) 1. The function of this pin depends on the
14F CSDB, FGS configuration of the installation.
Input Port #4 (B) 2. See FMS Identification Logic paragraph.
14G Configuration Module, Ground 3. P/N 1190–03–X114
– Brown
404.X 405.X 600.X
14H Configuration Module,
5 VDC– Red
14J Configuration Module,
DATA Clock – yellow
14K Configuration Module,
DATA I/O– Blue
15B Fuel Flow #1 (L)
15C Fuel Flow #2 (H)
15D Fuel Flow #2 (L)
15E Fuel Flow #3 (H)
400.X 401.X 402.X
403.X 404.X 405.X
Page 398.48
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
1
(2) Bottom Plug – P/N 1190–03–

XXXX
BOTTOM PLUG – P/N 1190–03–XXXX
PIN FUNCTION

400.X 401.X 402.X
403.X 404.X 405.X
NOTE: ON BATT is used only if Emergency

1 Disc Output 1 Configurable
(Ground / Open)
60X.X
2 28 VDC Input
3 28 VDC BATT Input
NOTE: 28 VDC BATT Input is used only if

4 Power Control
6 CDU 28 VDC PWR
7 Chassis Ground
8 DC Return
9
10
11 CDU DC Return
12
13
Page 398.49
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
1
D. 4” FPCDU Pin Identification Chart

The data in the following tables are arranged in pin number order. This information is not
included in the Wiring Specifications tables.
CDU Connector on the FPCDU
Connector Pin Description
P1 A CDU Rx Data Hi
P1 B CDU Rx Data Lo
P1 C CDU Rx Data Shield
P1 D
P1 E +5 VDC or 5 VAC Keypad Lighting
P1 F Ground Keypad Lighting
P1 G +28 V Keypad Lighting
CAUTION: USE 5 V OR 28 V POWER FOR KEYPAD LIGHTING,
NOT BOTH.
P1 H
P1 J CDU Tx Data Hi
P1 K CDU Tx Data Lo
P1 L CDU Tx Data Shield
P1 M +28 VDC Power Input
P1 N Ground
P1 P Power +28 VDC Return
P1 R Power On Control Output (+28 VDC)
Page 398.50
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
1
E. SSDTU Pin Assignment
(1) Connector – J1
Pin Function Pin Function
A EIA-485 (Side A) (FMS 485 A) J
B EIA-485 (Side B) (FMS 485 B) K
C Ethernet #1 RX (+) L Chassis Ground
D Ethernet #1 RX (-) M SSDTU Power 28 VDC
E Ethernet #1 Shield N EIA-232 RX
F Ethernet #1 TX (+) P SSDTU Ground
G Ethernet #1 TX (-) R EIA-232 TX
H
(2) Connector – J2
Pin Function Pin Function
1 Ethernet #3 RX (+) 29 Ethernet #8 Shield
2 Ethernet #3 TX (+) 30 Ethernet #5 Shield
3 31 Ethernet #5 TX (+)
4 Ethernet #2 RX (-) 32
5 33
7 Ethernet #3 TX (-) 35 Ethernet #8 TX (+)
8 Ethernet #4 TX (-) 36 Ethernet #8 RX (+)
9 Ethernet #4 TX (+) 37
10 Ethernet #2 TX (-) 38 Ethernet #5 RX (+)
11 Ethernet #2 RX (+) 39 Ethernet #5 TX (-)
12 40 Ethernet #7 RX (+)
13 Ethernet #3 Shield 41 Ethernet #7 RX (-)
14 42 Ethernet #7 Shield
16 Ethernet #4 RX (+) 44 Ethernet #6 Shield
17 45
18 Ethernet #2 TX (+) 46 Ethernet #5 RX (-)
19 Ethernet #2 Shield 47 Ethernet #7 TX (+)
20 48 Ethernet #7 TX (-)
21 49
22 50 Ethernet #6 TX (+)
23 Ethernet #4 Shield 51 Ethernet #6 RX (+)
24 52
25 53
26 54 Ethernet #6 TX (-)
27 Ethernet #8 TX (-) 55 Ethernet #6 RX (-)
28 Ethernet #8 RX (-)
Page 398.51
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
1
F. FMS Identification Logic

Up to three UNS–1B FMSs may be installed in a single aircraft. The NCUs must know their
identities (FMS #1, FMS #2, and FMS #3) in order to work together. The following truth
table shows how to configure two pins on individual UNS–1B FMS NCUs to create the
required logical identification.
FMS IDENTIFICATION LOGIC
MP11J MP11K UNS–1B NCU IDENTITY

#2 FMS SELECT #3 FMS SELECT
DISCRETE DISCRETE
OPEN OPEN FMS #1

GROUND OPEN FMS #2
OPEN GROUND FMS #3 — listening for #1 side

VOR and DME.
GROUND GROUND FMS #3 — listening for #2 side
VOR and DME.
NOTE: If MP11J and MP11K are as shown, then the UNS–1B NCU is
configured as shown.
Page 398.52
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
1
7. NCU Wiring Conversion Chart – UNS–1A To UNS–1B

The following chart is provided for instances where a UNS–1A NCU (P/N 1161–21–( ),
1180–21–( ), or 1180–24–( ) is being replaced with a UNS–1B NCU (P/N 1190–01–X11X,
1190–02–X11X, or
1190–03–X11X).
The following table is intended to help you convert the aircraft’s UNS–1A wiring to UNS–
1B wiring with a minimal effort. When converting from the UNS–1A NCU P/N 1180–24–( ),
refer to the 1180–21–XX column. The wiring for the 1180–24–( ) is a subset of the 1180–
21–XX because the latter accepts analog and fuel flow inputs and has a Double Density
ARINC board that the 1180–24–( ) does not. We use function names from the UNS–1A in
the table. These names may differ from those shown in the NCU Pin Identification Charts
for the UNS–1B NCUs. For complete listing of the NCU pins and functions, refer to the
NCU Pin Identification Charts.
NOTE: When converting to a P/N 1190–XX–2XXX, the discrete inputs and outputs must be configured.
NCU WIRING CONVERSION CHART – UNS–1A TO UNS–1B
FUNCTION NAME (FROM) (FROM) (TO) (TO) (TO)

UNS–1A UNS–1A UNS–1B UNS–1B UNS–1B
1161–21–1XX 1180–21–XX 1190–01–X11X 1190–02–X11X 1190–03–X11X
Port 8 ARINC 429 I/P (A) TP1A MP1C

Note 1, 2
Port 8 ARINC 429 I/P (B) TP1B MP1D

Note 1, 2
Port 9 ARINC 429 I/P (A) TP1D MP1G

Note 1, 2
Port 9 ARINC 429 I/P (B) TP1E MP1H

Note 1, 2
Port 11 ARINC 429 I/P (A) Spare TP1G MP5G

Note 1, 2
Port 11 ARINC 429 I/P (B) Spare TP1H MP5H

Note 1, 2
Strut Switch Input Discrete TP1K TP1K MP15K MP15K MP15K
Port 10 ARINC 429 I/P (A) Spare TP2A MP5C

Note 1, 2
Port 10 ARINC 429 I/P (B) Spare TP2B MP5D

Note 1, 2
Port 4 ARINC 429 I/P (A) TP2D
Page 398.53
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
1

1161–21–1XX 1180–21–XX 1190–01–X11X 1190–02–X11X 1190–03–X11X
Port 4 ARINC 429 I/P (B) TP2E
Port 13 ARINC 429 I/P (A) Spare TP2G MP3C

Note 1, 2
Port 13 ARINC 429 I/P (B) Spare TP2H MP3D

Note 1, 2
VNAV Mode Ground TP2K TP2K MP6G MP6G
Port 6 ARINC 429/571 I/P (A) TP3A TP3A MP8E MP8E MP8E
Note 1 Note 1 Note 1
Port 6 ARINC 429/571 I/P (B) TP3B TP3B MP8F MP8F MP8F
ARINC 429 O/P #5 (B) Spare TP3D
ARINC 430 O/P #5 (A) Spare TP3E
Eng. #1 F/F Input (A) TP3G TP9D MP15A MP15A MP15A
Eng. #1 F/F Input (C) TP3H
Test Switch Discrete TP3K TP3K MP15J MP15J
Port 14 ARINC 429 I/P (A) Spare TP4A MP3E

Note 1, 2
Port 14 ARINC 429 I/P (B) Spare TP4B MP3F

Note 1, 2
Port 15 ARINC 429 I/P (A) Spare TP4D MP3G

Note 1, 2
Port 15 ARINC 429 I/P (B) Spare TP4E MP3H

Note 1, 2
Eng. #1 F/F Input (B) TP4G TP9E MP15B MP15B MP15B
Eng. #1 F/F Input (D) TP4H
MAG/True Output Select TP4K TP4K MP11H MP11H MP11H
Tune Data I/P(CSDB)(A) #1 TP5A TP5A MP14C MP14C MP14C
Tune Data I/P(CSDB)(B) #1 TP5B TP5B MP14D MP14D MP14D
Tune Data I/P(CSDB)(A) #3 TP5D TP5D MP14A MP14A MP14A
Page 398.54
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
1

1161–21–1XX 1180–21–XX 1190–01–X11X 1190–02–X11X 1190–03–X11X
Tune Data I/P(CSDB)(B) #3 TP5E TP5E MP14B MP14B MP14B
Tune Data I/P(CSDB)(A) #2 TP5G TP5G MP2G MP2G MP2G
Tune Data I/P(CSDB)(B) #2 TP5H TP5H MP2H MP2H MP2H
#3 FMS Select Discrete TP5K TP5K MP11K MP11K MP11K
ARINC 429 O/P #6 (A) TP6A

ARINC 429 O/P #6 (B) TP6B
ARINC 429 O/P #7 (A) TP6D
ARINC 429 O/P #7 (B) TP6E
ARINC 429 O/P #6 (A) TP6G
ARINC 429 O/P #6 (B) TP6H
MAG/True OUT SEL OPEN/+28 TP6K TP6K MP11G MP11G MP11G
Eng. #3 F/F Input (A) TP7A MP15E MP15E MP15E
Eng. #3 F/F Input (B) TP7B
Port 3 ARINC 429/571 I/P (A) TP7D TP7D MP12G MP12G MP12G
Port 3 ARINC 429/571 I/P (B) TP7E TP7E MP12H MP12H MP12H
Spare Output (A) CSDB) TP7G
Spare Output (B) CSDB) TP7H
#2 FMS Select Discrete TP7K TP7K MP11J MP11J MP11J
Eng. #3 F/F Input (C) TP8A MP15F MP15F MP15F
Eng. #3 F/F Input (D) TP8B
RS–422 I/P #2 – Spare TP8D
RS–422 I/P #2 + Spare TP8E
RS–422 I/P # 1 + (DTU) TP8G TP8G MP8J MP8J MP8J
RS–422 I/P # 1 – (DTU) TP8H TP8H MP8K MP8K MP8K
Spare Input Discrete TP8K
CDU Data I/P (A) TP9A TP9A MP2A MP2A MP2A
CDU Data I/P (B) TP9B TP9B MP2B MP2B MP2B
Fuel Flow #1 (Hi) TP9D
Fuel Flow #1 & #2 (Return) TP9E
ARINC 429 O/P #2 LS (A) TP9G TP9G MP4J MP4J MP4J
Page 398.55
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
1

1161–21–1XX 1180–21–XX 1190–01–X11X 1190–02–X11X 1190–03–X11X
ARINC 429 O/P #2 LS (B) TP9H TP9H MP4K MP4K MP4K

FMS Heading Mode Ann. Discrete TP9K TP9K MP13E MP13E MP13E
Configuration Straps TP10A–C
Fuel Flow # 2 TP10D
FMS Aprch Mode Ann. Discrete Out TP10K TP10K MP13D MP13D MP13D
Tune Data O/P(CSDB)(A) #1 TP11D TP11D MP2J MP2J MP2J
Tune Data O/P(CSDB)(B) #1 TP11E TP11E MP2K MP2K MP2K
ARINC 429 O/P # 4 (A) TP11G
ARINC 429 O/P # 4 (B) TP11H
SXTK Ann. Discrete Out TP11K TP11K MP13C MP13C MP13C
Configuration Straps TP12A–J MP13A–J
ARINC Output Port #3 (A) TP13A TP13A MP12E MP12E MP12E
ARINC Output Port #3 (B) TP13B TP13B MP12F MP12F MP12F
CDU Data O/P (A) TP13D TP13D MP2E MP2E MP2E
CDU Data O/P (B) TP13E TP13E MP2F MP2F MP2F
ARINC 429 HS Output Port 0 (A) TP13G TP13G MP4A MP4A MP4A
ARINC 429 HS Output Port 0 (B) TP13H TP13H MP4B MP4B MP4B
Message Ann. Discrete Out TP13K TP13K MP13A MP13A MP13A
ARINC 561 #1 O/P (Data) H TP14A TP14A MP5C MP5C
ARINC 561 #1 O/P (Data) L TP14B TP14B MP5D MP5D
ARINC 561 #1 O/P (SYNC) H TP14D TP14D MP5A MP5A
ARINC 561 #1 O/P (SYNC) L TP14E TP14E MP5B MP5B
ARINC 561 #1 O/P (CLK) H TP14G TP14G MP5E MP5E
ARINC 561 #1 O/P (CLK) L TP14H TP14H MP5F MP5F
ARINC 561 Digital Valid Out TP14K TP14K MP5G MP5G
Port 12 ARINC 429 I/P (B) TP15A MP3A
Note 1, 2
Port 12 ARINC 429 I/P (A) TP15B MP3A
Note 1, 2
Port 4 ARINC 429/571 I/P (A) TP15D TP15D MP8A MP8A MP8A
Page 398.56
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
1

1161–21–1XX 1180–21–XX 1190–01–X11X 1190–02–X11X 1190–03–X11X
Port 4 ARINC 429/571 I/P (B) TP15E TP15E MP8B MP8B MP8B
Port 2 ARINC 429/571 I/P (A) TP15G TP15G MP12C MP12C MP12C
Port 2 ARINC 429/571 I/P (B) TP15H TP15H MP12D MP12D MP12D
Waypoint Ann. Discrete Out TP15K TP15K MP13B MP13B MP13B
Eng. #4 Fuel Flow Input (A) MP1A MP15G MP15G MP15G

Eng. #4 Fuel Flow Input (C) MP1B
Vertical Deviation – Up MP1D MP4E MP7F MP7F
Vertical Deviation – Down MP1E MP4F MP7G MP7G
Port 7 ARINC 429/571 I/P (A) MP1G MP1G MP8G MP8G MP8G
Port 7 ARINC 429/571 I/P (B) MP1H MP1H MP8H MP8H MP8H
Vertical Flag MP1J MP4C MP7J MP7J
Vertical Valid Output MP1K MP4D MP7H MP7H
Eng. #4 Fuel Flow Input (B) MP2A MP15H MP15H MP15H
Eng. #4 Fuel Flow Input (D) MP2B
Flag Return MP2J MP4J MP7K MP7K
Port 5 ARINC 429/571 I/P (A) MP3A MP3A MP8C MP8C MP8C
Port 5 ARINC 429/571 I/P (B) MP3B MP3B MP8D MP8D MP8D
TO/FROM (To) MP3D MP3D MP5J MP5J
TO/FROM (From) MP3E MP3E MP5K MP5K
Lateral Deviation – Right MP3G MP3G MP3F MP3F
Lateral Deviation – Left MP3H MP3H MP3G MP3G
NAV Valid Discrete Out MP3K MP3K MP3H MP3H
Flag Return MP4J MP4J MP3K MP3K
Eng. #2 Fuel Flow Input (A) MP5A MP15C MP15C MP15C
Page 398.57
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
1

1161–21–1XX 1180–21–XX 1190–01–X11X 1190–02–X11X 1190–03–X11X
Eng. #2 Fuel Flow Input (C) MP5B

Port 0 ARINC 429/571 I/P (A) MP5D MP5D MP4C MP4C MP4C
Port 0 ARINC 429/571 I/P (B) MP5E MP5E MP4D MP4D MP4D
Port 1 ARINC 429/571 I/P (A) MP5G MP5G MP4G MP4G MP4G
Port 1 ARINC 429/571 I/P (B) MP5H MP5H MP4H MP4H MP4H
On Battery Ann. Discrete Out MP5J MP5J BP1 BP1 BP1
Heading Valid Discrete Input MP5K MP5K MP9F MP9F
Eng. #2 Fuel Flow Input (B) MP6A MP15D MP15D MP15D
Eng. #2 Fuel Flow Input (D) MP6B
ARINC 429 HS Output Port 0 (A) MP6D MP6D MP12A MP12A MP12A
ARINC 429 HS Output Port 0 (B) MP6E MP6E MP12B MP12B MP12B
ARINC 429 HS Output Port 2 (A) MP6G MP6G MP12J MP12J MP12J
ARINC 429 HS Output Port 2 (B) MP6H MP6H MP12K MP12K MP12K
SYNC HDG I/P MAG/True SEL MP6K MP9G MP9G
Synchro HEADING Input X MP7A MP7A MP9A MP9A
Synchro HEADING Input Y MP7B MP7B MP9B MP9B
Synchro HEADING Input Z MP7C MP7C MP9C MP9C
ARINC 571 #1 O/P (A) MP7D MP7D MP4E MP4E MP4E
ARINC 571 #1 O/P (B) MP7E MP7E MP4F MP4F MP4F
Roll Steering Command – Right MP7G MP7G MP11A MP11A MP11A
Roll Steering Command – Left MP7H MP7H MP11B MP11B MP11B
Roll Steering Valid Discrete MP7K MP7K MP11C MP11C MP11C
Synchro Desired TRK X MP8A MP8A MP3A MP3A
Resolver Desired TRK SIN MP8A MP8A MP3A MP3A
Synchro Desired TRK Y MP8B MP8B MP3B MP3B
Resolver Desired TRK COS MP8B MP8B MP3B MP3B
Synchro Desired TRK Z MP8C MP8C MP3C MP3C
Page 398.58
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
1

1161–21–1XX 1180–21–XX 1190–01–X11X 1190–02–X11X 1190–03–X11X
Resolver Desired TRK COM MP8D MP8D MP3D MP3D

Synchro Waypoint Bearing X MP9A MP9A MP1A MP1A
Resolver Waypoint Bearing SIN MP9A MP9A MP1A MP1A
Synchro Waypoint Bearing Y MP9B MP9B MP1B MP1B
Resolver Waypoint Bearing COS MP9B MP9B MP1B MP1B
Synchro Waypoint Bearing Z MP9C MP9C MP1C MP1C
Resolver Waypoint Bearing COM MP9D MP9D MP1D MP1D
Synchro Reference 26 VAC (H) MP9E MP9E MP1E MP1E
Synchro Reference 26 VAC (Com) MP9F MP9F MP9D MP9D
A/P Reference 26 VAC (H) MP9G MP9G MP11D MP11D MP11D
A/P Reference 26 VAC (Com) MP9H MP9H MP11E MP11E MP11E
FMS Valid Discrete Output MP9K MP9K MP13F MP13F MP13F
Configuration Straps MP10A, B, MP11A, B,

D, F–K D–K
Lateral Deviation Scaling MP10C MP11C MP6J MP6J
Frequency Mgmt. Enable (RTU) MP10E MP13H MP6A MP6A
Configuration Straps MP11A–

11K
Configuration Straps MP12A–

12K
Configuration Straps MP13A– MP13A–F,

13K J, K
Configuration Straps MP14A–C, MP14A–

E–J 14F
561 Distance Format MP14K MP13G MP6H MP6H
Configuration Straps MP15A– MP15A–

15K 15K
FMS +28 VDC Input BP2 BP2 BP2 BP2 BP2
FMS +28 VDC Battery Input BP3 BP3 BP3 BP3 BP3
CDU Power Control BP4 BP4 BP4 BP4 BP4
CDU +28 VDC Power BP6 BP6 BP6 BP6 BP6
Page 398.59
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
1

1161–21–1XX 1180–21–XX 1190–01–X11X 1190–02–X11X 1190–03–X11X
FMS Chassis Ground BP7 BP7 BP7 BP7 BP7
FMS DC Return BP8 BP8 BP8 BP8 BP8
CDU DC Return BP11 BP11 BP11 BP11 BP11
NOTE: 1. Refer to sensor and function restrictions shown under ARINC Input Port Capabilities In the
section NCU Interfaces: NCU Wiring – General
2. Ports 8 through 15 ARINC 429/571 apply only to NCU P/N 1190–03–X112
3. If you are converting to P/N 1190–XX–2XXX from a UNS–1B that used SCN 400.X,
.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, or 404.X, and Lateral Deviation Scaling was used, then the
rack wiring should have the wire removed from MP6J. This will allow the use of Discrete
Input 3 for another purpose.
Page 398.60
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
System Data Installation

1. Configuration Module Features
General
The UNS-1B Navigation Computer Unit (NCU) provides interface to a configuration module
containing information pertaining to the specific Flight Management System (FMS)
installation configuration. The configuration module, typically located on the mounting rack
of the NCU, remains with the aircraft when the NCU is removed. The configuration module
reduces aircraft-specific wiring required when an NCU is installed. On multiple FMS
installations, the configuration module for each NCU must be programmed separately.
The data from the configuration module is used to configure the FMS input and output ports
and identifies other installation specific data. The configuration module improves flexibility
in configuration by providing more options/data than discrete strapping.
The configuration module data must be programmed after NCU installation and can be
altered through the FMS Control Display Unit (CDU) through its configuration pages, from a
disk using a Data Transfer Unit (DTU or DTU-100) or a memory storage device using a
Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU). Refer to the Configuration Module Programming
Procedures in this manual for step-by-step configuration instructions. Procedures for loading
and saving a configuration using the DTU/DTU-100/SSDTU are found later in this section.
Modification of the data contained in the configuration module requires entry of a special
code, defined in the Configuration Module Programming Procedures, to prevent inadvertent
configuration modification. Following the modification of configuration data, the FMS
performs a software commanded power-up sequence when the new configuration is stored.
The NCU maintains a copy of the configuration data in its memory. The configuration data
in NCU memory and the configuration module contain checksums to assure configuration
validity. Both sets of data are tested at power up and then compared to each other. The
maintenance of two copies of the configuration data creates four possible validity conditions.
The following table identifies the FMS response for each case.
CONFIGURATION MODULE DATA USAGE
FMS Module If Data is Same, If Data is Different,
Data Set Data Set Then: Then:
Valid Valid Use configuration data from Update FMS data with
either source. configuration module data.
See following paragraphs.
Valid Invalid N/A Give message
“Config Module Failed”.
Configure using data from FMS.
Invalid Valid N/A Update FMS data with
configuration module data.
See following paragraphs.
Invalid Invalid Give messages: Give messages:
“Config Module Failed” and “Config Module Failed” and
“Config Update Required” “Config Update Required”
Page 401
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
The configuration module stores all the information necessary to retain all the options listed
in the Configuration Pages. The configuration module is designed so a future FMS version or
revision may add additional configuration data. For revisions, the FMS may use the
configuration module data to initialize its configuration and the additional data may be
entered as required. To accomplish this, a version and revision number are stored in the
configuration module. Upon initialization, the NCU software checks the version number and
if it is not equal to the version defined in the NCU software, the NCU configuration data is
set to default values and all of the configuration data must be reconfigured. A CONFIG
UPDATE REQUIRED message is generated.
If the configuration module version is equal to the NCU version, there are three possible
cases. These are:
¾ The configuration module revision number is less than the NCU revision number. In
this case the configuration module data is read into the NCU and a message,
CONFIG UPDATE REQUIRED, prompts for entry of the additional data. The NCU
updates the configuration module revision number and stores the additional
configuration data upon command.
¾ The configuration module revision number is equal to the NCU revision number. In
this case, the configuration module data is read into the NCU and used for
configuration.
¾ The configuration module revision number is greater than the NCU revision number.
In this case, the configuration module data is read into the NCU and excess data
discarded. A message, CONFIG UPDATE REQUIRED, is displayed and the user
may either choose to update the configuration module data to the version and revision
of FMS presently installed or to allow the configuration data to remain the same.
In all cases where the system generates the message CONFIG UPDATE REQUIRED, the
NCU will not configure until the configuration data has been updated and stored.
NOTE: The worksheets in each section include checkboxes () used to indicate the
selection of various options.
NOTE: Each whole software number (SCN 601, 602, etc.) has its own section for
configuration module programming. Applicable software numbers are identified in
the page header of each section.
Page 402
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
2. Configuration Worksheets
Universal Avionics Systems Corporation recommends that the following worksheets be
completed in order to easily program the configuration module. One set of worksheets
should be filled out for each NCU. Fill in the blanks and check the appropriate boxes based
on the wiring of the aircraft and its set of avionics components. Further, these worksheets
may be submitted along with other approval paperwork. A copy of these worksheets should
be filed with the aircraft paper work for future reference.
Fill in the blanks and check the boxes ( ) based upon the aircraft wiring and its set of
avionics components.
NOTE: You are hereby authorized to reproduce these worksheets as well as the
configuration module programming procedures if desired.
A. Identification Data
Date:
Company Address:
A/C Manufacturer:
A/C Model No.:
A/C Serial No.:
A/C Registration No.:
(1) FMS Options

NOTE: Refer to the Equipment Specifications section and the unit nameplate to
determine hardware configuration.
Mark the appropriate boxes to indicate the hardware configuration of the FMS/NCU.
Standard (1190-01-1111, 1190-01-1113)
Analog ADC (1190-02-1111, 1190-02-1113)
All Digital (1190-01-1110)
Dual ARINC (1190-03-1112)
ASCB (1190-03-1114)
(2) Software:
Mark the appropriate box and fill in the corresponding blanks to indicate the software
version in the FMS NCU.
SCN 40__.__ Flight Management System
Page 403
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
B. Fuel Options
FUEL MODE ENABLED DISABLED
EMPTY WEIGHT (up to six digits)
NOTE: Empty weight must be entered in lbs. regardless of display units.
NUMBER OF (Maximum of 4)
ENGINES
DISPLAY UNITS LBS KGS
FUEL FLOW TYPE NO SENSOR DC LINEAR AC LINEAR
PULSE FREQ PULSE WIDTH
NOTE: Second Harmonic Fuel Flow Sensors are not supported by the UNS-1B FMS.
DC Linear Fuel Flow Scaling

FLOW RATE (PPH) VOLTAGE (VDC) MIN
AIRCRAFT # ENG
LOWER UPPER LOWER UPPER FF
ATR-42 2 0 1212 0.000 5.000 50
ATR-72 2 0 1212 0.000 5.000 50
BOEING 737-300 2 0 12000 0.173 4.827 350
BAe ATP 2 0 1500 0.000 5.000 50
BAe-125-800 2 0 2800 0.000 5.000 100
BEECH KA-300/350/1900 2 0 750 0.000 5.000 60
BEECH KA-90, KA-200 2 0 600 0.200 10.200 20
BEECHJET 2 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75
BK-117 2H 0 500 0.000 5.000 25
BOEING 707 4 0 17700 1.000 11.000 500
CESSNA CITATION I 2 0 1418 0.000 5.000 110
CESSNA CITATION II/SII 2 0 2000 0.000 7.050 140
CESSNA CITATION III, VI,VII 2 0 2400 0.500 5.500 50
CITATION II 2 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75
NOTE: Optional fuel flow on later Citation II aircraft.
CITATION V 2 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75
CL600 2 0 3500 0.000 5.000 65
CL601 2 0 4500 0.000 5.000 65
DASH 8 2 0 1200 0.000 5.000 75
DO-228 2 0 500 0.000 5.000 60
FALCON 10 2 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75
FALCON 20/TFE-371 2 0 3000 0.000 5.000 80
FALCON 50 3 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75
GULFSTREAM II 2 0 8000 0.000 5.000 80
GULFSTREAM III 2 0 10000 0.000 5.000 160
HS-125 2 0 2200 0.000 5.000 100
IAI ASTRA 1125 2 0 2200 1.000 5.400 70
IAI WESTWIND 1124 2 0 2200 0.000 5.000 100
JETSTAR II 4 0 2500 1.000 11.000 75
Page 404
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
DC Linear Fuel Flow Scaling (Continued)

FLOW RATE (PPH) VOLTAGE (VDC) MIN.
AIRCRAFT # ENG
LEARJET 2 0 3000 0.000 10.000 55
LOCKHEED L1011 3 0 20000 0.000 5.000 400
MERLIN 2 0 600 0.000 5.000 25
OPV 1 0 150 0.000 5.000 1
PARTENAVIA 2 0 644 0.000 5.000 60
PIPER CHEYENNE III 2 0 550 0.000 5.000 50
PIPER CHEYENNE IV 2 0 800 0.000 8.000 50
PUMA 2H 0 600 0.000 10.000 75
S-76A 2H 0 500 0.000 5.000 25
S-76B 2H 0 800 0.000 5.000 60
SABRE 65 2 0 4000 1.000 9.000 100
AC Linear Fuel Flow Scaling

FLOW RATE (PPH) VOLTAGE (VRMS) MIN.
AIRCRAFT # ENG FF
LOWER UPPER LOWER UPPER PPH
FALCON 20 2 0 4000 0.000 5.000 75
GULFSTREAM II 2 0 12000 0.000 5.000 180
MDC DC-8 4 0 7800 0.000 5.000 150
MDC DC-8 4 0 12000 0.000 5.000 250
Pulse Frequency Fuel Flow Scaling

PULSE
AIRCRAFT # ENG SCALING UNITS MIN. FF
EDGE
BEECHJET 2 FALLING 56.250 PPH/HZ 75
BEECHJET DIAMOND 2 FALLING 56.250 PPH/HZ 75
FALCON 10/100 2 RISING 13.888 PPH/HZ 75
HS-125 2 FALLING 56.250 PPH/HZ 75
LEARJET 2 FALLING 28.150 PPH/HZ 55
PARTENAVIA 2 FALLING 2.353 PPH/HZ 120
S-76 2H FALLING 56.250 PPH/HZ 75
Pulse Width Fuel Flow Scaling

PULSE
AIRCRAFT # ENG SCALING UNITS/mS MIN. FF
POLARITY
BAE-125-800 2 POSITIVE 100.000 PPH/mS 80
BAE-146 4 POSITIVE 100.000 PPH/mS 185
FALCON 200 2 POSITIVE 100.000 PPH/mS 80
GULFSTREAM II, III 2 POSITIVE 80.000 PPH/mS 180
Page 405
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
(1) DC Linear Fuel Flow Scaling Data

Refer to the associated table above for specific information needed to complete this
worksheet.
INPUT RANGE 0 – 5 VDC 0 – 8 VDC 0 – 12 VDC
LOWER FLOW RATE UPPER FLOW RATE
LOWER VOLTAGE UPPER VOLTAGE
MINIMUM FUEL FLOW PPH (pounds per hour)
NOTE: Fuel flow values must be entered in pounds per hour regardless of display units.
(2) AC Linear Fuel Flow Scaling Data

worksheet.
INPUT RANGE 0 – 5 VRMS 0 – 8 VRMS
(3) Pulse Frequency Fuel Flow Scaling Data

worksheet.
SCALING PPH/HZ (123.456)
PULSE EDGE RISING FALLING
(4) Pulse Width Fuel Flow Scaling Data

worksheet.
SCALING (123.456) PPH / millisecond
PULSE POLARITY POSITIVE NEGATIVE
Page 406
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
C. Performance Options
SCN 400.X
PERFORMANCE ENABLED DISABLED
MODE
SCN 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X

BASIC ENABLED DISABLED
MANUAL ENABLED DISABLED
NOTE: MANUAL is a future provision and must be configured DISABLED.
ADVANCED ENABLED DISABLED
NOTE: Refer to your aircraft flight manual for the value of the normal nominal climb gradient.
PERF DATABASE
ID
(up to 24 characters and only when advanced is enabled)
NOTE: Refer to the Advanced Performance Option Information table that follows.
Page 407
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
(1) Advanced Performance Option Information
The following table reflects data needed when the Advanced Performance Option is
enabled. Match the Performance Database ID number and diskette ID number exactly
when entering during Configuration Module Programming. It is required that the
applicable supplement be inserted into the associated Operator’s Manual.
Kit #
Disk #/Zip #/USB # Database Performance Database
Aircraft Type Engine Type AFM ID
Operator’s Manual Version ID (Disk ID)
Supp. #
P12500 CL601-1A GE CF34–3A PSP601–1B A12500 CL6011A030699A12500
A12500/A12500-1 (CL600–2A12) (Rev 26)
/A12500-2 43,100 lbs. MTOW
2421CL6013A (W/SB 601–0238)
P12501 CL601-1A GE CF34–3A PSP601–1B–1 A12501 CL6011A020699A12501
A12501/A12501-1 (CL600–2A12) (Rev 24)
/A12501-2 44,600 or 45,100 lbs. MTOW
2421CL6013A (W/SB 601–0238)
P12502 CL601-3A GE CF34–3A PSP601A-1-1 A12502 CL6013A010699A12502
A12502/A12502-1 (CL600-2B16) (Rev 30)
/A12502-2 44,600 or 45,100 lbs. MTOW
2421CL6013A
P12520-1 Learjet 60 PW305A FM 123-09 A12520 LEAR60210794A12520
A12520/A12520-1 23,100 lbs. MTOW
/A12520-2
2421LR60-405
P12521-1 Learjet 60 Prod PW305A FM 123-11 A12521 LEAR60150395A12521
A12521/A12521-1 23,500 lbs. MTOW
/A12521-2
2421LR60
A12521/A12521-1 SCN 405/505
2421LR60-405 23,500 lbs. MTOW
(SCN 404.X)
A12521/A12521-1 SCN 404/504
2421LR60 23,500 lbs. MTOW
(SB 60-8-1)
(SCN 404.X)
P12521-3 Learjet 60 Retro PW305A FM 123-11 A12521 LEAR60150395A12521
A12521/A12521-1 SCN 404/504
2421LR60 23,500 lbs. MTOW
(SB 60-8-1)
P12522 Canadian Certified Learjet 60 PW305A AFMS: W1314-2 A12522 LEAR60150795A12522
A12522/A12522-1 Canadian/German (Canada)
/A12522-2 23,500 lbs. MTOW W1418
2421LR60-405C (Germany)
Page 408
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
D. VNAV Options
VNAV MODE ENABLED DISABLED
FPA LIMIT ° (max 9.9 degrees)
VDEV OUTPUT NORMAL VN-212
VDEV STOW ENABLED DISABLED
NOTE: VDEV STOW is applicable to SCN 405.4 and later
E. Approach Options
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X
(1) APPR OPT 1/1
APPROACH MODE ENABLED DISABLED
CAUTION: (SCN 401.1) THE REMOTE TUNE MUST BE DISABLED
REMOTE TUNE ENABLED DISABLED
REMOTE ARM ENABLED DISABLED
NOTE: REMOTE ARM should only be enabled when the aircraft is equipped with Collins
EFIS 85/86 with status B-4, B-14, C-4, C-14, E-4 or E-14 and Collins FCC 86/APS
85 Flight Guidance Systems.
FPA LIMIT ° (max. 9.9 degrees)
(2) APPROACH TYPES

SCN 400.X
VOR ENABLED DISABLED
RNV ENABLED DISABLED
VFR ENABLED DISABLED
ILS ENABLED ADVISORY
SCN 401.X, 402.X, 403.X

LOC ENABLED DISABLED
BC ENABLED DISABLED
Page 409
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
F. Approach Options
SCN 404.X
(1) APPR OPT 1/1
NOTE: REMOTE ASRM should only be enabled when the aircraft is equipped with Collins
(2) APPR TYPES 1/1

LOC ENABLED ADVISORY
BC ENABLED ADVISORY
NOTE: When REMOTE ARM is DISABLED the APPR TYPES 1/1 and 2/2 pages are not
configurable.
NOTE: When REMOTE ARM is ENABLED, then ILS, LOC and BC are configurable.
Page 410
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
G. Approach Options
SCN 405.X
(1) APPR OPT 1/1
AUTO HDG ENABLED DISABLED
ROLL STEERING GAINS
Integer Multiplier (Range: 1x to 7x)
NOTE: We recommend starting with the 3x integer multiplier. Let your flight experience
guide you in selecting another integer multiplier.
(2) APPR TYPES 1/1

GPS ENABLED DISABLED
NDB ENABLED DISABLED
BC ENABLED ADVISORY
configurable.
Page 411
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
H. EFIS Options
SCN 400.X, 401.X
(1) EFIS OPT 1/1
CAUTION: ASSURE THAT ADVANCED EFIS IS COMPATIBLE PRIOR
TO SELECTING 429 ADV.
TYPE 429 ADV 429 GAMA
NOTE: 429 ADV = Collins B, C, E series, Bendix/King 40/50 or equivalent.
429 GAMA = Standard
(2) PERF DISP OPTS

NOTE: Some EFIS Systems do not support the following options. Contact UASC
Product Support with questions.
V1 Display Options
COMPUTED Black Blue Green Cyan
COLOR Red Magenta Yellow
MANUAL Black Blue Green Cyan
SYMBOL Bug Line
V2 Display Options
SYMBOL Bug Line
V TGT Display Options

SYMBOL Bug Line
V REF Display Options

SYMBOL Bug Line
Page 412
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
I. EFIS Options
SCN 402.X, 403.X
(1) EFIS OPT 1/1
TYPE 429 ADV 429 GAMA 429 DHC (SCN 403.X)
NOTES: 429 ADV = Collins B, C, E series, Bendix/King 40/50 or equivalent.
429 GAMA = Standard
429 DHC = (SCN 403.X) de Havilland Canada with EDZ-810
(2) PL-4 OPT 1/1

CHP SINGLE N/A
RADAR TYPE RTA-844A RT-854 N/A
PL-4 REF MAGNETIC N/A
CAUTION: (SCN 402.X) THE TCAS MODE MUST BE CONFIGURED AS DISABLED.
TCAS MODE ENABLED DISABLED
MLS SINGLE DUAL N/A
(3) PERF DISP OPTS

The following options are only available with Advanced or Manual
performance modes enabled.
V1 Display Options
SYMBOL Bug Line
V2 Display Options
SYMBOL Bug Line
Page 413
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X

SYMBOL Bug Line

SYMBOL Bug Line
J. EFIS Options
SCN 404.X, 405.X
(1) EFIS OPT 1/1
TYPE 429 ADV 429 GAMA EDC 705 429 DHC
429 GAMA = Standard
EDZ 705 = Honeywell
429 DHC = (SCN 403.X) de Havilland Canada with EDZ-810
(2) PL-4 OPT 1/1

CHP SINGLE N/A
PL-4 REF MAGNETIC TRUE N/A
ADF DIAG SINGLE DUAL N/A
FUEL MAX SELECT #1 SELECT #2
(SCN 405.X)
NOTE: This selection sets the display limits to be satisfactory for the Pro Line 4. If your
aircraft is a LEAR 60 (including the FIAS Lear 60), then select #1 (sets the value
to 8191 lbs.). If your aircraft is a Canadair CL-601 Challenger (including the FIAS
Challenger), then select #2 (set value to 65535 lbs.)
TCAS MODE SINGLE DUAL N/A
MLS SINGLE DUAL N/A
RAD ALT SINGLE DUAL N/A
Page 414
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
(3) Performance Display Options

V1 Display Options
SYMBOL Bug Line
VR Display Options
SYMBOL Bug Line
V2 Display Options
SYMBOL Bug Line

SYMBOL Bug Line

SYMBOL Bug Line
Page 415
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
K. NAV Options
AC ROLL STEERING ENABLED DISABLED
STEERING LIMITS AT OR BELOW Ft. Altitude
NOTE: Altitude range – 0 to 60,000 ft., this altitude may not be greater than that entered on the
line below.
BANK LIMIT ° (min. 15°, max. 30.0°)
AT OR ABOVE Ft. Altitude
NOTE: Altitude range – 0 to 60,000 ft.., this altitude may not be lower than that entered on the line
above. You may need to configure the high limit (AT OR ABOVE) before the low limit (AT OR
BELOW) in some installations.
AIRCRAFT TYPE FIXED WING HELICOPTER
L. Tune Options
Mark the appropriate boxes to indicate the quantity of each type of radio installed in your
aircraft.
# COMS 0 1 2
# NAVS 0 1 2
# ADFS 0 1 2
# ATC 0 1
M. Crossfill (XFILL) Options

(1) Data Base Editing
SCN 401.X, 402.X, 403.X
DATABASE EDITING ENABLED DISABLED
(2) Crossfill Options

SCN 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
MASTER ENABLED DISABLED
NOTE: If MASTER is ENABLED, then INIT, FUEL, and FLIGHT PLAN will be
ENABLED automatically.
INIT ENABLED DISABLED
FUEL ENABLED DISABLED
FLIGHT PLAN ENABLED DISABLED
TUNE PRESETS ENABLED DISABLED
Page 416
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
N. Cabin Display Options

SCN 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
(1) CABIN DISPLAY 1/1
Cabin Display ENABLED DISABLED
(2) MESSAGE ( ) 1/1

Message 1 Title
Message 1 Duration Sec.
Message 2 Title
Message 3 Title
Message 4 Title
Message 5 Title
Message 6 Title
O. Strut Switch Options

SCN 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
STRUT SWITCH ANALOG DIGITAL
Page 417
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
P. ARINC Options
Record the assignment of options to specific numbered ports by marking the intersection of
the columns with the appropriate row. Assign NO SENSOR to all unused ports.
(1) ARINC Receive Port Assignments
Units with 2nd ARINC board only
Receive Port # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
MP MP MP MP MP MP MP MP MP MP MP MP MP MP MP MP
Pin Numbers (A/B)
4C 4G 12C 12G 8A 8C 8E 8G 1C 1G 5C 5G 3A 3C 3E 3G
UNS-1F/UNS-1B
4D 4H 12D 12H 8B 8D 8F 8H 1D 1H 5D 5H 3B 3D 3F 3H
NO SENSOR
429 ADC
575 ADC
AFIS (Note 1)
429 AHRS 1
429 AHRS 2
CROSSFILL 1
CROSSFILL 2
429 DME
709 DME
DOPPLER 91
DOPPLER 2012
HS GPS 1 B1 (Note 2)
HS GPS 3
LS GPS 1 B1 (Note 2)
LS GPS 3
C-IV GPIRS 1
C-IV GPIRS 2
C-IV GPIRS 3
IC600 R
IC600 L
HS 429 GPS 1
HS 429 GPS 2
P4-01 IOC
P4-02 IOC
RRS-T
Page 418
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
(1) ARINC Receive Port Assignments (Continued)
Receive Port # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Pin Numbers (A/B)
4C 4G 12C 12G 8A 8C 8E 8G 1C 1H 5D 5H 3A 3D 3F 3H
UNS-1F/UNS-1D+
4D 4H 12D 12H 8B 8D 8F 8H 1D 1G 5D 5G 3B 3C 3E 3G
429 IRGPS 1
429 IRGPS 2
429 IRGPS 3
HS429 IRS 1
HS429 IRS 2
HS429 IRS 3
LS429 IRS 1
LS429 IRS 2
LS429 IRS 3
571 IRS 1
571 IRS 2
571 IRS 3
KFC FGS
LCS
P4-L AUX
P4-R AUX
P4-01 Onside (Note 3)
P4-01 Offside (Note 3)
429 RADAR
571 RADAR
RADAR 1500
429 VOR RAD
711 VOR
Page 419
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
NOTES: 1. For SCN 400.X, 401.X, 401.1, 402.X, 403.X, and 404.X, Port 7 (Mp-8G, MP-8H) is not configurable.
2. B1 indicates TSO C-129 Class B1 GPS. This Class 1 GPS is required for GPS approach operation. GPS-1000,
GPS-1200 and UNS 764-2 are certified B1. The absence of B1 indicates non-TSO C-129 Class B1 GPS. These
inputs may not be used for GPS approach mode. GPS-950 and UNS 764 are not certified B1.
3. The P4-01 Onside, P4-02 Onside, P4-01 Offside and P4-02 Offside buses are used for the standard Learjet 60
Collins Pro Line 4 EFD-871. In this installation, the P4-01 Onside or P4-02 Onside and the P4-01 Offside or
P4-02 Offside IOC input buses are configured with either the P4-01 IOC or the P4-02 IOC output bus and the
P4-01 MAP bus.
4. The P4-03 Onside, P4-04 Onside, P4-03 Offside and P4-04 Offside buses are used for the FIAS Collins Pro
Line 4 EFD-871. In this installation, the P4-03 Onside or P4-04 Onside and the P4-03 Offside or P4-04 Offside
IOC input buses are configured with the P4-01 IOC output bus and the P4-01 MAP output bus.
5. The P4-05 Onside, P4-06 Onside, P4-05 Offside and P4-06 Offside buses are used for the F2000 and Astra
SPX Collins Pro Line 4 EFD-4077. In this installation, the P4-05 Onside or P4-06 Onside and the P4-05 Offside
or the P4-06 Offside IOC input buses are configured with the P4-03 IOC output bus and the P4-02 MAP A and
P4-02 MAP B output bus.
Page 420
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
(2) ARINC Transmit Port Assignments
Record the assignment of options to specific numbered ports by marking the intersection
of the columns with the appropriate row. Assign NO SENSOR to all unused ports.
#1 ARINC BOARD #2 ARINC BOARD
ARINC Transmit
Port # 0A / 0B 1 2A / 2B 3 4A / 4B 5 6A / 6B 7
(NOTE 4)
MP MP MP MP MP MP MP MP MP MP MP MP
4A 12A 4E 4J 12J 12E 1A 5A 1E 1J 5J 5E
4B 12B 4F 4K 12K 12F 1B 5B 1F 1K 5K 5F
NO SENSOR
429 LS (Note 1)
429 HS (Note 1)
571 LRN (Note 1)
429 XFILL (Note 1)
429 TUNE (Note 1)
P4-01 IOC (Note 1)
P4-02 IOC (Note 2)
P4-01 MAP (Note 1)
NOTES: 1. SCN 402.X and later.
2. SCN 405.X.
(3) ARINC 561 Transmit Port Assignments

SCN 404.X, 405.X
561 Bus LRN DATA DIST ONLY
DTG Format ARINC 561 ARINC 568
Page 421
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
Q. CSDB Options
Record the assignment of options to specific numbered ports by marking the intersection of the
columns with the appropriate row. Assign NO SENSOR to all unused ports.
RCV # or XMIT # RX 1 RX 2 RX 3 RX 4 TX 1 TX 2
Pin Numbers (A/B) MP14C MP2G MP14A MP14E MP2J MP10A
MP14D MP2H MP14B MP14F MP2K MP10B
NO SENSOR
RTU (Note 1)
SINGLE DME
DUAL DME
DME DIRECT
VOR
MFD
ERP (Note 2)
NONE
TUNE
RTU TUNE (Note 1)
NOTES: 1. If an RTU is installed, the appropriate receive and transmit ports should be
configured for RTU and RTU TUNE respectively.
2. SCN 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X. The ERP (EFIS Radar Panel) option is
only available when interfaced with Collins Pro Line 4 Avionics system.
When the ERP is selected, the only options available for the other ports
ARE NO SENSOR and VOR.
R. Analog Options
Analog options do not apply to NCU P/Ns 1190-01-1110 and 1190-03-XXXX.
WPT BRG SIG DRIFT ANGLE WPT BRG
WPT BRG FMT NONE SYNCHRO RESOLVER
OFFSET +180 DEGREES +0 DEGREES
RELATIVE TO NOSE NORTH
SCNs 403.X, 404.X, 405.X

PITCH COMMAND NONE DHC
DESIRED TRACK NONE SYNCHRO RESOLVER
SCNs 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X

ANALOG HDG ENABLED DISABLED
SCNs 404.X, 405.X

ANALOG HDG NONE HDG ONLY HDG+PIT+ROL
Page 422
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
S. Air Data Options
WARNING: IT IS IMPERATIVE THAT YOU IDENTIFY THE TYPE OF AIR DATA
INPUT(S) (BARO ALTITUDE, PRESSURE ALTITUDE OR BOTH)
PROVIDED BY THE AIR DATA SOURCES IN YOUR
INSTALLATION. YOU MUST CONFIGURE THE CONFIGURATION
MODULE TO MATCH THESE INPUTS EXACTLY.
The use of Baro Altitude inputs is strongly recommended. Without Baro Altitude, SIDs and
STARs with altitude terminators cannot be flown and VNAV operation below 18,000 feet is
not possible.
Due to the different NCU configurations, some of the following options may be blanked;
their entry field dashed or is not selectable by the operator.
ALT DISPLAY BARO ALT PRESS ALT BOTH
SCNs 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X
NOTE: BOTH must be selected if the ADVANCED Performance option is ENABLED.
A/S DISPLAY TAS TAS and IAS

MINIMUM TAS KTS (0 to 60)
SAT FORMAT NONE DIGITAL 565 DC (Note)
MACH FORMAT NONE DIGITAL
ALT TYPE (SCN 400.X) NONE DIGITAL
BARO ALT FORMAT NONE 565 DC/RESOLVER DIGITAL

(SCNs 401.X, 402.X, SYNCHRO
403.X, 404.X, 405.X)
PRES ALT FORMAT NONE 565 DC/RESOLVER DIGITAL

(SCNs 401.X, 402.X, SYNCHRO
403.X, 404.X, 405.X)
A/S FORMAT 565 DC 20MV IAS 11MV IAS DIGITAL

(Note)
NOTE: 565 DC is available only for NCU P/N 1190-02-XXXX
Page 423
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
3. Configuration Module Programming Procedures
Refer to the Description and Operation section for general information about the use of the
FMS. That section introduces line select keys, keyboard and display features.
On multiple FMS installations, the following procedures must be repeated for each FMS.
Program the Configuration Module as follows:
A. Starting the FMS
With power applied to the aircraft, push [PWR DIM] or [ON/OFF DIM] key as applicable on
the FPCDU. After approximately a five-second warm-up, self test will begin with the self
test page displayed and test will proceed. The display will look like this during the database
portion of the self-test.
UNS - 1B
aircraft identification
CPU PASS
RAM PASS
DATABASE PASS
If the self tests detect a fault precluding use of the system, then this page will identify the
failed test. In this case refer to Maintenance, Checkout and Troubleshooting section of this
manual.
Page 424
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
A. Starting the FMS (Continued)
If the self tests detect no faults precluding use of the system, then the COPYRIGHT page
will be briefly displayed followed by the initialization page (INIT 1/1).
2
Push [1R] to highlight the
DATE field.
Push [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
[9] and then push [ENTER].
POS INIT 1/1 ÂMSG

date
initial pos 31-MAY-96
id ----- utc
N 32 07.9 14:49
W 110 55.4
standard/extended
nav database expires
19-JUN-96
¬ACCEPT fmc ver 404.0
1
Push [5L] to initialize
the NCU. Ignore the date,
position and time
information.
Page 425
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
NOTE: The following is applicable to SCN 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X. In SCN
400.X the DATA page is not illustrated, press CONFIG [1R] to display CONFIG
1/2 page.
1
Push [DATA] to
show the DATA DATA 1/5
1/5 page.
¬JEPPESEN
¬PILOT
¬PERF
¬DISK
¬HOLD POS MAINT®
2
Push MAINT [5R] to show
the Maintenance page.
MAINT 1/1
¬CONFIG MAINT LOG®
3 Push CONFIG [1L] to

show the First
Configuration page. CLEAR LOG®
RETURN®
EDIT [1R] must be pushed once, on this or a later page, before you
can change the configuration. The display will change to:
EDIT CONFIG®
STORE CONF®
The changes you make performing these configuration procedures are
not effective until you store them. You should enter all required
configuration changes before pushing STORE CONF® [1R].
If you push STORE CONF® [1R] before making all required

changes, then you will have to wait while the system restarts itself.
CONFIG 1/2
version rev
4
Push DISPLAY [1L]
to show the Display 103 001 EDIT®
Configuration page. aircraft identification
TEST ONLY
¬FMS CONFIG ANALOG®
¬ARINC AIR DATA®
¬CSDB RETURN®
Page 426
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
B. Fuel Options Configuration
1
Push FMS CONFIG [2L] on the
first CONFIG page to show
the first FMS CONFIG page.
FMS CONFIG 1/2

The FMS shows its fms options edit config
basic hardware class. STANDARD STORE CONF®
¬FUEL EFIS®
2
Push FUEL [2L] to show ¬PERF NAV®
the Fuel Options page.
¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®
3 Push FUEL MODE [1L].

Fill in the appropriate
item number:
9
1 ENABLED Push FF SCALE [2R].
2 DISABLED
and then push [ENTER].
4
Push EMPTY WEIGHT [2L].
Fill in the aircraft FUEL OPT 1/1
empty weight and then fuel mode edit config
push [ENTER]. ENABLED STORE CONF®
empty weight
18620 lbs FF SCALE®
5
Push # OF ENGINES [3L]. # of engines
Fill in 1, 2, 3, or 4, 2 NAV®
and then push [ENTER]. display units
LBS TUNE®
fuel flow type
DIGITAL RETURN®
6
Push DISPLAY UNITS [4L].
item number:
1 LBS NOTE: If, in Step 8, you selected NO
2 KGS SENSOR, then push RETURN [5R], skip
and then push [ENTER]. the fuel flow scaling procedures,
and go to the Performance Options
Configuration procedures.
7 Push FUEL FLOW TYPE [5L].
OPT LIST 1/1

select
#-
8
item number from the 1 no sensor
Option List and then 2 dc linear
push [ENTER]. See note. 3 ac linear
4 pulse freq
5 pulse width
6 digital
RETURN®
Page 427
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
C. DC Linear Fuel Flow Scaling Configuration
1 2
Push INPUT RANGE [1L]. Fill in the LOWER and UPPER
Fill in the appropriate FLOW RATES and VOLTAGES with
item number: the appropriate values for
1 05 VDC your aircraft.
2 08 VDC Push the line select key, input the
3 012 VDC value, and then push [ENTER]
and then push [ENTER]. for each item.
FF SCALING 1/1
input range edit config
0-8 VDC STORE CONF®
lower FLOW RATE upper
3
Push MIN FF [5L].
0 pph 1212
Fill in the rate for
your aircraft and lower VOLTAGE upper
then push [ENTER]. O.000 vdc 5.000
min ff
50 pph RETURN®
4
Push RETURN [5R].
D. AC Linear Fuel Flow Scaling Configuration
2
Fill in the LOWER and
1 Push INPUT RANGE [1L]. UPPER FLOW RATES [2L] [2R]

Fill in the appropriate and VOLTAGES [3L] [3R]
item number: with the appropriate
1 05 VRMS values for your aircraft.
2 08 VRMS Push the line select key,
and then push [ENTER]. input the value, and then
push [ENTER] for each item.
FF SCALING 1/1
0-5 VRMS STORE CONF®
3
Push MIN FF [5L]. lower FLOW RATE upper
Fill in the rate for 0 pph 4000
then push [ENTER]. O.OOO vrms 5.000
min ff
75 pph RETURN®
4
Push RETURN [5R].
Page 428
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
E. Pulse Frequency Fuel Flow Scaling Configuration
1
Push SCALING [2L].
Fill in the scaling
for your aircraft and
then push [ENTER].
FF SCALING 1/1
edit config
STORE CONF®
scaling
2 Push PULSE EDGE [3L]. 13.888 pph/hz

Fill in the appropriate pulse edge
item number: RISING
1 RISING
2 FALLING
and then push [ENTER]. min ff
75 pph RETURN®
3 4
Push MIN FF [5L]. Push RETURN [5R].
Fill in the minimum fuel flow
rate for your aircraft
F. Pulse Width Fuel Flow Scaling Configuration
1 Push SCALING [2L].

Fill in the scaling
for your aircraft
FF SCALING 1/1
and then push [ENTER]. edit config
STORE CONF®
scaling
40.000 pph/msec
pulse polarity
2
Push PULSE POLARITY [3L]. POSITIVE
item number:
1 POSITIVE min ff
2 NEGATIVE 100 pph RETURN®
4
Push RETURN [5R].
3
Push MIN FF [5L].
rate for your aircraft and
then push [ENTER].
Page 429
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
G. Performance Options Configuration

SCN 400.X
1
Push RETURN [5R] on the Fuel Option
page to show the FMS CONFIG 1/2 page.
FMS CONFIG 1/2
2 Push PERF [3L].

fms options
ALL DIGITAL
edit config
STORE CONF®
¬FUEL EFIS®
¬PERF NAV®
3 Push BASIC [1L].

item number:
¬VNAV
¬APPR
TUNE®
RETURN®
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
PERF OPT 1/1
basic edit config
4
Push MANUAL [2L]. ENABLED STORE CONF®
Fill in the appropriate manual
item number: DISABLED
1 ENABLED advanced
2 DISABLED ENABLED PERF DB®
5
Push ADVANCED [3L]. RETURN®
item number:
1 ENABLED
6
2 DISABLED If you enabled ADVANCED,
and then push [ENTER]. and the optional Performance
Database is a part of your
installation, then push
PERF DB [3R].
Page 430
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
H. Performance Options Configuration
SCN 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
1 Push RETURN [5R] on the Fuel Option

FMS CONFIG 1/ 2
2 Push PERF [3L].

fms options
ALL DIGITAL
edit config
STORE CONF®
¬FUEL EFIS®
¬PERF NAV®
3
Push BASIC [1L]. ¬VNAV TUNE®
item number:
¬APPR RETURN®
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
PERF OPT 1/ 1
basic edit config
4
1 ENABLED advanced
NOTE: Make sure

MANUAL is DISABLED. RETURN®
6
If you enabled ADVANCED,
5
Push ADVANCED [3L]. and the optional Performance
Fill in the appropriate Database is a part of your
item number: installation, then push
1 ENABLED PERF DB [3R].
2 DISABLED
PERF DB 1/1
edit config
STORE CONF®
7
Push PERFORMANCE DATABASE
ID [3L]. Fill in the
appropriate database performance database id
identification for your CL602190193A12501
aircraft and then push
[ENTER].
RETURN®
Page 431
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
I. VNAV Options Configuration
FMS CONFIG 1/2
1 Push RETURN [5R] on the

Performance Database
page and again on the
fms options
ALL DIGITAL
edit config
STORE CONF®
Performance Option page
to show the FMS ¬FUEL EFIS®
Configuration page.
¬PERF NAV®
¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®
2 Push VNAV [4L].
3 Push VNAV MODE [1L].

item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
4 Push FPA LIMIT [3L].

Fill in the flight path
angle limit (max. 9.9°)
and then push [ENTER]. VNAV OPT 1/1
vnav mode edit config
ENABLED STORE CONF®
5 SCN 405.4 only

Push VDEV STOW [4L].
fpa limit
7.5Ø
item number: vdev stow
1 ENABLED DISABLED
2 DISABLED vdev output
NORMAL RETURN®
6 Push VDEV OUTPUT [5L].

item number:
1 NORMAL
2 VN-212
and then press [ENTER].
See note.
NOTE: VN212 causes VDEV outputs to be three times normal,

(225 mV/dot vs. 75 mV/dot).
Page 432
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
J. Approach Options Configuration
SCN 400.X 401.X, 402.X, 403.X
FMS CONFIG 1/3

fms options
1
Push RETURN [5R] on the
VNAV Options page to show ALL DIGITAL STORE®
the FMS Configuration Page.
¬FUEL
¬PERF NAV®
2
Push APPR [5L].
¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®
3
Push APPR MODE [1L].
item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
APPR OPT 1/1
appr mode edit config
4 CAUTION: REMOTE TUNE ENABLED STORE CONF®

MUST BE DISABLED IN remote tune
SCN 401.1. ENABLED
Push REMOTE TUNE [2L]. remote arm
Fill in the appropriate ENABLED
item number: fpa limit
1 ENABLED 9.0Ø
2 DISABLED
and then push [ENTER]. ¬APPR TYPES RETURN®
5
Push REMOTE ARM [3L].
6
Fill in the appropriate Push FPA LIMIT [4L].
item number: Fill in the appropriate
1 ENABLED maximum flight path angle
2 DISABLED (max. 9.9 degrees).
See NOTE.
NOTE: Make sure that EFIS and flight guidance system is compatible if
REMOTE ARM is to be ENABLED. REMOTE ARM should only be enabled
when the aircraft is equipped with Collins EFIS 85/86 with
status B-4, B-14, C-4, C-14, E-4, or E-14 and Collins FCC
86/APS 85 Flight Guidance Systems. You must set REMOTE ARM to
ENABLED for the system to operate in the NAV-to-NAV mode.
Page 433
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
J. Approach Options Configuration (Continued)
SCN 400.X 401.X, 402.X, 403.X
APPR OPT 1/1

remote tune
ENABLED
remote arm
ENABLED
fpa limit
9.0Ø
¬APPR TYPES RETURN®
7
If REMOTE ARM [3L] is ENABLED,
then push APPR TYPES [5L].
NOTE: When REMOTE ARM is DISABLED, APPR

TYPES 1/1 page is not
configurable.
NOTE: These items are not configurable

on the Approach Types pages.
VOR, RNV, and VFR will show ENABLED
8
or DISABLED based on sensor selections Push ILS [2R].
on other pages. Fill in the appropriate
item number:
1 ENABLED
2 ADVISORY
APPR TYPES 1/1
vor edit config
rnv ils
ENABLED ADVISORY
vfr loc
ENABLED ADVISORY
bc
ADVISORY 9 SCN 401.X, 402.X, 403.X
Repeat Step 8 for
LOC [3R] and BC [4R].
RETURN®
bk
Push RETURN [5R] to
show the Approach
Options page.
Page 434
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
K. Approach Options Configuration
SCN 404.X
FMS CONFIG 1/3

fms options
1
VNAV Options page to show ALL DIGITAL STORE®
¬FUEL
¬PERF NAV®
2
Push APPR [5L].
¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®
3
Push APPR MODE [1L].
item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
APPR OPT 1/1
4 Push REMOTE TUNE [2L]. ENABLED STORE CONF®

Fill in the appropriate remote tune
item number: ENABLED
1 ENABLED remote arm
2 DISABLED ENABLED
and then push [ENTER]. fpa limit
9.0Ø
5
item number:
1 ENABLED
6
2 DISABLED Push FPA LIMIT [4L].
and then push [ENTER]. Fill in the appropriate
See NOTE. maximum flight path angle
(max. 9.9 degrees).
Page 435
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
K. Approach Options Configuration (Continued)
SCN 404.X
APPR OPT 1/1

remote tune
ENABLED
remote arm
ENABLED
fpa limit
9.0Ø
7
If REMOTE ARM [3L] is ENABLED,
NOTE: When REMOTE ARM is DISABLED, APPR

TYPES 1/1 page is not
configurable. NOTE: ILS, LOC, and BC
are configurable
only while REMOTE
ARM is ENABLED.
VOR, RNV, and VFR will
8
show ENABLED or DISABLED Push ILS [2R].
based on sensor selections on Fill in the appropriate
other pages. item number:
1 ENABLED
2 ADVISORY
APPR TYPES 1/1
vor edit config
rnv ils
ENABLED ADVISORY
vfr loc
ENABLED ADVISORY
bc
9
ADVISORY Repeat Step 8 for
RETURN®
bk
Push RETURN [5R] to
show the Approach
Options page.
Page 436
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
L. Approach Options Configuration
SCN 405.X.
FMS CONFIG 1/2

fms options edit config

VNAV Options page to show
ALL DIGITAL STORE CONF®
¬FUEL EFIS®
¬PERF NAV®
2
Push APPR [5L].
¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®
3
Push APR MODE [1L].
item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
APPR OPT 1/1
4
Push REMOTE TUNE [2L]. ENABLED STORE CONF®
Fill in the appropriate remote tune auto-hdg
item number: ENABLED DISABLED
1 ENABLED remote arm roll gains
2 DISABLED ENABLED 3x
9.0Ø
5
item number:
6
1 ENABLED Push FPA LIMIT [4L].
2 DISABLED Fill in the appropriate
and then push [ENTER]. maximum flight path angle
See NOTE. (max. 9.9 degrees).
Page 437
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
L. Approach Options Configuration (Continued)
SCN 405.X.
APPR OPT 1/1

remote tune auto-hdg
ENABLED DISABLED
7 If REMOTE ARM [3L] is ENABLED,

remote arm
ENABLED
fpa limit
roll gains
3x
9.0Ø

GPS, NDB, VOR, RNV, and VFR
8
will show ENABLED or DISABLED Push ILS [2R].
1 ENABLED
2 ADVISORY
APPR TYPES 1/2
gps edit config
ndb ils
NOTE: ILS, LOC, and BC
ENABLED ADVISORY
are configurable
vor loc
only while REMOTE
ENABLED ADVISORY
ARM is ENABLED.
rnv bc
ENABLED ADVISORY
vfr
ENABLED RETURN®
9
Repeat Step 1 for
bk
Push RETURN [5R] to
show the Approach
Options page.
Page 438
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
M. EFIS Configuration
SCNs 400.X, 401.X
(1) EFIS Configuration
1
Approach Options page
to display the first
FMS configuration page.
FMS CONFIG 1/2

STANDARD STORE CONF®
2 Push EFIS [2R].
¬FUEL EFIS®
¬PERF NAV®
¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®
3 Push TYPE [1L].

item number: EFIS OPT 1/1
1 429 ADV (See note.) type edit config
2 429 GAMA 429 DHC STORE CONF®
NOTE: Verify that EFIS is ¬PERF DISP OPTS

compatible before
selecting 429 ADV.
RETURN®
4
SCN 401.X
Push PERF DISP OPTS [3L].
Page 439
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
(2) Performance Display Configuration
SCN 401.X.
1
SCN 401.X
Push PERF EFIS DISP [2L].
item number: PERF DISP OPTS
1 ENABLED edit config
2 DISABLED STORE CONF®
and then push [ENTER]. disp perf data
DISABLED VTGT®
2 SCN 401.X
Push one of the following
line select keys:
¬V1 VREF®
V1 [3L] ¬VR
VR [4L]
V2 [5L] ¬V2 RETURN®
V TGT [2R]
V REF [3R]
and then perform
Steps 3, 4, and 5.
3 SCN 401.X
Push COMPUTED COLOR [2L].
V1 OPT
edit config
item number: STORE CONF®
1 BLACK computed color
2 BLUE BLACK
3 GREEN
manual color
4 CYAN
BLACK
5 RED
symbol
6 MAGENTA
7 YELLOW BUG
and then Push [ENTER].
RETURN®
4 SCN 401.X
Push MANUAL COLOR [3L].
Select the desired color
as in Step 3, above.
6 Push RETURN [5R] on the Option page
and then repeat Steps 2 through 5
for the remaining Performance
5 SCN 401.X Display Options.

Push SYMBOL [4L].
item number:
1 BUG
2 LINE
Page 440
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
N. EFIS Configuration
SCNs 402.X, 403.X
1
FMS CONFIG 1/2

2
Push EFIS [2R].
¬FUEL EFIS®
¬PERF NAV®
¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®
CAUTION: IN SCN 402.X THE
TCAS MODE MUST BE
3
Push TYPE [1L]. NOTE: Verify that EFIS is CONFIGURED AS
Fill in the appropriate compatible before DISABLED.
item number: (See Note.) selecting 429 ADV.
1 429 ADV
7
Push TCAS MODE [2R].
2 429 GAMA
3 429 DHC (SCN 403.X)
item number:(See CAUTION)
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
4
Push CHP [2L]. and then push [ENTER].
item number:
1 SINGLE EFIS OPT 1/1
2 N/A
type edit config
429 ADV STORE CONF®
chp tcas mode
5
Push RADAR TYPE [3L]. SINGLE DISABLED
Fill in the appropriate radar type mls
item number: RTA-844 N/A
1 RTA-844 pl-4 ref
2 RTA-854 N/A
3. N/A
and then push [ENTER]. ¬PERF DISP OPTS RETURN®
6
Push PL-4 REF [4L].
8
Push MLS [3R].
item number:
item number:
1 MAGNETIC
1 SINGLE
2 N/A
2 DUAL
3. N/A
Page 441
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X

SCNs 402.X, 403.X

PL-4 Options page to show
the EFIS Options page.
type
429 ADV
EFIS OPT 1/1
edit config
STORE CONF®
chp tcas mode
SINGLE DISABLED
radar type mls
2 Push PERF DISP OPTS [5L].

RTA-844
pl-4 ref
N/A
3
Push PERF EFIS DISP [2L]. ¬PERF DISP OPTS RETURN®
item number:
1 ENABLED PERF DISP OPTS
2 DISABLED edit config
and then push [ENTER]. STORE CONF®
disp perf data
DISABLED VTGT®
4
line select keys: ¬V1 VREF®
V1 [3L]
VR [4L] ¬VR
V2 [5L]
V TGT [2R] ¬V2 RETURN®
V REF [3R]
and then perform
Steps 5, 6 and 7.
5
Fill in the appropriate V1 OPT
item number: edit config
1 BLACK STORE CONF®
2 BLUE computed color
3 GREEN BLACK
4 CYAN
manual color
5 RED
BLACK
6 MAGENTA
symbol
7 YELLOW
and then Push [ENTER]. BUG
RETURN®
6 Push MANUAL COLOR [3L].

8
Push RETURN [5R] on the Option page
7 Push SYMBOL [4L]. Display Options.

item number:
1 BUG
2 LINE
Page 442
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
O. EFIS Configuration
SCNs 404.X, 405.X

FMS CONFIG 1/2

2
Push EFIS [2R].
¬FUEL EFIS®
¬PERF NAV®
¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®
3
Push TYPE [1L].
3 EDZ 705
4 429 DHC
NOTE: Verify that EFIS is ¬PL-4 OPTS

compatible before
selecting 429 ADV. ¬PERF DISP OPTS RETURN®
4
Push PL-4 OPTS [4L].
Page 443
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
(2) Pro Line 4 Options Configuration

SCNs 404.X, 405.X
1 Push CHP [1L].

Select the appropriate Pro Line 4 Options apply only to the Lear
item number: 60 and Canadair CL-601 Challenger. Select
1 SINGLE N/A for all other aircraft.
2 N/A
Push [ENTER].
6 Push TCAS [2R].

7 Push MLS [3R].
2 Select the appropriate Select the appropriate

Push RADAR TYPE [2L].
item number: item number:
Select the appropriate
1 SINGLE 1 SINGLE
item number:
2 DUAL 2 DUAL
1 RTA-844
3 N/A 3 N/A
2 RTA-854
Push [ENTER]. Push [ENTER].
3 N/A
Push [ENTER].
3 Push PL-4 REF [3L].

Select the appropriate PL-4 OPT 1/1
item number: chp edit config
1 MAGNETIC SINGLE STORE CONF®
2 TRUE radar type tcas
3 N/A RTA-854 SINGLE
Push [ENTER]. pl-¢ ref mls
MAGNETIC DUAL
adf diag rad alt
N/A SINGLE
4 Push ADF DIAG [4L].

fuel max
8191 LBS RETURN®
item number:
1 SINGLE
2 DUAL
3 N/A
8 Push RAD ALT [4R].
item number:
Push [ENTER].
1 SINGLE
2 DUAL
3 N/A
5 Push FUEL MAX [5L].

item number: (See Note)
Push [ENTER].
1 8191 LBS
2 65535 LBS
Push [ENTER]. 9 Push RETURN [5R] to
return to EFIS OPT 1/1
page.
NOTE: In step 5 enter 1 (8191 LBS)

for Lear 60 or 2 (65535 LBS)
for Canadair CL-601 Challenger.
Page 444
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X

SCNs 404.X, 405.X

type
EFIS OPT 1/1
429 ADV
edit config
STORE CONF®
¬PL-4 OPTS
3
item number:
disp perf data
DISABLED VTGT®
4
line select keys: ¬V1 VREF®
V1 [3L]
VR [4L] ¬VR
V2 [5L]
V TGT [2R] ¬V2 RETURN®
V REF [3R]
and then perform
Steps 5, 6, and 7.
5
Fill in the appropriate V1 OPT
item number: edit config
1 BLACK STORE CONF®
2 BLUE computed color
3 GREEN BLACK
4 CYAN
manual color
5 RED
BLACK
6 MAGENTA
symbol
7 YELLOW
and then Push [ENTER]. BUG
RETURN®
6 Push MANUAL COLOR [3L].

8
Push RETURN [5R] on the Option page
7 Push SYMBOL [4L]. Display Options.

item number:
1 BUG
2 LINE
Page 445
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
P. NAV Configuration
FMS CONFIG 1/2

fms options
ALL DIGITAL
edit config
STORE CONF® 1 Push RETURN [5R] on each
Option page to show the
FMS Configuration page.
¬FUEL EFIS®
¬PERF NAV®
2
Push NAV [3R].
¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®
3 Push AC ROLL STR [1L].

item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
5
Push BANK LIMIT [3R].
4 Push AT OR BELOW [3L]. Fill in the bank limit for

Fill in the desired altitude. the AT OR BELOW altitude.
(Range 0 to 60,000 feet but (Range 15 to 30 degrees.)
less than the altitude on the
line below.)
NAV OPT 1/1
ac roll str edit config
DISABLED STORE CONF®
STEERING LIMITS
at or below bank limit
20000 ft 27.0
at or above bank limit
32000 ft 15.0
a/c type
FIXED WING RETURN®
7
6 Push AT OR ABOVE [4L].

Fill in the desired altitude.
(Range 0 to 60,000 feet but
Fill in the bank limit for
the AT OR ABOVE altitude.
(Range 15 to 30 degrees.)
greater than the altitude on
the line above.)
8
Push A/C TYPE [5L].
item number:
1 FIXED WING
2 HELICOPTER
Page 446
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
Q. Tune Configuration
FMS CONFIG 1/2

1
ALL DIGITAL STORE CONF® Push RETURN [5R] on the
NAV Options page to show
¬FUEL EFIS® the FMS Configuration page.
¬PERF NAV®
¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN® 2 Push TUNE [4R].
3
Push # COMS [1L].
Fill in the quantity of COM
radios (range 0 to 3) and
then push [ENTER].
TUNE OPT 1/1
4
Push # NAVS [2L].
# coms edit config
Fill in the quantity of NAV
2 STORE CONF®
# navs
then push [ENTER].
2
# adfs
2
5 Push # ADFS [3L].

Fill in the quantity of ADF
# atc
1
then push [ENTER].
RETURN®
6 Push # ATC [4L].

Fill in the quantity of ATC
then push [ENTER].
Page 447
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
R. Crossfill Configuration
SCNs 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
1 Push RETURN [5R] on the Tune

Options page to show the FMS
Configuration page. FMS CONFIG 2/2
Then push [NEXT] to show the edit config
second FMS Configuration page. ¬XFILL STORE CONF®
strut sw
¬CABIN DISP ANALOG
2 Push XFILL [1L] to show the

Crossfill Options page.
RETURN®
3 Push MASTER [1L].

item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
XFILL OPT 1/1

master edit config
4 Push INIT [2L].

item number:
ENABLED
init
ENABLED
STORE CONF®
1 ENABLED
fuel tune presets
2 DISABLED
ENABLED DISABLED
flight plan
ENABLED
5 Push FUEL [3L].

item number:
RETURN®
7
1 ENABLED Push TUNE PRESETS [3R].
and then push [ENTER]. item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
6
Push FLIGHT PLAN [4L].
item number:
1 ENABLED NOTE: If MASTER Crossfill is enabled,
2 DISABLED then INIT, FUEL, and FLIGHT PLAN
and then push [ENTER]. will be enabled automatically.
The TUNE PRESETS Crossfill is
independent of the MASTER Crossfill.
TUNE PRESETS can be disabled even
though the MASTER is enabled.
Page 448
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
S. Cabin Display Configuration
SCNs 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
1
FMS CONFIG 2/2
XFILL Options page to
show the second FMS edit config
Configuration page. ¬XFILL STORE CONF®
strut sw
¬CABIN DISP ANALOG
2
Push CABIN DISP [2L].
RETURN®
4
If Cabin Display is enabled, then
3
proceed with the following steps.
If Cabin Display is disabled, then go
item number:
to the next procedure Strut Switch
1 ENABLED
Configuration.
2 DISABLED
CABIN DISP 1/1
5
Push MESSAGE 1 [2L]. cabin disp edit config
¬MESSAGE 1 MESSAGE 4®
6 Push MESSAGE 1 [1L].

item number:
1 ENABLED ¬MESSAGE 3 MESSAGE 6®

2 DISABLED
and then push [ENTER]. RETURN®
7
If you enabled this
MESSAGE 1 1/1
message, then push
MESSAGE TITLE [2L]. message 1 edit config
Fill in the title of ENABLED STORE CONF®
this message using message title
up to eleven WELCOME
characters including msg duration
[±] for spaces and 68 secs
then push [ENTER].
RETURN®
8 Push MSG DURATION [3L].

Fill in the length of
9
the message (in seconds) Push RETURN [5R] to show the Cabin
and then push [ENTER]. Display page.
Repeat Steps 5, 6, 7, and 8 for each
of the remaining messages.
Page 449
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
T. Strut Switch Configuration
SCNs 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X

Cabin Display page to
show the second FMS
Configuration page.
2 Push STRUT SW [2R].
item number:
FMS CONFIG 2/2 1 ANALOG
edit config 2 DIGITAL
¬XFILL STORE CONF® and then push [ENTER].
strut sw
¬CABIN DISP ANALOG
RETURN®
3
Push RETURN[5R] to
display CONFIG 1/2 page.
NOTE: You must set the Strut Switch Configuration as the last item of configuration.
The Strut Switch is not configurable to other than ANALOG unless the PL4
(Pro Line 4) option has been configured.
Page 450
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
U. ARINC Configuration
1
On the first Configuration
page, push ARINC [4L] to
show the ARINC Options page.
2
Push RECEIVE [1L] to show
the first ARINC Receive
page. Then verify or set
each of the ARINC Receive
ARINC OPT 1/1
inputs. EDIT CONFIG
¬RECEIVE STORE CONF®
3
Push TRANSMIT [2L] to
¬TRANSMIT
show the first ARINC
Transmit page. Then
verify or set each of ¬561 XMIT
the ARINC Transmit
outputs.
RETURN®
4
Push 561 TRANSMIT [3L] to
show the A561 Transmit page.
Then verify or set each of
the configurable items.
5
When you have verified or
configured the RECEIVE,
TRANSMIT, and 561 TRANSMIT
NOTE: 561 TRANSMIT will not show unless
items, push RETURN [5R] to show
the FMS is equipped with an
the first Configuration page.
ANALOG board:
NOTE: Refer to the individual worksheets provided earlier in

this section the ARINC RECEIVE, TRANSMIT, and
561 TRANSMIT selections.
Page 451
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
(1) ARINC Receive Ports Configuration
NOTE: ARINC RCV 2/2 page with ports 8 through 15 is applicable to
P/N 1190-03-1112 only.
The table of FMS ARINC Receive Port Options, found in the Configuration
worksheets, shows the allowable sensors for the ARINC Receive Ports.
1
Push the line select key for any
ARINC Input you want to change. NOTE: Select the NO SENSOR option for all
Fill in the appropriate item ports initially. This will allow all
number and then push [ENTER]. possible port input devices to show in
the selection list for each port.
Once a sensor is selected for a
particular port, it will not show up as
2 Repeat Step 1 for all remaining

ARINC Inputs you want to change.
an option for any other ports.
ARINC RCV 1/1

port 0 EDIT CONFIG
LS GPS1 B1 STORE CONF®
port 1 port 5
NO SENSOR 429 ADC
port 2 port 6
NO SENSOR CROSSFILL 2
port 3 port 7
429 DME CROSSFILL 1
port 4
429 OSS 1 RETURN®
4
3
If your FMS is equipped with
configured all ARINC Inputs,
two Arinc boards, push [NEXT]
push RETURN [5R] to show the
to show the second ARINC
ARINC Options page.
Options page.
Perfrom steps 1 and 2 for all
ARINC inputs.
Page 452
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
(2) ARINC Transmit Ports Configuration
SCNs 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
NOTE: Ports 4 through 7 is applicable to P/N 1190-03-1112 only.
The table of FMS ARINC Transmit Port Options, found in the Configuration
worksheets, shows the allowable sensors for the ARINC Transmit Ports.
1 Push the line select key

for any ARINC Output you
want to change. Fill in
ARINC XMIT 1/1
the appropriate item
number and then push port 0 edit config
[ENTER]. NONE STORE CONF®
port 1 port 5
429 XFILL NONE
2 Repeat Step 1 for all

remaining ARINC Outputs
you want to change.
port 2
429 LS
port 3
port 6
NONE
port 7
429 HS NONE
port 4
tune RETURN®
3 When you have verified or

configured all ARINC Outputs,
ARINC Options page.
(3) ARINC 561 Transmit Configuration
1 Push 561 BUS [1L].

item number:
1 LRN DATA
2 DIST ONLY
and then push [ENTER]. A561 XMIT 1/1
561 bus edit config
LRN DATA STORE CONF®
dtg format
2
Push DTG FORMAT [2L]. ARINC 561
item number:
1 ARINC 561
2 ARINC 568
RETURN®
3 Push RETURN [5R] to show

the ARINC Options page.
Page 453
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
V. CSDB Configuration
1
page, push CSDB [5L] to show NOTE: When performing the initial configuration of
the CSDB Option page. CSDB options, select the NO SENSOR option
for each receiver and transmitter. This will
allow all possible options to be displayed
in the selection list. Once a receiver or
2 Push RCVR 1 [1L]. transmitter is selected it will not show up

Fill in the appropriate item as an option again.
number (See Receiver Options
list) and then push [ENTER].
CSDB OPT 1/1
rcvr 1 EDIT CONFIG
NO SENSOR STORE CONF®
3
Repeat Step 2 for RCVR 2 [2L], rcvr 2 xmitter 1
RCVR 3 [3L], and RCVR 4 [4L]. RTU RTU TUNE
rcvr 3 xmitter 2
NO SENSOR NONE
rcvr 4
NO SENSOR
RETURN®
CSDB OPT 1/1 with RTU
NOTE: If an RTU is installed, the appropriate receive

and transmit ports should be configured for RTU
and RTU TUNE respectively.
rcvr 1
CSDB OPT 1/1
EDIT CONFIG
4 Push XMITTER 1 [2R].
Fill in the appropriate item
number (See Transmitter
VOR STORE CONF® Options list) and then push
rcvr 2 xmitter 1 [ENTER].
NO SENSOR NONE
rcvr 3 xmitter 2
5
SINGLE DME TUNE Repeat Step 4 for
rcvr 4 XMITTER 2 [3R].
MFD
RETURN®
CSDB OPT 1/1 without RTU
6 Push RETURN [5R] to show the

first Configuration page.
Page 454
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
W. Analog Configuration
Analog options are only available when the Analog board is installed.
1 8
On the first Push RELATIVE TO [3R].
Configuration page, push Fill in the appropriate
ANALOG [2R] to show the item number:
Analog Options page. 1 NOSE
2 NORTH
7
Push DESIRED TRK [2R].
item number:
2
Push WPT BRG SIG [1L].
1 NONE
2 SYNCHRO
item number:
3 RESOLVER
1 DRIFT ANGLE
2 WPT BRG
ANALOG OPT 1/ 1
wpt brg sig edit config
3 Push WPT BRG FMT [2L].

item number:
DRIFT ANGLE
wpt brg fmt
SYNCHRO
STORE CONF®
desired trk
SYNCHRO
1 NONE
offset relative to
2 SYNCHRO
+180 NOSE
3 RESOLVER
relative to analog att
NOSE NONE
pitch cmd
DHC RETURN®
4 Push OFFSET [3L].

Fill in the
appropriate item
number:
bk
1 +180 Push RETURN [5R] to show the
2 +0 first Configuration page.
5 Push RELATIVE TO [4L].

item number:
6 SCN 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
Push PITCH CMD [5L].
9 SCN 404.X, 405.X
Push ANALOG ATT [4R].
item number:
1 NOSE item number:
1 NONE
2 NORTH 1 NONE
2 HDG ONLY
and then push [ENTER]. 2 DHC
3 HDG+PIT+ROL
SCN 400.X, 401.X,
402.X, 403.X
item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
Page 455
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
X. Air Data Configuration
SCN 400.X
WARNING: IT IS IMPERATIVE THAT YOU VERIFY THE TYPE OF AIR DATA
INPUT(S) (BARO ALTITUDE, PRESSURE ALTITUDE, OR BOTH)
PROVIDED BY THE AIT DATA SOURCES IN YOUR INSTALLATION.
YOU MUST CONFIGURE THE FMS TO EXACTLY MATCH THESE
INPUTS.
1
page, push AIR DATA [4R] to
show the AIR DATA page.
7
Push BARO ALT FMT [2R]
2 Push ALT DISPLAY [1L].

item number:
NOTE: We recommend use of BARO
ALTITUDE; however, you must
item number:
1 565 SYNCHRO
1 BARO ALT use BOTH if you ENABLED the 2 DC/RESOLVER
2 PRESS ALT ADVANCED Performance Option. and then push [ENTER].
3 BOTH
8
Push PRES ALT FMT [3R]
3
Push A/S DISPLAY [2L]. Fill in the appropriate
Fill in the appropriate item number:
item number: 1 BARO ALT
1 TAS 2 PRESSURE
2 TAS AND IAS and then push [ENTER].
AIR DATA 1/1
4
Push MINIMUM TAS [3L]. alt display edit config
Fill in the minimum BOTH STORE CONF®
value (0 to 60) of TAS a/s display alt format
that will be treated as TAS AND IAS 565 SYN
valid and then push minimum tas alt type
[ENTER]. 60 KTS BARO ALT
sat format a/s format
5 Push SAT FORMAT [4L]. NONE 565 DC

Fill in the appropriate mach format
item number: NONE RETURN®
1 NONE
2 DIGITAL
9 Push A/S FORMAT [4R]
item number:
6 Push MACH FORMAT [5L].

item number:
1 565 DC
2 20 MV IAS
3 11 MV IAS
1 NONE 4 DIGITAL
2 DIGITAL and then push [ENTER].
bk
Push RETURN [5R] to show
the first Configuration
page.
Page 456
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
X. Air Data Configuration (Continued)
SCNs 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
INPUTS.
NOTE: NCU P/Ns 1190-01-XXXX and 1190-03-XXXX,
BARO ALT FMT [2R], PRES ALT FMT [3R], and
A/S FORMAT [4R] are not selectable and
will always be DIGITAL.
1 On the first Configuration

7
show the AIR DATA page. Push BARO ALT FMT [2R]
item number:
2 Push ALT DISPLAY [1L].

item number:
1 565 SYNCHRO
2 DC/RESOLVER
3 DIGITAL
1 BARO ALT use BOTH if you ENABLED the 4 NONE
2 PRESS ALT ADVANCED Performance Option. and then push [ENTER].
3 BOTH
8 Push PRES ALT FMT [3R]

3 Push A/S DISPLAY [2L]. item number:

Fill in the appropriate 1 565 SYNCHRO
item number: 2 DC/RESOLVER
1 TAS 3 DIGITAL
2 TAS AND IAS 4 NONE
and then push [ENTER]. and then push [ENTER].
AIR DATA 1/1
4 Push MINIMUM TAS [3L]. alt display edit config

value (0 to 60) of TAS a/s display baro alt fmt
that will be treated as TAS AND IAS DIGITAL
valid and then push minimum tas pres alt fmt
[ENTER]. 60 KTS DIGITAL
5 Push SAT FORMAT [4L]. NONE DIGITAL

1 NONE
2 DIGITAL
9
and then push [ENTER]. Push A/S FORMAT [4R]
item number:

item number:
1 565 DC
2 20 MV IAS
3 11 MV IAS
1 NONE 4 DIGITAL
2 DIGITAL and then push [ENTER].
7
page.
Page 457
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 400.X, 401.X, 402.X, 403.X, 404.X, 405.X
Y. Store Final Configuration
1
With the first Configuration page showing, push
[NEXT] to show the second Configuration page.
CONFIG 1/2
version rev edit config
103 001 STORE CONF®
TEST ONLY
¬ARINC AIR DATA®
¬CSDB RETURN®
2
Push STORE CONF [1R] twice to
save the new configuration.
NOTE: The first time you push STORE CONF® [1R] to save the new
configuration, the field will be highlighted. When you push STORE
CONF® [1R] again, the system will reset itself and initiate power
on self tests.
A few seconds after you push [1R] to save the new configuration, the
system will reset itself and initiate power on self tests.
If you press RETURN [5R] instead of [1R], then the system will return
to the previous display (MAINT 1/1) and none of the selected options
will be stored in the Configuration Module. The configuration Module
will retain its previous configuration data.
Page 458
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
4. Configuration Worksheets (SCN 600.X)
Date:
Company Address:
A/C Manufacturer:
A/C Model No.:
A/C Serial No.:
(1) FMS Options

Standard (1190-01-2111, 1190-01-2113)
Analog ADC (1190-02-2111, 1190-02-2113)
All Digital (1190-01-2110)
Dual ARINC (1190-03-2112)
ASCB (1190-03-2114)
(2) Software:
SCN 600.__ Flight Management System
Page 459
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
B. Fuel Options Data
NOTE: Empty weight must be entered in lbs. regardless of display units.
ENGINES
PULSE FREQ PULSE WIDTH
NOTE: Second Harmonic Fuel Flow Sensors are not supported by the UNS-1B FMS.

AIRCRAFT # ENG
ATR-42 2 0 1212 0.000 5.000 50
ATR-72 2 0 1212 0.000 5.000 50
BOEING 737-300 2 0 12000 0.173 4.827 350
BAe ATP 2 0 1500 0.000 5.000 50
BAe-125-800 2 0 2800 0.000 5.000 100
BEECH KA-300/350/1900 2 0 750 0.000 5.000 60
BEECH KA-90, KA-200 2 0 600 0.200 10.200 20
BEECHJET 2 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75
BK-117 2H 0 500 0.000 5.000 25
BOEING 707 4 0 17700 1.000 11.000 500
CITATION II 2 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75
CITATION V 2 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75
CL600 2 0 3500 0.000 5.000 65
CL601 2 0 4500 0.000 5.000 65
DASH 8 2 0 1200 0.000 5.000 75
DO-228 2 0 500 0.000 5.000 60
FALCON 10 2 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75
FALCON 20/TFE-371 2 0 3000 0.000 5.000 80
FALCON 50 3 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75
GULFSTREAM II 2 0 8000 0.000 5.000 80
GULFSTREAM III 2 0 10000 0.000 5.000 160
HS-125 2 0 2200 0.000 5.000 100
IAI ASTRA 1125 2 0 2200 1.000 5.400 70
IAI WESTWIND 1124 2 0 2200 0.000 5.000 100
JETSTAR II 4 0 2500 1.000 11.000 75
Page 460
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X

AIRCRAFT # ENG
LEARJET 2 0 3000 0.000 10.000 55
LOCKHEED L1011 3 0 20000 0.000 5.000 400
MERLIN 2 0 600 0.000 5.000 25
OPV 1 0 150 0.000 5.000 1
PARTENAVIA 2 0 644 0.000 5.000 60
PUMA 2H 0 600 0.000 10.000 75
S-76A 2H 0 500 0.000 5.000 25
S-76B 2H 0 800 0.000 5.000 60
SABRE 65 2 0 4000 1.000 9.000 100

AIRCRAFT # ENG FF
FALCON 20 2 0 4000 0.000 5.000 75
GULFSTREAM II 2 0 12000 0.000 5.000 180
MDC DC-8 4 0 7800 0.000 5.000 150
MDC DC-8 4 0 12000 0.000 5.000 250

PULSE
EDGE

PULSE
POLARITY
Page 461
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X

worksheet.

worksheet.

worksheet.

worksheet.
(5) Digital Fuel Flow Scaling Data

worksheet.
Page 462
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
C. Performance Options
PERF DATABASE
ID

Kit #
Supp. #
A12500/A12500-1 (CL600–2A12) (Rev 26)
/A12500-2 43,100 lbs. MTOW
2421CL6013A (W/SB 601–0238)
A12501/A12501-1 (CL600–2A12) (Rev 24)
/A12501-2 44,600 or 45,100 lbs. MTOW
2421CL6013A (W/SB 601–0238)
A12502/A12502-1 (CL600-2B16) (Rev 30)
/A12502-2 44,600 or 45,100 lbs. MTOW
2421CL6013A
A12520/A12520-1 23,100 lbs. MTOW
/A12520-2
2421LR60-405
A12521/A12521-1 23,500 lbs. MTOW
/A12521-2
2421LR60
/A12522-2 23,500 lbs. MTOW W1418
Page 463
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
D. VNAV Options
VDEV OUTPUT NORMAL VN-212
E. Approach Options
(1) APPR OPT 1/1
AUTO-HDG ENABLED DISABLED
NOTE: If AUTO-HDG is ENABLED, then the FMS will transition automatically to FMS HDG
mode when an approach is manually activated. You should select DISABLED for
aircraft which switch from roll steering to left/right deviation steering for approach
mode.
ROLL STEERING GAINS
(2) APPR TYPES 1/2 and APPR TYPES 2/2

BC ENABLED ADVISORY
configurable.
Page 464
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
F. EFIS Options
(1) EFIS OPT 1/1
TYPE 429 ADV 429 GAMA EDC 705 429 DHC
429 GAMA = Standard
EDZ 705 = Honeywell
429 DHC = de Havilland Canada with EDZ-810
(2) PL-4 OPT 1/1

CHP SINGLE N/A
FUEL MAX SELECT #1 SELECT #2
NOTE: This selection sets the display limits to be satisfactory for the Pro Line 4. If your
aircraft is a LEAR 60 (including the FIAS Lear 60), then select #1 (sets the value
to 8191 lbs.). If your aircraft is a Canadair CL-601 Challenger (including the FIAS
Challenger), then select #2 (set value to 65535 lbs.)
TCAS MODE SINGLE DUAL N/A
MLS SINGLE DUAL N/A
Page 465
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
(3) Performance Display Options

V1 Display Options
SYMBOL Bug Line
VR Display Options
SYMBOL Bug Line
V2 Display Options
SYMBOL Bug Line

SYMBOL Bug Line

SYMBOL Bug Line
Page 466
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
G. NAV Options
STEERING LIMITS AT OR BELOW ft. Altitude
NOTE: Altitude range – 1,500 to 64,000 ft., this altitude may not be greater than that entered
on the line below.
AT OR ABOVE ft. Altitude
NOTE: Altitude range – 1,500 to 64,000 ft., this altitude may not be lower than that entered on the line
above. You may need to configure the high limit (AT OR ABOVE) before the low limit (AT OR
BELOW) in some installations.
H. Tune Options
aircraft.
# COMS 0 1 2
# NAVS 0 1 2
# ADFS 0 1 2
# ATC 0 1
I. Crossfill (XFILL) Options

NOTE: If MASTER is ENABLED, then INIT, FUEL, and FLIGHT PLAN will be
ENABLED automatically.
Page 467
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
J. Cabin Display Options
(1) CABIN DISP 1/1
(2) MESSAGE ( ) 1/1

Message 1 Title
Message 2 Title
Message 3 Title
Message 4 Title
Message 5 Title
Message 6 Title
K. Strut Switch Options

Page 468
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
L. Discrete Options
(1) Discrete In
Configurable discrete inputs may be configured on any discrete input resource.
Ground/Open input resources must have Ground/Open signals configured to them
and 28V/Open input resources must have 28V/Open signals configured to them for
the function to operate correctly in the FMS.
How to interpret Discrete Options tables.
The bordered box indicates the default option, if any, for the discrete resource.
NONE
The shaded box indicates an option was hard wired to the discrete resource in some
previous installations.
NONE
The bordered/shaded box indicates a default option was hard wired to the discrete
resource in some previous installations.
NONE
Page 469
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
(1) Discrete In (Continued)
CAUTION: IF CONFIGURING FOR AN UPGRADE FROM P/N 1190-XX-1XXX TO
P/N1190-XX-2XXX DO THE FOLLOWING
SELECT THOSE SHADED OPTIONS SHOWN BELOW, THAT APPLY
TO YOUR INSTALLATION. IF THE WIRING FOR A DISCRETE
INPUT HAS BEEN MOVED TO A DIFFERENT PIN, YOU MUST
SELECT THAT NEW INPUT CONFIGURATION.
Input Discrete Number 1 2 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 9 10
Record the assignment of discretes to Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
specific numbered inputs by marking
28 V/Open
28 V/Open
the intersection of the columns with
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
the appropriate row. Assign NONE to
all unused inputs.
MP MP MP MP MP MP MP MP MP MP MP
6G 6H 6J 15J 11G 11H 15K 6A 6E 6F 6B
NONE
ATC1 Select
DHC VNAV Coupled
ARINC 561 DTG Resolution
Frequency Management
Magnetic/True Switch
Reversion Tune Enable
Sperry VNAV Capture
Strut
Test
Alternate Magnetic/True Switch
NOTES: 1. When using SCN 60X Discrete In #5 can be configured as either a 28V/Open type Discrete on MP11H or as a
GND/Open type discrete on MP11G, but not both.
Page 470
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
(2) Discrete Out
Configurable discrete outputs may be configured on any discrete output resource.
Ground/Open output resources must have Ground/Open signals configured to them
and 28V/Open output resources must have 28V/Open signals configured to them for
CAUTION: IF CONFIGURING FOR AN UPGRADE FROM P/N 1190-XX-1XXX TO
P/N1190-XX-2XXX DO THE FOLLOWING
SELECT THOSE SHADED OPTIONS SHOWN BELOW, THAT APPLY
TO YOUR INSTALLATION. IF THE WIRING FOR A DISCRETE
INPUT HAS BEEN MOVED TO A DIFFERENT PIN, YOU MUST
SELECT THAT NEW INPUT CONFIGURATION.
Output Discrete Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Record the assignment of discretes to
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
specific numbered outputs by marking
28 V/Open
the intersection of the columns with the
appropriate row. Assign NONE to all
unused inputs.
BP MP MP1 MP MP MP MP MP MP
1 13B 3C 13D 13E 7A 7B 6C 13F
NONE
Approach Annunciator
DHC Arm Annunciator
DHC VNAV Engage Request
Doppler Mode
Doppler Sea State
FMS Valid
Doppler Self Test
On Battery Annunciator
GPS Integrity
FMS Heading Annunciator
Pro Line 4 FMS #1 Nav Source
Selected Crosstrack Annunciator
Sperry VNAV Flag
Waypoint Annunciator
Page 471
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
M. ARINC Options
Receive Port # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Pin Numbers (A/B) 4C 4G 12C 12G 8A 8C 8E 8G 1C 1H 5D 5H 3A 3D 3F 3H
NO SENSOR
429 ADC
575 ADC
AFIS
CROSSFILL 1
429 AHRS 1
429 AHRS 2
429 DME
709 DME
DOPPLER 91
DOPPLER 137
DOPPLER 2012
HS GPS 1
HS GPS 2
HS GPS 3
LS GPS 1
LS GPS 2
LS GPS 3
IC600 R
IC600 L
429 IRGPS 1
429 IRGPS 2
429 IRGPS 3
HS429 IRS 1
HS429 IRS 2
HS429 IRS 3
Page 472
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
Receive Port # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Pin Numbers (A/B) 4C 4G 12C 12G 8A 8C 8E 8G 1C 1H 5D 5H 3A 3D 3F 3H
LS429 IRS 1
LS429 IRS 2
LS429 IRS 3
571 IRS 1
571 IRS 2
571 IRS 3
KFC FGS
P4-L AUX
P4-R AUX
P4-01 ONSD (Note 2)
P4-02 ONSD (Note 2)
P4-01 OFFSD (Note 2)
P4-03 ONSD (Note 3)
P4-04 ONSD (Note 3)
P4-05 ONSD
P4-06 ONSD
P4-05 OFFSD
P4-06 OFFSD
C-IV GPIRS1
C-IV GPIRS2
C-IV GPIRS3
LCS
429 RADAR
571 RADAR
RADAR 1500
RRS-T
429 VOR
711 VOR
Page 473
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
NOTES: 1. B1 indicates TSO C-129 Class B1 GPS. This Class 1 GPS is required for GPS approach operation. GPS-1000,
Collins Pro Line 4 EFD-871. In this installation, the P4-01 Onside or P4-02 Onside and the P4-01 Offside or P4-
02 Offside IOC input buses are configured with either the P4-01 IOC or the P4-02 IOC output bus and the P4-01
MAP output bus.
Page 474
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
ARINC Transmit Port
# 0A / 0B 1 2A / 2B 3 4A / 4B 5 6A / 6B 7
(NOTE 4)
4A 12A 4E 4J 12J 12E 1A 5A 1E 1J 5J 5E
4B 12B 4F 4K 12K 12F 1B 5B 1F 1K 5K 5F
NO SENSOR
429 LS
429 HS
571 LRN
429 XFILL
429 TUNE
IC600-01
P4-01 IOC (Note 1)
P4-02 IOC (Note 2)
P4-03 IOC (Note 3)
P4-01 MAP (Note 4)
P4-02 MAP A (Note 5)
P4-02 MAP B (Note 5)
NOTES: 1. The P4-01 IOC bus is used for the standard Learjet 60 and the FIAS Collins Pro Line 4 EFIS and
autopilot systems. In this installation the P4-01 IOC output bus is configured with the P4-01 or P4-
02 Onside and Offside IOC input buses.
2. The P4-02 IOC bus is used for the standard Learjet 60 Collins Pro Line 4 EFD-871. In this
installation the P4-03 IOC output bus is configured with the P4-01 or P4-02 Onside and Offside
IOC input buses.
3. The P4-03 IOC bus is used for the F2000 and Astra SPX Collins Pro Line 4 EFD-4077. In this
installation the P4-02 IOC output bus is configured with the P4-05 or P4-06 Onside and Offside
IOC input buses.
4. The P4-01 MAP bus is used for the standard Learjet 60 and the FIAS Collins Pro Line 4
EFD-871. In this installation the P4-01 MAP output bus is configured with the P4-03 or P4-04
Onside and Offside IOC input buses.
5. The P4-02 MAP A and P4-02 MAP B output buses are used for the F2000 and Astra SPX Collins
Pro Line 4 EFD-4077. The P4-02 MAP A bus is connected to the Onside MFD and the P4-02
MAP B bus is connected to the Offside MFD. In these installations the P4-02 MAP A and P4-02
MAP B output buses are configured with the P4-05 or P4-06 Onside and Offside IOC input buses.
Page 475
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X

N. CSDB Options
NO SENSOR
RTU (Note)
SINGLE DME
DUAL DME
DME DIRECT
VOR
MFD
ERP
NONE
TUNE
RTU TUNE (Note)
NOTE: If an RTU is installed, the appropriate receive and transmit ports should be
Page 476
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
O. Analog Options
Analog options do not apply to NCU P/Ns 1190-01-2110 and 1190-03-XXXX.
ANALOG HDG NONE HDG ONLY HDG+PIT+ROL
P. ASCB Options
WPT TRIGGER ENABLED DISABLED
TRIGGER WT ____________ LBS
Page 477
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
Q. Air Data Options
not possible.

SAT FORMAT NONE DIGITAL 565 DC (Note)
NOTE: 565 DC is available only for NCU P/N 1190-02-211X
BARO ALT FORMAT NONE 565 SYNCHRO DC/RESOLVER
DIGITAL
PRES ALT FORMAT NONE 565 SYNCHRO DC/RESOLVER
DIGITAL
A/S FORMAT 565 DC (Note) 20MV IAS 11MV IAS
DIGITAL
NOTE: 565 DC is available only for NCU P/N 1190-02-211X
Page 478
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
R. Aircraft Identification
SCN ________________________________
NOTE: Up to six letters, numbers or decimal points may be added to identify the software
version that the installation is designed for.
AIRCRAFT ID _____________________________________________________________
NOTE: Up to 24 characters may be entered to identify the aircraft during FMS
configuration. A suggested format is: registration, model number, variation, any
other necessary information – separated by spaces. Instead of registration, you
could use serial number, “tail number”, “fleet number”, or any set of characters that
uniquely identifies the specific aircraft for maintenance record keeping purposes.
NOTE: The use of the Flight Log data requires that the unique aircraft identification be
provided. This identification must be in a form recognized by the software in the
ground computer. The text string in the AIRCRAFT IDENTIFICATION field on
the CONFIG 2/2 page is placed on the disk exactly as displayed on the FMS.
Page 479
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
5. Configuration Module Programming Procedures (SCN 600.X)
A. Starting the FMS
UNS - 1B
CPU PASS
RAM PASS
DATABASE PASS
manual.
Page 480
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
1 Push [5L] to initialize

the UNS-1. The position,
date, and time do not
2 Push [MSG] to display the
message(s).
Push [MSG] or RETURN [5R]
matter. to return to the
Initialization page.
POS INIT 1/1 ÂMSG

date
id ----- utc
N 32 07.9 14:49
W 110 55.4
standard/extended
19-JUN-96
3
DATE field.
Push [4][5][6][7][8][9]
Page 481
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
1 Push [DATA] to
show the DATA
1/5 page.
DATA 1/5
¬JEPPESEN
¬PILOT
¬PERF
¬DISK
¬HOLD POS MAINT®
2 Push MAINT [5R] to show

MAINT 1/1
3
Push CONFIG [1L] to
show the First
RETURN®
edit config
STORE CONF®

CONFIG 1/2
4
Push DISPLAY [1L]
to show the Display ¬DISPLAY EDIT®
Configuration page.
¬DISCRETES ASCB®
¬ARINC AIR DATA®
¬CSDB RETURN®
Page 482
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
B. Fuel Options Configuration
1
FMS CONFIG 1/2

The FMS shows its fms options edit config
¬FUEL EFIS®
2
¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®

item number:
9
2 DISABLED
4
push [ENTER]. ENABLED STORE CONFIG®
empty weight
5
Fill in 1, 2, 3, or 4, 2
LBS
fuel flow type
DIGITAL RETURN®
6
item number:
OPT LIST 1/1

select
#-
8
4 pulse freq
5 pulse width
6 digital
RETURN®
Page 483
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
C. DC Linear Fuel Flow Scaling Configuration
1 2
FF SCALING 1/1
3
Push MIN FF [5L].
0 pph 1212
min ff
50 pph RETURN®
4
Push RETURN [5R].
D. AC Linear Fuel Flow Scaling Configuration
2
1 Push INPUT RANGE [1L]. UPPER FLOW RATES [2L] [2R]

FF SCALING 1/1
3
min ff
75 pph RETURN®
4
Push RETURN [5R].
Page 484
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
E. Pulse Frequency Fuel Flow Scaling Configuration
1
Push SCALING [2L].
Fill in the scaling
then push [ENTER].
FF SCALING 1/1
edit config
STORE CONF®
scaling

item number: RISING
1 RISING
2 FALLING
75 pph RETURN®
3 4
F. Pulse Width Fuel Flow Scaling Configuration

Fill in the scaling
for your aircraft
FF SCALING 1/1
STORE CONF®
scaling
40.000 pph/msec
pulse polarity
2
item number:
1 POSITIVE min ff
4
Push RETURN [5R].
3
Push MIN FF [5L].
then push [ENTER].
Page 485
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
G. Digital Fuel Flow Scaling Configuration
FF SCALING 1/1
edit config
STORE CONF®
1
Push MIN FF [5L].
Fill in the minimum
fuel flow rate for
your aircraft and
then push [ENTER].
min ff
45 pph RETURN®
2
Push RETURN [5R].
Page 486
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
H. Performance Options Configuration

FMS CONFIG 1/2
2
Push PERF [3L].
¬FUEL EFIS®
¬PERF NAV®
3
item number:
¬APPR RETURN®
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
PERF OPT 1/ 1
basic edit config
4
1 ENABLED advanced
climb grad
5
Push ADVANCED [3L].
500 ft/nm RETURN®
item number:
1 ENABLED
6
2 DISABLED Push CLIMB GRAD [5L].
and then push [ENTER]. Enter the normal nominal
climb gradient for your
aircraft (see AFMS) and
then push [ENTER].
7 If you enabled ADVANCED,

and the optional Performance
PERF DB [3R].
PERF DB 1/1
edit config
STORE CONF®
8
[ENTER].
RETURN®
Page 487
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
I. VNAV Options Configuration
FMS CONFIG 1/2

fms options
ALL DIGITAL
edit config
STORE CONF®
Configuration page.
¬PERF NAV®
¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®
2
Push VNAV [4L].

item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
4
Push FPA LIMIT [3L].
angle limit (max. 9.9°) fpa limit
and then push [ENTER]. 7.5Ø
5 Push VDEV OUTPUT [5L]. vdev output

Fill in the appropriate NORMAL RETURN®
item number:
1 NORMAL
2 VN-212
See note.

Page 488
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
J. Approach Options Configuration
FMS CONFIG 1/2

1
VNAV Options page to show ALL DIGITAL STORE CONF®
¬FUEL EFIS®
¬PERF NAV®
2 Push APPR [5L].

¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®
3 Push APR MODE [1L].

item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
APPR OPT 1/1
4
9.0Ø
5 Push REMOTE ARM [3L].

item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
See NOTE.
6 Push FPA LIMIT [4L]. NOTE: IF APPR MODE is DISABLED then both
Fill in the appropriate REMOTE TUNE and REMOTE ARM
maximum flight path angle automatically will be DISABLED.
(max. 9.9 degrees). in this case skip Step 6.
Page 489
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
7
Push AUTO-HDG [2R]. NOTE: If AUTO-HDG is ENABLED, then
Fill in the appropriate the FMS will transition
item number: automatically to FMS HDG mode
1 ENABLED when an approach is manually
2 DISABLED activated. You should select
and then push [ENTER]. DISABLED for aircraft which
switch from roll steering to
left/right deviation steering
for approach mode.
APPR OPT 1/1

ENABLED
remote arm
ENABLED
DISABLED
roll gains
3x
8 Push ROLL GAINS [3R].
Fill in the multiplier
digit (from 1 to 7) that
fpa limit represents the desired
9.0Ø roll steering gain
factors and then push
¬APPR TYPES RETURN® [ENTER]. See note.
NOTE: We recommend starting with the 3x

integer multiplier. Let your flight
9 If REMOTE ARM [3L] is ENABLED, experience guide you in selecting

then push APPR TYPES [5L]. another integer multiplier.
Page 490
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X

1
1 ENABLED
2 ADVISORY
APPR TYPES 1/2
gps EDIT CONFIG
ndb ils
NOTE: ILS, LOC, and BC
ENABLED ADVISORY
are configurable
vor loc
only while REMOTE
ENABLED ADVISORY
ARM is ENABLED.
rnv bc
DISABLED ADVISORY
vfr
ENABLED RETURN®
2
Repeat Step 1 for
3 Push RETURN [5R] to

show the Approach
Options page.
Page 491
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
K. EFIS Options Configuration
1
FMS CONFIG 1/2

2 Push EFIS [2R].
¬FUEL EFIS®
¬PERF NAV®
¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®
3
Push TYPE [1L].
3 EDZ 705
4 429 DHC

compatible before
4
Page 492
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
(2) Pro Line 4 Options Configuration
1 Push CHP [1L].

Select the appropriate Pro Line 4 Options apply only to the Lear
item number: 60 and Canadair CL-601 Challenger. Select
1 SINGLE N/A for all other aircraft.
2 N/A
Push [ENTER].
6 Push TCAS [2R].

7 Push MLS [3R].

1 SINGLE 1 SINGLE
item number:
2 DUAL 2 DUAL
1 RTA-844
3 N/A 3 N/A
2 RTA-854
3 N/A
Push [ENTER].

MAGNETIC DUAL
adf diag rad alt
N/A SINGLE

fuel max
8191 LBS RETURN®
item number:
1 SINGLE
2 DUAL
3 N/A
item number:
Push [ENTER].
1 SINGLE
2 DUAL
3 N/A

item number:
Push [ENTER].
1 N/A
2 8191 LBS
3 65535 LBS
Push [ENTER].
page.
NOTE: In Step 5 enter 2 (8191 LBS)

Page 493
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X

type
EFIS OPT 1/1
429 DHC
edit config
STORE CONF®
¬PL-4 OPTS
3
item number:
perf efis disp
DISABLED V TGT®
4
line select keys:
V1 [3L] ¬V1 V REF®
VR [4L]
V2 [5L] ¬VR
V TGT [2R]
V REF [3R] ¬V2 RETURN®
and then perform
Steps 5, 6, and 7.
5
item number:
1 BLACK
2 BLUE
3 GREEN
4 CYAN V1 OPT
5 RED edit config
6 MAGENTA STORE CONF®
7 YELLOW computed color
and then Push [ENTER]. BLACK
manual color
BLACK
symbol
6 Push MANUAL COLOR [3L]. BUG

as in Step 5, above. RETURN®
7 Push SYMBOL [4L].

item number: 8 Push RETURN [5R] on the Option page
1 BUG
Display Options.
2 LINE
Page 494
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
L. NAV Options Configuration
FMS CONFIG 1/2

fms options
ALL DIGITAL
edit config
¬FUEL EFIS®
¬PERF NAV®
2
Push NAV [3R].
¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®

item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
5

(Range 1,500 to 64,000 feet (Range 15 to 30 degrees.)
but less than the altitude on
the line below.)
NAV OPT 1/1
STEERING LIMITS
20000 ft 27.0
32000 ft 15.0
a/c type
FIXED WING RETURN®
7

(Range 1,500 to 64,000 feet but
(Range 15 to 30 degrees.)
the line above.)
8
Push A/C TYPE [5L].
item number:
1 FIXED WING
2 HELICOPTER
Page 495
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
M. Tune Options Configuration
FMS CONFIG 1/2

1
¬PERF NAV®
¬VNAV TUNE®
3
Push # COMS [1L].
then push [ENTER].
TUNE OPT 1/1
4
Push # NAVS [2L].
# coms edit config
2 STORE CONF®
# navs
then push [ENTER].
2
# adfs
2
5 Push # ADFS [3L].

# atc
1
then push [ENTER].
RETURN®
6 Push # ATC [4L].

then push [ENTER].
Page 496
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
N. Crossfill Options Configuration

Then push [NEXT] to show the edit config
strut sw
¬CABIN DISP ANALOG

RETURN®
3
Push MASTER [1L].
item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
XFILL OPT 1/1

master edit config
4 Push INIT [2L].

item number:
ENABLED
init
ENABLED
STORE CONF®
1 ENABLED
fuel tune presets
2 DISABLED
ENABLED DISABLED
flight plan
ENABLED
5 Push FUEL [3L].

item number:
RETURN®
7
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
6
Push FLIGHT PLAN [4L].
item number:
Page 497
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
O. Cabin Display Configuration

FMS CONFIG 2/2
strut sw
¬CABIN DISP ANALOG
2 Push CABIN DISP [2L].
RETURN®
3
item number:
4 If Cabin Display is enabled, then
to the next procedure Strut Switch
1 ENABLED
Configuration.
2 DISABLED
CABIN DISP 1/1
5 Push MESSAGE 1 [2L]. cabin disp edit config


Fill in the appropriate ¬MESSAGE 2 MESSAGE 5®
item number:
2 DISABLED
7 If you enabled this

message, then push
MESSAGE TITLE [2L].
MESSAGE 1
message 1
1/1
edit config
then push [ENTER].
RETURN®

9
Page 498
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
P. Strut Switch Configuration
1
show the second FMS
Configuration page.
item number:
strut sw
¬CABIN DISP ANALOG
RETURN®
3 Push RETURN[5R] to
display CONFIG 1/2 page.
Page 498.1
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
Q. Discrete Configuration

Strut Switch page and
again on the FMS
CONFIG 1/2
config edit
Configuration page to show
STORE CONF®
page.
¬FMS CONFIG
2 Push DISCRETES [3L] to ¬DISCRETES ANALOG®

show the Discrete Options
page. ¬ARINC AIR DATA®
¬CSDB RETURN®
DISC OPT 1/1

3
Push DISCRETE IN [2L].
Then verify or set each of edit config
the eleven dicsrete STORE CONF®
inputs.
¬DISCRETE IN
¬DISCRETE OUT
4 Push DISCRETE OUT [3L].

the nine discrete outputs.
RETURN®

configured all Discrete
Inputs and Outputs, push
RETURN [5R] to show the
Page 498.2
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
(1) Discrete Input Configuration
Certain signals are common in UNS-1B installations. These signals default to specific
discrete input resources. The default configuration, shown in the illustrations may be
changed since the input signals can be connected to any input resource. The installer
must ensure that the input signal name and type match exactly the input resource and
aircraft wiring.
1 Push the line select key for

any Discrete Input you want
to change.
DISC IN 1/2
disc in 1 edit config
Fill in the appropriate item SP VNV CAP STORE CONF®
number and then push disc in 2 disc in 6
[ENTER]. 561 DTG RES STRUT
disc in 3 disc in 7

remaining Discrete Inputs
you want to change.
NONE
disc in 4
TEST
FREQ MNGT
disc in 8
NONE
disc in 5
NOTE: Discrete Inputs 14 and MAG/TRUE SW RETURN®
6-9 are GND/Open type.
Discrete Input 5 can be

either GND/Open on MP 11G
or 28V/Open on MP11H, but
not both.
DISC IN 2/2
NONE STORE CONF®
3 Push [NEXT] to show the

second Discrete Input
page.
dis in 10 28v
NONE
CAUTION: DISC IN 10 MUST BE A

28 V / OPEN TYPE SIGNAL.
RETURN®

for any Discrete Input you
number and then push
[ENTER].
Inputs, push RETURN [5R] to
show the Discrete Options page.
5
Repeat Step 4 for all
you want to change.
Page 498.3
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
(2) Discrete Output Configuration
Certain signals are common in UNS-1B installations. These signals default to specific
discrete output resources. The default configuration, shown in the illustrations may
be changed since the output signals can be connected to any output resource. The
installer must ensure that the output signal name and type match exactly the output
resource and aircraft wiring.
DISC OUT 1/2
disc out 1 edit config
NONE STORE CONF®
disc out 2 disc out 6
WPT ANN NONE
SXTK ANN NONE
APPR ANN NONE
disc out 5
HDG ANN RETURN®
1 Push the line select key for any

Discrete Output you want to
change. Fill in the appropriate
item number and then push [ENTER].

Discrete Outputs you want to
change.
NOTE: Discrete Inputs 18 are CAUTION: DISC OUT 9 [2L] MUST BE A
Ground / Open type. 28 VDC / OPEN TYPE SIGNAL.
DISC OUT 2/2

second Discrete Output page. edit config
STORE CONF®
dis out 9 28v
FMS VAL

any Discrete Output you want
to change. Fill in the
appropriate item number and
then push [ENTER].
RETURN®

remaining Discrete Outputs
you want to change.
6 When you have verified or configured
all Discrete Outputs, push RETURN [5R]
to show the Discrete Options page.
Page 498.4
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
R. ARINC Configuration
1
2 Push RECEIVE [1L] to show

ARINC OPT 1/1
inputs.
edit config
3 Push TRANSMIT [2L] to show

the first ARINC Transmit
¬TRANSMIT
each of the ARINC Transmit ¬561 XMIT

outputs.
RETURN®
4 Push 561 TRANSMIT [3L] to

5
ANALOG board.

Page 498.5
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
NOTE: ARINC RCV 2/2 page with ports 8 through 15 is applicable to
P/N 1190-02-2112 only.
When performing the initial configuration of ARINC receive ports, select the NO
SENSOR option for all ports initially. This will allow all possible port input devices
to be displayed in the selection list for each port. Once a sensor is selected for a
particular port, it will not show up as an option for any other ports.
1

ARINC RCV 1/1

port 0 EDIT CONFIG
LS GPS1 B1 STORE CONF®
port 1 port 5
NO SENSOR 429 ADC
port 2 port 6
port 3 port 7
429 DME CROSSFILL 1
port 4
429 OSS 1 RETURN®
4
3 If your FMS is equipped with

two Arinc boards, push [NEXT]
to show the second ARINC
ARINC Options page.
Options page.
Perfrom steps 1 and 2 for all
ARINC inputs.
Page 498.6
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
NOTE: Ports 4 through 7 is applicable to P/N 1190-03-2112 only.
1
Push the line select key
ARINC XMIT 1/1
port 1 port 5
429 XFILL NONE

you want to change.
port 2
429 LS
port 3
port 6
NONE
port 7
429 HS NONE
port 4
tune RETURN®
3
ARINC Options page.
(3) ARINC 561 Transmit
1
Push 561 BUS [1L].
item number:
1 LRN DATA
2 DIST ONLY
561 bus edit config
dtg format
2
item number:
1 ARINC 561
2 ARINC 568
RETURN®

Page 498.7
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
S. CSDB Options Configuration
1

CSDB OPT 1/1
rcvr 1 EDIT CONFIG
3
rcvr 3 xmitter 2
NO SENSOR NONE
rcvr 4
NO SENSOR
RETURN®

rcvr 1
CSDB OPT 1/1
EDIT CONFIG
NO SENSOR NONE
rcvr 3 xmitter 2
5
MFD
RETURN®

Page 498.8
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
T. Analog Options Configuration
1 7 8
On the first Push DESIRED TRK [2R]. Push RELATIVE TO [3R].
Configuration page, Fill in the appropriate Fill in the appropriate
push ANALOG [2R] to item number: item number:
show the Analog Options 1 NONE 1 NOSE
page. 2 SYNCHRO 2 NORTH
3 RESOLVER and then push [ENTER].
2
Push WPT BRG SIG [1L]. and then push [ENTER].
item number:
1 DRIFT ANGLE
2 WPT BRG
ANALOG OPT 1/1
3 Push WPT BRG FMT [2L].

item number:
wpt brg sig
WPT BRG
edit config
STORE CONF®
1 NONE wpt brg fmt desired trk
2 SYNCHRO SYNCHRO SYNCHRO
3 RESOLVER offset relative to
and then push [ENTER]. +0 NOSE
4
Push OFFSET [3L]. NOSE NONE
Fill in the pitch cmd
appropriate item NONE RETURN®
number:
1 +180
bk
2 +0 Push RETURN [5R] to show the

item number:
1 NOSE
2 NORTH
6 Push PITCH CMD [5L].
item number:
9
and then push [ENTER]. 1 NONE item number:
2 DHC 1 NONE
and then push [ENTER]. 2 HDG ONLY
Page 498.9
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
U. ASCB Options Configuration
1
page, push ASCB [3R] to ASCB OPT 1/1
show the ASCB Options page. edit config
STORE CONF®
wt trigger
2 Push WT TRIGGER [2L]. ENABLED

item number:
1 ENABLED trigger wt
2 DISABLED XXXXXXX LBS
RETURN®
3
Push TRIGGER WT [4L].
4
Fill in the appropriate Push RETURN [5R] to show the
Trigger Weight and then first Configuration Page.
push [ENTER].
Page 498.10
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
V. Air Data Configuration
INPUTS.
1
2
Push ALT DISPLAY [1L].
item number:
1 BARO ALT
2 PRESS ALT NOTE: We recommend use of BARO
3 BOTH ALTITUDE; however, you must
and then push [ENTER]. use BOTH if you ENABLED the
ADVANCED Performance Option.
3
Push A/S DISPLAY [2L].
item number: NOTE: BARO ALT FMT [2R], PRES ALT FMT [3R], and
1 TAS A/S FORMAT [4R] all default to DIGITAL.
2 TAS AND IAS
AIR DATA 1/1
4
5 Push SAT FORMAT [4L]. NONE DIGITAL

1 NONE
2 DIGITAL
3 565 DC
6
Push MACH FORMAT [5L].
page.
item number:
1 NONE
2 DIGITAL
Page 498.11
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 600.X
W. Store Final Configuration
NOTE: The Configuration

Module updates
(dates and time)
1 With the first Configuration page showing, push show when the
[NEXT] to show the second Configuration page. last four updates
occurred.
CONFIG 2/2
STORE CONF®
CHALLENGER CL601-3A162Y
config module updates
date utc
10-apr-95 23:04
2
Push AIRCRAFT IDENTIFICATION
[2L] or [2R]. RETURN®
Type the Aircraft
Identification (Up to 24
3
characters including spaces. Push STORE CONF [1R] twice to
(Use [±] to enter a space.) save the new configuration.
on self tests.
Page 498.12
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
Date:
Company Address:
A/C Manufacturer:
A/C Model No.:
A/C Serial No.:
(1) FMS Options

All Digital
Standard
Dual ARINC
(2) Software:
Page 498.13
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
B. Display Configuration – Colors
STANDARD
SCDU
PRIMUS 1000
PL 4 4000
C. Fuel Options Data
NOTE: Empty weight must be entered in lbs. or kgs. as selected under DISPLAY UNITS below.
ENGINES
PULSE FREQ PULSE WIDTH DIGITAL

AIRCRAFT # ENG
ATR-42 2 0 1212 0.000 5.000 50

ATR-72 2 0 1212 0.000 5.000 50
BOEING 737-300 2 0 12000 0.173 4.827 350
BAe ATP 2 0 1500 0.000 5.000 50
BAe-125-800 2 0 2800 0.000 5.000 100
BEECH KA-300/350/1900 2 0 750 0.000 5.000 60
BEECH KA-90, KA-200 2 0 600 0.200 10.200 20
BEECHJET 2 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75
BK-117 2H 0 500 0.000 5.000 25
BOEING 707 4 0 17700 1.000 11.000 500
CITATION II 2 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75
CITATION V 2 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75
CL600 2 0 3500 0.000 5.000 65
CL601 2 0 4500 0.000 5.000 65
DASH 8 2 0 1200 0.000 5.000 75
DO-228 2 0 500 0.000 5.000 60
FALCON 10 2 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75
FALCON 20/TFE-371 2 0 3000 0.000 5.000 80
Page 498.14
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X

AIRCRAFT # ENG
FALCON 50 3 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75

GULFSTREAM II 2 0 8000 0.000 5.000 80
GULFSTREAM III 2 0 10000 0.000 5.000 160
HS-125 2 0 2200 0.000 5.000 100
IAI ASTRA 1125 2 0 2200 1.000 5.400 70
IAI WESTWIND 1124 2 0 2200 0.000 5.000 100
JETSTAR II 4 0 2500 1.000 11.000 75
LEARJET 2 0 3000 0.000 10.000 55
LOCKHEED L1011 3 0 20000 0.000 5.000 400
MERLIN 2 0 600 0.000 5.000 25
OPV 1 0 150 0.000 5.000 1
PARTENAVIA 2 0 644 0.000 5.000 60
PUMA 2H 0 600 0.000 10.000 75
S-76A 2H 0 500 0.000 5.000 25
S-76B 2H 0 800 0.000 5.000 60
SABRE 65 2 0 4000 1.000 9.000 100

AIRCRAFT # ENG FF
FALCON 20 2 0 4000 0.000 5.000 75
GULFSTREAM II 2 0 12000 0.000 5.000 180
MDC DC-8 4 0 7800 0.000 5.000 150
MDC DC-8 4 0 12000 0.000 5.000 250

PULSE
EDGE
Page 498.15
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X

PULSE
POLARITY
Digital Fuel Flow Scaling

AIRCRAFT # ENG MIN.FF UNITS
LEARJET 45 2 45 PPH
F2000 2 160 PPH
Page 498.16
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X

worksheet.

worksheet.

worksheet.

worksheet.

worksheet.
Page 498.17
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
D. Performance Options
CLIMB GRAD FT/NM
PERF DATABASE
ID
Page 498.18
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
Kit #
Supp. #
A12500/A12500-1 (CL600–2A12) (Rev 26)
/A12500-2 43,100 lbs. MTOW
2421CL6013A (W/SB 601–0238)
A12501/A12501-1 (CL600–2A12) (Rev 24)
/A12501-2 44,600 or 45,100 lbs. MTOW
2421CL6013A (W/SB 601–0238)
A12502/A12502-1 (CL600-2B16) (Rev 30)
/A12502-2 44,600 or 45,100 lbs. MTOW
2421CL6013A
A12520/A12520-1 23,100 lbs. MTOW
/A12520-2
2421LR60-405
A12521/A12521-1 23,500 lbs. MTOW
/A12521-2
2421LR60
/A12522-2 23,500 lbs. MTOW W1418
P12540 Falcon 2000 CFE738-1-1B DTM537 A12540 F2000200696A12540
A12540/A12540-1 35,800 or 36,500 lbs. MTOW
/A12540-2
2421F2000
P12550 ASTRA SPX TFE 731-40R- APX-1001-1 A12550 ASTRA151096A12550
A12550/A12550-1 24,650 lbs. MTOW 200G
/A12550-2 20,700 lbs. MLdgW
2421SPX (SCN 601.2 and later)
Page 498.19
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
E. VNAV Options
VDEV SCALE NORMAL VN-212
TEMP COMP ENABLED DISABLED
F. Approach Options
(1) APPR OPT 1/1
FPA Limit ° (max. 9.9 degrees)
AUTO HDG ENABLED DISABLED
ROLL STEERING GAINS

NOTE: You may or may not be able to enable certain approach types depending on
which ARINC sensors are configured at any given time.
ILS ENABLED DISABLED ADVISORY
LOC ENABLED DISABLED ADVISORY
BC ENABLED DISABLED ADVISORY
NOTE: When REMOTE ARM is DISABLED the APPR TYPES 1/2 and 2/2 pages are
not configurable.
Page 498.20
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
G. EFIS Options
TYPE 429 ADV 429 GAMA EDZ 705 429 DHC
NOTE: Select 429 DHC for MD-87 aircraft.
H. Pro Line 4 Options

CHP SINGLE N/A
RADAR TYPE RTA-844 RTA-854 N/A
FUEL MAX N/A 8191 LBS 65535 LBS
TCAS SINGLE DUAL N/A
MLS SINGLE DUAL N/A
I. Performance Display Options

(1) Function
PERF EFIS DISP ENABLED DISABLED
(2) V1 Display Options

COLOR Red Magenta Yellow White
SYMBOL Bug Line
(3) VR Display Options

SYMBOL Bug Line

SYMBOL Bug Line
Page 498.21
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
(5) VTGT Display Options

SYMBOL Bug Line
(6) VREF Display Options

SYMBOL Bug Line
J. NAV Options
AT OR BELOW Ft. Altitude
NOTE: Altitude range: 1,500 to 64,000 ft. The AT OR BELOW altitude must be at least one foot lower than
BANK LIMIT ° (min. 12.5°max. 30.0°)
NOTE: Altitude range: 1,500 to 64,000 ft. The AT OR ABOVE altitude must be at least one foot higher than
the AT OR BELOW altitude. You may need to configure the AT OR ABOVE altitude before the AT
OR BELOW altitude in some installations.
K. Tune Options
aircraft.
# COMS 0 1 2 3
# NAVS 0 1 2
# ADFS 0 1 2
# ATC 0 1
Page 498.22
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
L. Crossfill (XFILL) Options
M. Cabin Display Options

Message 1 ENABLED DISABLED
Message 1 Title
Message 2 Title
Message 3 Title
Message 4 Title
Message 5 Title
Message 6 Title
NOTE: Message titles must be spelled exactly as they are in the removable Flash Card in the
Cabin Display Computer. Contact Universal Avionics Customer Service if you do not
know the message titles or duration.
N. Pilot Data, Flight Plan and Log, and Strut Switch Options
PLT DB @ PWRUP RETAINED CLEARED
FPL TYPE STANDARD MULTI-STOP
FLIGHT LOG ENABLED DISABLED
NOTE: The Flight Log function requires the Fuel option to be configured.
Page 498.23
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
O. Discrete Options
(1) Discrete In
the function to operate correctly in the FMS. Any signal can be configured on any
discrete input resource if the installer ensures the signal types and wiring match. As
an example, the “Go-around” discrete input can be ground on some aircraft and 28V
on others.
NOTE: The following discrete input options are used only for flight logging and do
not need to be configured if Flight Log is disabled.
APU Running
ENG 1 Running
ENG 2 Running
ENG 3 Running
ENG 4 Running
Parking Brake
Rotors Turning
Page 498.24
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
Input Discrete Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
28 V/Open
all unused inputs.
MP MP MP MP MP MP MP MP MP MP
6G 6H 6J 15J 11G 15K 6A 6E 6F 6B
None
APU Running
ATC1 Select
DHC VNAV Coupled
DHC VNAV Arm
Engine 1 Running
Engine 2 Running
Engine 3 Running
Engine 4 Running
Go Around
Mark On Target (MMMS)
Parking Brake Set
Rotors Turning
Sperry VNAV Capture
Strut
Test
Page 498.25
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
(2) Discrete Out
output resource if the installer ensures the signal types match.
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
28 V/Open
unused inputs.
1 13B 3C 13D 13E 7A 7B 6C 13F
None
DHC Arm Annunciator
DR Mode (SCN 601.4 and later)
Doppler Mode
Doppler Sea State
Doppler Self Test
FMS Valid
GPS Integrity
Sperry VNAV Flag
Page 498.26
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
P. ARINC Options
Receive Port # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Pin Numbers (A/B)
UNS-1F/UNS-1D+
NO SENSOR
429 ADC
575 ADC
AFIS
429 AHRS 1
429 AHRS 2
CROSSFILL 1
CROSSFILL 2
429 DME
709 DME
DOPPLER 91
DOPPLER 137
DOPPLER 2012
HS GPS 1
HS GPS 2
HS GPS 3
LS GPS 1
LS GPS 2
LS GPS 3
C-IV GPIRS 1
C-IV GPIRS 2
C-IV GPIRS 3
IC600 R
IC600 L
Page 498.27
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
Receive Port # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Pin Numbers (A/B)
UNS-1F/UNS-1D+
429 IRGPS 1
429 IRGPS 2
429 IRGPS 3
HS429 IRS 1
HS429 IRS 2
HS429 IRS 3
LS429 IRS 1
LS429 IRS 2
LS429 IRS 3
571 IRS 1
571 IRS 2
571 IRS 3
KFC FGS
LCS
P4-L AUX
P4-R AUX
P4-02 Onside (Note 2
429 RADAR
571 RADAR
RADAR 1500
429 VOR RAD
711 VOR
RRS-T
Page 498.28
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
P4-01 MAP bus.
Page 498.29
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
ARINC Transmit
Port # 0A / 0B 1 2A / 2B 3 4A / 4B 5 6A / 6B 7
(NOTE 4)
4A 12A 4E 4J 12J 12E 1A 5A 1E 1J 5J 5E
4B 12B 4F 4K 12K 12F 1B 5B 1F 1K 5K 5F
NONE
429 LS
429 HS
429 LS MOD 1
(MD-78 EFIS)
571 LRN
429 XFILL
429 TUNE
IC600-01
P4-01 IOC
P4-02 IOC
P4-03 IOC
P4-01 MAP
P4-02 MAP A
P4-02 MAP B
Autopilot systems. The P4-01 IOC output bus is configured with the P4-01 or P4-02 ONSD and
OFFSD IOC input buses.
2. The P4-02 IOC bus is used for the standard Learjet 60 Collins Pro Line 4 EFD-871. In this
installation the P4-02 IOC output bus is configured with the P4-01 or P4-02 ONSD and OFFSD IOC
input buses.
3. The P4-03 IOC bus is used for the F2000 and the Astra SPX Collins Pro Line 4 EFD-4077. In this
input buses.
4. The P4-01 MAP bus is used for the standard Learjet 60 and the FIAS Collins Pro Line 4 EFD-871. In
this installation the P4-01 MAP output bus is configured with the P4-03 or P4-04 ONSD and OFFSD
IOC input buses.
5. The P4-02 MAP A and P4-02 MAP B output buses are used for the F2000 and Astra SPX Collins
Pro Line 4 EFD-4077. The P4-02 MAP A bus is connected to the onside MFD and the P4-02 MAP B
bus is connected to the offside MFD. The P4-02 MAP A and P4-02 MAP B output buses are
configured with the P4-05 or P4-06 ONSD and OFFSD IOC buses.
Page 498.30
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
Q. CSDB Options
NO SENSOR
RTU
SINGLE DME
DUAL DME
DME DIRECT
VOR
MFD
ERP
NONE
TUNE
RTU TUNE
R. Analog Options
ANALOG ATT NONE HDG ONLY HDG+PIT+ROL
Page 498.31
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
S. Air Data Options
not possible.
SAT FORMAT NONE DIGITAL
BARO ALT NONE 565 SYNCHRO DC/RESOLVER DIGITAL
FORMAT
PRES ALT FORMAT NONE 565 SYNCHRO DC/RESOLVER DIGITAL
A/S FORMAT 565 DC 20MV IAS 11MV IAS DIGITAL
Page 498.32
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
T. Aircraft Identification
SCN ________________________________
AIRCRAFT ID _____________________________________________________________
Page 498.33
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
A. Starting the FMS
UNS - 1B
CPU PASS
RAM PASS
DATABASE PASS
manual.
Page 498.34
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X

the UNS-1. The position,
date, and time do not
2 Push [MSG] to display the
message(s).
Push [MSG] or RETURN [5R]
POS INIT 1/1 ÂMSG

date
id ----- utc
N 32 07.9 14:49
W 110 55.4
standard/extended
19-JUN-96
perf db A12500
3
DATE field.
Push [4][5][6][7][8][9]
Page 498.35
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
1 Push [DATA] to
show the DATA
1/5 page.
DATA 1/5
¬JEPPESEN
¬PILOT
¬PERF
¬DISK
¬HOLD POS MAINT®

MAINT 1/1
3
Push CONFIG [1L] to
show the First
RETURN®
EDIT CONFIG®
STORE CONF®

CONFIG 1/2
4
Push DISPLAY [1L]
Configuration page.
¬DISCRETES
¬ARINC AIR DATA®
¬CSDB RETURN®
Page 498.36
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
B. Display Configuration
1 Push COLORS [3L] to show DISPLAY CONFIG

the Option List page. display type edit config
Fill in the appropriate FLAT PANEL STORE CONF®
item number:
1 STANDARD
2 SCDU colors
3 PRIMUS 1000 STANDARD
4 PL 4 4000
RETURN®
2
Push RETURN [5R] to
display the first CONFIG
page.
Page 498.37
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
C. Fuel Options Configuration
1
FMS CONFIG 1/2

The FMS shows its fms options edit onfig
¬FUEL EFIS®
2
¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®

item number:
9
2 DISABLED
4
push [ENTER]. ENABLED STORE CONF®
empty weight
5
Fill in 1, 2, 3, or 4, 2
LBS
fuel flow type
DIGITAL RETURN®
6
item number:
NOTE: If, in Step 8, you selected NO
1 LBS
SENSOR, then push RETURN [5R], skip
2 KGS
the fuel flow scaling procedures,
OPT LIST 1/1

select
#-
8
4 pulse freq
5 pulse width
6 digital
RETURN®
Page 498.38
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
D. DC Linear Fuel Flow Scaling Configuration
1 2
FF SCALING 1/1
3
Push MIN FF [5L].
0 pph 1212
min ff
50 pph RETURN®
4
Push RETURN [5R].
E. AC Linear Fuel Flow Scaling Configuration
2
UPPER FLOW RATES [2L] [2R]
1
Push INPUT RANGE [1L].
FF SCALING 1/1
3
Push MIN FF [5L].
0 pph 7500
min ff
250 pph RETURN®
4
Push RETURN [5R].
Page 498.39
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
F. Pulse Frequency Fuel Flow Scaling Configuration
1
Push SCALING [2L].
Fill in the scaling
then push [ENTER].
FF SCALING 1/1
edit config
STORE CONF®
scaling

item number: RISING
1 RISING
2 FALLING
75 pph RETURN®
3 4
Fill in the minimum fuel
flow rate for your aircraft
G. Pulse Width Fuel Flow Scaling Configuration

Fill in the scaling
for your aircraft
FF SCALING 1/1
STORE CONF®
scaling
40.000 pph/msec
pulse polarity
2
item number:
1 POSITIVE min ff
4
Push RETURN [5R].
3
Push MIN FF [5L].
then push [ENTER].
Page 498.40
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
H. Digital Fuel Flow Scaling Configuration
FF SCALING 1/1
edit config
STORE CONF®
1
Push MIN FF [5L].
Fill in the minimum
fuel flow rate for
your aircraft and
then push [ENTER].
min ff
75 pph RETURN®
2
Push RETURN [5R].
Page 498.41
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
I. Performance Options Configuration

FMS CONFIG 1/2
2
Push PERF [3L].
¬FUEL EFIS®
¬PERF NAV®
3
item number:
¬APPR RETURN®
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
PERF OPT 1/ 1
basic edit config
4
1 ENABLED advanced
climb grad
5
Push ADVANCED [3L].
500 ft/nm RETURN®
item number:
1 ENABLED
6
2 DISABLED Push CLIMB GRAD [5L].
and then push [ENTER]. Enter the normal nominal
then push [ENTER].

PERF DB [3R].
PERF DB 1/1
edit config
STORE CONF®
8
[ENTER].
RETURN®
Page 498.42
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
J. VNAV Options Configuration
FMS CONFIG 1/2

fms options
ALL DIGITAL
edit config
STORE CONF®
Configuration page.
¬PERF NAV®
¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®
2 Push VNAV [4L].

item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED

5 SCN 405.4 only

Push VDEV STOW [4L].
fpa limit
7.5Ø
item number: vdev stow
1 ENABLED DISABLED
2 DISABLED vdev output
NORMAL RETURN®

item number:
1 NORMAL
2 VN-212
See note.

Page 498.43
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
FMS CONFIG 1/2


¬FUEL EFIS®
¬PERF NAV®
2 Push APPR [5L].

¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®
3
Push APR MODE [1L].
item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
APPR OPT 1/1
4
9.0Ø
5
item number:
6
Page 498.44
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
7
for approach mode.
APPR OPT 1/1

ENABLED
remote arm
ENABLED
DISABLED
roll gains
3x


Page 498.45
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
L. Approach Types Configuration

1
1 ENABLED
2 ADVISORY
APPR TYPES 1/2
gps edit config
ndb ils
ENABLED ADVISORY
vor loc
ENABLED ADVISORY
rnv bc
ENABLED ADVISORY
vfr
ENABLED RETURN®
2 Repeat step 1 for

3
Push RETURN [5R] to
show the Approach
Options page.
Page 498.46
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
M. EFIS Options Configuration
1
FMS CONFIG 1/2

2 Push EFIS [2R].
¬FUEL EFIS®
¬PERF NAV®
¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®
3
Push TYPE [1L].
3 EDZ 705
4 429 DHC

compatible before
4
Page 498.47
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
N. Pro Line 4 Options Configuration
1 Push CHP [1L].

Select the appropriate For Pro Line 4 4000 installations, all
item number: options must be configured to N/A except
1 SINGLE PL-4 REF which must be configured to TRUE.
2 N/A
Push [ENTER].
6 Push TCAS [2R].

7 Push MLS [3R].

1 SINGLE 1 SINGLE
item number:
2 DUAL 2 DUAL
1 RTA-844
3 N/A 3 N/A
2 RTA-854
3 N/A
Push [ENTER].

MAGNETIC DUAL
adf diag rad alt
N/A SINGLE

fuel max
8191 LBS RETURN®
item number:
1 SINGLE
2 DUAL
3 N/A
item number:
Push [ENTER].
1 SINGLE
2 DUAL
3 N/A

item number:
Push [ENTER].
1 N/A
2 8191 LBS
3 65535 LBS
Push [ENTER].
page.

Page 498.48
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
O. Performance Display Options Configuration
1
Push RETURN [5R] on the EFIS OPT 1/1
PL-4 Options page to show type edit config
the EFIS Options page. 429 DHC STORE CONF®
¬PL-4 OPTS
3
item number:
perf efis disp
DISABLED V TGT®
4
line select keys:
V1 [3L] ¬V1 V REF®
VR [4L]
V2 [5L] ¬VR
V TGT [2R]
and then perform
Steps 5, 6, and 7.
5
item number:
1 BLACK
2 BLUE
3 GREEN
4 CYAN V1 OPT
5 RED edit config
6 MAGENTA STORE CONF®
or push [NEXT] and fill in: BLACK
1 WHITE
manual color
BLACK
symbol

7
Push SYMBOL [4L].
1 BUG
Display Options.
2 LINE
Page 498.49
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
P. NAV Options Configuration
FMS CONFIG 1/2

fms options
ALL DIGITAL
edit config
¬FUEL EFIS®
¬PERF NAV®
2
Push NAV [3R].
¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®

item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
5

(Range 1,500 to 64,000 feet (Range 12.5 to 30 degrees.)
but less than the altitude on
the line below.)
NAV OPT 1/1
STEERING LIMITS
20000 ft 27.0
32000 ft 15.0
a/c type
FIXED WING RETURN®
7

(Range 1,500 to 64,000 feet but
(Range 12.5 to 30 degrees.)
the line above.)
8
Push A/C TYPE [5L].
item number:
1 FIXED WING
2 HELICOPTER
Page 498.50
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
Q. Tune Options Configuration
FMS CONFIG 1/ 2
1
¬PERF NAV®
¬VNAV TUNE®
3
Push # COMS [1L].
then push [ENTER].
TUNE OPT 1/1
4
Push # NAVS [2L].
# coms edit config
2 STORE CONF®
# navs
then push [ENTER].
2
# adfs
2
5 Push # ADFS [3L].

# atc
1
then push [ENTER].
RETURN®
6 Push # ATC [4L].

then push [ENTER].
Page 498.51
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
R. Crossfill Options Configuration

Then push [NEXT] to show the config edit
strut sw
¬CABIN DISP ANALOG
flight log
ENABLED
fpl type
STANDARD
2
Push XFILL [1L] to show the
plt db @ pwrup
RETAINED RETURN®
3 Push MASTER [1L].

item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
XFILL OPT 1/1

master config edit
4 Push INIT [2L].

item number:
ENABLED
init
ENABLED
STORE CONF®
1 ENABLED
fuel tune presets
2 DISABLED
ENABLED DISABLED
flight plan
ENABLED
5
Push FUEL [3L].
RETURN®
item number:
7
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
6 Push FLIGHT PLAN [4L].

item number:
and then push [ENTER]. will be enabled automatically and
steps 4, 5, and 6 need not be
performed.
Page 498.52
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X

FMS CONFIG 2/2
strut sw
¬CABIN DISP ANALOG
flight log
ENABLED
2 Push CABIN DISP [2L]. fpl type

STANDARD
plt db @ pwrup
RETAINED RETURN®
3
item number:
to the next procedure, Pilot Data,
1 ENABLED
Flight Plan and Log, and Strut Switch
2 DISABLED
Configuration.
CABIN DISP 1/1
5 Push MESSAGE 1 [2L]. cabin disp edit config


item number:
2 DISABLED

message, then push
MESSAGE TITLE [2L].
MESSAGE 1
message 1
1/1
edit config
then push [ENTER].
RETURN®

9
Page 498.53
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
T. Pilot Data, Flight Plan and Log, and Strut Switch Configuration

show the second FMS
5
Configuration page. Push STRUT SW [2R].
item number:
strut sw
¬CABIN DISP ANALOG
flight log
ENABLED 4 Push FLIGHT LOG [3R].
item number:
fpl type 1 ENABLED
STANDARD 2 DISABLED
plt db @ pwrup and then push [ENTER].
RETAINED RETURN®
3
Push FPL TYPE [4R].
2 Push PLT DB @ PWRUP [5L].

item number:
item number:
1 STANDARD
2 MULTI-STOP
1 RETAINED
2 CLEARED
Page 498.54
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
U. Discrete Configuration
Certain signals are configurable discrete inputs or outputs for the FMS. Configurable
discretes are either Ground/Open type or 28 VDC/Open type and may be configured on any
discrete input or output resource of the same type.

Strut Switch page and
again on the FMS
CONFIG 1/2
config edit
Configuration page to show
STORE CONF®
page.
¬FMS CONFIG
2 Push DISCRETES [3L] to ¬DISCRETES ANALOG®

page. ¬ARINC AIR DATA®
¬CSDB RETURN®
DISC OPT 1/1

3 Push DISCRETE IN [2L].
the eleven dicsrete
edit config
STORE CONF®
inputs.
¬DISCRETE IN
¬DISCRETE OUT
4 Push DISCRETE OUT [3L].

RETURN®

Inputs and Outputs, push
Page 498.55
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
Input signals can be connected to any input resource. The installer must ensure that
the input signal name and type match exactly the input resource and aircraft wiring.
NOTE: Select the NONE option initially for all discrete inputs. This will allow all
possible discrete inputs to be displayed in the selection list. Once an input
is selected, it will not be displayed as an option for any other discrete input.
1
Push the line select key for
any Discrete Input you want DISC IN 1/2
to change. disc in 1 edit config
disc in 3 disc in 7
2
Repeat Step 1 for all NONE FREQ MNGT
remaining Discrete Inputs disc in 4 disc in 8
you want to change. TEST NONE
disc in 5
MAG/TRUE SW RETURN®
NOTE: Discrete Inputs 19 are
Ground / Open type.
DISC IN 2/2
NONE STORE CONF®
3
Push [NEXT] to show the
second Discrete Input dis in 10 28v
page. NONE

RETURN®
4
6
the appropriate item When you have verified or
number and then push configured all Discrete
[ENTER]. Inputs, push RETURN [5R] to
5
you want to change.
Page 498.56
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
Output signals can be connected to any input resource. The installer must ensure that
the output signal name and type match exactly the output resource and aircraft
wiring.
NOTE: Select the NONE option initially for all discrete outputs. This will allow all
possible discrete outputs to be displayed in the selection list. Once an
output is selected, it will not be displayed as an option for any other
discrete output.
DISC OUT 1/2
NONE STORE CONF®
WPT ANN NONE
SXTK ANN NONE
APPR ANN NONE
disc out 5
HDG ANN RETURN®


change.
Ground / Open type. 28 V / OPEN TYPE SIGNAL.
DISC OUT 2/2

STORE CONF®
dis out 9 28v
FMS VAL
4
then push [ENTER].
RETURN®

you want to change.
6
When you have verified or configured
Page 498.57
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
V. ARINC Configuration
1

ARINC OPT 1/1
inputs.
edit config
3 Push TRANSMIT [2L] to show

the first ARINC Transmit
¬TRANSMIT
each of the ARINC Transmit ¬561 XMIT

outputs.
RETURN®

5
ANALOG board.

Page 498.58
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X

ARINC Input you want to change.
NOTE: Select the NO SENSOR option for all
ports initially. This will allow all
ARINC Inputs you want to change. an option for any other ports.
ARINC RCV 1/1

port 0 edit config
429 RADAR STORE CONF®
port 1 port 5
NO SENSOR NO SENSOR
port 2 port 6
NO SENSOR HS429 IRS 1
port 3 port 7
port 4
HS429 IRS 3 RETURN®
3 4
If your FMS is equipped with two When you have verified or
ARINC boards, push [NEXT] to configured all ARINC Inputs,
show the second ARINC Options push RETURN [5R] to show the
page. ARINC Options page.
Perform steps 1 and 2 for all
ARINC inputs.
Page 498.59
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
1
ARINC XMIT 1/1
port 1 port 5
429 XFILL NONE

you want to change.
port 2
429 LS
port 3
port 6
NONE
port 7
429 HS NONE
port 4
tune RETURN®
3
ARINC Options page.
1
Push 561 BUS [1L].
item number:
1 LRN DATA
2 DIST ONLY
561 bus edit config
dtg format
2
item number:
1 ARINC 561
2 ARINC 568
RETURN®
3
Page 498.60
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
W. CSDB Options Configuration
1

CSDB OPT 1/1
rcvr 1 edit config
3
rcvr 3 xmitter 2
NO SENSOR NONE
rcvr 4
NO SENSOR
RETURN®

rcvr 1
CSDB OPT 1/1
edit config
NO SENSOR NONE
rcvr 3 xmitter 2
5
MFD
RETURN®

Page 498.61
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
X. Analog Options Configuration
1 7 8
On the first Push DESIRED TRK [2R]. Push RELATIVE TO [3R].
Configuration page, push Fill in the appropriate Fill in the appropriate
ANALOG [2R] to show the item number: item number:
Analog Options page. 1 NONE 1 NOSE
2 SYNCHRO 2 NORTH
2 Push WPT BRG SIG [1L].

item number:
1 DRIFT ANGLE
2 WPT BRG
ANALOG OPT 1/1
3
Push WPT BRG FMT [2L].
wpt brg sig edit config
item number: WPT BRG STORE CONF®
1 NONE wpt brg fmt desired trk
2 SYNCHRO SYNCHRO SYNCHRO
3 RESOLVER offset relative to
and then push [ENTER]. +0 NOSE
4
Push OFFSET [3L]. NOSE NONE
Fill in the pitch cmd
appropriate item NONE RETURN®
number:
1 +180
2 +0
bk Push RETURN [5R] to show the
5 6 9
Push RELATIVE TO [4L]. Push PITCH CMD [5L]. Push ANALOG ATT [4R].
Fill in the appropriate Fill in the appropriate Fill in the appropriate
item number: item number: item number:
1 NOSE 1 NONE 1 NONE
2 NORTH 2 DHC 2 HDG ONLY
and then push [ENTER]. and then push [ENTER]. and then push [ENTER].
Page 498.62
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
Y. Air Data Configuration
INPUTS.
NOTE: Due to the different FMS configurations, some of the options or their entry fields may
be blank.
1
2
item number:
1 BARO ALT
2 PRESS ALT NOTE: We recommend use of BARO
3 BOTH ALTITUDE; however, you must
and then push [ENTER]. use BOTH if you ENABLED the
3
2 TAS AND IAS
AIR DATA 1/1
4
5
Push SAT FORMAT [4L]. NONE DIGITAL
1 NONE
2 DIGITAL
6 7
Push MACH FORMAT [5L]. Push RETURN [5R] to show
Fill in the appropriate the first Configuration
item number: page.
1 NONE
2 DIGITAL
Page 498.63
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 601.X
Z. Store Final Configuration

Module updates
(dates and time)
1
With the first Configuration page showing, push show when the
[NEXT] to show the second Configuration page. last four updates
occurred.
CONFIG 2/2
STORE CONF®
date utc
10-apr-95 23:04
2 Push AIRCRAFT IDENTIFICATION

[2L] or [2R].
Type the Aircraft
RETURN®
3
characters including spaces. Push STORE CONF [1R] twice to
on self tests.
Page 498.64
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
Date:
Company Address:
A/C Manufacturer:
A/C Model No.:
A/C Serial No.:
(1) NCU Hardware

(Not configurable)
(2) NCU Software:
B. Display Configuration – Colors
STANDARD
SCDU
PRIMUS 1000
PL 4 4000
PL 4 800
Page 498.65
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
C. Fuel Options
NOTE: Empty weight must be entered in lbs. or kgs. as selected under DISPLAY UNITS below.
ENGINES

AIRCRAFT # ENG
ATR-42 2 0 1212 0.000 5.000 50

ATR-72 2 0 1212 0.000 5.000 50
BOEING 737-300 2 0 12000 0.173 4.827 350
BAe ATP 2 0 1500 0.000 5.000 50
BAe-125-800 2 0 2800 0.000 5.000 100
BEECH KA-300/350/1900 2 0 750 0.000 5.000 60
BEECH KA-90, KA-200 2 0 600 0.200 10.200 20
BEECHJET 2 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75
BK-117 2H 0 500 0.000 5.000 25
BOEING 707 4 0 17700 1.000 11.000 500
CITATION II 2 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75
Page 498.66
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X

AIRCRAFT # ENG
CITATION V 2 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75

CL600 2 0 3500 0.000 5.000 65
CL601 2 0 4500 0.000 5.000 65
DASH 8 2 0 1200 0.000 5.000 75
DO-228 2 0 500 0.000 5.000 60
FALCON 10 2 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75
FALCON 20/TFE-371 2 0 3000 0.000 5.000 80
FALCON 50 3 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75
GULFSTREAM II 2 0 8000 0.000 5.000 80
GULFSTREAM III 2 0 10000 0.000 5.000 160
HS-125 2 0 2200 0.000 5.000 100
IAI ASTRA 1125 2 0 2200 1.000 5.400 70
IAI WESTWIND 1124 2 0 2200 0.000 5.000 100
JETSTAR II 4 0 2500 1.000 11.000 75
LEARJET 2 0 3000 0.000 10.000 55
LOCKHEED L1011 3 0 20000 0.000 5.000 400
MERLIN 2 0 600 0.000 5.000 25
OPV 1 0 150 0.000 5.000 1
PARTENAVIA 2 0 644 0.000 5.000 60
PUMA 2H 0 600 0.000 10.000 75
S-76A 2H 0 500 0.000 5.000 25
S-76B 2H 0 800 0.000 5.000 60
SABRE 65 2 0 4000 1.000 9.000 100

AIRCRAFT # ENG FF
FALCON 20 2 0 4000 0.000 5.000 75
GULFSTREAM II 2 0 12000 0.000 5.000 180
MDC DC-8 4 0 7800 0.000 5.000 150
MDC DC-8 4 0 12000 0.000 5.000 250
Page 498.67
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
PULSE
EDGE

PULSE
POLARITY

LEARJET 45 2 45 PPH
F2000 2 160 PPH
Page 498.68
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X

worksheet.

worksheet.

worksheet.

worksheet.
Page 498.69
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X

worksheet.
CLIMB GRAD FT/NM
PERF DATABASE ID
Page 498.70
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
Kit #
Supp. #
A12500/A12500-1 (CL600–2A12) (Rev 26)
/A12500-2 43,100 lbs. MTOW
2421CL6013A (W/SB 601–0238)
A12501/A12501-1 (CL600–2A12) (Rev 24)
/A12501-2 44,600 or 45,100 lbs. MTOW
2421CL6013A (W/SB 601–0238)
A12502/A12502-1 (CL600-2B16) (Rev 30)
/A12502-2 44,600 or 45,100 lbs. MTOW
2421CL6013A
A12520/A12520-1 23,100 lbs. MTOW
/A12520-2
2421LR60-405
A12521/A12521-1 23,500 lbs. MTOW
/A12521-2
2421LR60
/A12522-2 23,500 lbs. MTOW W1418
P12523 Learjet 60 (60-049 and PW305A FM-123-25 A12523 LEAR60240901A12523
A12523/A12523-1 subsequent and prior w/SB (FAA Approved
/A12523-2 60-8-1) 1-15-93, U.S.
2421LR60-25 23,500 lbs. MTOW Units)
(SCN 602.4 and later)
A12540/A12540-1 35,800 or 36,500 lbs. MTOW
/A12540-2
2421F2000
A12550/A12550-1 24,650 lbs. MTOW 200G
/A12550-2 20,700 lbs. MLdgW
2421SPX
Page 498.71
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
E. VNAV Options
F. Approach Options
(1) APPR OPT 1/1
AUTO-HDG ENABLED DISABLED
NOTE: If AUTO-HDG is ENABLED, then the FMS will transition automatically to FMS HDG
mode when an approach is manually activated. You should select DISABLED for
aircraft which switch from roll steering to left/right deviation steering for approach
mode.
ROLL STEERING
GAINS Integer Multiplier (Range: 1x to 7x)

BC ENABLED ADVISORY
NOTE: GPS, NDB, VOR, RNV, and VFR will show ENABLED or DISABLED based on
sensor selections on other pages.
Page 498.72
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
G. EFIS Options
NOTE: Select 429 DHC for MD-87 aircraft.

CHP SINGLE N/A
MLS SINGLE DUAL N/A
Page 498.73
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X

(1) Function

SYMBOL Bug Line

SYMBOL Bug Line

SYMBOL Bug Line

SYMBOL Bug Line

SYMBOL Bug Line
Page 498.74
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
J. NAV Options
NOTE: Altitude range: 0 to 59,999 ft. The AT OR BELOW altitude must be at least one foot
lower than the AT OR ABOVE altitude.
NOTE: Altitude range: 1 to 60,000 ft. The AT OR ABOVE altitude must be at least one foot
higher than the AT OR BELOW altitude. You may need to configure the AT OR
ABOVE altitude before the AT OR BELOW altitude in some installations.
K. Tune Options
aircraft.
# COMS 0 1 2 3
# NAVS 0 1 2
# ADFS 0 1 2
# ATC 0 1

XFILL MODE PULL PUSH
NOTE: If MASTER is ENABLED, then INIT, FUEL and FLIGHT PLAN will be enabled
automatically.
Page 498.75
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
Message 1 Title
Message 2 Title
Message 3 Title
Message 4 Title
Message 5 Title
Message 6 Title
MAX STBY TIME DISABLED 2 HOURS 4 HOURS
6 HOURS 8 HOURS
NOTE: The Flight log function requires that the Fuel option be configured.
Page 498.76
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
O. Discrete Options
(1) Discrete In
on others.
APU Running
ENG 1 Running
ENG 2 Running
ENG 3 Running
ENG 4 Running
Parking Brake
Rotors Turning
Page 498.77
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
Input Discrete Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
28 V/Open
all unused inputs.
MP MP MP MP MP MP MP MP MP MP
6G 6H 6J 15J 11G 15K 6A 6E 6F 6B
NONE
APU Running
ATC1 Select
DHC VNAV ARM
DHC VNAV Coupled
Door
Engine 1 Running
Engine 2 Running
Engine 3 Running
Engine 4 Running
FPL Erase (MMMS)
Go Around
Mark On Target (MMMS)
Parking Brake Set
Rotors Turning
Sperry VNAV Capture
Strut
Test
Page 498.78
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
(2) Discrete Out

Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
28 V/Open
unused inputs.
1 13B 3C 13D 13E 7A 7B 6C 13F
NONE
DHC Arm Annunciator
Doppler Sea State
Doppler Self Test
FMS Valid
GPS Integrity
Sperry VNAV Flag
VNAV Waypoint Annunciator
Page 498.79
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
P. ARINC Options
Receive Port # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Pin Numbers (A/B)
UNS-1F/UNS-1D+
NO SENSOR
429 ADC
575 ADC
AFIS
429 AHRS 1
429 AHRS 2
CROSSFILL 1
CROSSFILL 2
429 DME
709 DME
DOPPLER 91
DOPPLER 137
DOPPLER 2012
HS GPS 1
HS GPS 2
HS GPS 3
LS GPS 1
LS GPS 2
LS GPS 3
C-IV GPIRS 1
C-IV GPIRS 2
C-IV GPIRS 3
IC600 L-01
IC600 L-02
IC600 R-01
IC600 R-02
Page 498.80
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
Receive Port # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Pin Numbers (A/B)
UNS-1F/UNS-1D+
429 IRGPS 1
429 IRGPS 2
429 IRGPS 3
HS429 IRS 1
HS429 IRS 2
HS429 IRS 3
LS429 IRS 1
LS429 IRS 2
LS429 IRS 3
571 IRS 1
571 IRS 2
571 IRS 3
KFC FGS
LCS
P4-L AUX
P4-R AUX
429 RADAR
571 RADAR
RRS-T
RADAR 1500
429 VOR RAD
711 VOR
UNILINK
Page 498.81
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
P4-01 MAP bus.
Page 498.82
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
ARINC Transmit Port
# 0A / 0B 1 2A / 2B 3 4A / 4B 5 6A / 6B 7
(NOTE 4)
4A 12A 4E 4J 12J 12E 1A 5A 1E 1J 5J 5E
4B 12B 4F 4K 12K 12F 1B 5B 1F 1K 5K 5F
NONE
429 LS
429 HS
429 LS MOD 1
(MD-78 EFIS)
571 LRN
429 XFILL
429 TUNE
IC600-01
LS429 MOD 1
P4-01 IOC (Note 1)
P4-02 IOC (Note 2)
P4-03 IOC (Note 3)
P4-01 MAP (Note 4)
2. The P4-02 IOC bus is used for the standard Learjet 60 Collins Pro Line 4 EFD-871. In this installation
the P4-02 IOC output bus is configured with the P4-01 or P4-02 ONSD and OFFSD IOC input buses.
input buses.
IOC input buses.
5. The P4-02 MAP A and P4-02 MAP B output buses are used for the F2000 and Astra SPX Collins Pro
Line 4 EFD-4077. The P4-02 MAP A bus is connected to the onside MFD and the P4-02 MAP B bus
is connected to the offside MFD. The P4-02 MAP A and P4-02 MAP B output buses are configured
with the P4-05 or P4-06 ONSD and OFFSD IOC buses.
Page 498.83
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
Q. ARINC 561 Transmit Options

R. CSDB Options
NO SENSOR
RTU
SINGLE DME
DUAL DME
DME DIRECT
VOR
MFD
ERP
NONE
TUNE
RTU TUNE
S. Analog Options
T. ASCB Options Data

WT TRIGGER ENABLED DISABLED
TRIGGER WT LBS.
Page 498.84
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
U. Air Data Options
not possible.
SAT FORMAT NONE DIGITAL
BARO ALT FORMAT NONE 565 SYNCHRO DC/RESOLVER DIGITAL
A/S FORMAT 565 DC TAS 20MV IAS 11MV IAS DIGITAL
Page 498.85
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
V. Aircraft Identification
SCN ________________________________
AIRCRAFT ID _____________________________________________________________
Page 498.86
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
A. Starting the FMS
UNS - 1B
CPU PASS
RAM PASS
DATABASE PASS
CONFIG MODULE
AUXILIARY
ARINC
ANALOG
manual.
Page 498.87
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
If the self tests detect no faults precluding use of the system, then this COPYRIGHT page
1 2
Push [5L] to initialize Push [MSG] to display the
the UNS-1. The position, message(s).
date, and time do not Push [MSG] or RETURN [5R]
POS INIT 1/1 ÂMSG

date
initial pos 19-JUN-98
id ----- utc
N 32 07.9 14:49
W 110 55.4
standard/extended XFILL®
19-JUN-98 MSTR XFILL®
perf db A12500
3 Push [1R] to highlight the

DATE field.
Push [4][5][6][7][8][9]
Page 498.88
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
1 Push [DATA] to
show the DATA
1/4 page.
DATA 1/4
¬NAV DATA CABIN DISP®
¬PILOT DATA MFD DISP®
¬PERF
¬DISK MSTR XFILL®
¬HOLD POS MAINT®

MAINT 1/1
3
Push CONFIG [1L] to
show the First
Configuration page. clear log
¬STATIC TEST
¬DYNAMIC TEST
¬S/W VERS RETURN®
can change the configuration. The display will change to: STORE®

configuration changes before pushing STORE® [1R].
If you push STORE® [1R] before making all required changes, then
you will have to wait while the system restarts itself.
CONFIG 1/2
4
Push DISPLAY [1L]
Configuration page.
¬DISCRETES
¬ARINC AIR DATA®
¬CSDB RETURN®
Page 498.89
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
1 Push COLORS [3L] to show

the Option List page.
DISPLAY CONFIG
display type
item number: FLAT PANEL STORE®
1 STANDARD
2 SCDU
3 PRIMUS 1000 colors
4 PL 4 4000 STANDARD
5 PL 4 800
RETURN®
2
Push RETURN [5R] to
page.
Page 498.90
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
1
FMS CONFIG 1/2

The FMS shows its fms options edit onfig
¬FUEL EFIS®
2
¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®

item number:
9
2 DISABLED
4
empty weight and then fuel mode
push [ENTER]. ENABLED STORE®
empty weight
5
Fill in 1, 2, 3, or 4, 2
LBS
fuel flow type
DIGITAL RETURN®
6
item number:
NOTE: If, in Step 8, you selected NO
1 LBS
SENSOR, then push RETURN [5R], skip
2 KGS
the fuel flow scaling procedures,
OPT LIST 1/1

select
#-
8
4 pulse freq
5 pulse width
6 digital
RETURN®
Page 498.91
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
2
Fill in the LOWER and UPPER
1
Push INPUT RANGE [1L]. FLOW RATES and VOLTAGES with
Fill in the appropriate the appropriate values for
item number: your aircraft.
3 012 VDC for each item.
FF SCALING 1/1
input range
0-8 VDC STORE®
3
Push MIN FF [5L].
0 pph 1212
min ff
50 pph RETURN®
4
Push RETURN [5R].
2
1
and VOLTAGES [3L] [3R]
item number:
with the appropriate
1 05 VRMS
values for your aircraft.
2 08 VRMS
Push the line select key,
input the value, and then
FF SCALING 1/1
input range
0-5 VRMS STORE®
3 Push
Fill
your
MIN FF [5L].
in the rate for
aircraft and
0
lower
O.OOO
pph
VOLTAGE
vrms
4000
upper
5.000
then push [ENTER].
min ff
75 pph RETURN®
4
Push RETURN [5R].
Page 498.92
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
1
Push SCALING [2L].
Fill in the scaling
then push [ENTER].
FF SCALING 1/1
STORE®
scaling

item number: RISING
1 RISING
2 FALLING
75 pph RETURN®
3 4

Fill in the scaling
for your aircraft
FF SCALING 1/1
STORE®
scaling
40.000 pph/msec
pulse polarity
2
item number:
1 POSITIVE min ff
4
Push RETURN [5R].
3
Push MIN FF [5L].
then push [ENTER].
Page 498.93
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
FF SCALING 1/1
STORE®
1
Push MIN FF [5L].
Fill in the minimum
fuel flow rate for
your aircraft and
then push [ENTER].
min ff
45 pph RETURN®
2
Push RETURN [5R].
Page 498.94
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
I. Performance Options Configuration

FMS CONFIG 1/2
2
Push PERF [3L].
fms options
ALL DIGITAL STORE®
¬FUEL EFIS®
¬PERF NAV®
3
item number:
¬APPR RETURN®
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
PERF OPT 1/1
basic
4
Push MANUAL [2L]. ENABLED STORE®
1 ENABLED advanced
NOTE: With SCN 602.X and climb grad

702.X make sure 500 ft/nm RETURN®
MANUAL is DISABLED.
ADVANCED and MANUAL
6
can not both be Push CLIMB GRAD [5L].
enabled at the Enter the normal nominal
same time. climb gradient for your
then push [ENTER].
5
Push ADVANCED [3L].
item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
and then push [ENTER]. installation, then push
PERF DB [3R].
PERF DB 1/1
STORE®
8
[ENTER].
RETURN®
Page 498.95
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
J. VNAV Options Configuration
FMS CONFIG 1/2

fms options
ALL DIGITAL STORE®
Configuration page.
¬PERF NAV®
¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®
2 Push VNAV [4L].

item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED

vnav mode
ENABLED STORE®
5 Push VDEV STOW [4L].

item number:
fpa limit
7.5Ø
temp comp
DISABLED
1 ENABLED vdev stow
2 DISABLED DISABLED
and then push [ENTER]. vdev output
NORMAL RETURN®

item number:
7
Push TEMP COMP [3R].
item number:
1 NORMAL 1 ENABLED
2 VN-212 2 DISABLED
and then press [ENTER]. and then push [ENTER].
See note.

Page 498.96
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
FMS CONFIG 1/2

fms options

ALL DIGITAL STORE®
¬FUEL EFIS®
¬PERF NAV®
2 Push APPR [5L].

¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®
3
Push APR MODE [1L].
item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
APPR OPT 1/1
appr mode
4
Push REMOTE TUNE [2L]. ENABLED STORE®
9.0Ø
5
item number:
6
Page 498.97
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
7
for approach mode.
APPR OPT 1/1

appr mode
ENABLED STORE®
ENABLED
remote arm
ENABLED
DISABLED
roll gains
3x


Page 498.98
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
L. Approach Types Configuration
GPS, NDB, VOR, RNV and VFR
1
1 ENABLED
2 ADVISORY
APPR TYPES 1/2
gps
ENABLED STORE®
ndb ils
ENABLED ADVISORY
vor loc
ENABLED ADVISORY
rnv
DISABLED
vfr
bc
ADVISORY 2 Repeat Step 1 for
ENABLED RETURN®

show the Approach
Options page.
Page 498.99
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
M. EFIS Options Configuration
1
FMS CONFIG 1/2

fms options
STANDARD STORE®
2 Push EFIS [2R].
¬FUEL EFIS®
¬PERF NAV®
¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®
3
Push TYPE [1L].
1 429 ADV (See note.) type
2 429 GAMA 429 DHC STORE®
3 EDZ 705
4 429 DHC

compatible before
4
Page 498.100
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
N. Pro Line 4 Options Configuration
1 Push CHP [1L].

Select the appropriate For Pro Line 4 options apply only to the
item number: Lear 60 and Canadair CL-601 Challenger.
1 SINGLE Select N/A for all other aircraft.
2 N/A
Push [ENTER].
6 Push TCAS [2R].

7 Push MLS [3R].

1 SINGLE 1 SINGLE
item number:
2 DUAL 2 DUAL
1 RTA-844
3 N/A 3 N/A
2 RTA-854
3 N/A
Push [ENTER].

item number: chp
1 MAGNETIC SINGLE STORE®
MAGNETIC DUAL
adf diag rad alt
N/A SINGLE

fuel max
8191 LBS RETURN®
item number:
1 SINGLE
2 DUAL
3 N/A
item number:
Push [ENTER].
1 SINGLE
2 DUAL
3 N/A

item number:
Push [ENTER].
1 N/A
2 8191 LBS
3 65535 LBS
Push [ENTER].
page.
NOTE: In Step 5 enter 2 (8191 LBS)

Page 498.101
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
O. Performance Display Configuration
1
PL-4 Options page to show type
the EFIS Options page. 429 DHC STORE®
¬PL-4 OPTS
3
item number:
2 DISABLED
and then push [ENTER]. STORE®
perf efis disp
DISABLED V TGT®
4
line select keys:
V1 [3L] ¬V1 V REF®
VR [4L]
V2 [5L] ¬VR
V TGT [2R]
and then perform
Steps 5, 6, and 7.
5
item number:
1 BLACK
2 BLUE
3 GREEN
4 CYAN V1 OPT
5 RED
6 MAGENTA STORE®
1 WHITE
manual color
BLACK
symbol

7
Push SYMBOL [4L].
1 BUG
Display Options.
2 LINE
Page 498.102
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
P. NAV Options Configuration
FMS CONFIG 1/2

fms options
ALL DIGITAL STORE® 1 Push RETURN [5R] on each
¬FUEL EFIS®
¬PERF NAV®
2
Push NAV [3R].
¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®

item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
5

(Range 0 to 59,999 feet but (Range 12.5 to 30 degrees.)
less than the altitude on the
line below.)
NAV OPT 1/1
ac roll str
DISABLED STORE®
STEERING LIMITS
20000 ft 27.0
32000 ft 15.0
a/c type
FIXED WING RETURN®
7

(Range 1 to 60,000 feet but
(Range 12.5 to 30 degrees.)
the line above.)
8
Push A/C TYPE [5L].
item number:
1 FIXED WING
2 HELICOPTER
Page 498.103
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
Q. Tune Options Configuration
FMS CONFIG 1/2

fms options
1
ALL DIGITAL STORE® Push RETURN [5R] on the
¬PERF NAV®
¬VNAV TUNE®
3
Push # COMS [1L].
then push [ENTER].
TUNE OPT 1/1
4
Push # NAVS [2L].
# coms
2 STORE®
# navs
then push [ENTER].
2
# adfs
2
5 Push # ADFS [3L].

# atc
1
then push [ENTER].
RETURN®
6 Push # ATC [4L].

then push [ENTER].
Page 498.104
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
R. Crossfill Options Configuration

Then push [NEXT] to show the
second FMS Configuration page. ¬XFILL STORE®
strut sw
¬CABIN DISP ANALOG
flight log
2 Push XFILL [1L] to show the ENABLED

Crossfill Options page. max stby time
2 hours
plt db @ pwrup
RETAINED RETURN®
7 Push XFILL MODE [3R].

3 Push MASTER [1L].

item number:
1 PUSH
item number:
2 PULL
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
XFILL OPT 1/1

master
4 Push INIT [2L]. ENABLED STORE®

Fill in the appropriate init
item number:
ENABLED
1 ENABLED
fuel xfill mode
2 DISABLED
ENABLED PUSH
FPL tune presets
ENABLED DISABLED
5 Push FUEL [3L].

item number:
RETURN®
8
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED

item number:
Page 498.105
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
FMS CONFIG 2/2

show the second FMS
¬XFILL STORE®
strut sw
Configuration page. ¬CABIN DISP ANALOG
flight log
ENABLED
2
Push CABIN DISP [2L]. max stby time
2 hours
plt db @ pwrup
RETAINED RETURN®
4
If Cabin Display is enabled, then
3
item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
Configuration.
CABIN DISP 1/1
5
Push MESSAGE 1 [2L]. cabin disp
DISABLED STORE®
6
Push MESSAGE 1 [1L].
item number:
2 DISABLED

message, then push
MESSAGE TITLE [2L].
MESSAGE 1
message 1
1/1
Fill in the title of ENABLED STORE®

then push [ENTER].
RETURN®

the message (in seconds)
and then push [ENTER]. 9 Push RETURN [5R] to show the Cabin
Display page.
Page 498.106
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
T. Pilot Data, Flight Plan and Log, and Strut Switch Configuration
1
4
Push STRUT SW [2R].
show the second FMS Fill in the appropriate
Configuration page. item number:
1 ANALOG
2 DIGITAL
2 Push MAX STBY TIME [4L]. and then push [ENTER].

item number:
NOTE: The Strut Switch DIGITAL
1 DISABLED
option (used for Primus
2 2 HOURS
1000 type EFIS) is not
3 4 HOURS
available until both an
4 6 HOURS
IC600 LXX and an IC600
5 8 HOURS
RXX input bus options
are first configured.
FMS CONFIG 2/2
¬XFILL STORE®
strut sw
¬CABIN DISP ANALOG
flight log
ENABLED
max stby time
2 hours
plt db @ pwrup
RETAINED RETURN®
3 Push PLT DB @ PWRUP [5L].

item number:
5
Push FLIGHT LOG [3R].
item number:
1 RETAINED 1 ENABLED
2 CLEARED 2 DISABLED
and then push [ENTER]. and then push [ENTER].
Page 498.107
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
U. Discrete Configuration
CONFIG 1/2
1
Strut Switch page and STORE®
again on the FMS
Configuration page to show ¬FMS CONFIG
page. ¬DISCRETES ANALOG®
¬ARINC AIR DATA®
2 Push DISCRETES [3L] to

page.
¬CSDB RETURN®
DISC OPT 1/1

the eleven dicsrete
STORE®
inputs. ¬DISCRETE IN
¬DISCRETE OUT
4
Push DISCRETE OUT [3L].
RETURN®
5
NOTE: Refer to the individual procedure When you have verified or
diagrams provided below for the configured all Discrete
discrete input and output Inputs and Outputs, push
configuration procedures.
Page 498.108
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
1
disc in 3 disc in 7
2
disc in 5
Ground / Open type.
DISC IN 2/2
NONE STORE CONF®
3
page. NONE

RETURN®
4
6
5
you want to change.
Page 498.109
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
wiring.
discrete output.
DISC OUT 1/2
NONE STORE CONF®
WPT ANN NONE
SXTK ANN NONE
APPR ANN NONE
disc out 5
HDG ANN RETURN®


change.
DISC OUT 2/2

STORE CONF®
dis out 9 28v
FMS VAL
4
then push [ENTER].
RETURN®

you want to change.
6
Page 498.110
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
V. ARINC Configuration
1

ARINC OPT 1/1
inputs.
¬RECEIVE STORE®
3
show the first ARINC ¬TRANSMIT
Transmit page. Then
the ARINC Transmit
outputs.
RETURN®
4
Push 561 TRANSMIT [3L] to


Page 498.111
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
1

ARINC RCV 1/1

port 0
LS GPS1 B1 STORE®
port 1 port 5
NO SENSOR 429 ADC
port 2 port 6
port 3 port 7
429 DME CROSSFILL 1
port 4
429 OSS 1 RETURN®

ARINC Options page.
Page 498.112
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X

want to change. Fill in NOTE: ARINC Transmit ports 4, 5, 6 and 7 will
the appropriate item be displayed only if the UNS-1B is
number and then push equipped with two ARINC boards.
[ENTER].
ARINC XMIT 1/1

port 0
NONE STORE®
port ¡ port
429 XFILL NONE
port port §
429 LS NONE
port £ port ¶
429 HS NONE
port ¢
NONE RETURN®
2
3
remaining ARINC Outputs When you have verified or
you want to change. configured all ARINC Outputs,
ARINC Options page.
1
Push 561 BUS [1L].
item number:
1 LRN DATA
2 DIST ONLY
561 bus
LRN DATA STORE®
dtg format
2
item number:
1 ARINC 561
2 ARINC 568
RETURN®
3
Page 498.113
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
W. CSDB Options Configuration
1

CSDB OPT 1/1
rcvr 1
NO SENSOR STORE®
3
rcvr 3 xmitter 2
NO SENSOR NONE
rcvr 4
NO SENSOR
RETURN®

rcvr 1
CSDB OPT 1/1 4 Push XMITTER 1 [2R].
VOR STORE® Options list) and then push
NO SENSOR NONE
rcvr 3 xmitter 2
5
MFD
RETURN®

Page 498.114
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
X. Analog Options Configuration
1 On the first
Configuration page, push
ANALOG [2R] to show the
7 Push DESIRED TRK [2R].
item number:
8 Push RELATIVE TO [3R].
item number:
2 SYNCHRO 2 NORTH

item number:
1 DRIFT ANGLE
2 WPT BRG
ANALOG OPT 1/1

wpt brg sig
3
Push WPT BRG FMT [2L]. DRIFT ANGLE STORE®
Fill in the appropriate wpt brg fmt desired trk
item number: SYNCHRO SYNCHRO
1 NONE
offset relative to
2 SYNCHRO
+180 NOSE
3 RESOLVER
NOSE NONE
pitch cmd
DHC RETURN®
4 Push OFFSET [3L].

Fill in the
appropriate item
number:
bk
Push RETURN [5R] to show the
1 +180
2 +0
9

item number:
item number:
item number:
1 NONE
1 NOSE 1 NONE 2 HDG ONLY
2 NORTH 2 DHC 3 HDG+PIT+ROL
Page 498.115
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
Y. ASCB Option Configuration
1
page, push ASCB [3R] to ASCB OPT 1/1
show the ASCB Options page.
STORE ®
wt trigger

item number:
RETURN®
3
4
push [ENTER].
Page 498.116
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
Z. Air Data Configuration
INPUTS.
be blank.
1
2
item number:
1 BARO ALT
use BOTH if you ENABLED the
2 PRESS ALT
3 BOTH
3
2 TAS AND IAS
AIR DATA 1/ 1
4
Push MINIMUM TAS [3L]. alt display
Fill in the minimum BOTH STORE®
5
1 NONE
2 DIGITAL
7
6 Push MACH FORMAT [5L]. page.

item number:
1 NONE
2 DIGITAL
Page 498.117
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 602.X
AA. Store Final Configuration
1
2 Push SCN [1L].

Type up to six letters, numbers, or decimal
points to identify the software version that
Module updates
(dates and time)
the installation is designed and/or approved show when the
for. last four updates
(Use [±] to enter a decimal point and "X" as a occurred.
"wild-card" character, e.g., 602.X)
NOTE: If blinking of the display hides the cursor after

pushing [1L], type the SCN and then push [ENTER].
The Wildcard "X" may be used in any of the six characters

in this field. A SOFTWARE CONFIG MISMATCH message is
generated when the loaded version of software does not
match the SCN stored in the configuration module. The
"X" matches any character.
Recommend you use the "X" after the decimal point.
CONFIG 2/2
scn ver rev
602.0 001 001 STORE®
date utc
10-apr-97 23:04
3
Type the Aircraft
4
characters including spaces. Push STORE [1R] twice to
NOTE: The first time you push STORE® [1R] to save the new configuration,
the field will be highlighted. When you push STORE® [1R] again,
the system will reset itself and initiate power on self tests.
Page 498.118
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
Date:
Company Address:
A/C Manufacturer:
A/C Model No.:
A/C Serial No.:
(1) NCU Hardware

(Not configurable)
All Digital
Digital and Analog Interfaces with Hi-Level Deviation Output
Digital and Analog Interfaces including 565 Analog Air Data
Digital and Analog Interfaces including 565 Analog Air Data with Hi-Level
Deviation Output
Internal GPS
(2) NCU Software:
Page 498.119
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
B. Display Options – Colors
STANDARD
SCDU
PRIMUS 1000
PL 4 4000
PL 4 800
NOTE: Empty weight must be entered in lbs. or kgs. as selected under DISPLAY UNITS
below.
NUMBER OF
ENGINES (Maximum of 4)

AIRCRAFT # ENG
ATR-42 2 0 1212 0.000 5.000 50

ATR-72 2 0 1212 0.000 5.000 50
BOEING 737-300 2 0 12000 0.173 4.827 350
BAe ATP 2 0 1500 0.000 5.000 50
BAe-125-800 2 0 2800 0.000 5.000 100
BEECH KA-300/350/1900 2 0 750 0.000 5.000 60
BEECH KA-90, KA-200 2 0 600 0.200 10.200 20
BEECHJET 2 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75
BK-117 2H 0 500 0.000 5.000 25
BOEING 707 4 0 17700 1.000 11.000 500
CITATION II 2 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75
Page 498.120
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X

AIRCRAFT # ENG
CITATION V 2 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75

CL600 2 0 3500 0.000 5.000 65
CL601 2 0 4500 0.000 5.000 65
DASH 8 2 0 1200 0.000 5.000 75
DO-228 2 0 500 0.000 5.000 60
FALCON 10 2 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75
FALCON 20/TFE-371 2 0 3000 0.000 5.000 80
FALCON 50 3 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75
GULFSTREAM II 2 0 8000 0.000 5.000 80
GULFSTREAM III 2 0 10000 0.000 5.000 160
HS-125 2 0 2200 0.000 5.000 100
IAI ASTRA 1125 2 0 2200 1.000 5.400 70
IAI WESTWIND 1124 2 0 2200 0.000 5.000 100
JETSTAR II 4 0 2500 1.000 11.000 75
LEARJET 2 0 3000 0.000 10.000 55
LOCKHEED L1011 3 0 20000 0.000 5.000 400
MERLIN 2 0 600 0.000 5.000 25
OPV 1 0 150 0.000 5.000 1
PARTENAVIA 2 0 644 0.000 5.000 60
PUMA 2H 0 600 0.000 10.000 75
S-76A 2H 0 500 0.000 5.000 25
S-76B 2H 0 800 0.000 5.000 60
SABRE 65 2 0 4000 1.000 9.000 100

AIRCRAFT # ENG FF
FALCON 20 2 0 4000 0.000 5.000 75
GULFSTREAM II 2 0 12000 0.000 5.000 180
MDC DC-8 4 0 7800 0.000 5.000 150
MDC DC-8 4 0 12000 0.000 5.000 250
Page 498.121
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
PULSE
EDGE

PULSE
POLARITY

LEARJET 45 2 45 PPH
F2000 2 160 PPH
Page 498.122
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X

worksheet.
NOTE: Minimum fuel flow values must be entered in pounds per hour regardless of display units.

worksheet.

worksheet.

worksheet.

worksheet.
NOTE: Minimum fuel flow values must be entered in pounds per hour regardless of display
units.
Page 498.123
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
(6) APU Fuel Flow Options

FUEL FLOW 1 Lbs
FUEL FLOW 2 Lbs
FUEL FLOW 3 Lbs
FUEL FLOW 4 Lbs
APU SOURCE NONE MANUAL DIGITAL
CLIMB GRAD FT/NM
PERF DATABASE
ID
NOTE: Refer to the Advanced Performance Option Information table that follows:
Page 498.124
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X

Kit #
Supp. #
A12500/A12500-1 (CL600–2A12) (Rev 26)
/A12500-2 43,100 lbs. MTOW
2421CL6013A (W/SB 601–0238)
A12501/A12501-1 (CL600–2A12) (Rev 24)
/A12501-2 44,600 or 45,100 lbs. MTOW
2421CL6013A (W/SB 601–0238)
A12502/A12502-1 (CL600-2B16) (Rev 30)
/A12502-2 44,600 or 45,100 lbs. MTOW
2421CL6013A
A12520/A12520-1 23,100 lbs. MTOW
/A12520-2
2421LR60-405
A12521/A12521-1 23,500 lbs. MTOW
/A12521-2
2421LR60
/A12522-2 23,500 lbs. MTOW W1418
P12523 Learjet 60 (60-049 and PW305A FM-123-25 A12523 LEAR60240901A12523
A12523/A12523-1 subsequent and prior w/SB (FAA Approved
/A12523-2 60-8-1) 1-15-93, U.S.
2421LR60-25 23,500 lbs. MTOW Units)
(SCN 603.1and later)
A12540/A12540-1 35,800 or 36,500 lbs. MTOW
/A12540-2
2421F2000
A12550/A12550-1 24,650 lbs. MTOW 200G
/A12550-2 20,700 lbs. MLdgW
2421SPX
Page 498.125
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
E. VNAV Options
DIGITAL – 429/571/ASCB
VDEV ENRT+APPR ENRT ONLY
APPR ONLY DISABLED
PITCH ENRT+APPR ENRT ONLY
APPR ONLY DISABLED
VERT SPD ENRT+APPR ENRT ONLY
APPR ONLY DISABLED
ANALOG
APPR ONLY DISABLED
APPR ONLY DISABLED
Page 498.126
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
F. Approach Options
(1) APPR OPT 1/1
ROLL STEERING GAINS

GPS ENABLED DISABLED ADVISORY
NDB ENABLED DISABLED ADVISORY
VOR ENABLED DISABLED ADVISORY
RNV ENABLED DISABLED ADVISORY
VFR ENABLED DISABLED ADVISORY
ILS ENABLED DISABLED ADVISORY
LOC ENABLED DISABLED ADVISORY
BC ENABLED DISABLED ADVISORY
GLS ENABLED DISABLED ADVISORY
configurable.
NOTE: GPS, NDB, VOR, RNV, VFR, and GLS are not configurable on the APPROACH
TYPES pages. These items will show ENABLED, DISABLED or ADVISORY based
on sensor selections on other pages.
Page 498.127
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
G. EFIS Options
NOTE: For MD-87 aircraft, select 429 DHC.

CHP SINGLE N/A
MLS SINGLE DUAL N/A
Page 498.128
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X

(1) Function

SYMBOL Bug Line

SYMBOL Bug Line

SYMBOL Bug Line

SYMBOL Bug Line

SYMBOL Bug Line
Page 498.129
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
J. NAV Options
HEADING SELECT ENRT+APPR ENRT ONLY NONE
K. Tune Options
aircraft.
# COMS 0 1 2 3
# NAVS 0 1 2
# ADFS 0 1 2
# ATC 0 1

NOTE: If MASTER is ENABLED, then INIT, FUEL and FLIGHT PLAN will be enabled automatically.
Page 498.130
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
Message 1 Title
Message 2 Title
Message 3 Title
Message 4 Title
Message 5 Title
Message 6 Title
POSITION ESTIMATE Q ANP/RNP
DISPLAY
6 HOURS 8 HOURS
NOTE: The Flight log function requires that the Fuel option be configured.
Page 498.131
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
O. Discrete Options
(1) Discrete In
on others.
APU Running
ENG 1 Running
ENG 2 Running
ENG 3 Running
ENG 4 Running
Parking Brake
Rotors Turning
Page 498.132
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
28 V/Open
28 V/Open
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
all unused inputs.
6G 6H 6J 15J 11G 11H 15K 6A 6E 6F 6B
NONE
APU Running
ATC1 Select
DHC VNAV ARM
DHC VNAV Coupled
Door
Engine 1 Running
Engine 2 Running
Engine 3 Running
Engine 4 Running
Go Around
Mark On Target (MMMS Only)
Parking Brake Set
Rotors Turning
Sperry VNAV Capture
Strut
Test
NOTE: 1. When using SCN 60X/70X Discrete In #5 can be configured as either a 28V/Open type Discrete on MP11H or
as a GND/Open type discrete on MP11G, but not both.
Page 498.133
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
(2) Discrete Out
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
28 V/Open
unused inputs.
1 13B 3C 13D 13E 7A 7B 6C 13F
NONE
DHC Arm Annunciator
Doppler Mode
Doppler Sea State
Doppler Self Test
FMS Valid
GPS Integrity
Sperry VNAV Flag
Page 498.134
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
P. ARINC Options
Receive Port # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Pin Numbers (A/B)
UNS-1F/UNS-1D+
NO SENSOR
429 ADC
575 ADC
AFIS
429 AHRS 1
429 AHRS 2
CROSSFILL 1
CROSSFILL 2
429 DME
709 DME
DOPPLER 91
DOPPLER 137
DOPPLER 2012
HS GLS 1
HS GLS 2
HS GNSS 1
HS GNSS 2
HS GNSS 3
HS GPS 1
HS GPS 2
HS GPS 3
Page 498.135
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
Receive Port # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Pin Numbers (A/B)
UNS-1F/UNS-1D+
LS GPS 1
LS GPS 2
LS GPS 3
C-IV GPIRS 1
C-IV GPIRS 2
C-IV GPIRS 3
IC600 L-01
IC600 L-02
IC600 L-03
IC600 L-04
IC600 R-01
IC600 R-02
IC600 R-03
IC600 R-04
429 IRGPS 1
429 IRGPS 2
429 IRGPS 3
HS429 IRS 1
HS429 IRS 2
HS429 IRS 3
LS429 IRS 1
LS429 IRS 2
LS429 IRS 3
571 IRS 1
571 IRS 2
571 IRS 3
KFC FGS
LCS
P4-L AUX
P4-R AUX
Page 498.136
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
Receive Port # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
MP MP MP MP MP MP MP MP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP
Pin Numbers (A/B)
4C 4G 12C 12G 8A 8C 8E 8G 13C 13G 13J 14A 14E 14G 15A 15E
UNS-1F/UNS-1D+
4D 4H 12D 12H 8B 8D 8F 8H 13D 13H 13K 14B 14F 14H 15B 15F
429 RADAR
571 RADAR
RADAR 1500
RRS-T
UNILINK
429 VOR BRG
429 VOR RAD
711 VOR
NOTES: 1. B1 indicates TSO C-129 Class B1 GPS. This Class 1 GPS is required for GPS approach operation. GPS-
1000, GPS-1200 and UNS 764-2 are certified B1. The absence of B1 indicates non-TSO C-129 Class B1
GPS. These inputs may not be used for GPS approach mode. GPS-950 and UNS 764 are not certified B1.
P4-01 MAP output bus.
SPX Collins Pro Line 4 EFD-4077. In this installation, the P4-05 Onside or P4-06 Onside and the P4-05
Offside or the P4-06 Offside IOC input buses are configured with the P4-03 IOC output bus and the P4-02
MAP A and P4-02 MAP B output bus.
Page 498.137
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
ARINC Transmit Port
# 0A / 0B 1 2A / 2B 3 4A / 4B 5 6A / 6B 7
(NOTE 4)
4A 12A 4E 4J 12J 12E 1A 5A 1E 1J 5J 5E
4B 12B 4F 4K 12K 12F 1B 5B 1F 1K 5K 5F
NONE
429 LS
429 HS
LS 429 MOD 1
(MD-80)
571 LRN
429 XFILL
429 TUNE
IC600-01
P4-01 IOC (Note 1)
P4-02 IOC (Note 2)
P4-03 IOC (Note 3)
P4-01 MAP (Note 4)
WBURG TEST
GLS TUNE
NOTES: 1. For the standard Learjet 60 Collins Pro Line 4 EFD-871, select the P4-01 MAP output bus and either
P4-01 IOC or the P4-02 IOC output buses.
2. For the FIAS Collins Pro Line 4 EFD-871, select the P4-01 IOC output bus and the P4-01 MAP output
bus.
3. For the F2000 and the Astra SPX Collins Pro Line 4 EFD-EFD-871, select the P4-03 IOC output bus
and the P4-02 MAP A and P4-02 MAP B Output buses.
Page 498.138
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X

561 BUS LRN DATA DIST ONLY
DTG FORMAT ARINC 561 ARINC 568 561E/568A
R. CSDB Options
NO SENSOR
RTU
SINGLE DME
DUAL DME
DME DIRECT
VOR
MFD
ERP
NONE
TUNE
RTU TUNE
AUX VNAV
NOTES: If an RTU is installed, the appropriate receive and transmit ports should be
Pro Line 4, 4000 series installations such as the F2000 and Astra SPX, must
have the CSDB options configured as follows: RX1, RX2, RX3 and RX4 = NO
SENSOR, TX1 and TX2 = NONE
S. Analog Options
RELATIVE TO NORTH NOSE
T. ASCB Options
TRIGGER WT LBS.
Page 498.139
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
U. Air Data Options
not possible.
their entry field dashed or not be selectable by the operator.
NOTE: Pro Line 4, 4000 Series installations such as the F2000 and Astra SPX, must have
air data options configured as follows: ALT DISPLAY = BOTH; A/S DISPLAY =
TAS AND IAS; MINIMUM TAS = 60 KTS; SAT FORMAT = DIGITAL; MACH
FORMAT = DIGITAL. BARO ALT FORMAT, PRES ALT FORMAT and A/S
FORMAT default to DIGITAL and are not configurable.
SAT FORMAT NONE DIGITAL 565 DC
BARO ALT NONE 565 SYNCHRO DC/RESOLVER DIGITAL
FORMAT
SCN ________________________________
AIRCRAFT ID _____________________________________________________________
Page 498.140
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
A. Starting the FMS
UNS - 1B
CPU PASS
RAM PASS
DATABASE PASS
CONFIG MODULE
AUXILIARY
ARINC
ANALOG
manual.
Page 498.141
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
1 Push [5L] to intialize

the UNS-1B. The 2 Push [MSG] to display the
message(s). Push [MSG] or
RETURN [5L] to return to
Position, date, and
time do not matter. the Initialization Page.
POS INIT 1/1 ÂMSG

date
initial pos 19-JUN-98
id ----- utc
N 32 07.9 14:49
W 110 55.4
perf db A12500
3 Push [1R] to highlight

the DATE field. Push
[4], [5], [6], [7], [8],
[9], and then push [ENTER].
Page 498.142
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
1 Push [DATA] to
show the DATA
1/4 page.
DATA 1/4
¬PERF
¬DISK MSTR XFILL®
¬HOLD POS MAINT®

MAINT 1/1
3
Push CONFIG [1L] to
show the First
¬STATIC TEST
¬DYNAMIC TEST
¬S/W VERS RETURN®

CONFIG 1/2
4
Push DISPLAY [1L]
Configuration page.
¬DISCRETES
¬ARINC AIR DATA®
¬CSDB RETURN®
Page 498.143
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X

DISPLAY CONFIG
display type
1 STANDARD
2 SCDU
5 PL 4 800
RETURN®
2
Push RETURN [5R] to
page.
NOTE: While the Option List is showing, you must push [MENU]
to show a Sample Menu of available color options.
To show a sample page, push the LSK adjacent to the item.
Page 498.144
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
1
FMS CONFIG 1/3

The FMS shows its fms options
basic hardware class. STANDARD STORE®
¬FUEL EFIS®
2
¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®

item number:
9
2 DISABLED
4
empty weight
5
Fill in 1, 2, 3, or 4, 2 APU®
LBS
fuel flow type
DIGITAL RETURN®
6
item number:
OPT LIST 1/1

select
#-
8
4 pulse freq
5 pulse width
6 digital
RETURN®
Page 498.145
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
1 Push INPUT RANGE [1L].

item number:
2 Fill in the LOWER and UPPER
FLOW RATES and VOLTAGES with
the appropriate values for
FF SCALING 1/1
input range
0-8 VDC STORE®
3
Push MIN FF [5L].
0 pph 1212
min ff
50 pph RETURN®
4 Push RETURN [5R].
2
1
Push INPUT RANGE [1L]. UPPER FLOW RATES [2L] [2R]
FF SCALING 1/1
input range
3
Push MIN FF [5L]. 0-5 VRMS STORE®
Fill in the rate for lower FLOW RATE upper
your aircraft and 0 pph 4000
then push [ENTER]. lower VOLTAGE upper
O.OOO vrms 5.000
min ff
75 pph RETURN®
4
Push RETURN [5R].
Page 498.146
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
1
Push SCALING [2L].
Fill in the scaling
then push [ENTER].
FF SCALING 1/1
STORE®
scaling

item number: RISING
1 RISING
2 FALLING
75 pph RETURN®
3 4

Fill in the scaling
for your aircraft
FF SCALING 1/1
STORE®
scaling
40.000 pph/msec
pulse polarity
2
item number:
1 POSITIVE min ff
4
Push RETURN [5R].
3
Push MIN FF [5L].
then push [ENTER].
Page 498.147
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
FF SCALING 1/1
STORE®
1
Push MIN FF [5L].
Fill in the minimum
fuel flow rate for
your aircraft and
then push [ENTER].
min ff
45 pph RETURN®
2
Push RETURN [5R].
I. APU Fuel Flow Configuration
FUEL OPT 1/1

fuel mode
ENABLED STORE® 1 Push APU [3R] to show
the APU Options page.
empty weight
# of engines
2 APU®
display units
LBS
3
fuel flow type Push APU SOURCE [2R].
DIGITAL RETURN® Fill in the appropriate
item number:
1 NONE
NOTE: If your aircraft is 2 MANUAL
an Embraer-145, then 3 DIGITAL
perform step 2; if not and then push [ENTER].
perform step 3.
APU OPT 1/1
2
Push FUEL FLOW1 [1L] to fuel flow¡
highlight the data entry 0 lbs STORE®
field for APU #1. fuel flow apu source
Fill in the fuel flow rate
0 lbs NONE
fuel flow£
0 lbs
fuel flow¢
NOTE: After entering a fuel 0 lbs
flow, the cursor
advances to the next RETURN®
APU Fuel Flow Rate.
After entering all
the appropriate APU
4
fuel flows, perform Push RETURN [5R].
step 3.
Page 498.148
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
J. Performance Options Configuration

FMS CONFIG 1/2
2
Push PERF [3L].
fms options
ALL DIGITAL STORE®
¬FUEL EFIS®
¬PERF NAV®
3
item number:
¬APPR RETURN®
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
PERF OPT 1/1
basic
4
1 ENABLED advanced
climb grad
5
Push ADVANCED [3L]. 500 ft/nm RETURN®
item number:
6
1 ENABLED Push CLIMB GRAD [5L].
2 DISABLED Enter the normal nominal
and then push [ENTER]. climb gradient for your
then push [ENTER].

PERF DB [3R].
PERF DB 1/1
STORE®
8 Push PERFORMANCE DATABASE

appropriate database
identification for your performance database id
aircraft and then push CL602190193A12501
[ENTER].
RETURN®
Page 498.149
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
K. VNAV Options Configuration
FMS CONFIG 1/2

fms options
ALL DIGITAL STORE®
Configuration page.
¬PERF NAV®
¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®
2 Push VNAV [4L].

item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED

vnav mode
ENABLED STORE®

item number:
fpa limit
7.5Ø
temp comp
DISABLED
1 ENABLED vdev stow
2 DISABLED DISABLED
NORMAL RETURN®

item number:
7
Push TEMP COMP [3R].
item number:
1 NORMAL 1 ENABLED
2 VN-212 2 DISABLED
and then press [ENTER]. and then push [ENTER].
See note.

Page 498.150
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
K. VNAV Options Configuration (Continued)

second VNAV Option page.
VNAV OPT 2/2
STORE®
9
Push VDEV [3L]. ¢ª÷¶¡÷ascb analog
Fill in the appropriate vdev vdev
item number: ENRT+APPR ENRT+APPR
1 ENRT+APPR pitch pitch
2 ENRT ONLY ENRT+APPR ENRT+APPR
3 APPR ONLY vert spd
4 DISABLED
ENRT+APPR RETURN®
bk Repeat Step 9 for each of

the remaining options:
[4L] PITCH
[5L] VERT SPD
[3R] VDEV
[4R] PITCH
Page 498.151
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
FMS CONFIG 1/2

fms options

ALL DIGITAL STORE®
¬FUEL EFIS®
¬PERF NAV®
2 Push APPR [5L].

¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®
3
Push APR MODE [1L].
item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
APPR OPT 1/1
appr mode
4
9.0Ø
5
item number:
6
Page 498.152
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
APPR OPT 1/1

appr mode
ENABLED STORE®
remote tune
ENABLED
remote arm
ENABLED
roll gains
3x


Page 498.153
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
M. Approach Types Configuration
GPS, NDB, VOR, RNV, VFR, and
1
GLS will show ENABLED, DISABLED or Push ILS [2R].
ADVISORY based on sensor selections Fill in the appropriate
on other pages. item number:
1 ENABLED
2 ADVISORY
APPR TYPES 1/2
gps
ENABLED STORE®
ndb ils
ENABLED ADVISORY
vor loc
ENABLED ADVISORY
rnv bc
DISABLED ADVISORY
vfr
ENABLED RETURN®
NOTE: Push [NEXT] to show

2 Repeat Step 1 for
the second page.
APPR TYPES 2/2
STORE®
gls
ADVISORY 3 Push RETURN [5R] to
show the Approach
Options page.
RETURN®
Page 498.154
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
1
FMS CONFIG 1/2

fms options
STANDARD STORE®
2 Push EFIS [2R].
¬FUEL EFIS®
¬PERF NAV®
¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®
3
Push TYPE [1L].
1 429 ADV (See note.) type
2 429 GAMA 429 DHC STORE®
3 EDZ 705
4 429 DHC

compatible before
4
Page 498.155
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
O. Pro Line 4 Configuration
1 Push CHP [1L].

2 N/A
Push [ENTER].
6 Push TCAS [2R].

7 Push MLS [3R].

1 SINGLE 1 SINGLE
item number:
2 DUAL 2 DUAL
1 RTA-844
3 N/A 3 N/A
2 RTA-854
3 N/A
Push [ENTER].

item number: chp
MAGNETIC DUAL
adf diag rad alt
N/A SINGLE

fuel max
8191 LBS RETURN®
item number:
1 SINGLE
2 DUAL
3 N/A
item number:
Push [ENTER].
1 SINGLE
2 DUAL
3 N/A

item number:
Push [ENTER].
1 N/A
2 8191 LBS
3 65535 LBS
Push [ENTER].
page.

Page 498.156
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
P. Performance Display Configuration
1
PL-4 Options page to show type
the EFIS Options page. 429 DHC STORE®
¬PL-4 OPTS
3
item number:
2 DISABLED
and then push [ENTER]. STORE®
perf efis disp
DISABLED V TGT®
4
line select keys:
V1 [3L] ¬V1 V REF®
VR [4L]
V2 [5L] ¬VR
V TGT [2R]
and then perform
Steps 5, 6, and 7.
5
item number:
1 BLACK
2 BLUE
3 GREEN
4 CYAN V1 OPT
5 RED
6 MAGENTA STORE®
1 WHITE
manual color
BLACK
symbol

7
Push SYMBOL [4L].
item number:
1 BUG
8 Push RETURN [5R] on the Option page
Display Options.
2 LINE
Page 498.157
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
Q. NAV Options Configuration
FMS CONFIG 1/2
1
fms options Push RETURN [5R] on each
ALL DIGITAL STORE®
¬FUEL EFIS®
2
¬PERF NAV® Push NAV [3R].
¬VNAV TUNE®
5
¬APPR RETURN® Push HDG SEL [2R].
item number:
1 ENRT + APPR
3 Push A/C TYPE [1L].

item number:
2 ENRT ONLY
3 NONE
1 FIXED WING
2 HELICOPTER
NOTE: We recommend that you select
NONE unless your installation
provides interactive heading
mode for approach.

item number:
1 ENABLED NAV OPT 1/1
2 DISABLED a÷c type
and then push [ENTER]. FIXED WING STORE®
ac roll str hdg sel
ENABLED ENRT+APPR
6
Push AT OR BELOW [3L]. 20000 ft 27.0
Fill in the desired at or above bank limit
altitude (Range = 1,500 32000 ft 15.0
to 64,000 feet but less
than the altitude on
RETURN®
the line below) and
then push [ENTER].
7

Fill in the desired
altitude (Range = 1,500
the AT OR BELOW altitude
(Range = 12.5 to 30 degrees)
to 64,000 feet but
greater than the
altitude on the line
above) and then push
[ENTER]. 9 Push BANK LIMIT [4R].
the AT OR ABOVE altitude
Page 498.158
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
R. Tune Options Configuration
FMS CONFIG 1/2

fms options
1
¬PERF NAV®
¬VNAV TUNE®
3
Push # COMS [1L].
then push [ENTER].
TUNE OPT 1/1
4
Push # NAVS [2L].
# coms
2 STORE®
# navs
then push [ENTER].
2
# adfs
2
5 Push # ADFS [3L].

# atc
1
then push [ENTER].
RETURN®
6 Push # ATC [4L].

then push [ENTER].
Page 498.159
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
S. Crossfill Options Configuration

Configuration page. ¬XFILL
FMS CONFIG 2/2
STORE®
Then push [NEXT] to show the strut sw
second FMS Configuration page.
¬CABIN DISP ANALOG
pos est disp flight log
Q ENABLED
max stby time
2 hours

plt db @ pwrup
RETAINED RETURN®
7
Push XFILL MODE [3R].
3 Push MASTER [1L].

item number:
item number:
1 PUSH
2 PULL
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
XFILL OPT 1/1

master
4
Push INIT [2L]. ENABLED STORE®
item number:
ENABLED
1 ENABLED
fuel xfill mode
2 DISABLED
ENABLED PUSH
FPL tune presets
ENABLED DISABLED
5 Push FUEL [3L].

item number:
RETURN®
8
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED

item number:
Page 498.160
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
T. Cabin Display Configuration
FMS CONFIG 2/2
1
XFILL Options page to ¬XFILL STORE®
show the second FMS strut sw
Configuration page. ¬CABIN DISP ANALOG
pos est disp flight log
Q ENABLED
2
Push CABIN DISP [2L]. max stby time
2 hours
plt db @ pwrup
RETAINED RETURN®

item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
Configuration.
CABIN DISP 1/1
5
DISABLED STORE®
6
item number:
2 DISABLED
7
If you enabled this
MESSAGE 1 1/1
message, then push
MESSAGE TITLE [2L]. message 1
then push [ENTER].
RETURN®

the message (in seconds)
and then push [ENTER]. 9 Push RETURN [5R] to show the Cabin
Display page.
Page 498.161
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
U. Pilot Data, Flight Plan and Log, and Strut Switch Configuration

TAWS page to show the
second FMS Configuration
item number:
page. Push NEXT to display 1 ANALOG
FMS CONFIG 2/2. 2 DIGITAL
2 Push POS EST DISP [3L].

item number:
option (used for Primus
100 type EFIS) is not
1 Q available until both
2 ANP/RNP an IC600 L-XX and an IC600
and then push [ENTER]. R-XX input bus options are
first configured.
FMS CONFIG 2/2
3 Push
Fill
item
MAX STBY TIME [4L].
in the appropriate
number:
¬XFILL
¬CABIN DISP
STORE®
strut sw
ANALOG
1 DISABLED pos est disp flight log
Q ENABLED
2 2 HOURS max stby time
3 4 HOURS 2 HOURS
4 6 HOURS plt db @ pwrup
5 8 HOURS RETAINED RETURN®
4 Fill
Push PLT DB @ PWRUP [5L].
item
in the appropriate
number: 6 Push
Fill
item
FLIGHT LOG [3R].
in the appropriate
number:
1 RETAINED
2 CLEARED 1 ENABLED
and then push [ENTER]. 2 DISABLED
Page 498.162
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
V. Discrete Configuration
CONFIG 1/2

FMS CONFIG 3/3 page to
show the first
¬DISPLAY STORE®
Configuration page. ¬FMS CONFIG ANALOG®
¬DISCRETES
¬ARINC AIR DATA®
2
Push DISCRETES [3L] to
show the Discrete Options ¬CSDB RETURN®
page.
DISC OPT 1/1

the eleven dicsrete
STORE®
¬DISCRETE OUT
4
RETURN®
5
diagrams provided which follow the configured all Discrete
discrete input and output Inputs and Outputs, push
Page 498.163
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
1
disc in 3 disc in 7
2
disc in 5
Ground / Open type.
DISC IN 2/2
NONE STORE CONF®
3
page. NONE

RETURN®
4
6
5
you want to change.
Page 498.164
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
wiring.
discrete output.
DISC OUT 1/2
NONE STORE CONF®
WPT ANN NONE
SXTK ANN NONE
APPR ANN NONE
disc out 5
HDG ANN RETURN®


change.
DISC OUT 2/2

STORE CONF®
dis out 9 28v
FMS VAL
4
then push [ENTER].
RETURN®

you want to change.
6
Page 498.165
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
W. ARINC Options Configuration
1

ARINC OPT 1/1
inputs.
¬RECEIVE STORE®
3
Transmit page. Then
the ARINC Transmit
outputs.
RETURN®



Page 498.166
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
1
2
Repeat Step 1 for all remaining
ARINC RCV 1/1

port 0
LS GPS1 B1 STORE®
port 1 port 5
NO SENSOR 429 ADC
port 2 port 6
port 3 port 7
429 DME CROSSFILL 1
port 4
429 OSS 1 RETURN®
3
ARINC Options page.
Page 498.167
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X

[ENTER].
ARINC XMIT 1/1

port 0
NONE STORE®
port ¡ port
429 XFILL NONE
port port §
429 LS NONE
port £ port ¶
429 HS NONE
port ¢
NONE RETURN®
2
3
remaining ARINC Outputs When you have verified or
you want to change. configured all ARINC Outputs,
ARINC Options page.
1
Push 561 BUS [1L].
item number:
1 LRN DATA
2 DIST ONLY
561 bus
LRN DATA STORE®
dtg format
2
item number:
1 ARINC 561
2 ARINC 568
3 561E/568A
RETURN®
3
Page 498.168
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
X. CSDB Configuration
NOTE: When performing the initial configuration of CSDB options, select
the NO SENSOR option for each receiver and transmitter. This will
allow all possible options to be displayed in the selection list.
Once a receiver or transmitter is selected it will not show up as
an option again.
CSDB OPT 1/1
1 On the first Configuration rcvr 1

page, push CSDB [5L] to NO SENSOR STORE®
rcvr 2 xmitter 1
show the CSDB Option page. RTU RTU TUNE
rcvr 3 xmitter 2
NO SENSOR NONE
rcvr 4
2 Push RCVR 1 [1L]. NO SENSOR
Fill in the appropriate RETURN®

item number
3 Repeat Step 2 for RCVR 2

[2L], RCVR 3 [3L], and
RCVR 4 [4L].
NOTE: If an RTU is installed, the
appropriate receive and
transmit ports should be
configured for RTU and RTU
TUNE respectively. All
other ports should be
configured NO SENSOR and
NONE.
4 Push
Fill
item
XMITTER 1 [2R].
in the appropriate
number and then
push [ENTER].
CSDB OPT 1/1

rcvr 1
VOR STORE®
rcvr 2 xmitter 1
NO SENSOR NONE
5 Repeat step 4
rcvr 3 xmitter 2
SINGLE DME TUNE for XMITTER 2
rcvr 4
[3R].
MFD
RETURN®
CSDB OPT 1/1 without RTU 6 Push RETURN [5R] to show

page.
NOTE: Configure RCVR 4 to NO SENSOR and XMITTER 2 to NONE.
Page 498.169
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
Y. Analog Options Configuration
1 On the first
item number:
item number:
2 SYNCHRO 2 NORTH

item number:
1 DRIFT ANGLE
2 WPT BRG
ANALOG OPT 1/1

wpt brg sig
3
1 NONE
offset relative to
2 SYNCHRO
+180 NOSE
3 RESOLVER
NOSE NONE
pitch cmd
DHC RETURN®
4 Push OFFSET [3L].

Fill in the
appropriate item
number:
bk
1 +180
2 +0
9

item number:
item number:
item number:
1 NONE
Page 498.170
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
Z. ASCB Options Configuration
1 On the first Configuration

page, push ASCB [3R] to
ASCB OPT 1/1
STORE ®
wt trigger

item number:
RETURN®
3
4
push [ENTER].
Page 498.171
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
AA. Air Data Configuration
INPUTS.
be blank.
1
2
Fill in the appropriate NOTE: We recommend use of BARO
item number: ALTITUDE; however, you must
1 BARO ALT use BOTH if you ENABLED the
2 PRESS ALT ADVANCED Performance Option.
3 BOTH
3
item number:
1 TAS
2 TAS AND IAS
AIR DATA 1/1
4
5
1 NONE
2 DIGITAL
3 565 ADC

item number:
1 NONE
2 DIGITAL
Page 498.172
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
AA. Air Data Configuration (Continued)
NOTE: BARO ALT FMT [2R],
7
PRES ALT FMT [3R] and Push BARO ALT FMT [2R]. Select
A/S FORMAT [4R] all the appropriate item number:
default to DIGITAL. 1 NONE
2 DIGITAL
3 565 SYN
4 DC/RES
AIR DATA 1/1 Push [ENTER].
alt display
BOTH STORE®
a/s display baro alt fmt
TAS AND IAS DIGITAL
minimum tas pres alt fmt
8 Push PRES ALT FMT [3R]. Select
the appropriate item number:
1 NONE
60 KTS DIGITAL 2 DIGITAL
Push [ENTER].
NONE DIGITAL
9
mach format Push A/S FORMAT [4R]. Select
NONE RETURN® the appropriate item number:
1 DIGITAL
2 565 DC TAS
bk Push RETURN [5R] to display

CONFIG 1/2 page.
3 20MV IAS
4 11MV IAS
Push [ENTER].
Page 498.173
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 603.X
AB. Store Final Configuration
1
2 Push SCN [1L].

Module updates
(dates and time)


CONFIG 2/2
scn ver rev
603.0 001 001 STORE®
date utc
10-apr-97 23:04
3
Type the Aircraft
4
Page 498.174
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
Date:
Company Address:
A/C Manufacturer:
A/C Model No.:
A/C Serial No.:
(1) NCU Hardware

All Digital
Digital and Analog Interfaces with Hi-Level Deviation Output
Digital and Analog Interfaces including 565 Analog Air Data
Digital and Analog Interfaces including 565 Analog Air Data with Hi-Level
Deviation Output
Internal GPS
(2) NCU Software:
Page 498.175
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
B. Display Options – Colors
STANDARD
SCDU
PRIMUS 1000
PL 4 4000
PL 4 800
NOTE: Empty weight must be entered in lbs. or kgs. as selected under DISPLAY UNITS
below.
ENGINES

AIRCRAFT # ENG
ATR-42 2 0 1212 0.000 5.000 50

ATR-72 2 0 1212 0.000 5.000 50
BOEING 737-300 2 0 12000 0.173 4.827 350
BAe ATP 2 0 1500 0.000 5.000 50
BAe-125-800 2 0 2800 0.000 5.000 100
BEECH KA-300/350/1900 2 0 750 0.000 5.000 60
BEECH KA-90, KA-200 2 0 600 0.200 10.200 20
BEECHJET 2 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75
BK-117 2H 0 500 0.000 5.000 25
BOEING 707 4 0 17700 1.000 11.000 500
CITATION II 2 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75
CITATION V 2 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75
CL600 2 0 3500 0.000 5.000 65
CL601 2 0 4500 0.000 5.000 65
DASH 8 2 0 1200 0.000 5.000 75
Page 498.176
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X

AIRCRAFT # ENG
DO-228 2 0 500 0.000 5.000 60

FALCON 10 2 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75
FALCON 20/TFE-371 2 0 3000 0.000 5.000 80
FALCON 50 3 0 2000 0.000 5.000 75
GULFSTREAM II 2 0 8000 0.000 5.000 80
GULFSTREAM III 2 0 10000 0.000 5.000 160
HS-125 2 0 2200 0.000 5.000 100
IAI ASTRA 1125 2 0 2200 1.000 5.400 70
IAI WESTWIND 1124 2 0 2200 0.000 5.000 100
JETSTAR II 4 0 2500 1.000 11.000 75
LEARJET 2 0 3000 0.000 10.000 55
LOCKHEED L1011 3 0 20000 0.000 5.000 400
MERLIN 2 0 600 0.000 5.000 25
OPV 1 0 150 0.000 5.000 1
PARTENAVIA 2 0 644 0.000 5.000 60
PUMA 2H 0 600 0.000 10.000 75
S-76A 2H 0 500 0.000 5.000 25
S-76B 2H 0 800 0.000 5.000 60
SABRE 65 2 0 4000 1.000 9.000 100

AIRCRAFT # ENG FF
FALCON 20 2 0 4000 0.000 5.000 75
GULFSTREAM II 2 0 12000 0.000 5.000 180
MDC DC-8 4 0 7800 0.000 5.000 150
MDC DC-8 4 0 12000 0.000 5.000 250
Page 498.177
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
PULSE
EDGE

PULSE
POLARITY

LEARJET 45 2 45 PPH
F2000 2 160 PPH
Page 498.178
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
worksheet.
NOTE: Minimum fuel flow values must be entered in pounds per hour regardless of
display units.
worksheet.
display units.

worksheet.
display units.

worksheet.
display units.
Page 498.179
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X

worksheet.
NOTE: Minimum fuel flow values must be entered in pounds per hour regardless of display
units.
(6) APU Fuel Flow Options

FUEL FLOW 1 Lbs
FUEL FLOW 2 Lbs
FUEL FLOW 3 Lbs
FUEL FLOW 4 Lbs
APU SOURCE NONE MANUAL DIGITAL
DISCRETE
Page 498.180
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
CLIMB GRAD FT/NM
NOTE: Refer to your aircraft flight manual for the value of the normal nominal
climb gradient.
PERF DATABASE
ID
NOTE: Refer to the Advance Performance Option Information table that
follows.
Page 498.181
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
Kit #
Supp. #
A12500/A12500-1 (CL600–2A12) (Rev 26)
/A12500-2 43,100 lbs. MTOW
2421CL6013A (W/SB 601–0238)
A12501/A12501-1 (CL600–2A12) (Rev 24)
/A12501-2 44,600 or 45,100 lbs. MTOW
2421CL6013A (W/SB 601–0238)
A12502/A12502-1 (CL600-2B16) (Rev 30)
/A12502-2 44,600 or 45,100 lbs. MTOW
2421CL6013A
A12520/A12520-1 23,100 lbs. MTOW
/A12520-2
2421LR60-405
A12521/A12521-1 23,500 lbs. MTOW
/A12521-2
2421LR60
/A12522-2 23,500 lbs. MTOW W1418
A12540/A12540-1 35,800 or 36,500 lbs. MTOW
/A12540-2
2421F2000
A12550/A12550-1 24,650 lbs. MTOW 200G
/A12550-2 20,700 lbs. MLdgW
2421SPX (SCN 601.4/701.4 and later)
P12562 Learjet 45 TFE 731-20 FM 126 A12562 LEAR45191101A12562
A12562/A12562-1 20,500 lbs. MTOW (Refer to Note) (Chg. 5)
2421LR45-01 (SCN 604.3/704.3 and later)
NOTE: TFE 731-20 engines with -1006 DEEC and/or -1007 DEEC that meets both of the following:
1. Aircraft 45-028 and subsequent or prior aircraft modified by SB 45-00-1.
2. Aircraft 45-028 and 45-055 and subsequent or prior aircraft modified by SB 45-76-1.
Page 498.182
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
E. VNAV Options
DIGITAL – 429/571/ASCB
APPR ONLY DISABLED
APPR ONLY DISABLED
VERT SPD ENRT+APPR ENRT ONLY
APPR ONLY DISABLED
ANALOG
APPR ONLY DISABLED
APPR ONLY DISABLED
Page 498.183
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
F. Approach Options
(1) APPR OPT 1/1
ROLL STEERING GAINS

GPS ENABLED ADVISORY
NDB ENABLED ADVISORY
VOR ENABLED ADVISORY
RNV ENABLED ADVISORY
VFR ENABLED ADVISORY
BC ENABLED ADVISORY
GLS ENABLED ADVISORY
NOTE: You may not be able to enable certain approach types depending on which ARINC
sensors are configured at any given time.
If Approach Mode is DISABLED on the APPR OPT 1/1 page, all APPROACH TYPE
options will be ADVISORY and cannot be changeable by user.
If Approach Mode is ENABLED on APPR OPT 1/1 page, then all APPROACH TYPE
options are selected by the FMS based on sensor and REMOTE ARM
configuration.
G. EFIS Options
TYPE 429 ADV 429 GAMA EDZ 705 EDZ 810
Page 498.184
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
H. Performance Display Options
(1) Function
PERF EFIS DISP DISABLED ASCB ARINC+ASCB
ENABLE
D

COMPUTED BLACK BLUE GREEN CYAN
COLOR RED MAGENTA YELLOW WHITE
MANUAL BLACK BLUE GREEN CYAN
SYMBOL BUG LINE

SYMBOL BUG LINE

SYMBOL BUG LINE

SYMBOL BUG LINE

SYMBOL BUG LINE
Page 498.185
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
I. NAV Options
HEADING SELECT ENRT+APPR ENRT ONLY NONE
J. Tune Options
aircraft.
# COMS 0 1 2 3
# NAVS 0 1 2
# ADFS 0 1 2
# ATC 0 1
COMM RADIO 8.33/25 kHz 25 kHz
K. Crossfill (XFILL) Options

NOTE: If MASTER is ENABLED, then INIT, FUEL and FLIGHT PLAN will be enabled automatically.
Page 498.186
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
L. Cabin Display Options
CD-2000 or UniVision only.
Message 1 Title
Message 2 Title
Message 3 Title
Message 4 Title
Message 5 Title
Message 6 Title
M. TAWS Options (SCN 604.3 and later)

MODE/RANGE SEL ENABLED DISABLED
PAGE DISPLAY N/A A739 FMS
POSITION ESTIMATE Q ANP/RNP
DISPLAY
6 HOURS 8 HOURS
NOTE: The Flight log function requires the Fuel option to be configured.
Page 498.187
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
O. Discrete Options
(1) Discrete In
APU Running
ENG 1 Running
ENG 2 Running
ENG 3 Running
ENG 4 Running
Parking Brake
Rotors Turning
Page 498.188
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
28 V/Open
28 V/Open
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
all unused inputs.
6G 6H 6J 15J 11G 11H 15K 6A 6E 6F 6B
NONE
APU DSC 1/2
APU DSC 2/2
APU Running
ATC1 Select
DHC VNAV ARM
DHC VNAV Coupled
Door
Engine 1 Running
Engine 2 Running
Engine 3 Running
Engine 4 Running
FPL Erase (MMMS Only)
Go Around
Mark On Target (MMMS Only)
Parking Brake Set
Rotors Turning
Sperry VNAV Capture
Strut
Test
NOTE: 1. When using SCN 60X/70X Discrete In #5 can be configured as either a 28V/Open type Discrete on MP11H or
as a GND/Open type discrete on MP11G, but not both.
Page 498.189
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
(2) Discrete Out
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
Ground/Open
28 V/Open
unused inputs.
1 13B 3C 13D 13E 7A 7B 6C 13F
NONE
DHC Arm Annunciator
Doppler Mode
Doppler Sea State
DR Mode
Doppler Self Test
FMS Valid
GPS Integrity
IMS Tuneval
Sperry VNAV Flag
DWP Annuciator
Page 498.190
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
P. ARINC Options
Receive Port # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Pin Numbers (A/B)
UNS-1F/UNS-1D+
NO SENSOR
429 ADC
575 ADC
AFIS
429 AHRS 1
429 AHRS 2
CROSSFILL 1
CROSSFILL 2
429 DME
709 DME
DOPPLER 91
DOPPLER 137
DOPPLER 2012
Fuels 01
HS GLS 1
HS GLS 2
HS GLS 1 – GLO
HS GLS 2 – GLO
HS GNSS 1
HS GNSS 2
HS GNSS 3
HS GNSS 1 – GLO
HS GNSS 2 – GLO
HS GNSS 3 – GLO
HS GPS 1
HS GPS 2
HS GPS 3
Page 498.191
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
Receive Port # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Pin Numbers (A/B)
UNS-1F/UNS-1D+
LS GPS 1
LS GPS 2
LS GPS 3
C-IV GPIRS 1
C-IV GPIRS 2
C-IV GPIRS 3
IC600 L-01
IC600 L-02
IC600 L-03
IC600 L-04
IC600 L-05
IC600 L-06
IC600 R-01
IC600 R-02
IC600 R-03
IC600 R-04
IC600 R-05
IC600 R-06
429 IRGPS 1
429 IRGPS 2
429 IRGPS 3
HS429 IRS 1
HS429 IRS 2
HS429 IRS 3
LS429 IRS 1
LS429 IRS 2
LS429 IRS 3
571 IRS 1
571 IRS 2
571 IRS 3
KFC FGS
LCS
P4-L AUX
P4-R AUX
Page 498.192
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
Receive Port # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Pin Numbers (A/B)
UNS-1F/UNS-1D+
PL21 L-01 (Note 6)
PL21 L-02 (Note 7)
PL21 R-01 (Note 6)
PL21 R-02 (Note 7)
429 RADAR
571 RADAR
RADAR 1500
RRS-T
SIMULATOR
TAWS
UNILINK
429 VOR BRG
429 VOR RAD
711 VOR
Page 498.193
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
P4-01 MAP bus.
5. The P4-07 Onside, P4-06 Onside, P4-05 Offside and P4-06 Offside buses support Enhanced Pro Line 4-4000
installations for the Falcon 2000. These input buses are all configured with the P4-04 output bus. The P4-07
buses contain AHRS data.
6. The PL21 L-01 and PL21 R-01 buses are used for the Cessna CJ1. In this installation, the PL21 L-01 and PL21
R-01 input buses are configured with the P21-01 output bus.
7. The PL21 L-02 and PL21 R-02 buses are used for the Cessna CJ2. In this installation, the PL21 L-02 and PL21
R-02 input buses are configured with the P21-02 output bus.
Page 498.194
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
ARINC Transmit
Port # 0A / 0B 1 2A / 2B 3 4A / 4B 5 6A / 6B 7
(NOTE 4)
4A 12A 4E 4J 12J 12E 1A 5A 1E 1J 5J 5E
4B 12B 4F 4K 12K 12F 1B 5B 1F 1K 5K 5F
NONE
429 LS
429 HS
571 LRN
429 XFILL
429 TUNE
BAE-146
IC600-01
IMS-01
IMS ARCDU 1
IMS ARCDU 2
P4-01 IOC (Note 1)
P4-02 IOC (Note 2)
P4-03 IOC (Note 3)
P4-04 IOC
P4-01 MAP (Note 4)
PL21-01
HS429 MOD 1
LS429 MOD 1
700 TUNE
UNS HS429-1 (Note 6
LS429 MOD 1
WBURG TEST
Page 498.195
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
(2) ARINC Transmit Port Assignments (Continued)
2. The P4-02 IOC bus is used for the standard Learjet 60 Collins Pro Line 4 EFD-871. In this installation
the P4-02 IOC output bus is configured with the P4-01 or P4-02 ONSD and OFFSD IOC input buses.
input buses.
IOC input buses.
5. The P4-02 MAP A and P4-02 MAP B output buses are used for the F2000 and Astra SPX Collins Pro
Line 4 EFD-4077. The P4-02 MAP A bus is connected to the onside MFD and the P4-02 MAP B bus
is connected to the offside MFD. The P4-02 MAP A and P4-02 MAP B output buses are configured
with the P4-05 or P4-06 ONSD and OFFSD IOC buses.
6. For TAWS only.
Page 498.196
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X

561 BUS LRN DATA DIST ONLY
DTG FORMAT ARINC 561 ARINC 568 561E/568A
R. CSDB Options
NO SENSOR
RTU
SINGLE DME
DUAL DME
DME DIRECT
VOR
MFD
ERP
NONE
TUNE
RTU TUNE
AUX VNAV
S. Analog Options
T. ASCB Options
TRIGGER WT LBS.
Page 498.197
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
U. Air Data Options
not possible.
their entry field dashed or not be selectable by the operator.
SAT FORMAT NONE DIGITAL 565 DC
BARO ALT FORMAT NONE 565 SYNCHRO DC/RESOLVER DIGITAL
SCN ________________________________
AIRCRAFT ID _____________________________________________________________
Page 498.198
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
A. Starting the FMS
UNS - 1B
CPU PASS
RAM PASS
DATABASE PASS
CONFIG MODULE
AUXILIARY
ARINC
ANALOG
manual.
Page 498.199
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
A. Starting the FMS (continued)
1 Ifdisplayed,
no initial position is
enter the
present position of your
aircraft. Two methods
exist:
(a) push [1L], enter the
ID code for your airfield,
and then press [ENTER]; or
3 Push [1R] to highlight the
DATE field. Push [4], [5],
[6], [7], [8], [9], and
(b) push [2L], enter your then push [ENTER].
latitude and longitude,
The Position ID Page will
display.
POS INIT 1/1 ÂMSG
date
id ----- utc
N 32 07.9 14:49
W 110 55.4
perf db A12500

the NCU. Ignore the date,
time, and database
KTUS 1/1
tucson intl
information. NAV N 32 06.97
ARPT W 110 56.48
elev 2641
mag var e 11.8
¬ACCEPT RETURN®
2 Push ACCEPT [5L] to

confirm the selected
position description.
Page 498.200
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
A. Starting the FMS (continued)
1 Push [DATA] to
show the DATA
1/4 page.
DATA 1/4
¬PERF
¬DISK MSTR XFILL®
¬HOLD POS MAINT®

MAINT 1/1
3
Push CONFIG [1L] to
show the First
¬STATIC TEST
¬DYNAMIC TEST
¬S/W VERS RETURN®

CONFIG 1/2
4
Push DISPLAY [1L]
Configuration page.
¬DISCRETES
¬ARINC AIR DATA®
¬CSDB RETURN®
Page 498.201
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X

DISPLAY CONFIG
display type
1 STANDARD
2 SCDU
5 PL 4 800
RETURN®
2
Push RETURN [5R] to
page.
NOTE: While the Option List is showing, you must push [MENU]
to show a Sample Menu of available color options.
To show a sample page, push the LSK adjacent to the item.
Page 498.202
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
1
FMS CONFIG 1/3

The FMS shows its fms options
basic hardware class. STANDARD STORE®
¬FUEL EFIS®
2
¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®

item number:
9
2 DISABLED
4
empty weight
5
Fill in 1, 2, 3, or 4, 2 APU®
LBS
fuel flow type
DIGITAL RETURN®
6
item number:
OPT LIST 1/1

select
#-
8
4 pulse freq
5 pulse width
6 digital
RETURN®
Page 498.203
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
1 2
FF SCALING 1/1
input range
0-8 VDC STORE®
3
Push MIN FF [5L].
0 pph 1212
min ff
50 pph RETURN®
4
Push RETURN [5R].
2
1
and VOLTAGES [3L] [3R]
item number:
with the appropriate
1 05 VRMS
values for your aircraft.
2 08 VRMS
Push the line select key,
input the value, and then
FF SCALING 1/1
input range
0-5 VRMS STORE®
3
min ff
75 pph RETURN®
4
Push RETURN [5R].
Page 498.204
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
1
Push SCALING [2L].
Fill in the scaling
then push [ENTER].
FF SCALING 1/1
STORE®
scaling

item number: RISING
1 RISING
2 FALLING
75 pph RETURN®
3 4

Fill in the scaling
for your aircraft
FF SCALING 1/1
STORE®
scaling
40.000 pph/msec
pulse polarity
2
item number:
1 POSITIVE min ff
4
Push RETURN [5R].
3
Push MIN FF [5L].
then push [ENTER].
Page 498.205
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
FF SCALING 1/1
STORE®
1
Push MIN FF [5L].
Fill in the minimum
fuel flow rate for
your aircraft and
then push [ENTER].
min ff
45 pph RETURN®
2
Push RETURN [5R].
I. APU Fuel Flow Configuration
FUEL OPT 1/1
1
Push APU [3R] to show
fuel mode
the APU Options page.
ENABLED STORE®
empty weight
# of engines
2 APU®
display units
3
LBS Push APU SOURCE [2R].
fuel flow type Fill in the appropriate
DIGITAL RETURN® item number:
1 NONE
2 MANUAL
3 DIGITAL
4 DISCRETE
2 Push FUEL FLOW1 [1L] to and then push [ENTER].

highlight the data entry
field for APU #1.
Fill in the fuel flow rate APU OPT 1/1
and then push [ENTER]. fuel flow¡
0 lbs STORE®
fuel flow apu source
0 lbs NONE
NOTE: After entering a fuel fuel flow£
flow, the cursor
advances to the next 0 lbs
APU Fuel Flow Rate. fuel flow¢
After entering all 0 lbs
the appropriate APU
fuel flows, perform
Step 3. RETURN®
4
Push RETURN [5R].
Page 498.206
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
J. Performance Options Configuration

FMS CONFIG 1/3
2
Push PERF [3L].
fms options
ALL DIGITAL STORE®
¬FUEL
¬PERF NAV®
3
item number:
¬APPR RETURN®
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
PERF OPT 1/1
basic
4
1 ENABLED advanced
climb grad
5
Push ADVANCED [3L]. 500 ft/nm RETURN®
item number:
1 ENABLED
6
Push CLIMB GRAD [5L].
2 DISABLED
Enter the normal nominal
then push [ENTER].

PERF DB [3R].
PERF DB 1/1
STORE®
8 Push PERFORMANCE DATABASE

[ENTER].
RETURN®
Page 498.207
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
K. VNAV Configuration
FMS CONFIG 1/3

fms options
ALL DIGITAL STORE®
to show the FMS ¬FUEL
Configuration page.
¬PERF NAV®
¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®
2
Push VNAV [4L].
3
Push VNAV MODE [1L].
item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED

angle limit (max. 9.9°) VNAV OPT 1/1
and then push [ENTER]. vnav mode
ENABLED STORE®

item number:
fpa limit
7.5Ø
temp comp
DISABLED
1 ENABLED vdev stow
2 DISABLED DISABLED
NORMAL RETURN®
6
Push VDEV OUTPUT [5L].
item number:
1 NORMAL
2 VN-212
7 Push TEMP COMP [3R].
item number:
and then press [ENTER]. 1 ENABLED
See note. 2 DISABLED

Page 498.208
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
K. VNAV Configuration (Continued)

second VNAV Option page.
VNAV OPT 2/2
STORE®
9
Push VDEV [3L]. ¢ª÷¶¡÷ascb analog
Fill in the appropriate vdev vdev
item number: ENRT+APPR ENRT+APPR
1 ENRT+APPR pitch pitch
2 ENRT ONLY ENRT+APPR ENRT+APPR
3 APPR ONLY vert spd
4 DISABLED
ENRT+APPR RETURN®
bk Repeat Step 9 for each of

the remaining options:
[4L] PITCH
[5L] VERT SPD
[3R] VDEV
[4R] PITCH
Page 498.209
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
FMS CONFIG 1/3

fms options

ALL DIGITAL STORE®
¬FUEL
¬PERF NAV®
2 Push APPR [5L].

¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®
3
Push APR MODE [1L].
item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
APPR OPT 1/1
appr mode
4
9.0Ø
5
item number:
6
Page 498.210
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
APPR OPT 1/1

appr mode
ENABLED STORE®
remote tune
ENABLED
remote arm
ENABLED
roll gains
3x


Page 498.211
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
M. Approach Types Configuration
NOTE: If Approach Mode is DISABLED on
the APPR OPT 1/1 page, all
APPROACH TYPE options will be
ADVISORY and cannot be changeable
by the user.
NOTE: GPS, NDB, VOR, RNV, VFR, and GLS
will show ENABLED or DISABLED
If Approach Mode is ENABLED on
based on sensor selections on
the APPR OPT 1/1 page, then all
other pages.
APPROACH TYPE options are
selected by the FMS based on
If a sensor previously ENABLED is
sensor and REMOTE ARM configuration.
set to ADVISORY by the user, an
(M) is displayed adjacent to the
ADVISORY indicating manual
configuration.
1 Push ILS [2R].

item number:
1 ENABLED
APPR TYPES 1/2 2 ADVISORY
gps and then push [ENTER].
ENABLED STORE®
ndb ils
ENABLED ADVISORY
vor loc
ENABLED [m]ADVISORY
rnv bc
DISABLED[m] [m]ADVISORY
vfr
ENABLED RETURN®
2
Repeat Step 1 for
NOTE: Push [NEXT] to show LOC [3R] and BC [4R].
the second page.
APPR TYPES 2/2
STORE®
gls
ADVISORY 3 Push RETURN [5R] to
show the Approach
Options page.
RETURN®
Page 498.212
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
1
Approach Options page.
FMS CONFIG 1/3 is displayed.
Push NEXT to display the
FMS CONFIG 2/3 page. FMS CONFIG 2/3
¬XFILL STORE®
¬CABIN DISP
¬EFIS
¬TAWS
2 Push EFIS [3L].

RETURN®
3 Push TYPE [1L].

item number:
1 429 ADV (see NOTE)
2 429 GAMA
3 EDZ 705
4 EDZ 810
EFIS OPT 1/1
type
EDZ 810 STORE®
NOTE: Verify that EFIS is

compatible before
selecting 429 ADV.
¬PL-4 OPTS
¬PERF DISP OPTS RETURN®
4 Push PL-4 OPTS [4L].
Page 498.213
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
O. Pro Line 4 Configuration
1 Push CHP [1L].

2 N/A
Push [ENTER].
6 Push TCAS [2R].

7 Push MLS [3R].

1 SINGLE 1 SINGLE
item number:
2 DUAL 2 DUAL
1 RTA-844
3 N/A 3 N/A
2 RTA-854
3 N/A
Push [ENTER].

item number: chp
MAGNETIC DUAL
adf diag rad alt
N/A SINGLE

fuel max
8191 LBS RETURN®
item number:
1 SINGLE
2 DUAL
3 N/A
item number:
Push [ENTER].
1 SINGLE
2 DUAL
3 N/A

item number:
Push [ENTER].
1 N/A
2 8191 LBS
3 65535 LBS
Push [ENTER].
page.

Page 498.214
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
P. Performance Display Options Configuration
1 Push PERF DISP OPTS [5L] on EFIS OPT

1/1 page.
NOTE: This function is available
only if PERF OPT ADVANCED is ENABLED.
2 Push PERF EFIS DISP [2L]. PERF DISP OPTS

item number: STORE®
1 DISABLED perf efis disp
2 ARINC DISABLED
3 ASCB
4 ARINC+ASCB ¬ARINC
Push [ENTER].
¬ASCB
3
Select ARINC [3L].
RETURN®
4
line select keys:
V1 [2L] ARINC
V2 [3L]
VR [4L] STORE®
V TGT [2R]
VLDG1 [3R] ¬V1 V TGT®
VLDG2 [4R]
¬V2 VLDG1®
5 Push COMPUTED COLOR [2L].

item number:
¬VR VLDG2®
1 BLACK RETURN®
2 BLUE
3 GREEN
4 CYAN
5 RED
6 MAGENTA
ARINC V1 OPT
7 YELLOW
or push [NEXT] and select:
STORE®
1 WHITE
Push [ENTER]. computed color
BLACK
6
Push MANUAL COLOR [3L]. manual color
Select the appropriate BLACK
item number: symbol
1 BLACK BUG
2 BLUE
3 GREEN RETURN®
4 CYAN
5 RED
6 MAGENTA
7 YELLOW
or push [NEXT] and select:
8 Push RETURN [5R] and repeat Steps 4
through 7 for the remaining
Performance Display Options. When
1 WHITE complete, press RETURN [5R] to
Push [ENTER]. display ARINC page.
Press RETURN [5R] on the ARINC page
7 Push SYMBOL [4L]. to return to the PERF DISP OPTS

Select the appropriate page.
item number:
1 BUG
2 LINE
Push [ENTER].
Page 498.215
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
P. Performance Display Options Configuration (Continued)
PERF DISP OPTS
STORE®
perf efis disp
9
Select ASCB [4L]. DISABLED
¬ARINC
¬ASCB
RETURN®
bk
line select keys:
V1 [2L] ASCB VSPD OPTS
V2 [3L]
VR [4L] STORE®
V TGT [2R] v¡ v tgt
V REF [3R] NONE NONE
v v ref
NONE NONE
vr
bl Select the appropriate

item number:
1 NONE
NONE
RETURN®
2 AMBER
3 WHITE
4 GREEN
bm
5 BLUE Press RETURN [5R] to
6 VSPEED1 display PERF DISP OPTS
7 VSPEED2 page.
Push [ENTER]. Press RETURN [5R] to
Repeat 10 and 11 for the display EFIS OPT 1/1 page.
remaining ASCB VSPD
options.
Page 498.216
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
Q. NAV Configuration
1
FMS CONFIG 1/3 Push RETURN [5R] on each
fms options Option page to show the
ALL DIGITAL STORE® FMS Configuration page.
¬FUEL EFIS®
2 Push NAV [3R].

¬PERF NAV®
¬VNAV TUNE®
¬APPR RETURN®
5 Push HDG SEL [2R].

item number:
3
Push A/C TYPE [1L].
Fill in the appropriate 1 ENRT + APPR
item number: 2 ENRT ONLY
1 FIXED WING 3 NONE
2 HELICOPTER and then push [ENTER].
NOTE: We recommend that you select

NONE unless your installation
4 Push AC ROLL STR [2L]. provides interactive heading

Fill in the appropriate mode for approach.
item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED NAV OPT 1/1
and then push [ENTER]. a÷c type
FIXED WING STORE®
ac roll str hdg sel
ENABLED ENRT+APPR
6
Push AT OR BELOW [3L]. at or below bank limit
Fill in the desired 20000 ft 27.0
altitude (Range = 1,500 at or above bank limit
to 64,000 feet but less 32000 ft 15.0
than the altitude on
RETURN®
the line below) and
then push [ENTER].
7

Fill in the desired
altitude (Range = 1,500
the AT OR BELOW altitude
to 64,000 feet but
greater than the
altitude on the line
above) and then push
[ENTER]. 9 Push BANK LIMIT [4R].
the AT OR ABOVE altitude
Page 498.217
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
R. Tune Options Configuration
FMS CONFIG 1/3

fms options
1
¬FUEL the FMS Configuration page.
¬PERF NAV®
¬VNAV TUNE®
3
Push # COMS [1L].
then push [ENTER].
TUNE OPT 1/1
4
Push # NAVS [2L].
# coms
2 STORE®
# navs comm radio
then push [ENTER].
2 25 KHZ
# adfs
2
5 Push # ADFS [3L].

# atc
1
then push [ENTER].
RETURN®
6 Push # ATC [4L].

then push [ENTER].
Page 498.218
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
S. Crossfill Configuration

Then push [NEXT] to show the
¬XFILL STORE®
¬CABIN DISP

Crossfill Options page. ¬EFIS
¬TAWS
RETURN®
7 Push XFILL MODE [3R].

3 Push MASTER [1L].

item number:
1 PUSH
item number:
2 PULL
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
XFILL OPT 1/1

master
4
Push INIT [2L]. ENABLED STORE®
item number:
ENABLED
1 ENABLED
fuel xfill mode
2 DISABLED
ENABLED PUSH
FPL tune presets
ENABLED DISABLED
5
Push FUEL [3L].
RETURN®
item number:
8
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED

item number:
Page 498.219
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
T. TAWS Configuration (SCN 604.3 and later)
FMS CONFIG 2/3
1
Push RETURN [5R]
on the EFIS OPTS 1/1 ¬XFILL STORE®
page to display FMS
CONFIG 2/3 page. ¬CABIN DISP
¬EFIS
¬TAWS
2 Push TAWS. [4L]

RETURN®
3 Push MODE/RANGE SEL

[1L]. Select the
appropriate item TAWS CONFIG 1/1
number: mode/range sel
1 ENABLED ENABLED STORE®
2 DISABLED page display
3 A739 N/A
Push [ENTER].
4
Push PAGE DISPLAY [2L].
number: RETURN®
1 N/A
2 A739
3 FMS
Push [ENTER].
Page 498.220
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
U. Cabin Display Configuration
FMS CONFIG 2/3
1
XFILL Options page to ¬XFILL STORE®
show the second FMS
Configuration page. ¬CABIN DISP
¬EFIS
2
¬TAWS
RETURN®

item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED
Configuration.
CABIN DISP 1/1
5
DISABLED STORE®
6
item number:
2 DISABLED

message, then push
MESSAGE TITLE [2L].
MESSAGE 1
message 1
1/1

then push [ENTER].
RETURN®
8
Push MSG DURATION [3L].
9
Page 498.221
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
V. Pilot Data, Flight Plan and Log, and Strut Switch Configuration
1
TAWS page to show the
Push NEXT to display
FMS CONFIG 3/3.
2 Push STRUT SW [2R]. option (used for Primus

Select the appropriate 1000 type EFIS) is not
item number: available until both an
1 ANALOG IC600 L-XX and an IC600
2 DIGITAL R-XX input bus options
and then push [ENTER]. are first configured.
3 Push POS EST DISP [2L]. FMS CONFIG 3/3

Fill in the appropriate strut switch
item number: ANALOG STORE®
1 Q pos est disp
2 ANP/RNP Q
and then push [ENTER]. max stby time
2 HOURS
plt db @ pwrup
4 Push MAX STBY TIME [3L].

item number:
RETAINED
flight log
ENABLED RETURN®
1 DISABLED
2 2 HOURS
3 4 HOURS
4 6 HOURS
5 8 HOURS
6 Push FLIGHT LOG [5L].

5 Push PLT DB @ PWRUP [4L]. item number:

Fill in the appropriate 1 ENABLED
item number: 2 DISABLED
1 RETAINED and then push [ENTER].
2 CLEARED
Page 498.222
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
W. Discrete Configuration
CONFIG 1/2

FMS CONFIG 3/3 page to
show the first
¬DISPLAY STORE®
Configuration page. ¬FMS CONFIG ANALOG®
¬DISCRETES
¬ARINC AIR DATA®
2
Push DISCRETES [3L] to
show the Discrete Options ¬CSDB RETURN®
page.
DISC OPT 1/1

the eleven dicsrete
STORE®
¬DISCRETE OUT
4
RETURN®
5
diagrams provided which follow for configured all Discrete
the discrete input and output Inputs and Outputs, push
Page 498.223
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X

any Discrete Input you want
to change.
DISC IN 1/2
disc in 1
Fill in the appropriate item SP VNV CAP STORE®
disc in 2 disc in 6
[ENTER].
561 DTG RES STRUT
disc in 3 disc in 7

you want to change.
NONE
disc in 4
FREQ MNGT
disc in 8
TEST NONE
disc in 5
NOTE: Discrete Inputs 14 and MAG/TRUE SW RETURN®
6-9 are Ground / Open
type.
Discrete Input 5 can be

either a 28 VDC / Open
type on MP11G or a Ground
/ Open type on MP11H but DISC IN 2/2
not both. disc in 9
NONE STORE®
3 Push [NEXT] to show the dis in 10 28v

second Discrete Input NONE
page.

28 VDC / OPEN TYPE
SIGNAL.
RETURN®

[ENTER]. 6 When you have verified or
Inputs, push RETURN [5R] to
you want to change.
Page 498.224
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
wiring.
discrete output.
DISC OUT 1/2
1
Push the line select key for any disc out 1
Discrete Output you want to NONE STORE®
change. Fill in the appropriate disc out 2 disc out 6
item number and then push [ENTER]. WPT ANN NONE
SXTK ANN NONE
2
Repeat Step 1 for all remaining
APPR ANN NONE
change. disc out 5
HDG ANN RETURN®

Ground / Open type. CAUTION: DISC OUT 9 [2L] MUST BE A
28 VDC / OPEN TYPE SIGNAL.
DISC OUT 2/2
3
second Discrete Output page.
STORE®
dis out 9 28v
FMS VAL

then push [ENTER].
RETURN®

you want to change. 6 When you have verified or configured
twice to show the first Configuration
page.
Page 498.225
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
X. ARINC Options Configuration
1

ARINC OPT 1/1
inputs.
¬RECEIVE STORE®
3
Transmit page. Then
the ARINC Transmit
outputs.
RETURN®



Page 498.226
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
1

ARINC RCV 1/1

port 0
LS GPS1 B1 STORE®
port 1 port 5
NO SENSOR 429 ADC
port 2 port 6
port 3 port 7
429 DME CROSSFILL 1
port 4
429 OSS 1 RETURN®
3
ARINC Options page.
Page 498.227
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X

[ENTER].
ARINC XMIT 1/1

port 0
NONE STORE®
port ¡ port
429 XFILL NONE
port port §
429 LS NONE
port £ port ¶
429 HS NONE
port ¢
NONE RETURN®

you want to change. 3
ARINC Options page.
1
Push 561 BUS [1L].
item number:
1 LRN DATA
2 DIST ONLY
561 bus
LRN DATA STORE®
dtg format
2
item number:
1 ARINC 561
2 ARINC 568
3 561E/568A
RETURN®
3
Page 498.228
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
Y. CSDB Configuration
1

CSDB OPT 1/1
rcvr 1
NO SENSOR STORE®
3
rcvr 3 xmitter 2
NO SENSOR NONE
rcvr 4
NO SENSOR
RETURN®

rcvr 1
CSDB OPT 1/1 4 Push XMITTER 1 [2R].
VOR STORE® Options list) and then push
NO SENSOR NONE
rcvr 3 xmitter 2
5
MFD
RETURN®

Page 498.229
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
Z. Analog Options Configuration
1 On the first
item number:
item number:
2 SYNCHRO 2 NORTH

item number:
1 DRIFT ANGLE
2 WPT BRG
ANALOG OPT 1/1

wpt brg sig
3
1 NONE
offset relative to
2 SYNCHRO
+180 NOSE
3 RESOLVER
NOSE NONE
pitch cmd
DHC RETURN®
4 Push OFFSET [3L].

Fill in the
appropriate item
number:
bk
1 +180
2 +0
9

item number:
item number:
item number:
1 NONE
Page 498.230
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
AA. ASCB Configuration
ASCB options are only available when the ASCB board is installed.
1
page, push ASCB [3R] to
ASCB OPT 1/1
STORE®
2
Push WT TRIGGER [2L]. wt trigger
Fill in the appropriate ENABLED
item number:
1 ENABLED
2 DISABLED trigger wt
and then push [ENTER]. XXXXXXX LBS
RETURN®
3
Trigger Weight and then
push [ENTER].
first Configuration Page.
Page 498.231
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
AB. Air Data Configuration
INPUTS.
be blank.
1
2
Fill in the appropriate NOTE: We recommend use of BARO
item number: ALTITUDE; however, you must
1 BARO ALT use BOTH if you ENABLED the
2 PRESS ALT ADVANCED Performance Option.
3 BOTH
3
item number:
1 TAS
2 TAS AND IAS
AIR DATA 1/1
4
5
1 NONE
2 DIGITAL
3 565 ADC

item number:
1 NONE
2 DIGITAL
Page 498.232
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
AB. Air Data Configuration (Continued)
NOTE: BARO ALT FMT [2R],
7
PRES ALT FMT [3R] and Push BARO ALT FMT [2R]. Select
A/S FORMAT [4R] all the appropriate item number:
default to DIGITAL. 1 NONE
2 DIGITAL
3 565 SYN
4 DC/RES
AIR DATA 1/1 Push [ENTER].
alt display
BOTH STORE®
a/s display baro alt fmt
TAS AND IAS DIGITAL
minimum tas pres alt fmt
8 Push PRES ALT FMT [3R]. Select
the appropriate item number:
1 NONE
60 KTS DIGITAL 2 DIGITAL
Push [ENTER].
NONE DIGITAL
9
mach format Push A/S FORMAT [4R]. Select
NONE RETURN® the appropriate item number:
1 DIGITAL
2 565 DC TAS
bk Push RETURN [5R] to display

CONFIG 1/2 page.
3 20MV IAS
4 11MV IAS
Push [ENTER].
Page 498.233
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
SCN 604.X
AC. Store Final Configuration
1
2 Push SCN [1L].

Module updates
(dates and time)


CONFIG 2/2
scn ver rev
604.0 001 001 STORE®
date utc
10-apr-97 23:04
3
Type the Aircraft
4
Page 498.234
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
14. Performance Database Loading
NOTE: FMS displays indicate DISK which refers to any compatible data storage device
that can be used with the DTU, DTU-100 and SSDTU or the Portable DTU,
Portable DTU-100 and Portable SSDTU.
When the configuration module has been programmed for the Advanced Performance
Option, the performance data must then be loaded into the NCU via a disk or data storage
device inserted into the Data Transfer Unit (DTU) or Solid State DTU (SSDTU). The data
storage device is a part of the Performance Database Kit which also contains a supplement to
the FMS Operator’s Manual.
This procedure starts with the FMS power off. However, if the aircraft requires a Portable
DTU or Portable SSDTU, turn off both the FMS and aircraft power while connecting the
DTU cable.
Refer to the Operator’s Manual and Performance Database Supplement for more information
about disk loading and resolution of error messages.
1
If your system uses a Portable
DTU, connect the Portable DTU
cable to the connector mounted in
the aircraft.
DISC MENU
2
Press the ON key on the DTU. ¬DISK CONTENTS
¬DISK LOAD MAIN DNLD®
3
Press [ON/OFF DIM] on the PLT DATA
FMS CDU to start the FMS. ¬SAVE FLT LOG DNLD®
¬START DATA RECORDING
4
With the Initialization page
displayed, press [MENU] to
¬FORMAT DISK RETURN®
display the DISK MENU page.
5 Insert the data storage

device into DTU.
NOTE: If no data storage
device or an incorrect
or bad device is
inserted, the Disk Load
6 Press DISK LOAD [2L] to display

the DISK LOAD page.
procedure will not
procede.
7
Verify that the aircraft
specific data displayed on
the DISK LOAD page is
correct. DISK LOAD
AIRCRAFT TYPE
LEARJET 45
8 Push LOAD [5L]. ERASING MEMORY ENGINES

is displayed. TFE731-20
DB VERS CREATED
A12564 10-APR-05
PERF DB----
¬LOAD CANCEL®
Page 498.235
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
NOTE: After the data has successfully loaded, PERF DB PASS will
appear on the DISK LOAD page and CANCEL will change to RETURN.
9
Remove data storage device from DISK LOAD
DTU. AIRCRAFT TYPE
LEARJET 45
ENGINES
TFE731-20
bk
Press RETURN [5R], press
DB VERS CREATED
DATA to display DATA page 1.
A12564 10-APR-05
PERF DB PASS
¬LOAD RETURN®
bl Press MAIN [5R] to display

MAIN page. PERF VER 1/1
AIRCRAFT TYPE
LEARJET 45
ENGINES
bm
Press PERF VER LSK to TFE731-20
display PERF VER page 1/1 AFM 1D:
and verify that the aircraft FM 126-3
data displayed on the PERF DB VERSION: A12564
VER page is correct.
CREATED: 10-APR-05
RETURN®
Use the FMS Operator’s Manual Aircraft Performance Supplement to compute and display
the applicable performance parameters. The displayed parameters have been demonstrated to
be within the tolerances of AC 25-15 as shown below.
N1 ±0.25% N1
V1VR +1.0, -0.0 Kts
V2 +2.0, -0.0 Kts
VREF +2.0, -0.0 Kts
Page 498.236
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
Maintenance, Checkout, And Troubleshooting

Refer to the appropriate Component Maintenance Manual for repair procedures.
There are five subsections for checkout procedures:
¾ CDU/NCU Self–Test
¾ NCU Configuration Verification
¾ NCU Outputs To Flight Guidance System
¾ Sensor Checkouts
¾ Ground Checkout Of Approach Mode
You should perform these checks when installing a new or repaired component of the Flight
Management System in your aircraft. Refer to the appropriate Component Maintenance
Manual when an installed unit malfunctions.
You must know the aircraft’s navigational configuration before you checkout the Flight
Management System.
If the equipment fails any check, refer to the Troubleshooting section for corrective
troubleshooting procedures The Troubleshooting section includes problems you may find
when checking out a new Flight Management System or component.
1. Maintenance
A. Control Display Unit (CDU P/N 1016–X–XX and FPCDU P/N 1018–X–XXX)
Do not schedule maintenance for the CDU. No maintenance is needed unless you find a
problem.
B. Navigation Control Unit (NCU), P/N 1190–0X–XXXX
Do not schedule maintenance for the NCU. No maintenance is needed unless you find a
problem.
C. Configuration Module, P/N 11901
Do not schedule maintenance for the Configuration Module. No maintenance is needed
unless you find a problem.
D. Data Transfer Unit (DTU), P/N 1404–XX–XX or 1405–XX–X
Do not schedule maintenance for the DTU. No maintenance is needed unless you find a
problem.
E. EFIS Radar Panel (ERP), P/N 1015–1–XX
Do not schedule maintenance for the EFIS Radar Panel. No maintenance is needed unless
you find a problem.
Page 501
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
F. Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU), P/N 1408-00-X or 1409-00-2
Do not schedule maintenance for the SSDTU. No maintenance is needed unless a problem is
found.
Page 502
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
2. CDU/NCU Self–Test
You may make a copy of this section for recording the results of your checkout of the UNS–
1B Flight Management System. Mark the PASS or FAIL space and fill in the blanks as
appropriate.
A. Initial CDU/NCU Turn On
(1) Turn on all sensors having independent power control such as IRS, etc.
(2) Depress the ON Key. After about a five–second warm–up, the self–test page will
display.
Pass Fail
(3) The aircraft type will appear on line two. Check for correct aircraft type.
Pass Fail
(4) Check that all items on the self–test page display “PASS”. Pass Fail
Record failures: ___________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
B. Annunciators
The following annunciators, which are remote from the CDU, shall illuminate for about five
to fifteen seconds during NCU self–test. These annunciators may not be installed on aircraft
equipped with Pro Line 4 and SCN 404.X.
(1) WPT ALERT (Waypoint Alert). Pass Fail

(2) SXTK (Selected Crosstrack). Pass Fail
(3) APPR (Approach). Pass Fail
(4) HDG (Heading) Pass Fail
(5) MSG (Message). Pass Fail
NOTE: When all items on self–test page show PASS, another display, the
Initialization Page, will appear.
Page 503
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
C. Keyboard Dimming and Offset
(1) SCDU P/N 1016–X–( ) with SCN 1.X, 2.X, 3.X, or 4.X and NCU SCN:
400.X 414.X 401.X 401.1 402.X 403.X 404.X 405.X , or
SCDU P/N 1016–X–( ) with SCN 5.X or 6.X and NCU SCN: 600.X , 60X.X or
FPCDU P/N 1018–1–XXX and NCU SCN: 600.X , or FPCDU 1018-X-( ) and NCU
SCN
(a) With any display page showing, push [ON/OFF DIM] once to activate the dim
circuitry. The Dimming Control Window will be displayed on the right side of
the screen.
(b) Press and hold DIM [2R]. Display brightness should dim gradually while key
is held.
Release [2R]. Pass Fail
(c) Press and hold BRIGHT [1R]. Display brightness should increase gradually to
maximum brightness while key is held. Release [1R] Pass
Fail
(d) Press OFFSET [4R] to display the Offset Control Window on the right side of
the screen.
(e) Press Down [2R]. The display should move lower on the display surface.
Pass Fail
(f) Press UP [1R]...The display should move toward the top of the display
surface.
Pass Fail
Page 504
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(g) Operate the Down [2R] and UP [1R] controls to minimize the offset between
the selectable lines and the line select Keys.
(h) Press CANCEL [3R] to return to the Dimming Control Window.
(i) Press CANCEL [3R] to exit the Dimming Control function.
(j) Verify that the keyboard panel lighting is adjustable using the appropriate
radio lighting rheostat. Pass Fail
(2) FPCDU P/N 1018–2–XXX and NCU SCN: 600.X
(a) With any display page showing, push [ON/OFF DIM]. Verify the dimming
control window is shown on the right side of the active page with the options
BRIGHT [1R], DIM [2R], CANCEL [3R], DISPLAY [4R], and OFF [5R].
Pass Fail
·underlying
BRIGHT®
screen
DIM®
will
CANCEL®
appear
DISPLAY®
here
OFF®

(b) Alternately, push and hold BRIGHT [1R] and DIM [2R]. Verify that the
display brightens and dims. Pass Fail
(c) Push DISPLAY [4R]. Verify that the Display Option window is shown on the
right side of the active page with the options UP [1R], DOWN [2R],
CANCEL [3R], and VIDEO [4R].
Pass Fail
UP®
DOWN®
existing text
CANCEL®
VIDEO®
Display Option Window

NOTE: The video option will appear only on units equipped with video capability
(1018–1X–XXX).
Page 505
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(d) Alternately, push and hold UP [1R] and DOWN [2R]. Verify that the display
moves up and down and can be adjusted to minimize parallax between the
arrows and the line select keys. Pass Fail
(e) If your installation supports the video option, push VIDEO [4R]. Active
video, such as a wheel well camera will be displayed. Pass
Fail
(f) Push [ON/OFF DIM] or any mode key. Verify that the selected mode is
shown.
(g) With the Display Option window showing, push CANCEL [3R]. Verify the
dimming control window is shown. Pass Fail
(h) Push OFF [5R]. Verify that the Confirm Off window is shown on the right
side of the active page with the options CONFIRM OFF [1R] and CANCEL
[3R].
Pass Fail
CONFIRM®
OFF
existing text
CANCEL®
Confirm Off Window

(i) Push CANCEL [3R]. Verify that the Dimming Control window is shown.
Pass Fail
(j) Push CANCEL [3R]. Verify that the active display page is shown in full.
Pass Fail
(k) With the Confirm Off window showing, push CONFIRM OFF [1R]. Verify
that the FMS goes off. Pass Fail
NOTE: You may postpone this step until you complete other tests or
checkouts.
Page 506
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
D. Initialization Page
With Initialization Page showing, perform initialization procedure per the Operator’s
Manual.
From the last two lines on the Initialization Page, fill in blanks below.
NAV DATA BASE EXPIRES ______________________________________________
FMC VERSION _________________________________________________________
NOTE: You may test the UNS–1B FMS with an expired data base.
Page 507
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
3. Built–In–Test (BIT)
There will be two types of built–in–test. In response to a test discrete input, the FMS will
output certain test values. Additionally, the FMS monitors certain functions on a continuous
basis for failure.
A. Test Values
In response to the discrete test, values shall be output on the following signals:
¾ Analog desired track
¾ Analog bearing
¾ Analog lateral deviation
¾ Analog vertical deviation
¾ Flags: NAV VALID, DIGITAL VALID, VERTICAL VALID, PITCH VALID, TO, FMS
VALID, not STEERING VALID.
¾ Annunciators: HEADING, WAYPOINT ALERT, SELECTED CROSSTRACK,
APPROACH.
B. ARINC 561 Test Values
The following table contains the ARINC 561 Test Values. ARINC test values will be output
under the following conditions:
¾ For 5 seconds when on the initialization page. Accepting the initialization page will stop
the output of test values, except if the test discrete is grounded.
¾ Anytime the test discrete is grounded after Powerup and Selftests.
¾ When configured for distance only: only label 001 (distance) will be output.
ARINC 561 TEST VALUES
LABEL DESCRIPTION TEST VALUE CHANGED
001 Dist to Go 123.4 nm
002 Time to Go 78.9 min

003 Cross Track Dist 3.75 nm left
006 BCD Drift Angle 5.5 degrees right

012 Ground Speed 250 knots
014 True Heading 30 degrees

015 Wind Speed 50 knots
016 Wind Direction 225 degrees
031 Magnetic Variation 0 degrees
Page 508
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
LABEL DESCRIPTION TEST VALUE CHANGED

110 Status To, Msg, SX, DR, Alert
115 True Brg to TO WPT 135 degrees, wpt=25
155 Display Deviation 3.75 nm right
156 “TO” + 0 100 nm, wpt = 25

157 “TO” + 0 45 degrees, wpt = 25
156 “TO” + 1 100 nm, wpt = 26
157 “TO” + 1 45 degrees, wpt = 26
156 “TO” + 2 100 nm, wpt = 27

157 “TO” + 2 45 degrees, wpt = 27
156 “TO” + 3 100 nm, wpt = 28

157 “TO” + 3 45 degrees, wpt = 28
156 “TO” + 4 100 nm, wpt = 29
157 “TO” + 4 45 degrees, wpt = 29

156 “TO” + 5 100 nm, wpt = 30
157 “TO” + 5 45 degrees, wpt = 30

156 “TO” + 6 100 nm, wpt = 31
157 “TO” + 6 45 degrees, wpt = 31
156 “TO” + 7 100 nm, wpt = 32

157 “TO” + 7 45 degrees, wpt = 32
156 “TO” + 8 100 nm, wpt = 33
157 “TO” + 8 45 degrees, wpt = 33
201 BCD Dist to TO wpt 123.4 nm
Page 509
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
C. ARINC 429 Test Values
The following tables contain the ARINC 429 test values. ARINC test values will be output
under the following conditions:
¾ For 5 seconds when on the initialization page. Accepting the initialization page will stop
the output of test values, except if the test discrete is grounded.
¾ Anytime the test discrete is grounded after Powerup and Selftests.

LABEL DESCRIPTION TEST VALUE HEX CHANGED
032 ADF Tuning Code NCD 200000 X
034 NAV Tuning Code NCD 200000 X
035 DME Tuning Code 110.4 (channel 3) 44100C
041 Set Latitude N 45:00.0 445000
042 Set Longitude W 100:00.0 500000
043 Set Heading 135 degrees 44D400
074 EFIS FPL Header Record 1 record 400001
075 EFIS act wpt FR/TO data Tst: From wpt =01, To wpt =01 411000
101 Selected Heading 45 degrees 440000 X
105 ILS final course 45 degrees 440000 X
110 Pseudo ILS final course 315 degrees 5C0000 X
113 EFIS FPL checksum –(sum of records 300 –> 307) 55C966
114 DSRTK 45 degrees 440000 X
115 BEARING 315 degrees 5C0000 X
116 XTK 3.75 nm left 507800
117 VERT DEVIATION 200 feet low 5E7000
121 HORIZ CMD 10 degrees right 40E380
122 VERT CMD 1 degree up 400800 X
125 GMT 08:13:00 4204C0
147 MAGVAR 0 400000
150 GAMA format UTC 08:13:00 441A00
163 Wind on Nose 40 knots 428000
173 Localizer Deviation 0 400000
174 Glideslope Deviation 0 400000
203 Non–Baro–Corrected Altitude 3500 feet 406D60 X
204 Altitude 4000 feet 407D00
210 TAS 290 knots 424400
Page 510
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
213 SAT +8 degrees 404000
251 Distance to Next Wpt 123.4 nm 407B60
252 Time To Go 79.0 min 427800
260 DATE 29–Feb–87 548A1C
266 Mark On Target Bearing 135 degrees 4C0000 X
267 Mark On Target Distance 12.3 nm 462800 X
270 STATUS To, Msg, SX, DR, Alert 4F280C
271 OSS Mode Control Tst:mode=abs, airborne 480400
272 Man Station Deselections 0 400000
273 Select Memory Address 01800 403000
274 LORAN Chain Selection #1 NCD 200000 X
275 FMC STATUS To, Msg, SX, DR, Alert 45400C
276 Contents of selected memory 0 400000
277 Cabin Disp Control Discretes All zeros 400000 X
300 EFIS stn. cls/type/magvar high/TACAN,DME,VOR/+5 4F0500
301 EFIS msg chars. 7–9 blanks 400000
303 EFIS msg wpt num/type/length 1/off–FPL navaid/9 400199
(9:300–>307 +113)
306 EFIS wpt latitude N 45:42.0 441000
307 EFIS wpt longitude W 99:51.0 572001
310 LATITUDE N 45:00.0 440000
311 LONGITUDE W 100:00.0 571C80
312 GS 250 knots 40FA00
313 TRACK 45 degrees 440000 X
314 HEADING 135 degrees 4C0000 X
315 WIND SPEED 50 knots 432000
316 WIND ANGLE 225 degrees 540000
321 DRIFT ANGLE 5.5 degrees right 407D20
324 Pitch Angle 5 degrees up 407200 X
325 Roll Angle 10 degrees right 40D400 X
351 DIST TO DEST 1234.5 nm 409A50
Page 511
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
352 TIME TO DEST 139.0 min 408B00
353 Dest Local Time Offset + 8 hours 420000 X
366 N/S Velocity N 203.5 knots 40CB80
367 E/W Velocity E 145.125 knots 409120
371 Vendor/Unit ID 414C08 414C08
D. ARINC 571 Test Values

The following table lists the ARINC 571 test values.

001 BCD Distance to Next Wpt 123.4 nm 012340
002 BCD Time to Go 78.9 min 078900
003 BCD Cross Track Distance –3.75 nm C03750
004 BCD True Desired Track 45 degrees 045000 X
005 BCD Track Angle Error 0 degrees 000000
010 BCD Latitude N 45:00.0 045000
011 BCD Longitude W 100:00.0 D00000
012 BCD Ground Speed 250 knots 025000
013 BCD Track Angle 45 degrees 045000 X
014 BCD Heading 135 degrees 135000 X
015 BCD Wind Speed 50 knots 050000
016 BCD Wind Direction 225 degrees 225000
024 Status FROM/TO From 0/ To 1 001000
027 BCD Date 29–FEB–87 290287
031 BCD Magnetic Variation 0 degrees 000000
035 BCD Heading Rate 0 400000 X
036 WPT 0 Latitude N 45:00.0 045000
037 WPT 0 Longitude W 100:00.0 D00000
040 WPT 1 Latitude N 45:42.0 045420
041 WPT 1 Longitude W 99:51.0 C99510
042 WPT 2 Latitude N 45:53.0 045530
043 WPT 2 Longitude W 99:52.0 C99520
044 WPT 3 Latitude N 45:54.0 045540
Page 512
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
045 WPT 3 Longitude W 99:53.0 C99530
046 WPT 4 Latitude N 45:55.0 045550
047 WPT 4 Longitude W 99:54.0 C99540
050 WPT 5 Latitude N 45:56.0 045560
051 WPT 5 Longitude W 99:55.0 C99550
052 WPT 6 Latitude N 45:57.0 045570
053 WPT 6 Longitude W 99:56.0 C99560
054 WPT 7 Latitude N 45:58.0 045580
055 WPT 7 Longitude W 99:57.0 C99570
056 WPT 8 Latitude N 45:59.0 045590
057 WPT 8 Longitude W 99:58.0 C99580
060 WPT 9 Latitude N 46:00.0 046000
061 WPT 9 Longitude W 99:59.0 C99590
063 BCD Wind On Nose 40 knots 004000
075 Status FROM/TO From 1/ To 2 002000
104 Target Vertical Speed 1000 fpm 40FC00 X
110 Status Msg, SX, DR, Alert 888003
115 Bearing To Wpt 315 degrees F80000 X
116 Xtrack Distance 3.75 nm 507800 X
117 VDEV 200 feet low 5E7000 X
121 Horiz Command 10 degrees right 40E380
122 Pitch Command Signal 1 degree up 400800 X
125 BCD GMT 08:13:00 081300
173 Localizer Deviation 0 400000 X
174 Glideslope Deviation 0 400000 X
210 System Latitude N 45:00.0 080000
211 System Longitude W 100:00.0 6E38E4
212 Groundspeed 250 knots 827100
214 Heading 135 degrees 980000 X
266 N/S Velocity 203.5 knots 81FCC0
267 E/W Velocity 145.2 knots 816B00
273 FMS Discrete rnav enr, auto leg, mag, ρ∠ρ valid 458110 X
347 Dist to Destination 1234.5 nm 826940
Page 513
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
371 Equipment ID Code 414C08 414C08 X
377 FMS Equipment ID Bit 12 High 400008 X
E. Continuous Tests
The FMS shall continuously monitor the program checksum. If a failure is detected, the
message "PROGRAM CHECK FAIL" shall be generated.
The FMS shall continuously monitor the ECC–protected Jeppesen database regions. If an
correctable error is detected, correction shall be performed. If a non–correctable error occurs,
the message "DATABASE FAIL" shall be generated and a message pertaining to the
particular database which failed shall be generated as follows:
FAILURE MESSAGE
Jeppesen Airport database AIRPORT DATABASE FAIL
Jeppesen NDB database NDB DATABASE FAIL
Jeppesen Enroute Waypoints database ENROUTES DATABASE FAIL
Jeppesen Terminal Waypoints database TERMINALS DATABASE FAIL
Jeppesen VHF NAVAID database VHF NAVAID DATABASE FAIL
Jeppesen Airway database AIRWAY DATABASE FAIL
Jeppesen VHF names database VHF NAME DATABASE FAIL
Jeppesen NDB names database NDB NAME DATABASE FAIL
Jeppesen Airport names database ARPT NAME DATABASE FAIL
Jeppesen SID database SID DATABASE FAIL
Jeppesen STAR database STAR DATABASE FAIL
Jeppesen Runway database RUNWAY DATABASE FAIL
Jeppesen Approach database APPROACH DATABASE FAIL
NOTE: A database will not be accessible after a failure is detected
Page 514
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
4. NCU Configuration Verification
The NCU’s Configuration Module is programmed to allow the NCU to interface with the
installed sensors, databases, etc. The CDU can show what aircraft hardware the
Configuration Module is programmed for.
To verify proper programming, check the Aircraft Configuration Data Sheets against the
CDU configuration displays. Refer to the Configuration Module Programming Procedures,
if necessary. However, you should not push EDIT [R1] during this verification.
5. NCU Outputs To Flight Guidance System
A. NCU Self Test Output Checkout
During this test, with the Analog Test Discrete Connector pin MP15J grounded, the analog
and 561 bus outputs to the HSI should be as follows:
NOTE: Due to differences in instrumentation and coupling, not all of the following
will be applicable to every installation.
(1) 1234 in DIS display. Pass Fail
(2) 250 in speed display. Pass Fail
(3) Pulls NAV Flag. Pass Fail
(4) Pulls Vertical Deviation Flag. Pass Fail
(5) 045 degree Desired Track, or 45 degree off the nose to the right in some installations.
Pass Fail
(6) With heading set at 360 degrees, bearing will be 315 degrees, or 45 degrees off the
nose to the left. Pass Fail
(7) CDI moves 1 dot right. Pass Fail
NOTE: The terms Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) and Lateral Deviation
Needle are used interchangeably.
(8) Glide Slope Needle moves 1 dot up. Pass Fail
(9) With Flight Director coupled to FMS, Flight Director will command a 10 degree right
bank.
Pass Fail
Record any discrepancies:
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
Page 515
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
B. Flight Plan Checkout
NOTE: To perform this checkout, the following flight plan must be put into the
system. The Flight Plan Checkout and subsequent procedures, through Winds
Display, are written assuming that each procedure will be done in sequence. If
the CDU is turned off between procedures, it will be necessary to input the
flight plan again before continuing with the checkout procedures.
(1) Start with CDU turned Off. Turn On and initialize with present position, same as
WPT 1 (Below).
WPT 5
WPT 3 N 32 00.0
3 N 32 00.0 W 95 00.0 5
W 100 00.0
DTO #5
WPT 2 DIS 284 nm
2 N 31 00.0 DSRTK 056 deg
W 100 00.0
DIS 59.9 nm
CRS 352 deg
VAR 08 deg
BRG 352 deg
WPT 1
1
N 30 00.0
W 100 00.0
NOT TO SCALE
(2) Create a route utilizing the following pilot defined waypoints:

¾ WPT 1 N 30 00.0, W 100 00.0
¾ WPT 2 N 31 00.0, W 100 00.0
¾ WPT 3 N 32 00.0, W 100 00.0
¾ WPT 4 XXXXXXXX
¾ (Gap)
¾ WPT 5 N 32 00.0, W 95 00.0
(3) Copy route into flight plan. Input flight plan as follows. Start with CDU turned OFF.
(4) Turn system On and initialize at WPT 1.
(5) Display DATA ROUTE Page.
Page 516
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(6) Select CREATE ROUTE and create a route using Waypoints 1 through 5.
NOTE: If the ROUTES catalog page shows any route waypoints identified by
numbers from 1 through 5, notice what those numbers are so that
others can be chosen to identify the waypoints that will be entered
below.
(7) Display FPL Page and CPY RTE containing WPT 1 through WPT 5 to the flight plan.
C. NCU Output to HSI Checkout.

(1) Slew compass card to 0 degrees under lubber line.
(2) Verify the following on the HSI:
¾ DIS: 59.9 NM. Pass Fail
¾ DTK: 352 degrees (M). Pass Fail
¾ BRG: 352 degrees (M). Pass Fail
¾ CDI: Centered. Pass Fail
¾ TO/FR: TO. Pass Fail
¾ NAV FLAG: Out of view. Pass Fail
(3) Record any discrepancies:
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
D. ADC Function Checkout – DIST/GS Function Check

(1) Display DATA Page 2, insure that all sensors are deselected. Deselect if necessary.
NOTE: This step will not function if an IRS is installed and is operating.
(2) Select DTO. Observe direct to WPT 2.
(3) Display DATA Page 2.
(4) Select ADC Page 1.
(5) Select TAS. Enter 150 kts Manual TAS.
(7) Select HDG. Enter 360° Manual heading.
(8) Display NAV Page 1.
(9) Verify that the DIST is counting down. Pass Fail
(10) Verify that Ground Speed (GS) is approx. 150 kts. Pass Fail
Page 517
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
E. HSI from Function Check
(2) Select TAS. Enter 0.
(4) Select HOLD POS.
(5) Select FMS POS. Enter N 32 00.1. W 100 00.0, ACCEPT.
(6) Verify that the HSI shows FROM indication. Pass Fail
F. DIST/BRG Check
(2) Select HDG. Enter 056° Manual Heading.
(3) Display NAV Page 2. Enter FMS position N30 00.0, W100 00.0, ACCEPT.
(4) Select DTO. Enter WPT 5.
(5) Display NAV Page 1 and observe.
(6) Distance must read about 284 NM. Pass Fail
(7) Bearing must be 056. Pass Fail
(8) HSI must also show about 284 NM distance
and 056° bearing. Pass Fail
(9) Note any discrepancies:
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
(10) If the system is capable of Cross side switching (dual FMS only), select the other
FMS and verify all outputs are correct.
¾ Distance must read about 284 NM. Pass Fail
¾ Bearing must be 056. Pass Fail
¾ HSI must also show about 284 NM distance and 056° bearing. Pass
Fail
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
Page 518
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(12) If a Multifunction Display (MFD) is installed, ensure that the outputs are correct
when HSI is selected. Check cross side in both HSI positions.
¾ Distance must read about 284 NM. Pass Fail
¾ Bearing must be 056 Pass Fail
¾ HSI must also show about 284 NM distance and 056° bearing. Pass
Fail
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
G. Roll Steering Check

NOTE: This checkout assumes that the flight plan from the previous section has been
entered into the system. If not, enter it at this time.
The NCU must be programmed for full FMS HDG.
(1) Display DATA Page 4. Enter 360° (MAN) HDG.
(2) With 360° Aircraft heading in cursor engage F/D, AFCS, and EFIS LRN Mode.
Display ADC Page. Enter 200 kts (MAN) TAS.
(3) Display DATA SENSOR Page. Deselect all Sensors.
(4) Display NAV Page 1. Select HDG and enter 340 CMD HDG.
(5) Display DATA Page 4, ROLL CMD should go to L20° and the control yoke should
rotate counter clockwise. Pass Fail
(6) Verify that FMS HDG Annunciator on the panel is lighted. Pass Fail
(7) Display NAV Page 1. Select HDG and enter 20 CMD HDG.
(8) Display DATA Page 4, ROLL CMD Should go to R20° and control yoke should
rotate clockwise. Pass Fail
(9) Verify that FMS HDG Annunciator on the panel is illuminated. Pass
Fail
NOTE: AT 200 kts, roll steering equals approximately 1° ROLL for 1° HDG.
H. Input of a Selected Crosstrack

(1) Display NAV Page 1. Selected XTK (SX will appear below).
(2) ENTER R 7.5 (The CDU will display R 7.5).
(3) Observe that the remote Selected Crosstrack Annunciator is illuminated.
(4) Check that the HSI CDI deflects full scale to the right. Pass Fail
Page 519
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(5) ENTER L 5.0 in SX (The CDU will display L 5.0). Pass Fail
(6) Observe that the remote Selected Crosstrack Annunciator is illuminated.
Pass Fail
(7) Check that the HSI CDI deflects about 2/3 scale deflection to the left (SCNs 405 and
earlier) Full Scale Deflection (SCNs 600 and later).
Pass Fail
(8) If an MFD is installed, assure the outputs are correct when the “HSI” position is
selected.
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
(10) Check “cross side” in both positions.
(11) Select SX, enter 0. Observe that SX cancels and the Remote Annunciator
extinguishes.
Pass Fail
I. DME Checkout
NOTE: The following procedure requires a DME ramp checker such as the IFR ATC
600. Initialize CDU as follows:
(1) Turn on and initialize system at KDDC (N 37 45.7, W 099 57.9).
(2) Display DATA SENSOR Page.
(3) Select DME DATA Page.
(4) Input 50.0 NM on the DME ramp checker.
(5) Distance on the DME Sensor Status Page should be about the same.
J. Winds Display (EFIS Only)

NOTE: This test should be performed after the ROLL STEERING CHECK.
(1) Display DATA SENSOR Page.
NOTE: If the aircraft has no IRS, proceed to the NAV Page below.
(2) Deselect IRS.
(3) Display NAV Page 1.
(4) Select Wind Display on the EFIS. Verify that the winds displayed on the HSI
correspond to those on the CDU. Pass Fail
Page 520
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
6. Checkout Of Installations Configured For Collins Pro Line 4
Avionics maintenance and status data may be displayed on the Pro Line 4 multi–function
display (MFD). The Maintenance Menu page is displayed by pressing the MAINTENANCE
Line Select Key on the MFD Index page. The LRU Diagnostic Data page(s) and the LRU
Diagnostic History page(s) are accessed from this page by pressing the appropriate Line
Select Key. The Avionics Status page, which is accessed from the FMD Index page, will
display only failed LRU data. The LRU Diagnostic Data page will display all LRU status
data. The LRU Diagnostic History page will display only failures that have lasted a specified
time (30 seconds) or pilot commanded data snapshots. The text on the left side of the screen
is the plain language interpretation of the six–digit (HEX) number displayed on the right.
Refer to the Collins Pro Line 4 Installation Manual or Collins Learjet 60 Avionics System
Manual for detailed interpretation of the LRU diagnostic data. However, these manuals may
not decode some data items.
A. Sensors
The following table lists the sensors monitored by the system. The alphabetical order, by
System Title, is the order that they appear on the ProLine4 Avionics Status and LRU
Diagnostic Data pages.
SYSTEM TITLE SENSOR NAME LABEL BUS OTHER QUALIFER

NOTE 2 NOTE 1 NOTE 3
L–ADC ADC–850 062 P4–01, P4–02,

P4–03, P4–04
R–ADC ADC–850 062 P4–01, P4–02,
P4–03, P4–04
L–ADF ADF–462 063 P4–01, P4–02 ADF DIAG = SINGLE or DUAL
L–ADF ADF–75A 063 P4–03, P4–04 ADF DIAG = SINGLE or DUAL
R–ADF ADF–462 063 P4–01, P4–02 ADF DIAG = DUAL

R–ADF ADF–75A 063 P4–03, P4–04 ADF DIAG = DUAL
L–AHC WD#1 AHC–850 060 P4–01, P4–03
L–AHC WD#2 AHC–850 061 P4–01, P4–03

R–AHC WD#1 AHC–850 060 P4–01, P4–03
R–AHC WD#2 AHC–850 061 P4–01, P4–03

AHRS ‘M’ AHRS 270 AHRS
L–ATC TRA–67A 064 P4–03, P4–04
R–ATC TRA–67A 064 P4–03, P4–04

L–BCU BCU–4000 372 P4–03, P4–04
R–BCU BCU–4000 372 P4–03, P4–04
Page 521
34–60–04 12 August, 2009

L–COM VHF–422 074 P4–01, P4–02,
P4–03, P4–04
R–COM VHF–422 074 P4–01, P4–02,
P4–03, P4–04
L–DAU DAU–650 351 P4–01, P4–02,
P4–03, P4–04
R–DAU DAU–650 351 P4–01, P4–02,
P4–03, P4–04
L–DME DME–442 067 P4–01, P4–02,
P4–03, P4–04
R–DME DME–442 067 P4–01, P4–02,
P4–03, P4–04
L–FCC FCC–850 071 P4–01, P4–02,
P4–03, P4–04
R–FCC FCC–850 071 P4–01, P4–02,
P4–03, P4–04
L–GPIRS GPIRS 060 P4–04
L–GPIRS GPIRS 061 P4–04
R–GPIRS GPIRS 060 P4–04
R–GPIRS GPIRS 061 P4–04
GPIRS ‘m’ WD#1 GPIRS 270 429 IRGPS ‘m’
GPOSS ‘m’ WD#1 GPOSS 270 429 GPOSS ‘m’
GPS ‘m’ WD#1 GPS 273 HS429 GPS ‘m’
GPS ‘m’ WD#1 GPS 273 LS429 GPS ‘m’
GPS ‘m’ WD#2 GPS 277 LS429 GPS ‘m’ GPS–950 and GPS–1000 only.
(NA GPS–1200)
L–IOC IOC–851 350 P4–01, P4–02,
P4–03, P4–04
R–IOC IOC–851 350 P4–01, P4–02,
P4–03, P4–04
IRS ‘m’ IRS 270 LS429 IRS ‘m’
Page 522
34–60–04 12 August, 2009

IRS ‘m’ IRS 270 HS429 IRS ‘m’
LCS WD#1 LCS 270 LCS
L–MFD MFD–871 073 P4–01, P4–02,
P4–03, P4–04
R–MFD MFD–871 073 P4–01, P4–02,
P4–03, P4–04
L–MLS MLS 356 P4–01, P4–02 MLS = SINGLE or DUAL
R–MLS MLS 356 P4–01, P4–02 MLS = DUAL
L–NAV VIR–432 075 P4–01, P4–02,
P4–03, P4–04
R–NAV VIR–432 075 P4–01, P4–02,
P4–03, P4–04
OSS ‘m’ WD#1 OSS (2) 270 429 OSS ‘m’
OSS ‘m’ WD#2 OSS (2) 274 429 OSS ‘m’
L–PFD PFD–871 072 P4–01, P4–02,
P4–03, P4–04
R–PFD PFD–871 072 P4–01, P4–02,
P4–03, P4–04
L–RAD ALT RAC–870 077 P4–01, P4–02 RAD ALT = SINGLE OR DUAL
L–RAD ALT ALA–52A 077 P4–03, P4–04 RAD ALT = SINGLE OR DUAL
R–RAD ALT RAC–870 077 P4–01, P4–02 RAD ALT = DUAL
R–RAD ALT ALA–52A 077 P4–03, P4–04 RAD ALT = DUAL
L–STALL WARN SIA–850 355 P4–03, P4–04
R–STALL WARN SIA–850 355 P4–03, P4–04
L–TCAS TPA–81A 054 P4–01, P4–02 TCAS = SINGLE or DUAL
L–TCAS TTR–920 054 P4–03, P4–04 TCAS = SINGLE or DUAL
R–TCAS TPA–81A 054 P4–01, P4–02 TCAS = DUAL
R–TCAS TTR–920 054 P4–03, P4–04 TCAS = DUAL
L–TCN WD#1 TCN7628A 041 P4–03, P4–04
L–TCN WD#2 TCN7628A 042 P4–03, P4–04
L–WXR WD#1 WXT–8XX 354 P4–01, P4–02,
P4–03, P4–04
R–WXR WD#1 WXT–8XX 354 P4–01, P4–02,
P4–03, P4–04
Page 523
34–60–04 12 August, 2009

L–XPDR TDR–94 064 P4–01, P4–02
R–XPDR TDR–94 064 P4–01, P4–02
NOTE: 1. For the Proline 4 buses above designated as P4–xx. The onside bus should be used for
left data in FMS #1 and for right data in FMS #2. The offside bus should be used for right
data in FMS #1 and for left data in FMS #2.
2. Multiple sensors such as GPS, GPOSS, OSS, IRS are shown with the maximum number
in parentheses.
3. Items with no Other Qualifier entry should be configured for monitoring with the specified
data bus.
B. Diagnostic Messages
The maintenance log consists of the system title, date and time of failure, status word (six
hexadecimal digits), type of failure, and the number of times this failure has occurred. This
information is followed by the system title and status word for all configured sensors at the
time of the failure. The diagnostic data may be downloaded to disk as an ASCII file. The text
format of the download file is as follows:
R–AHC WD#2 07OCT93 2015Z ––––––

NOT RECEIVED – UNIT OFF? #005
L–ADC WD#1 600001

R–ADC WD#1 600002
L–AHC WD#1 600001
L–AHC WD#2 600201
R–AHC WD#1 600002
R–AHC WD#2 600202
L–ADF WD#1 ––––––
R–ADF WD#1 600001
The message tables show information for interpreting the status words that are presented on
the MFD and the download file. The tables are listed, in order, by label number and sensor
name. The messages may include messages that are not failure conditions but are status
conditions that will be reported on the ProLine4 diagnostic data pages and in the
maintenance data stored in the FMS.
Page 524
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
The six hexadecimal digits represent bit numbers 32 through 9 of the status message. The
system uses the other eight bits in the status message to identify the system title. The bits
indicate the following types of information:
BIT # INFORMATION
32 Parity bit (odd)

31–30 Status
29–11 Specific combinations of bits set to one that
correspond to individual messages.
10–9 Unit #
Page 525
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
The rows of the message tables show the bits that must be set to one for each status
condition, unit number, and message. Except where indicated on specific tables, the bit
pattern may point to more than one message at a time. In this case the first of these messages
in the table is displayed on the MFD and in the second line of the download file.
“YES” in the Log column means that the system makes a maintenance log entry when it
generates this message.
How to interpret the hexadecimal code:
¾ In the sensor table, find the sensor name and label number corresponding to the system
title shown in the maintenance log.
HEX Bit Wt.
¾ Find the message table for that sensor name and label number. 0
¾ Identify the bit numbers that are set (to one). 1 1
2 2
NOTE: The table at the right shows the bit weights assigned
3 2 1
to each hexadecimal value. The message tables show
the bit numbers for each hexadecimal digit. 4 4
5 4 1
¾ Find the row that shows the bit pattern for bits 31 and 30 and read
6 4 2
the status.
7 4 2 1
¾ Find the row that shows the bit pattern for bits 10 and 9 and read 8 8
the unit number.
9 8 1
¾ Find the row that shows the bit pattern for bits 29 – 11 and read A 8 2
the message and whether the system makes a maintenance log B 8 2 1
entry for this message.
C 8 4
NOTE: The word DASHES indicates that no message was D 8 4 1
received and six dashes are displayed instead of the E 8 4 2
hexadecimal digits. F 8 4 2 1
The word NONE means that there are no one–bits in
the indicated range of bits. Shaded areas are outside the range.
EXAMPLE: Interpret status word 80C00B. We have identified the bit numbers in the
following table.
HEX 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th
DIGIT 8 0 C 0 0 B
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
¾ The 8 in the 1st position indicates that Bit # 32 is set.

¾ The C in the 3rd position indicates that Bit # 24 and 23 are both set.
¾ The B in the 6th position indicates that Bits # 12, 10, and 9 are set.
¾ The 0s in the remaining positions indicate that none of the corresponding bits are set.
Page 526
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
Refer to the following example table to find the meaning of the status word bits.
EXAMPLE SYSTEM TITLE AND LABEL NUMBER
DIGIT 8 0 C 0 0 B
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE NORMAL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 FAIL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
NO NONE NORMAL OPERATION
YES DASHES NOT RECEIVED — UNIT
OFF?
YES 12 MESSAGE TEXT IN

ENGLISH – A
YES 24 23 MESSAGE TEXT IN
ENGLISH – B
¾ Bit # 32 is the parity bit and may be disregarded.

¾ Bits # 31 and 30 are not set. Therefore, in this example, the status is NORMAL. The use
of Bits # 31 and 30 differ among the various systems and labels.
NOTE: The status NCD means no computed data.
¾ Bits # 10 and 9 are both set. Therefore, the status word applies to Unit # 3.
¾ Bit # 12 is set. In this example, this bit corresponds to “MESSAGE TEXT IN ENGLISH
– A.”
¾ Bits # 24 and 23 are set. In this example, these bits correspond to
“MESSAGE TEXT IN ENGLISH – B.”
Page 527
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(1) TCN7628A Label 041 (FIAS)
TCN7628A LABEL 041 (FIAS)
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE NORMAL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 FAIL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?
YES 11 MPU TEST, FPU

ERROR
YES 12 MPU TEST, SHIFT
ERROR
YES 13 PROGRAM CHECKSUM
ERROR
YES 14 RAM TEST ERROR

YES 15 CONFIG EPROM
PARITY ERROR
YES 16 CONFIG EPROM

UNPROG ERROR
YES 17 CONFIG EPROM SETUP

TABLE ERROR
YES 18 CONFIG EPROM

CONST CKSUM ERROR
YES 19 ARINC PORT A RCVR

ERROR
YES 20 ARINC PORT B RCVR

ERROR
YES 21 FUNCTIONAL TEST

FAILED
YES 24 VCO PWR MONITR /
SMO LOCK DETECT
Page 528
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(2) TCN7628A Label 042 (FIAS)
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE FAIL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?
YES 17 POWER SUPPLY FAULT

YES 18 SYNTHESIZER LOCK
FAULT
YES 18 17 TRANSMITTER FAULT
YES 19 VIDEO PROCESSOR
FAULT
YES 19 17 RECEIVER
PROCESSOR FAULT
YES 19 18 DISTANCE
PROCESSOR FAULT
YES 19 18 17 ROM FAILURE
YES 20 RAM FAILURE
FAULT
YES 13 RECEIVER FAULT
YES 14 DISTANCE
PROCESSOR FAULT
YES 15 MICROPROCES–SOR
ROM FAULT
RAM FAULT
YES 26 SYNTHESIZER FAULT
YES 27 TRANSMITTER FAULT
NO 20 17 ARINC BUS B ABSENT
NO 21 ARINC BUS A ABSENT
NO 28 ARINC INPUT BUS B
ABSENT
NO 29 ARINC INPUT BUS A
ABSENT
Page 529
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE FAIL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
NOTE: Only one failure at a time will be found in the bit range 24 through 17.
Page 530
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(3) TPA–81A Label 054 (FIAS)
TPA–81A LABEL 054 (FIAS)
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE NORMAL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 FAIL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?
YES 11 TCAS COMPUTER UNIT

FAIL
YES 12 UPPER ANTENNA FAIL
YES 13 LOWER ANTENNA FAIL
YES 15 14 RAD ALT INPUT #1 AND
#2 FAIL
YES 17 16 MODE S XPDR #1 AND
#2 FAIL
YES 26 25 RA DISPLAY SYS #1 AND
#2 FAIL
YES 20 TCAS SYSTEM FAIL
NO 16 MODE S XPDR #1 FAIL /
INACTIVE
INACTIVE
NO 25 RA DISPLAY SYSTEM #1
FAIL
NO 26 RA DISPLAY SYSTEM #2
FAIL
NO 18 ATTITUDE INPUT FAIL /
INACTIVE
NO 19 MAG HDG INPUT FAIL /
INACTIVE
NO 23 TA DISPLAY SYSTEM #1
FAIL
NO 24 TA DISPLAY SYSTEM #2
FAIL
Page 531
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(4) TTR–920 Label 054
TTR–920 LABEL 054
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE NORMAL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 FAIL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?
YES 11 TCAS COMPUTER UNIT

FAIL
YES 12 UPPER ANTENNA FAIL
YES 13 LOWER ANTENNA FAIL
YES 15 14 RAD ALT INPUT #1 AND
#2 FAIL
YES 17 16 MODE S XPDR #1 AND
#2 FAIL
YES 26 25 RA DISPLAY SYS #1
AND #2 FAIL
YES 20 TCAS SYSTEM FAIL
INACTIVE
INACTIVE
NO 25 RA DISPLAY SYSTEM
#1 FAIL
NO 26 RA DISPLAY SYSTEM
#2 FAIL
NO 18 ATTITUDE INPUT FAIL /
INACTIVE
NO 19 MAG HDG INPUT FAIL /
INACTIVE
NO 23 TA DISPLAY SYSTEM
#1 FAIL
NO 24 TA DISPLAY SYSTEM
#2 FAIL
Page 532
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(5) AHC–850 Label 060
AHC–850 LABEL 060
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE FAIL
30 NCD
31 STIM
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?
YES 11 HEADING INVALID

YES 12 ATTITUDE INVALID
YES 13 RATE COMPARE
INVALID
YES 14 ACCEL COMPARE
INVALID
YES 15 CHECKSUM TEST
INVALID
YES 16 ALIGNMENT INVALID
YES 17 FLUX DETECTOR
INVALID
YES 18 INPUT/OUTPUT
INVALID
YES 19 HARDWARE INVALID
YES 20 W1 FAIL
YES 21 W2 FAIL
YES 23 HI RATE INVALID
YES 24 BOX ORIENTATION
INVALID
YES 25 RAM BACKUP INVALID
NO 22 INITIALIZATION MODE
NO 26 WRAP AROUND
ENABLE
NO 27 DISCRETE IN –
COMPASS MODE ON
NO 28 DISCRETE IN – DG
MODE
NO 29 AIR DATA INPUT NOT
PRESENT
Page 533
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(6) GPIRS Label 060 (FIAS)
GPIRS LABEL 060 (FIAS)
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE NORMAL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 FAIL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
NO 24 NORMAL OPERATION
OFF?

YES 12 I/O PROCESSOR FAULT
YES 13 SENSOR LSI FAULT
YES 14 MEMORY FAULT
YES 15 GPS FAULT
YES 16 ACCELERATION
RESIDUAL FAULT
YES 17 GYRO FAULT
YES 18 GYRO FREQUENCY
AND BIAS FAULT
YES 19 TEMPERATURE
SENSORS FAULT
YES 20 SYSTEM TESTS FAULT
YES 21 WATCHDOG TIMER
FAULT
YES 22 DISCRETE I/O FAULT
YES 23 CENTRAL PROCESSOR
UNIT FAULT
YES 24 A/D OR MUX FAULT
NO 27 AT HIGH LATITUDE
NO 28 HIGH LATITUDE
ALIGNMENT
NO 29 NO COOLING AIR
Page 534
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(7) AHC–850 Label 061
AHC–850 LABEL 061
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE FAIL
30 NCD
31 STIM
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
NO DASHES NOT RECEIVED — UNIT
OFF?
NO 29 TEST MODE
NO 28 REV MODE 1
NO 11 DISCRETE IN
AIRDATVAL OFF
NO 12 DIGITAL AIR DATA
INVALID
NO 13 ANALOG AIR DATA
INVALID
NO 21 ROLL ONLY STIM
MODE
NO 22 PITCH ONLY STIM
MODE
NO 22 21 HEADING ONLY STIM
MODE
NO 23 ROLL RATE STIM
MODE
NO 23 21 PITCH RATE STIM
MODE
NO 23 22 YAW RATE STIM MODE
NO 23 22 21 LONG ACCEL STIM
MODE
NO 24 LAT ACCEL STIM MODE
NO 24 21 NORMAL ACCEL STIM
MODE
NO 24 22 ALL DATA STIM MODE
NO 20 DISCRETE IN – STIM
MODE ON
Page 535
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(8) ADC–850 Label 062
ADC–850 LABEL 062
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE FAIL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?
YES 13 ALTITUDE
COMPUTATION
INVALID
YES 14 IAS COMPUTATION
INVALID
YES 15 9 ADC #2 ARINC FAIL
YES 15 10 ADC #1 ARINC FAIL
YES 16 FIFO FAULT
YES 17 9 ADC #2 PRO LINE BUS
ABSENT
YES 17 10 ADC #1 PRO LINE BUS
ABSENT
YES 18 ARP PRO LINE BUS
ABSENT
YES 19 ANALOG I/O FAULT
YES 20 STATIC PRESS (PS)
SENSOR FAULT
YES 21 DYN. PRESS (QC)
SENSOR FAULT
YES 22 BATTERY FAIL
YES 24 ADC CONFIGURATION
FAULT
YES 25 ADM PS
YES 26 ADM QS
YES 27 PS COEFFICIENT
PROM FAULT
YES 28 QC COEFFICIENT
PROM FAULT
Page 536
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(9) ADF–462 Label 063
ADF–462 LABEL 063
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE FAIL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?
YES 21 17 PORT A SERIAL BUS

FAULT
YES 21 18 PORT A ADF
FREQUENCY FAULT
YES 21 18 17 PORT A INVALID
FREQUENCY FAULT
YES 21 19 PORT B SERIAL BUS
FAULT
YES 21 19 17 PORT B ADF
FREQUENCY FAULT
YES 21 19 18 PORT B INVALID
FREQUENCY FAULT
YES 21 19 18 17 PL–II BUS NOT
RECEIVED
YES 21 20 PL–II ADF FREQUENCY
INVALID
YES 21 20 17 PL–II INVALID
FREQUENCY FAULT
YES 22 BEARING UPDATE
TIME OUT
YES 22 18 B+ FAILURE
YES 22 18 17 B– FAILURE
YES 22 19 RAM FAILURE
YES 22 19 17 A/D FAILURE
YES 22 19 18 SIN MODULATION
FAILURE
YES 22 19 18 17 COS MODULATION
FAILURE
YES 22 20 SMO LOCK FAILURE
YES 22 20 17 ANTENNA POWER
FAILURE
Page 537
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
ADF–462 LABEL 063
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE FAIL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
NO 22 21 LOW SIGNAL LEVEL
NO 22 21 17 DETECTOR OUT OF
LOCK
NO 22 21 18 AGC VOLTAGE OUT OF
RANGE
NO 22 21 18 17 HF KEY LINE LOW
NO 22 21 19 DC SIN FAILURE
NO 22 21 19 17 DC COS FAILURE
Page 538
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(10) ADF–75A Label 063 (FIAS)
ADF–75A LABEL 063 (FIAS)
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE FAIL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?
YES 11 LRU FAIL

YES 12 ANTENNA FAILURE
YES 14 TUNING FAILURE
Page 539
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(11) TDR–94 Label 064

DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE FAIL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?
YES 11 TRANSPONDER FAIL

YES 12 RAM ERROR
YES 13 ROM ERROR
YES 14 INPUT BUS B ABSENT
YES 15 INPUT BUS A ABSENT
YES 18 CAD RAM FAIL
YES 19 CAD ROM FAIL
YES 20 INPUT BUS B ABSENT
YES 21 INPUT BUS A ABSENT
Page 540
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(12) TRA–67A Label 064 (FIAS)
TRA–67A LABEL 064 (FIAS)
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE FAIL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?

YES 12 TOP ANTENNA
FAILURE
YES 13 BOTTOM ANTENNA
FAILURE
YES 26 25 ALTITUDE INPUTS
FAILED
NO 25 ALTITUDE INPUT #1
FAIL
NO 26 ALTITUDE INPUT #2
FAIL
Page 541
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(13) GPIRS Label 065 (FIAS)
GPIRS LABEL 065 (FIAS)
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE NORM
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?
YES 9 RAM FAULT

YES 10 PROM FAULT
YES 17 CPU FAIL
YES 18 FPU FAIL
YES 19 STACK OVERFLOW
YES 21 FREQUENCY LOOP
FAIL
YES 23 TIME MARK FAIL
YES 28 SHARED RAM FAIL
NO 11 NO 5301 DATA
NO 12 5301 DATA INVALID
NO 14 ARINC DIFFERENTIAL
INTEG FAIL
NO 15 ARINC GPSSU DATA
ERRORS
NO 16 TIME MARK
MISCOMPARE
NO 20 AUTONOMOUS ARINC
DATA TIMEOUT
NO 22 CLOCK PHASE
MISCOMPARE
NO 24 NO AUTONOMOUS
DATA
NO 25 CLOCK PHASE
DIFFERENCE
NO 27 GPS NOT PRESENT
Page 542
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(14) ME–422 Label 067
ME–422 LABEL 067
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE FAIL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?

YES 18 SYNTHESIZER LOCK
FAULT
YES 18 17 TRANSMITTER FAULT
FAULT
YES 19 17 RECEIVER
PROCESSOR FAULT
YES 19 18 DISTANCE
PROCESSOR FAULT
YES 19 18 17 ROM FAILURE
YES 20 RAM FAILURE
FAULT
YES 13 RECEIVER FAULT
YES 14 DISTANCE
PROCESSOR FAULT
ROM FAULT
RAM FAULT
YES 26 SYNTHESIZER FAULT
YES 27 TRANSMITTER FAULT
NO 20 17 ARINC BUS B ABSENT
NO 21 ARINC BUS A ABSENT
NO 28 ARINC INPUT BUS B
ABSENT
NO 29 ARINC INPUT BUS A
ABSENT
Page 543
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
ME–422 LABEL 067
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE FAIL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
Page 544
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(15) FCC–850 Label 071
FCC–850 LABEL 071
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE FAIL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?
YES 14 FCC FAILURE

YES 18 CONFIG STRAP
INCOMPATIBILITY
YES 22 TRIM SYSTEM FAILURE
YES 23 CROSS CHANNEL
COMM FAILURE
YES 24 A–IOC/FCC COMM
FAILURE
YES 25 AHRS/FCC COMM
FAILURE
YES 26 MSP
COMMUNICATIONS
FAILURE
YES 27 B–IOC/FCC COMM
FAILURE
Page 545
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(16) PFD–871 Label 072
PFD–871 LABEL 072
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE FAIL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?
YES 29 GRAPHICS
GENERATOR FAIL
YES 28 DEFLECTION
AMPLIFIER FAIL
YES 27 VIDEO AMPLIFIER FAIL
YES 26 DISPLAY PROCESSOR
FAIL
YES 25 I/O PROCESSOR FAIL
YES 24 MEMORY MODULE FAIL
YES 23 LOW VOLTAGE POWER
SUPPLY FAIL
YES 22 HIGH VOLTAGE
POWER SUPPLY FAIL
YES 21 ARINC WRAPAROUND
FAIL
Page 546
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(17) MFD–871 Label 073
MFD–871 LABEL 073
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE FAIL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?
YES 29 GRAPHICS
GENERATOR FAIL
YES 28 DEFLECTION
AMPLIFIER FAIL
YES 27 VIDEO AMPLIFIER FAIL
YES 26 DISPLAY PROCESSOR
FAIL
YES 25 I/O PROCESSOR FAIL
YES 24 MEMORY MODULE FAIL
YES 23 LOW VOLTAGE POWER
SUPPLY FAIL
YES 22 HIGH VOLTAGE
POWER SUPPLY FAIL
YES 21 ARINC WRAPAROUND
FAIL
Page 547
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(18) VHF–422 Label 074
VHF–422 LABEL 074
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE FAIL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?
YES 17 5 VOLT LOW

YES 18 5 VOLT HIGH
YES 18 17 12 VOLT LOW
YES 19 12 VOLT HIGH
YES 19 18 17 NOISE SQUELCH
WITHOUT SIGNAL
YES 20 NOISE SQUELCH WITH
SIGNAL
YES 22 17 TUNE VOLTAGE HIGH
FREQUENCY
YES 22 18 TUNE VOLTAGE LOW
FREQUENCY
YES 22 18 17 L.O. INJECTION LOW
YES 22 19 NO SIGNAL AGC
YES 22 19 17 DELTA AGC WITH
SIGNAL
YES 19 17 SYNTHESIZER NOT
LOCKED
YES 21 19 18 LOW FORWARD
POWER
YES 21 19 18 17 TRANSMITTER
TEMPERATURE
YES 22 19 18 REFLECTED POWER
YES 24 21 20 PORT A ARINC INPUT
ABSENT
YES 24 21 20 17 PORT B ARINC INPUT
ABSENT
NO 21 17 LBL 30 INPUT INVALID
OR ABSENT
NO 21 18 INVALID FREQUENCY
Page 548
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
VHF–422 LABEL 074
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE FAIL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
NO 21 19 INT. CSDB
FREQUENCY
NO 21 19 17 FREQUENCY OUT OF
LIMITS
NO 22 19 18 17 TRANSMITTER TIMED
OUT
Page 549
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(19) VIR–432 Label 075
VIR–432 LABEL 075
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE FAIL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
YES DASHES NOT RECEIVED – UNIT
OFF?
YES 18 RAM FAIL

YES 18 17 NO RECEIVED CSDB
SYNC
YES 19 NO RECEIVED CSDB
FREQUENCY
YES 19 17 ILLEGAL NAV
FREQUENCY
YES 23 NO PORT A DATA
YES 23 17 NO PORT A
FREQUENCY
YES 23 18 NO PORT B DATA
YES 23 18 17 NO PORT B
FREQUENCY
YES 23 19 NO CSDB RCVD FROM
INST MICRO
YES 20 17 PORT 1 I/O BUS
FAILURE
YES 21 PORT 2 I/O BUS
FAILURE
YES 21 17 A/D BUSY
YES 21 18 A/D FAIL REFERENCE
TEST
YES 21 18 17 +13 VDC FAILED TEST
YES 21 19 –13 VDC FAILED TEST
YES 21 19 18 17 VOR SYNTHESIZER
NOT LOCKED
YES 22 21 MARKER FAILURE
YES 22 19 17 LOC SYNTHESIZER
NOT LOCKED
YES 22 20 GS SYNTHESIZER NOT
LOCKED
Page 550
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
VIR–432 LABEL 075
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE FAIL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
NO 19 18 ILS LINE NOT EQ TO
DLY’D ILS
NO 21 20 AFC NOT LOCKED
NO 21 20 17 NO 30 HZ REFERENCE
SIGNAL
NO 22 NO 30 HZ VARIABLE
SIGNAL
NO 22 19 18 LOCALIZER SIGNAL
LEVEL LOW
NO 22 20 17 GS SIGNAL LEVEL TOO
LOW
NO 29 RADIO FAULT
WARNING
NO 28 FREQUENCY FAULT
WARNING
NO 27 GS FAULT WARNING
NO 26 LOC FAULT WARNING
NO 25 VOR FAULT WARNING
Page 551
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(20) ALA–52A Label 077 (FIAS)
ALA–52A LABEL 077 (FIAS)
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE FAIL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
NO 31 30 NORMAL OPERATION
YES NONE NOT RECEIVED – UNIT
OFF?
YES 11 LRU FAIL
YES 12 TRANSMIT ANTENNA
FAIL
YES 13 INDICATOR FAIL
YES 15 RECEIVE ANTENNA
FAIL
Page 552
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(21) RAC–870 Label 077
RAC–870 LABEL 077
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE FAIL
30 NORMAL
31 TEST
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?
YES 11 ALTIMETER FAIL

YES 12 RAM FAILURE
YES 13 ROM FAILURE
YES 17 ALTIMETER FAIL
YES 18 RAM FAILURE
YES 19 ROM FAILURE
NO 30 RADAR ALTITUDE OUT
OF RANGE
Page 553
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(22) AHRS Label 270
AHRS LABEL 270
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE NORMAL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?
(23) GPIRS Label 270 (HS 429)

GPIRS LABEL 270 (HS 429)
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE FAIL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?
NO 12 ATTITUDE MODE
NO 11 ALIGN MODE
Page 554
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(24) IRS Label 270 (HS 429)
IRS LABEL 270 (HS 429)
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE FAIL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?
NO 12 ATTITUDE MODE
NO 11 ALIGN MODE
Page 555
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(25) IRS Label 270 (LS 429)
IRS LABEL 270 (LS 429)
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE NORMAL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 FAIL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?
Page 556
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(26) LCS Label 270
LCS LABEL 270
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE NORMAL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?
YES 29 22 PROGRAM CHECKSUM

FAIL
YES 29 23 ARINC SELFTEST FAIL
YES 29 24 MEMORY SELFTEST
FAIL
Page 557
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(27) GPIRS Label 273
GPIRS LABEL 273
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE NORMAL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 FAIL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?
YES 28 27 26 GPS FAULT

NO NONE GPS SELF TEST
NO 26 GPS INITIALIZATION
NO 27 GPS ACQUISITION
NO 28 GPS ALTITUDE AIDING
Page 558
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(28) GPS Label 273 (HS 429)
GPS LABEL 273 (HS 429)
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE NORMAL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 FAIL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?

NO 28 26 GPS DIFFERENTIAL
MODE
Page 559
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(29) GPS Label 273 (LS 429)
GPS LABEL 273 (LS 429)
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE NORMAL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 FAIL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?

NO 28 26 GPS DIFFERENTIAL
MODE
Page 560
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(30) GPIRS Label 274
GPIRS LABEL 274
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE NORMAL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 FAIL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?
YES 28 27 26 HYBRID GPS FAULT

NO NONE HYBRID GPS SELF
TEST
NO 26 HYBRID GPS
INITIALIZATION
NO 27 HYBRID GPS
ACQUISITION
NO 28 HYBRID GPS ALTITUDE
AIDING
Page 561
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(31) GPS Label 277 (GPS–950 and GPS–1000 Only; NA GPS–1200)

GPS LABEL 277 (GPS–950 AND GPS–1000 ONLY; NA GPS–1200)
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE NORM
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
NO DASHES NOT RECEIVED — UNIT
OFF?
Page 562
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(32) IOC–851 Label 350
IOC–851 LABEL 350
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE FAIL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?
YES 11 MEMORY REGION 1

FAULT
FAULT
FAULT
FAULT
FAULT
YES 16 UART/MUX DATA BUS
FAULT
YES 19 MUX WRAP AROUND
TEST FAULT
YES 20 H/W PRIORITIZER TEST
FAULT
YES 21 HEARTBEAT MONITOR
TEST FAULT
YES 22 LOCAL STRAPS TEST
FAULT
YES 23 IAPS SYSTEM STRAP
PLUG FAULT
YES 24 CPU TEST FAULT
YES 25 TEST VECTOR
SIMULATION
YES 26 INPUT QUEUE
OVERRUN ERROR
YES 27 OUTPUT QUEUE
OVERRUN ERROR
YES 28 LOCAL POWER
SUPPLY OVERHEAT
YES 29 OFFSIDE POWER
SUPPLY OVERHEAT
Page 563
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
IOC–851 LABEL 350
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE FAIL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
NO 17 INITIALIZATION MODE
Page 564
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(33) DAU–650 Label 351
DAU–650 LABEL 351
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE FAIL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?
YES 25 DAU ROM FAIL

YES 28 DAU INTERNAL RAM
FAIL
YES 26 DAU EXTERNAL RAM
FAIL
YES 27 DISCRETE MUX FAIL
YES 13 DAU CHANNEL FAIL
YES 29 DAU CROSS CHANNEL
FAIL
YES 17 SERIAL GP BUS INPUT
FAIL
YES 20 SERIAL AOA BUS
INPUT FAIL
YES 19 SPARE SERIAL BUS
INPUT FAIL
Page 565
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(34) WXT–8XX Label 354
WXT–8XX LABEL 354
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE FAIL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?
YES 25 TRANSMITTER /
RECEIVER FAULT
YES 24 ANTENNA FAULT
YES 23 CONTROL FAULT
YES 22 ATTITUDE INPUT
FAULT
YES 21 CALIBRATION FAULT
(T/R)
YES 20 CONTROL BUS
ABSENT
YES 19 DEGRADED VARIANCE
PROCESSING
Page 566
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(35) SIA–850 Label 355 (FIAS)
SIA–850 LABEL 355 (FIAS)
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE FAIL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?
YES 25 ROM FAILED

YES 26 RAM FAILED
YES 27 UART FAILED
Page 567
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(36) MLS Label 356
MLS LABEL 356
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE NORMAL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 FAIL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?
YES 11 RPU FAILURE

YES 12 ANTENNA #1 FAILURE
YES 24 PROGRAM INPUTS
FAIL
YES 21 WARNING FLAGS FAIL
YES 20 ANALOG DEVIATIONS
FAIL
NO 16 FREQ / FUNCTION
DATABUS INACTIVE
NO 18 DME / TACAN DIST
INPUT INACTIVE
Page 568
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(37) BCU–4000 Label 372 (FIAS)
BCU–4000 LABEL 372 (FIAS)
DIGIT
Bit Wt. 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit # 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATUS
DASHES FAIL
NONE FAIL
30 NCD
31 TEST
31 30 NORMAL
9 Unit #1
10 Unit #2
10 9 Unit #3
LOG MESSAGE
OFF?
YES 13 BCU CHANNEL FAIL

YES 25 BCU ROM FAIL
YES 26 BCU EXTERNAL RAM
FAIL
YES 27 BCU DISCRETE MUX
FAIL
YES 28 BCU INTERNAL RAM
FAIL
NO 15 L–RNAV–1 BUS INPUT
INACTIVE
NO 16 L–RNAV–2 BUS INPUT
INACTIVE
NO 17 LEFT SERIAL GP BUS
INACTIVE
NO 18 RIGHT SERIAL GP BUS
INACTIVE
Page 569
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
7. Sensor checkouts
We assume that you will do these checkouts in the sequence shown. However, you may
perform each checkout individually or in any desired sequence. We wrote the instructions as
though the CDU is on. You may choose to power off the CDU after each test. If so you must
then make sure you have the correct CDU display before starting the next checkout.
A. Checkout of Inertial Sensor Status and Heading Displays
NOTE: If an Inertial Sensor System (ISS) is not installed, bypass this checkout and
proceed to the OSS checkout.
To perform this checkout, a known heading reference must be used. To obtain that reference,
align aircraft with heading reference such as a compass rose or ramp or hangar heading
marking. Where none of those are available, an accurate wet compass corrected for magnetic
variation may be used as a reference.
IRS to be OFF initially.
(1) Select DATA SENSOR Page.
(2) Display IRS.
(3) With the IRS Off, check that the IRS STATUS line on the CDU shows “FAILED”.
(4) Turn the IRS System MSU (Mode Selector Unit) to ALIGN or NAV (as appropriate).
Check that STATUS shows ALIGN. Pass Fail
NOTE: ALIGN will be displayed for about 3 to 15 minutes while the IRS
aligns itself.
(5) Select Data 3/4 using PREV or NEXT Keys.
(6) On FMS–1 CDU, depress line next to FMS position. The Define Position page will
be displayed.
(7) Accept the present position by depressing [ENTER] twice, then the ACCEPT [5L]
line select key, provided the displayed position is correct. This action will send “Set
Lat” and “Set Long” data to the IRS telling it where it is located. This data is required
to complete the IRS ALIGN process. If the IRS does not have this data, the ALIGN
annunciator on the MSU will flash.
(8) After alignment is complete, select NAV on the MSU if it was not selected above.
(9) Check that CDU STATUS shows NAV. Pass Fail
(10) Verify correct CDU HDG IN by comparing it to the known heading reference.
(11) Check that the HDG (Heading) displayed on the CDU corresponds the heading
displayed on the HSI. Pass Fail
NOTE: NCU and HSI must both receive IRS heading information for the CDU
vs HSI check to be done. Heading shown on the ISDU (Inertial Sensor
Display Unit) may be referenced if HSI does not receive IRS heading.
Page 570
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
NOTE: System status, i.e., ALIGN, NAV, ATTITUDE, will only be displayed
if those INS/INU data words are being transmitted to the NCU.
NOTE: If a second IRS is installed, repeat above procedure by selecting IRS 2
rather than the IRS 1. Then repeat for third IRS if present.
If a second IRS is not installed, proceed to Checkout of OSS.
B. Checkout of Loran C Sensor
(1) Select DATA SENSOR Page.
(2) Display LCS.
(3) Record STATUS (Nav, Noncert or Search):
(4) Record LOA (Inside or Outside):
(5) Record GRIs and Stations received:
NOTE: When outside LOA, GRIs or stations may not be received.
C. Checkout of Each Sensor’s Position Vs CDU–Calculated Position
(2) Select IRS 1 (if installed).
(3) Compare the IRS lat/long coordinates to the POS lat/long. Those coordinates should
be approximately equal as confirmed by small or 0 numbers on the DIFF line.
Pass Fail
Record any differences: ______________________________________________
NOTE: If POS coordinates are not approximately equal to the actual
coordinates of the aircraft, compare the sensor coordinates to the
actual position, not CDU computed POS.
(4) Select the next sensor in order (IRS 2, IRS 3, OSS 1, OSS 2 or LCS).
(5) Compare the lat/long as above.
¾ IRS 2 Pass Fail
¾ IRS 3 Pass Fail
¾ OSS 1 Pass Fail
¾ OSS 2 Pass Fail
¾ LCS Pass Fail
Record any differences: ______________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
(6) Repeat as necessary for the remaining sensors.
Page 571
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
D. Strut Switch Position Check

(1) With all other equipment operating, turn on CDU and initialize OSS Sensor(s).
(2) Display the OSS DATA Page.
(3) In the ADDRESS ENTER code 00AF. After a brief time the Strut Switch Position
Data will be displayed in the OSS Field.
(4) Interpret that data as given below. If the aircraft is on ground, one of the characters in
the GND column below must be displayed. If the aircraft is flying or the strut switch
has been manually opened, one of the characters in the AIR Column must be
displayed.
Pass Fail
AIR GND
0 2
1 3
6 4
7 5
8 A
9 B
E C
F D
NOTE: Only the 3rd digit of the OSS Field (XXXX) is applicable.
Example: Address: 00AF
OSS Field: 0042
3rd digit: 4 = GND
Page 572
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
E. NAV Receiver Shut Down
With the CDU in the RNAV mode, the following responses to NAV receiver shut down will
occur.
(1) Shut down NAV Receiver. MSG Key will flash.
(2) When MSG Key is depressed, “TUNE NAV AID” will be displayed.
Pass Fail
NOTE: The following are typical equipment responses to Nav receiver shutdown.
Responses will vary depending on the equipment. Consult equipment manuals
for proper response.
(3) On HSI, if present, NAV Flag will drop. Pass Fail
(4) On EFIS, if present, LRN MODE Flag will be displayed.
Pass Fail
(5) Shut down remaining aircraft equipment.
(6) Repeat procedure for other FMS if present.
F. Checkout of UASC Radio Reference Sensor (RRS)

NOTE: The following Checkout Procedures may be accomplished in flight and all
data can be compared to aircraft DME, VOR and (if applicable) TACAN.
(2) Select DME Status Page.
(3) Using Line Select Key, select MAN DME.
(4) Depress CDU LIST Key.
(5) Select an in–range DME Station from the menu.
(6) Select DME using Line Select Key.
(7) Compare distance displayed on CDU with aircraft DME Distance.
Pass Fail
(9) Select VOR Status Page.
(10) Tune test station by frequency (Test) or by ID (line select key adjacent to IDENT).
Check radial displayed on CDU for reasonableness.
Pass Fail
(11) Display DATA Page 2 (if applicable).
(12) Select TACAN Status Page.
(13) Check radial displayed on CDU for reasonableness.
Page 573
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(14) Compare distance displayed on CDU with aircraft TACAN distance.
Pass Fail
G. Checkout of GPIRS
(1) GPIRS Status – Page 1.
This page is accessed from DATA Page 2, and provides data on the GPS and IRS
Sensors.
NOTE: This illustration reflects SCN 404.0. The page layout may be different
with other SCNs.
Status (GPS)
¾ HYB GPS position alone is being used without IRS aiding.
¾ NAV GPS position alone is being used without IRS aiding.
¾ ALT Altitude aiding mode (ADC altitude being used to supplement
poor satellite geometry).
¾ INIT GPS/IRS is initializing position.
¾ ACQ GPS is acquiring satellites for navigation.
¾ TEST GPS is in test mode.
¾ FAIL GPS has failed, or no 429 data is being received.
Status (IRS)
¾ NAV IRS has correctly aligned and is in NAV.
¾ ALIGN IRS is in alignment mode.
¾ FAIL No ARINC 429 data received from GPIRS, or else GPIRS is
sending FAIL status on 429 bus.
¾ ATT IRS is in ATTITUDE mode. Sensor will not be used for
navigation.
This page will also show the number of satellites being tracked, as well as the
North and East component velocities from the IRS, GPS, FMS, and HYBrid
Page 574
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
IRS/GPS.
¾ SET HDG IRS heading may be initialized by entering a heading in
(2R) this field. The value entered is displayed and transmitted
on ARINC 429 label 043 for 12 seconds then dashes are
displayed in the field again and label stops transmitting.
Used for setting IRS heading when in ATT mode. Will
indicate ° for magnetic and T for true heading.
The GPS and IRS can be independently selected or deselected from this
page.
(2) GPIRS Comparison Page.
This page is similar to DATA 3/4, but only HYBrid, GPS, and IRS positions are
shown for comparison to FMS position. Pressing a line select key next to GPS, HYB,
or IRS will display that position in the upper right hand fields, and show the
difference from the FMS position.
(3) GPIRS Diagnostics Page.
This page shows contents of ARINC 429 labels from GPIRS as shown in left hand
column. Data is in hexadecimal and is used for diagnostic purposes only.
(4) GPIRS Diagnostics
GPIRS BUS 270 – IRS Status
ARINC 429 Hi Speed
Transmission rate: 500 milliseconds.
Page 575
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
Bit 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
21098765432109876543210987654321
P MM Status Bits SDI 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1
Status bit meanings, if set to one:

Bit 17 :: IRS on dc power.
Bit 15 :: IRS attitude is invalid, IRS is failed.
Bit 13 :: IRS in NAV (navigation mode).
Bit 12 :: IRS in ARR (attitude mode).
Bit 11 :: IRS in ALIGN mode.
Where MM is: 00 = valid; else = invalid.
Where P is bit which causes sum of 32 bits to be odd.
GPIRS BUS 273 – Autonomous GPS Status
ARINC 429 Hi Speed
Bit 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
21098765432109876543210987654321
P MM Status Bits 00111101

Bit 29 :: Reserved.
Bit 28–26 :: GPS mode:
000 = Self Test.
001 = Initialization.
010 = Acquisition.
011 = Navigation.
100 = Altitude Aiding.
101 = Spare.
110 = Spare.
111 = Fault.
Bit 25–24 :: Spare.
Bit 23–20 :: Number of Satellites Tracked.
Bit 19–16 :: Number of Satellites Visible.
Bit 15 :: Secondary IRS/FMS Source used.
Bit 14 :: IRS/FMS Not Present.
Bit 13 :: Secondary DADS Source used.
Bit 12 :: DADS not present.
Page 576
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
Where MM is: 00 = valid.
else = invalid.
GPIRS BUS 274 – Hybrid GPS Status
ARINC 429 Hi Speed
Bit 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
21098765432109876543210987654321
P MM Status Bits 00111101

Bit 29 :: Reserved.
Bit 28–26 :: GPS mode:
000 = Self Test.
001 = Initialization.
010 = Acquisition.
011 = Navigation.
100 = Altitude Aiding.
101 = Spare.
110 = Spare.
111 = Fault.
Bit 23–20 :: Number of Satellites Tracked.
Bit 19 :: Active GPSSU Source:
0 = GPSSU #1.
1 = GPSSU #2.
Bit 18–17 :: GPSSU #1 Validity:
00 = Valid.
01 = Inactive.
10 = Functional Test.
11 = Fail.
Bit 16–15 :: GPSSU #2 Validity:
00 = Valid.
01 = Inactive.
10 = Functional Test.
11 = Fail.
Where MM is: 00 = valid.
else = invalid.
Page 577
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
H. Checkout of UASC GPS
Except where indicated, this checkout applies to GPS–950, GPS–1000, and GPS–1200.
(1) Test Preparation.
(a) Apply aircraft power to the FMS and GPS sensor(s) systems.
(b) Power up the FMS and initialize by verifying or entering proper date, time
and present position.
(c) Access DATA 2/n page (sensor select page) and select GPS. GPS 1/3 page
will appear.
(d) Status should be either ACQ (acquiring) or INIT (initializing).
NOTE: At times, it may take up to 30 minutes to acquire a valid almanac from the
satellites present.
(e) Wait until NAV appears on GPS 1/3 status page.
(2) GPS1 1/3 Status Page.
GPS–1200 does not

support ARINC
Label 277.
Label 277 applies
only to GPS–950
and GPS–1000
NOTE: This illustration is for non–FIAS configuration and reflects SCN

404.0, 405.X and, 600.X. The page layout may be different with other
SCNs.
GPS–1200 does not

support ARINC
Label 277.
Label 277 applies
only to GPS–950
and GPS–1000
NOTE: This illustration is for FIAS configuration and reflects SCN 404.0,
405.X, and 600.X. The page layout may be different with other SCNs.
Page 578
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(a) GPS Status:
¾ NAV – GPS is in NAV mode.
¾ ACQ – GPS is acquiring satellites.
¾ INIT – GPS is initializing its position from internal almanac.
¾ ALT – GPS is using altitude to supplement poor satellite geometry.
¾ TEST – GPS is in TEST mode.
¾ FAIL – GPS has failed, or 429 data not received from GPS.
(b) GPS Q factors – These are error estimates in tenths of nautical miles (i.e., a Q
factor of 01 is equal to 0.1 NM circular error estimate). A Q factor of 99
indicates that the sensor is not usable by the FMS.
(c) # SATELLITES – The number of satellites currently being tracked by the
GPS.
This page shows ARINC 429 data on labels 273 and 277 from the GPS
sensor. The operator may enter a five–digit hex address in the ADDRESS
field to view four–digit hex data in DATA field. This page is to be used for
diagnostics and troubleshooting. HDOP and VDOP are for reference only.
(d) SELECT/DESELECT GPS – Used to manually select or deselect the GPS
sensor.
Page 579
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(e) Label 273 GPS Sensor Status (discrete)
APPROX. RESOLUTION: N/A UNITS: N/A
MAXIMUM VALUE: N/A DATA FORMAT: TBD
MINIMUM VALUE: N/A FULL SCALE: N/A
FIELD BIT BIT DESCRIPTION

NAME WEIGHT NUMBER
LABEL 01 1 CODE = 273 OCTAL

02 0
03 1
04 1
05 1
06 0
07 1
08 1
6th 1 09 0 SPARE
2 10 0 SPARE
4 11 0 405.X 600.X MSB of Satellite Visible (16X)
1 > 15 visible; 0 ≤ 15 visible
8 12 0 DADC STATUS
0 = PRESENT; 1 = NOT PRESENT
5th 1 13 X DADC SOURCE

0 = PRIMARY; 1 = SECONDARY
2 14 X FMS STATUS
0 = PRESENT; 1 = NOT PRESENT
4 15 X FMS SOURCE
0 = PRIMARY; 1 = SECONDARY
8 16 X NUMBER OF SATELLITES VISIBLE (1X) LSB
4th 1 17 X NUMBER OF SATELLITES VISIBLE (2X)

2 18 X NUMBER OF SATELLITES VISIBLE (4X
4 19 X NUMBER OF SATELLITES VISIBLE (8X) MSB
(See Bit Number 11.)
8 20 X NUMBER OF SATELLITES TRACKED (1X) LSB
3rd 1 21 X NUMBER OF SATELLITES TRACKED (2X)
Page 580
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
FIELD BIT BIT DESCRIPTION

NAME WEIGHT NUMBER
2 22 X NUMBER OF SATELLITES TRACKED (4X)
4 23 X NUMBER OF SATELLITES TRACKED (8X)

MSB (See Bit Number 29.)
8 24 X SPARE
2nd 1 25 X SPARE
2 26 X GPS OPERATIONAL MODE Note 1
1st 1 29 X 405.X 600.X MSB OF SATELLITES

TRACKED (16X) 1 > 15 tracked; 0 ≤ 15 tracked
2 30 X SSM Note
4 31 X SSM Note
8 32 X PARITY (ODD)
NOTE: The meanings of the bit combinations for GPS OPERATIONAL MODE and
SSM are shown in the following tables.
GPS OPERATIONAL MODE

BIT 28 BIT 27 BIT 26 MEANING
0 0 0 SELF TEST MODE
0 0 1 INITIALIZATION MODE
0 1 0 ACQUISITION MODE
0 1 1 NAVIGATION MODE
1 0 0 ALTITUDE AIDNIG MODE
1 0 1 SPARE
1 1 0 SPARE
1 1 1 FAULT
Page 581
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
SSM
BIT 31 BIT 30 MEANING
0 0 NORMAL OPERATION
0 1 NO COMPUTED DATA
1 0 FUNCTIONAL TEST
1 1 NOT USED
(f) Label 277 GPS Diagnostics

This label applies to the GPS–950 and GPS–1000 only.
It does not apply to the GPS–1200.
APPROX. RESOLUTION: N/A UNITS: N/A
MAXIMUM VALUE: N/A DATA FORMAT: TBD
MINIMUM VALUE: N/A FULL SCALE: N/A
DIGIT BIT WEIGHT BIT NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 Octal Label = 277

2 2
1 3
2 4
4 5
1 6
2 7
4 8
6th 1 9 Unused
2 10 Unused
4 11 NavCore V Sig Proc Code Gen/Inj Failure
8 12 NavCore V Sig Proc VCO Failure
5th 1 13 NavCore V Multifunction I/F Failure
2 14 NavCore V Preprocessor Failure
4 15 NavCore V Dig Sig Proc (DSP) Failure
8 16 NavCore Hi/Lo Order RAM Failure
Page 582
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
DIGIT BIT WEIGHT BIT NO. DESCRIPTION

4th 1 17 NavCore ROM Failure
2 18 ARINC Receiver Parity Errors
4 19 Noisy Interrupt Exception
8 20 Spurious Interrupt Exception
3rd 1 21 Unitialized Interrupt Exception

2 22 Bus or Addr Error, Divide by Zero Trap
4 23 Msg Neg or Not Ack from NavCore V
8 24 Almanac Data or Age Msg no Rcvd by NavCore V
2nd 1 25 Test, Tmark, Sat Vis Msg No Rcvd fm NavCore V
2 26 ARINC Transmitter or Receiver Failure
4 27 RAM Address or Data Storage Fail
8 28 PROM Checksum Failure
1st 1 29 Unreasonable Alt or Dup Sat Elev. and Az
(error of 7500')
2 30 SSM 01 = Invalid
4 31 SSM 10 = Unused
8 32 Parity Bit
Page 583
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(3) GPS1 2/3 and 3/3 Pages.
These pages apply to GPS–950 and GPS–1000.
These pages display the twelve satellites most likely to be in current use by the GPS.
Each line displays SV# (Satellite Vehicle Number), azimuth will always be true
direction from the aircraft). Elevation is in degrees above the horizon (90° is directly
overhead the aircraft position). EL may be negative, indicating a satellite below the
horizon. SNR is a number from 0 to 63 in dB Hz. Status is a number from 0 to 9 and
is defined as follows:
STATUS DEFINITION
0 Satellite is assigned to a channel

1 FIND command issued
2 Waiting to receive almanac and ephemeris data

3 Waiting to receive complete pseudo range data block
4 Performing the acquisition/tracking process

5 Fast sequencing of satellite signal (tracking mode)
6 Satellite is not assigned to a channel

7 Lost satellite lock during sequencing process
8 Waiting for clock message
9 Satellite not found
Page 584
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(4) GPS1 4/4 Page. 405.X

This page applies to GPS–950 and GPS–1000.
This page displays a list of satellites that have been deselected by the GPS or
requested to be deselected by the FMS. You should verify that individual satellites
can be deselected and selected manually by entering the satellite vehicle number in
the appropriate field and then pressing [ENTER].
Page 585
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
8. Ground Checkout Of Approach Mode
The following procedure allows checkout of the FMS and associated aircraft equipment in
the approach mode without flying the aircraft. Although this is a comprehensive check of
operation in that mode, a flight test will be required to fully verify approach mode
capabilities and may be done instead of this checkout.
NOTE: To fully perform the following procedure requires a pair of ramp testers
tunable to 108.00, one for DME and one for VOR. If ramp testers are not
available, the RNAV approach specified in one of the steps must be replaced
by a VFR approach. Where that is necessary, the resulting checkout will not
be as complete but will provide useful data for EFIS equipped aircraft.
If ramp testers of other frequencies are used, the procedures must be changed
accordingly.
WARNING: TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL USE OF THE APPROACH OR FLIGHT
PLAN THAT IS INPUT AS PART OF THIS TEST, DELETE THEM
AFTER COMPLETING THE TEST.
NOTE: The approach which is simulated for this test is similar to a VOR/DME
Approach to runway 32, Dodge City, Kansas, USA. An approach chart for
that location is provided below for reference.
The following equipment is required for this test:
(1) Ramp Testers with DME and VOR capabilities.
(2) Pitot–Static Tester or equivalent.
A. Test Preparation
(1) Turn on and tune the VOR ramp tester to output a frequency of 108.00 and a radial of
149 degrees. Place the ramp tester antenna next to the aircraft VOR Antenna.
(2) Turn on and tune the DME ramp tester to output a frequency paired with the 108.00
MHz VOR output, and a fixed 27 NM distance output. Place ramp tester Antenna
next to aircraft DME antenna.
CAUTION: APPLY PRESSURE TO THE PITOT SYSTEM OF THE
AIRCRAFT CAREFULLY TO AVOID DAMAGE TO THAT
EQUIPMENT.
(3) Use the pitot–static tester or equivalent device to set pressures equal to a TAS of
about 50 kts and a 4000 ft MSL altitude.
B. Initialization
(1) Turn on the FMS, ADC, Autopilot, and associated devices. With the Initialization
Page showing, proceed as follows:
(2) Initialize the system at ID KRIER, N 37 25.2, W 099 48.6.
Page 586
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
C. Creating the Approach
(1) Display DATA Page 1 and select APPROACHES.
(2) CREATE an approach with KDDC in the ARPT field.
(3) Enter RUNWAY 32 at Ref Wpt KDDC.
(4) Enter RADIAL of 329 degrees.
(5) Enter DISTANCE of 4.0 and ACCEPT.
(6) Enter ELEVATION of 2940 and ACCEPT.
(7) Enter VFR TYPE approach.
(8) Enter DDC facility.
NOTE: If 108.2 is not displayed in the FREQ entry field, input 108.0 at this
time. Although the VOR ramp tester is set to output 108.00 MHz, its
bandwidth is sufficient to cover the VOR receiver even though it is set
to 108.2. Therefore it is not necessary to exactly match the receiver
input to the tester output.
(9) Enter FAF MODGE.
Page 587
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
WARNING: DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION.
Approach Chart, KDDC, Runway 32.

Reproduction with permission of Jeppesen Sanderson, Inc.
Page 588
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
D. Linking Approach into Flight Plan
(1) Display FPL Page.
(2) Enter KRIER as the first WPT.
(3) Display LIST and select APT.
(4) Select KDDC and press [ENTER].
(5) Select ARRIVE and highlight APPROACH.
(6) List PLT APPRS and select KDDC 32 VFR.
E. Selecting Approach Mode and Checking Annunciation

(1) Display NAV and select APPR. Approach mode will be announced on flight
instrument such as the panel FMS APP or the EFIS display. Pass Fail
F. Inputting Manual HDG

(1) Display DATA Page 4 and select a manual HDG of 329 degrees.
(2) Display NAV Page.
G. Analysis of Approach Mode Display, Aircraft Static

(1) Select FMS APPR on HSI and flight director. Refer to Aircraft Flight Manual
Supplement (AFMS) for those procedures.
(2) A XTK to the right will be shown and the HSI needle will direct a course to the left.
Flight director command bar will indicate left turn. Pass Fail
(3) VDEV will be negative and glide slope pointer will be at top of scale.
Pass Fail
(4) Command bars will show a “fly up” indication. Pass Fail
(5) If there is a second EFIS or other backup flight instruments, do the above checks on
those also.
(6) Record failures:
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
Page 589
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
H. Analysis of Approach Mode Display – Aircraft In Flight
To simulate flight, speed and altitude inputs must be provided to the NCU. The instructions
below cause the ADC to be selected which provides TAS and altitude. To provide aircraft
ground speed, the DME ramp tester distance output must be set so that it decreases the
distance it outputs, causing the aircraft to “fly.”
Set up equipment as follows:
(1) Display DATA Sensor Page and select ADC.
(2) Display NAV APPR Page.
(3) On the DME ramp tester, set a distance slew rate equal to about 180 kts.
NOTE: If the tester does not have a slewing capability, reduce its distance outputs in
increments until it is down to about 4 miles while observing CDU and other
instruments outputs.
NOTE: CDU VDEV and HSI glide slope pointer will function as follows only if the
vertical mode is connected and a baro–corrected altitude is available from
ADC.
(4) As the aircraft “flies” to MODGE, CDU VDEV will decrease toward, and then pass,
zero. At the same time, the glide slope pointer will approach and pass through center
along with the command bars.
Pass Fail
(5) XTK will go to zero as will CDI offset. Flight director bars will go to the horizontal
position.
Pass Fail
(6) Record failures:
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
Page 590
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
9. Troubleshooting
When a UNS–1B Navigation System fails any of the tests in the checkout section,
troubleshoot it per the procedures below.
Troubleshooting instructions are provided in the form of a three–column table:
¾ Column 1 Lists equipment symptoms or describes the portion of the checkout
- procedure from the point where the unit did not pass. These
malfunctions/symptoms are listed in approximately the same sequence
e as were the checkouts.
¾ Column 2 Lists probable causes .
-
¾ Column 3 Describes the corrective action(s) for the malfunction.
-
After performing a listed corrective action, repeat the failed test to ensure that the problem
has been corrected. Then complete the checkout procedure from the point where it was
interrupted. Should the corrective action be of the type which could affect tests already
passed, redo those tests also.
Where more than one corrective action is listed, the first action listed is the most likely to be
effective or is the simplest and should be performed first. If the first action does not correct
the problem, perform the next action listed, etc.
NOTE: Ensure that you have eliminated all other potential causes of trouble before
returning the UNS–1B NCU or other major component for repair. Verify that
the installation wiring is correct. Determine whether the correct input and
output voltages are present. Verify that the required ARINC labels are present
on the data busses.
NOTE: When replacement of a major component such as the NCU is recommended, it
is permissible to replace individual circuit boards instead if personnel are
authorized to do so.
A. Self–Test
TROUBLE PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTION
The Self–Test Page shows a FAIL This indicates a situation which Press [MSG] to display failure
next to one or more of the items does not necessarily make the information which may lead to a
but after a short time the Self–Test navigation system unusable. quick correction.
Page is replaced by the
Initialization Page.
The Self–Test Page shows a FAIL This indicates a problem which Replace the NCU.
but is not replaced by the makes the navigation system
Initialization Page. unusable—NCU is defective.
Page 591
34–60–04 12 August, 2009

CDU MSG Indicator does not CDU is defective. Replace CDU.
illuminate.
One or more of the annunciators The annunciator is defective. Troubleshoot annunciator per
does not illuminate during self– manufacturer’s instructions.
test.
CRT brightness does not respond CDU is defective. Replace CDU.
properly to dimming feature.
Keyboard brightness cannot be 1. Fault in radio lighting circuit. 1. Repair radio lighting rheostat
controlled by the radio lighting or wiring.
2. CDU is defective.
2. Replace CDU.
Software is not the correct NCU has the wrong software Replace NCU.
version. program.
DEXP is out of date. 1. System date or time is 1. Enter the correct date and
wrong. time on the Initialization
Page.
2. Wrong database. 2. Update database per
Operator’s Manual.
B. Configuration Verification
Data value fails to match the 1. Configuration Module is 1. Reprogram per System Data
corresponding data value on the programmed incorrectly. Installation Section of this
Aircraft Configuration Data manual.
Sheets.
2. Mount rack or NCU connector 2. Determine which and
pins, insulation, or wiring is replace.
defective.
3. NCU is defective. 3. Replace NCU.
Page 592
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
C. NCU Self Test Output Checkout

HSI does not show required 1. NCU is defective. 1. Replace NCU.

output.
2. NCU to HSI wiring is 2. Check and correct wiring
incorrect. (See Troubleshooting,
Synchro: Wiring to Receiver.)
3. HSI is defective. 3. Replace HSI.
4. Configuration is incorrect. 4. Reprogram.
Flight director does not command 1. NCU is defective. 1. Replace NCU.
10 degree right bank.
2. Flight director is defective. 2. Replace flight director.
3. NCU to autopilot/ flight 3. Rewire correctly.
director wiring is incorrect.
D. NCU Output to HSI Checkout

HSI does not show required 1. NCU is defective. 1. Replace NCU.

output.
3. NCU to HSI wiring is 3. Check and correct wiring.
incorrect. (See Troubleshooting,
Synchro: Wiring to Receiver.)
4. Configuration is incorrect. 4. Reprogram.
E. DIST/GS Check
DIST is not counting down or GS NCU is defective. Replace NCU.

(Ground Speed) is not about 150
kts.
F. HSI FROM Check

HSI does not show FROM 1. NCU is defective. 1. Replace NCU.

indication.
Page 593
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
G. DIST/BRG Check
CDU does not show distance of 1. NCU is defective. 1. Replace NCU.

284 NM or bearing of 056°.
2. CDU is defective. 2. Replace CDU.
HSI does not show above values. 1. NCU is defective. 1. Replace NCU.
Multifunction display (MFD) does 1. MPU is defective. 1. Replace MPU.
not show correct display.
2. MFD is defective. 2. Replace MFD.
3. Wiring to MFD is incorrect. 3. Check and correct.
H. Roll Steering Check

Control yoke does not rotate in 1. NCU is defective. 1. Replace NCU.

specified direction.
2. Flight guidance equipment is 2. Checkout and correct.
defective.
3. NCU to autopilot/flight 3. Rewire.
director wiring is reversed.
FMS HDG panel annunciator does 1. Annunciator or its wiring is 1. Repair as required.
not light. defective.
I. Input of a Selected Crosstrack Check

CDU displays are not as required. NCU is defective. Replace NCU.

MFD display is incorrect. MFD is defective. Take corrective action.
HSI CDI does not deflect as 1. NCU is defective. 1. Replace NCU.

required.
Page 594
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
J. DME Checkout
DME Sensor Status Page does 1. DME Sensor or wiring is 1. Determine which and correct.
not show 50 NM. defective.
K. Winds Display Checkout

Winds Display on EHSI does not 1. NCU is defective. 1. Replace NCU.

agree with that on CDU.
2. EHSI drive computer is 2. Replace drive computer.
defective.
L. Sensor Checkout
(1) Checkout of Inertial Sensor Status and Heading Displays
CDU does not show FAILED when NCU is defective. Replace NCU.
ISS is off.
CDU does not show ALIGN when 1. IRS or its wiring is defective. 1. Repair as required.
MSU is set to Align.
CDU does not show NAV when 1. IRS or its wiring is defective. 1. Repair as required.
IRS is in NAV mode.
CDU HDG IN does not agree with IRS is defective. Replace IRS.
the reference heading.
CDU HDG IN does not agree with 1. IRS or its wiring are 1. Repair as required.
HSI HDG. defective.
Page 595
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(2) Checkout of LORAN C Sensor

LCS display does not show 1. Required LORAN station(s) 1. Check station maintenance in
expected values. is off the air. Navigation Systems Section,
Page 601.
2. Sensor system is defective. 2. Repair sensor system.
(3) Checkout of Sensor Lat/Long Coordinates Vs CDU Calculated Position

Sensor supplied coordinates do 1. Required VLF or Omega 1. Check station maintenance

not agree with CDU calculated station(s) is off the air. chart in Navigation Systems
position. Section, Page 601.
2. Sensor system is defective. 2. Repair sensor system.
(4) Strut Switch Position Check

CDU display indicates strut switch 1. Configuration Module is 1. Correct programming.

is in incorrect position. programmed incorrectly.
2. Strut switch is wired 2. Check wiring and correct.
incorrectly or the wiring is
open.
(5) Equipment Shutdown

TUNE NAV AID is not displayed NAV receiver is not connected to 1. Pull correct circuit breaker.
when MSG Key is depressed. the circuit breaker which was
pulled. 2. Rewire NAV receiver power
to the correct circuit breaker.
HSI flag does not drop. 1. HSI is defective. 1. Repair HSI.
2. Wiring to HSI is defective. 2. Repair Wiring.
EFIS does not display LRN MODE EFIS software is not compatible Replace EFIS.
flag. with NCU.
Page 596
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
(6) Checkout of UASC Radio Reference Sensor (RRS)
Distance displayed on CDU differs 1. Aircraft DME is defective. 1. Replace DME.

significantly from aircraft DME
distance. 2. RRS is defective. 2. Replace RRS.
(7) Checkout of GPIRS

GPIRS Diagnostics indicate IRS is IRS is defective. Replace GPIRS.

failed.
GPIRS Diagnostics indicate GPS sensor is defective. Replace GPIRS.
Autonomous GPS fault.
GPIRS Diagnostics indicate GPS sensor is defective. Replace GPIRS.
Hybrid GPS fault.
(8) Checkout of UASC GPS (GPS–950, GPS–1000, GPS 1200)

GPS Diagnostics indicate a GPS sensor is defective. Replace GPS sensor.

NavCore Failure. (Bit 11 – 17)
GPS Diagnostics indicate a data 1. GPS sensor is defective. 1. Replace GPS sensor.
error. (Bit 18 – 28)
GPS Diagnostics indicate GPS sensor is defective. Replace GPS sensor.
Unreasonable altitude (error of
7500') or duplicate satellite
elevation and azimuth.
M. Ground Checkout of Approach Mode

Approach mode is not announced 1. Aircraft wiring is incorrect. 1. Check and correct wiring.
by panel annunciator or EFIS.
2. Incompatibility between NCU 2. Resolve incompatibility.
and EFIS hardware or
software.
XTK, HSI or command bars do not 1. Aircraft wiring is incorrect. 1. Check and correct wiring.
agree with requirements in
Analysis of Approach Mode 2. Incompatibility between NCU 2. Resolve incompatibility.
Display section. and EFIS hardware or
software.
Page 597
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
VDEV, glide slope pointer or 1. Aircraft wiring is incorrect. 1. Check and correct wiring.
command bars do not agree with
requirements in Analysis of 2. Incompatibility between NCU 2. Resolve incompatibility.
Approach Mode Display section. and EFIS hardware or
software.
N. Synchro: Wiring to Receiver

If checkout indicates synchro related malfunction, troubleshoot as follows:
The simplest circumstance is that the HSI turns the same number of degrees as the input
signal requires it to but in the opposite direction. In that case, the corrective action is to
reverse the wires between terminals X and Y.
For a circumstance other than that above, compare the actual HSI reading to the required
reading and refer to the following tables.
For example, if the HSI reads 180 degrees more than the input angle sent to it, the corrective
action is to reverse the wires between terminals H and C. If the HSI reads 180 degrees less
than the angle sent to it, corrective action is to reverse the wires between terminals H and C
and between terminals X and Y.
SYNCHRO TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE
CORRECTIVE ACTION WHEN HSI

SHOWS DEVIATION ANGLE
HSI DEVIATION PLUS DEVIATION MINUS DEVIATION
60 Degrees REVERSE H and C REVERSE H and C

MOVE Y to X REVERSE Y and Z
MOVE X to Z
MOVE Z to Y
120 Degrees MOVE Z to X REVERSE X and Z
MOVE Y to Z
MOVE X to Y
REVERSE X and Y
240 Degrees MOVE Y to X REVERSE Y and Z
MOVE X to Z
MOVE Z to Y
MOVE Z to X REVERSE X and Z
MOVE Y to Z
MOVE X to Y
Page 598
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
SYNCHRO/RESOLVER TROUBLESHOOTING
ANGLE SYNCHRO RESOLVER

DEG 11.8 VAC LINE–TO–LINE OUTPUT 9.0 VAC
LINE–TO–LINE
OUTPUT
X–Y LEG X–Z LEG Y–Z LEG COSINE SINE

V = 11.8 SIN Θ V = 11.8 SIN(Θ − 120) V = 11.8 SIN(Θ + 120)
0 0.0 10.2 10.2 9.0 0.0

15 3.1 11.4 8.3 8.7 2.3
30 5.9 11.8 5.9 7.8 4.5
45 8.3 11.4 3.1 6.4 6.4

60 10.2 10.2 0.0 4.5 7.8
75 11.4 8.3 3.1 2.3 8.7
90 11.8 5.9 5.9 0.0 9.0
105 11.4 3.1 8.3 2.3 8.7
120 10.2 0.0 10.2 4.5 7.8

135 8.3 3.1 11.4 6.4 6.4
150 5.9 5.9 11.8 7.8 4.5

165 3.1 8.3 11.4 8.7 2.3
180 0.0 10.2 10.2 9.0 0.0
195 3.1 11.4 8.3 8.7 2.3

210 5.9 11.8 5.9 7.8 4.5
225 8.3 11.4 3.1 6.4 6.4
240 10.2 10.2 0.0 4.5 7.8

255 11.4 8.3 3.1 2.3 8.7
270 11.8 5.9 5.9 0.0 9.0

285 11.4 3.1 8.3 2.3 8.7
300 10.2 0.0 10.2 4.5 7.8

315 8.3 3.1 11.4 6.4 6.4
330 5.9 5.9 11.8 7.8 4.5

345 3.1 8.3 11.4 8.7 2.3
360 0.0 10.2 10.2 9.0 0.0
Page 599
34–60–04 12 August, 2009
Navigation Systems
1. Scheduled Maintenance Periods of Navigation Systems
The U.S. Naval Observatory maintains a data base of schedule and status information
accessible on Internet. The address is TYCHO.USNO.NAVY.MIL(192.5.41.239) and the
login is ADS. You need a password. To get the password call the Time Service Department
during normal business hours, Eastern Time, at (202) 653-1662.
A. GPS Maintenance Schedules
The Global Positioning System has no scheduled maintenance that affects the availability of
the system. The government will provide information about GPS and the status of individual
GPS satellites upon request. Call the Global Positioning System BBS at (703) 393–5910 or
the Global Positioning System Information Center (GPSIC) at (703) 313-5900 for
information.
B. LORAN Maintenance Schedules
The LORAN system has no regular schedule for maintenance of its transmitting stations.
Call the Time Service Department during normal business hours, Eastern Time, at (202) 653-
1662 for current status.
Page 601
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
Fuel Flow Inputs

1. Fuel Flow Sensors
The UNS-1B FMS accepts up to four fuel flow inputs directly from the engine fuel
flowmeter sensors. The sensor types which have been operated with thus far are:
¾ Eldec Flowmeter Transmitters
¾ Learjet/J.E.T. Fuel Management Computer (All Learjet models require J.E.T. S.B. #542-
1158-7)
¾ X & O Engineering Flowmeter Transmitters
¾ General Electric ac voltage pickoff
¾ Gull Airborne
¾ Ametek fuel flow indicators
¾ I.D.C. fuel flow indicators
¾ Canadian Marconi indicators
¾ Howell fuel flow indicators
¾ Simmons Precision transmitters
¾ Intertechnique Totalizer
NOTE: For information on Aircraft Type vs. Fuel Flowmeter Type Reference Chart
and0 Fuel Flow Scaling, refer the System Data Installation section of this
manual.
Page 701
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
2. Fuel Flow Input Wiring - Unit No. 1 or No. 2
A. IDC, CMC, Eldec, Ragen, X & O Engineering, Gull, Ametek, or Howell
FUEL FLOW INDICATORS
NCU #1 OR #2 (See note.)
#1 ENGINE H MP15A PULSE OR DC

FUEL FLOW - #1 ENGINE
INPUT L MP15B REF
#2 ENGINE H MP15C PULSE OR DC

INPUT L MP15D REF
#3 ENGINE H MP15E PULSE OR DC

INPUT L MP15F REF
#4 ENGINE H MP15G PULSE OR DC

INPUT L MP15H REF
NOTE: See table for more information about fuel flow indicators.
CAUTION: THE INSTALLER IS RESPONSIBLE FOR VERIFYING PIN NUMBERS
ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN
Page 702
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
FUEL FLOW INDICATORS
BRAND PART NUMBER PIN INFO
IDC 37804–00X Pulse – Pin T, REF – Pin N
Eldec 9–329 Pulse – Pin G, REF – Pin S

Howell H930–7 or H930–17 DC – Pin K, REF – Pin J
Ragern DSF1549 DC – Pin G, REF – Pin F
CMC 418–107–100 (CL600) DC – Pin D, REF – Pin M of J1 Conn. = #1 Eng.

DC – Pin D, REF – Pin M of J2 Conn. = #2 Eng.
CMC 418–107–104 (CL601) DC – Pin D, REF – Pin M of J1 Conn. = #1 Eng.
DC – Pin D, REF – Pin M of J2 Conn. = #2 Eng.
CMC 418–082–001 Lt. Eng. DC – Pin J, REF – Pin M
(DA–10) Rt. Eng. DC – Pin H, REF – Pin M
X & O Engineering PC 850–102 Pulse – Pin D, REF – Pin C of J1 Conn. = #1 Eng.
(Sig. Cond. Unit) Pulse – Pin D, REF – Pin C of J2 Conn. = #2 Eng.
Howell Indicator with H033–5 DC – Pin E, REF – Pin C of indicator
Simmons Precision Xmtr. 472015
Gull 218–913–001 DC – Pin K, REF – Pin L
Ametek Indicator (Citation III) Lt. Eng. DC – Pin a, REF – Pin T

Rt. Eng. DC – Pin J, REF – Pin N
Page 703
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
B. General Electric AC Voltage Pickoff
NCU #1 OR #2 G.E.
#1 ENGINE H MP15A G AC PICKOFF

FUEL FLOW
INPUT L MP15B F RETURN
C SHIELD
#2 ENGINE H MP15C G AC PICKOFF

FUEL FLOW
INPUT L MP15D F RETURN
C SHIELD
#3 ENGINE H MP15E G AC PICKOFF

FUEL FLOW
INPUT L MP15F F RETURN
C SHIELD
#4 ENGINE H MP15G G AC PICKOFF

FUEL FLOW
INPUT L MP15H F RETURN
C SHIELD

Page 704
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
C. Learjet/J.E.T. Fuel Management (Pulse)
NCU #1 OR #2 J207
#1 ENGINE H MP15A X
J.E.T. FUEL
FUEL FLOW
MANAGEMENT
INPUT L MP15B
COMPUTER
MODEL 260E
#2 ENGINE H MP15C Z (SEE NOTE.)
FUEL FLOW
INPUT L MP15D
NOTE: J.E.T. Service Bulletin 54211587 is required.

D. Learjet DC Fuel Management (0-10 VDC)

NCU #1 OR #2 AE5894
5
#1 ENGINE H MP15A
FUEL FLOW
FUEL FLOW
2 CONVERTER
INPUT L MP15B
P/N 3118493
#2 ENGINE H MP15C
FUEL FLOW
INPUT L MP15D 1

Page 705
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
E. Intertechnique Fuel Flow
NCU #1 OR #2 P1 TOTALIZER
100K
#1 ENGINE H MP15A B
33K
FUEL FLOW
INPUT L MP15B E
100K
#2 ENGINE H MP15C J
FUEL FLOW 33K
INPUT L MP15D

Page 706
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
F. Interconnect To Ragen DC Analog Fuel Flow Signal Conditioner,

P/N SCF-1788, Installed in some HS-125 Aircraft
SIGNAL CONDITIONER
(P/N SCF1788)
NCU #1 OR #2 (See Notes 1 & 2.)
J1
#1 ENGINE H MP15A M HI #1 ENGINE

FUEL FLOW FUEL FLOW
INPUT L MP15B L LO DATA
J2
#2 ENGINE H MP15C M HI #2 ENGINE
FUEL FLOW FUEL FLOW
INPUT L MP15D L LO DATA
NOTE: 1. If SCF1788 signal conditioner Pins M & L are already used,

the NCU should be wired parallel to those existing wires.
2. The SCF1788 signal conditioner is normally interfaced with
the DSF 6915 fuel flow indicator and the TFF 15732
transducer.

Page 707
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
G. Ametek DC Analog Fuel Flow Indicator,
P/N VSDLOC208B, (Cessna P/N 9914095-3) In Cessna Citation II
NCU #1 OR #2 FUEL FLOW INDICATOR
#1 ENGINE H MP15A a #1 ENGINE

FUEL FLOW
FUEL FLOW
INPUT L MP15B T INDICATOR
#2 ENGINE H MP15C J
#2 ENGINE
FUEL FLOW
FUEL FLOW
INPUT L MP15D N
INDICATOR

H. X & O Engineering DC Analog Fuel Flow Indicator,

P/N PC900-1A0800PH-1A1 in Sikorsky S-76
NCU #1 OR #2 FUEL FLOW INDICATOR
#1 ENGINE H MP15A L #1 ENGINE

FUEL FLOW
FUEL FLOW
INPUT L MP15B M INDICATOR
#2 ENGINE H MP15C L
#2 ENGINE
FUEL FLOW
FUEL FLOW
INPUT L MP15D M
INDICATOR

Page 708
34-60-04 12 August, 2009
I. Ametek/U.S. Gauge DC Analog Fuel Flow Indicator,

P/N VSDL-0C208C/E, (Cessna P/N 9912147-14/16) in Cessna S/II
NCU #1 OR #2
(See note)
1 kW
#1 ENGINE H MP15A F #1 ENGINE
FUEL FLOW
FUEL FLOW
INPUT L MP15B D INDICATOR
H
(See note)
1 kW
#2 ENGINE H MP15C W
#2 ENGINE
FUEL FLOW
FUEL FLOW
INPUT L MP15D U
INDICATOR
NOTE: Idlecutoff switches on throttles.

Page 709
34-60-04 12 August, 2009

34 60 04rev3

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

34 60 04rev3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

UNS-1B

Flight Management System

The information contained herein is subject to Export administration regulations (“EAR”),

©1995, 2009 UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION

3260 East Universal Way

Record of Temporary Changes

Record of Temporary Changes

List of Effective Pages

Subject Page Date Subject Page Date

Subject Page Date Subject Page Date

Subject Page Date Subject Page Date

Subject Page Date Subject Page Date

Subject Page Date Subject Page Date

Subject Page Date Subject Page Date

Subject Page Date Subject Page Date

2. Abbreviations and Terminology .....................................................................3

Description and Operation................................................................... 1

FAA Approval ........................................................................................ 101

2. Continuous Airworthiness, FAR 23.1529, 25.1529, 27.1529, and 29.1529 .. 102

3. Environmental Qualification Forms............................................................... 104

Equipment Specifications .................................................................... 201

2. Circuit Board Location And Function............................................................ 213

4. Equipment Specification Tables ....................................................................223

6. Wiring Specifications ...................................................................................... 231

7. ARINC Data Bus Inputs................................................................................... 259

8. ARINC Data Bus Outputs ................................................................................282

9. Required Tools ................................................................................................298.7

10. Wire and Cable Manufacturers .....................................................................298.9

11. Alternate Vendor Part Numbers ...................................................................298.10

12. Drawings ........................................................................................................298.11

Installation and Wiring ......................................................................... 301

2. NCU Interfaces................................................................................................. 314

7. NCU Wiring Conversion Chart – UNS-1A to UNS-1B ................................... 398.53

System Data Installation ...................................................................... 401

3. Configuration Module Programming Procedures (400.X, 401.X, 402.X,

4. Configuration Worksheets (SCN 600.X) ........................................................ 459

5. Configuration Module Programming Procedures (SCN 600.X) ...................480

6. Configuration Worksheets (SCN 601.X) ........................................................ 498.13

7. Configuration Module Programming Procedures (SCN 601.X) ...................498.34

8. Configuration Worksheets (SCN 602.X) ........................................................ 498.65

9. Configuration Module Programming Procedures (SCN 602.X) ...................498.87

10. Configuration Worksheets (SCN 603.X) ...................................................... 498.119

11. Configuration Module Programming Procedures (SCN 603.X) .................498.141

12. Configuration Worksheets (SCN 604.X) ...................................................... 498.175

13. Configuration Module Programming Procedures (SCN 604.X) .................498.199

14. Performance Database Loading................................................................... 498.235

Maintenance, Checkout, and Troubleshooting .................................. 501

2. CDU/NCU Self-Test.......................................................................................... 503

3. Built-In-test (BIT) ............................................................................................. 508

4. NCU Configuration Verification...................................................................... 515

5. NCU Outputs to Flight Guidance System...................................................... 515

8. Ground Checkout of Approach Mode............................................................ 586

9. Troubleshooting .............................................................................................. 591

Navigation Systems.............................................................................. 601

Fuel Flow Inputs ................................................................................... 701

1. Fuel Flow Wiring – Unit No. 1 or No. 2 ...........................................................702

¾ UNS–1B Configuration Module, P/N 11901.

2. Abbreviations and Terminology

We use the symbols 400.X , 401.X , 402.X , 403.X , 404.X , 405.X ,

Description and Operation

DME/P À Air Data

IRS or GPS LCS Radar

1 FPCDU P/N 10182XXX only

1 FPCDU P/N 10182XXX only

1 FPCDU P/N 10182XXX only